8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 1/587
McGILL UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF SCIENCE
DEPARTMENT OFMATHEMATICS AND STATISTICS
MATH 141 2010 01
CALCULUS 2
Information for Students(Winter Term, 2009 / 2010)
Pages 1 - 20 of these notes may be considered the Course Outline for this course. The page
numbers shown in the table of contents and in the upper right hand corners of pages are not the
same as the numbers of pages in the PDF document. If you wish to print out specific pages, you
should first view the relevant pages at your screen, and determine what are the numbers of the
corresponding PDF pages.
W. G. Brown
April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 2/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
Contents
1 General Information 1
1.1 Force Majeure . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Instructors and Times . . . . . . 2
1.3 Calendar Description . . . . . . 2
1.3.1 Calendar Description . . 2
1.3.2 Late transfer from MATH
151 / MATH 152 . . . . . 3
1.4 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4.1 Tutorial Times, Locations,
and Personnel (subject to
c h a n g e ) . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4.2 Teaching Assistants (TA’s) 31.4.3 Friday, April 02nd, 2010
and Monday, April 05th,
2010 . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 Evaluation of Your Progress . . 5
1.5.1 Your final grade (See Ta-
ble 3, p. 11) In the event
of extraordinary circum-
stances beyond the Uni-
versity’s control, the con-
tent and / or evaluation scheme
in this course is subjectto change. . . . . . . . . 5
1.5.2 WeBWorK . . . . . . . 6
1.5.3 Written Submissions. . . 7
1.5.4 Quizzes at the Tutorials. 7
1.5.5 Final Examination . . . 8
1.5.6 Supplemental Assessments 8
1.5.7 Machine Scoring: “Will
the final examination be
machine scored?” . . . . 9
1.5.8 Plagiarism. . . . . . . . 9
1.5.9 Corrections to grades . . 101.6 Published Materials . . . . . . . 10
1.6.1 Required Text-Book . . 10
1.6.2 Optional Reference Books 10
1.6.3 Recommended Video Ma-
t e r i a l s . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.6.4 Other Calculus Textbooks 13
1.6.5 Website . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7 Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141.8 Preparation and Workload . . . 15
1.8.1 Prerequisites. . . . . . . 15
1.8.2 Calculators . . . . . . . 15
1.8.3 Self-Supervision . . . . 16
1.8.4 Escape Routes . . . . . 17
1.8.5 Terminology . . . . . . 18
1.9 Communication with Instructors
and TA’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.10 Commercial tutorial and exam
preparation services . . . . . . . 19
1.11 Special Office Hours and Tutorials 20
2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1 21
2.1 Instructions to Students . . . . . 21
2.2 Monday Versions . . . . . . . . 21
2.3 Tuesday Versions . . . . . . . . 23
2.4 Wednesday Versions . . . . . . 24
2.5 Thursday Versions . . . . . . . 25
2.6 Friday Versions . . . . . . . . . 26
3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2 28
3.1 Instructions to Students . . . . . 28
3.2 Monday Versions . . . . . . . . 293.3 Most Tuesday Versions . . . . . 31
3.4 Most Wednesday Versions . . . 33
3.5 Thursday Versions . . . . . . . 35
3.6 Friday Versions . . . . . . . . . 38
4 References 201
4.1 Stewart Calculus Series . . . . . 201
4.2 Other Calculus Textbooks . . . . 202
4.2.1 R. A. Adams . . . . . . 202
4.2.2 Larson, Hostetler, et al. . 203
4.2.3 Edwards and Penney . . 203
4.2.4 Others, not “Early Tran-scendentals” . . . . . . 204
4.3 Other References . . . . . . . . 204
A Timetable for Lecture Section 001 of
MATH 141 2010 01 1001
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 3/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
B Timetable for Lecture Section 002 of
MATH 141 2009 01 2001
C Supplementary Notes for Students in
Section 001 of MATH 141 2010 01 3001
C.1 Lecture style in Lecture Section
001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001
C.2 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 04th, 2010 . . . 3002
C.2.1 §5.1 Areas and Distances. 3002
C.3 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 06th, 2010 . . . 3005
C.3.1
§5.1 Areas and Distances
(conclusion). . . . . . . 3005C.3.2 §5.2 The Definite Integral 3007
C.4 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 08th, 2010 . . . 3013
C.4.1 Summary of the last lec-
tures . . . . . . . . . . . 3013
C.4.2 §5.2 The Definite Inte-
gral (conclusion) . . . . 3014
C.4.3 §5.3 The Fundamental The-
orem of Calculus . . . . 3019
C.5 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 11th, 2010 . . . 3021C.5.1 §5.3 The Fundamental The-
orem of Calculus (con-
c lusion) . . . . . . . . . 3021
C.5.2 §5.4 Indefinite Integrals
and the “Net Change” The-
orem . . . . . . . . . . 3023
C.6 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 13th, 2010 . . . 3028
C.6.1 §5.4 Indefinite Integrals
and the “Net Change” The-
orem (conclusion) . . . 3028C.6.2 §5.5 The Substitution Rule 3033
C.7 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 15th, 2010 . . . 3036
C.7.1 §5.5 The Substitution Rule
(conclusion) . . . . . . . 3036
C.7.2 5 Review . . . . . . . . 3049
C.8 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 18th, 2010 . . . 3052C.8.1 §6.1 Areas between Curves 3052
C.9 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 20th, 2010 . . . 3061
C.9.1 §6.2 Volumes . . . . . . 3061
C.10 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 22nd, 2010 . . . 3069
C.10.1 §6.3 Volumes by Cylin-
drical Shells . . . . . . . 3069
C.10.2 §6.4 Work . . . . . . . . 3075
C.11 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 25th, 2010 . . . 3076
C.11.1 §6.5 Average value of a
func tion . . . . . . . . . 3077
C.12 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 27th, 2010 . . . 3082
C.12.1 §7.1 Integration by Parts 3082
C.13 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of January 29th, 2010 . . . 3089
C.13.1 §7.1 Integration by Parts
(conclusion) . . . . . . . 3089
C.13.2 §7.2 Trigonometric Inte-
grals . . . . . . . . . . . 3092
C.14 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-ture of February 01st, 2010 . . . 3095
C.14.1 §7.2 Trigonometric Inte-
grals (conclusion) . . . . 3095
C.15 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 03rd, 2010 . . . 3101
C.15.1 §7.3 Trigonometric Sub-
stitution . . . . . . . . . 3101
C.16 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 05th, 2010 . . . 3106
C.16.1 §7.3 Trigonometric Sub-
stitution (conclusion) . . 3106C.17 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 08th, 2010 . . . 3111
C.17.1 §7.4 Integration of Ra-
tional Functions by Par-
tial Fractions . . . . . . 3111
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 4/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
C.18 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 10th, 2010 . . . 3117C.18.1 §7.4 Integration of Ra-
tional Functions by Par-
tial Fractions (conclusion) 3117
C.19 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 12th, 2010 . . . 3124
C.19.1 §7.5 Strategy for Integra-
tion . . . . . . . . . . . 3124
C.19.2 §7.6 Integration Using Ta-
bles and Computer Al-
gebra Systems (OMIT) . 3129
C.19.3
§7.7 Approximate Inte-
gration (OMIT) . . . . . 3129
C.20 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 15th, 2010 . . . 3130
C.20.1 §7.8 Improper Integrals . 3130
C.21 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 17th, 2010 . . . 3140
C.21.1 §8.1 Arc Length . . . . 3140
C.21.2 §8.2 Area of a Surface
of Revolution . . . . . . 3146
C.22 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of February 19th, 2010 . . . 3147
C.22.1 §8.2 Area of a Surfaceof Revolution (conclusion) 3147
C.22.2 §8.3 Applications to Physics
and Engineering (OMIT) 3150
C.22.3 §8.4 Applications to Eco-
nomics and Biology (OMIT) 3151
C.22.4 §8.5 Probability (OMIT) 3151
C.23 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 01st, 2010 . . . . 3152
C.23.1 §10.1 Curves Defined by
Parametric Equations . . 3152
C.23.2 §10.2 Calculus with Para-metric Curves . . . . . . 3156
C.24 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 03rd, 2010 . . . . 3158
C.24.1 §10.2 Calculus with Para-
metric Curves (continued) 3158
C.25 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 05th, 2010 . . . . 3164C.25.1 §10.2 Calculus with Para-
metric Curves (conclusion) 3164
C.25.2 §10.3 Polar Coordinates 3165
C.26 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 08th, 2010 . . . . 3172
C.26.1 §10.3 Polar Coordinates
(continued) . . . . . . . 3172
C.26.2 §10.4 Areas and Lengths
in Polar Coordinates . . 3179
C.27 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 10th, 2010 . . . . 3181
C.27.1 §10.4 Areas and Lengths
in Polar Coordinates (con-
tinued) . . . . . . . . . 3181
C.28 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 12th, 2010 . . . . 3195
C.28.1 §10.4 Areas and Lengths
in Polar Coordinates (con-
c lusion) . . . . . . . . . 3195
C.28.2 §10.5 Conic Sections . . 3196
C.28.3 §11.1 Sequences . . . . 3197
C.28.4 Sketch of Solutions to Prob-
lems on the Final Exam-ination in MATH 141 2005
01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3198
C.29 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 15th, 2010 . . . . 3207
C.29.1 §11.1 Sequences (conclu-
sion) . . . . . . . . . . 3207
C.29.2 §11.2 Series . . . . . . . 3210
C.30 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 17th, 2010 . . . . 3213
C.30.1 §11.2 Series (conclusion) 3213
C.30.2 §11.3 The Integral Testand Estimates of Sums . 3217
C.31 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 19th, 2010 . . . . 3219
C.31.1 §11.3 The Integral Test
and Estimates of Sums
(conclusion) . . . . . . . 3219
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 5/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
C.32 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 22nd, 2010 . . . . 3225C.32.1 §11.4 The Comparison
Tests . . . . . . . . . . 3225
C.32.2 Sketch of Solutions to Prob-
lems on the Final Exam-
ination in MATH 141 2006
01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3230
C.33 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 24th, 2010 . . . . 3245
C.33.1 §11.5 Alternating Series 3245
C.33.2 Solutions to Problems on
the Final Examination in
MATH 141 2007 01 . . 3249
C.34 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 26th, 2010 . . . . 3265
C.34.1 §11.6 Absolute Conver-
gence and the Ratio and
Root Tests . . . . . . . . 3265
C.35 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of March 29th, 2010 . . . . 3268
C.35.1 §11.6 Absolute Conver-
gence and the Ratio and
Root Tests (conclusion) . 3268
C.36 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-ture of Wednesday, March 31st,
2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3272
C.36.1 §11.7 Strategy for Test-
ing Series . . . . . . . . 3272
C.37 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of Wednesday, April 7th, 2010 3278
C.37.1 Final Examination in MATH
141 2008 01 (one version) 3278
C.37.2 Draft Solutions to the Fi-
nal Examination in MATH
141 2009 01 (Version 4) 3293C.38 Supplementary Notes for the Lec-
ture of Friday, April 09th, 2010 . 3297
C.38.1 Final Examination in MATH
141 2009 01 (Version 4,
continued) . . . . . . . 3297
D Problem Assignments from Previous Years 5001
D.1 1998 / 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5001D.1.1 Assignment 1 . . . . . . 5001
D.1.2 Assignment 2 . . . . . . 5001
D.1.3 Assignment 3 . . . . . . 5002
D.1.4 Assignment 4 . . . . . . 5002
D.1.5 Assignment 5 . . . . . . 5002
D.2 1999 / 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5003
D.2.1 Assignment 1 . . . . . . 5003
D.2.2 Assignment 2 . . . . . . 5004
D.2.3 Assignment 3 . . . . . . 5006
D.2.4 Assignment 4 . . . . . . 5007
D.2.5 Assignment 5 . . . . . . 5009
D.2.6 Assignment 6 . . . . . . 5010
D.3 2000 / 2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5012
D.4 2001 / 2002 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5012
D.5 MATH 141 2003 01 . . . . . . . 5012
D.6 MATH 141 2004 01 . . . . . . . 5012
D.7 MATH 141 2005 01 . . . . . . . 5013
D.7.1 Written Assignment W 1 5013
D.7.2 Written Assignment W 2 5014
D.7.3 Written Assignment W 3 5016
D.7.4 Written Assignment W 4 5017
D.7.5 Written Assignment W 5 5019
D.8 MATH 141 2006 01 . . . . . . . 5021D.8.1 Solution to Written As-
signment W 1 . . . . . . 5021
D.8.2 Solution to Written As-
signment W 2 . . . . . . 5024
D.8.3 Solutions to Written As-
signment W 3 . . . . . . 5025
D.8.4 Solutions to Written As-
signment W 4 . . . . . . 5028
D.8.5 Solutions to Written As-
signment W 5 . . . . . . 5030
D.9 MATH 141 2007 01 . . . . . . . 5032
E Quizzes from Previous Years 5033
E.1 MATH 141 2007 01 . . . . . . . 5033
E.1.1 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1 5033
E.1.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2 5043
E.1.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3 5055
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 6/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
E.1.4 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q4 5070
E.2 MATH 141 2008 01 . . . . . . . 5086E.2.1 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1 5086
E.2.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2 5099
E.2.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3 5110
E.2.4 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q4 5121
E.3 MATH 141 2009 01 . . . . . . . 5134
E.3.1 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1 5134
E.3.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2 5140
E.3.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3 5146
F Final Examinations from Previous Years 5152
F.1 Final Examination in Mathemat-
ics 189-121B (1996 / 1997) . . . 5152F.2 Final Examination in Mathemat-
ics 189-141B (1997 / 1998) . . . 5153
F.3 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in Mathematics 189-141B
(1997 / 1998) . . . . . . . . . . . 5155
F.4 Final Examination in Mathemat-
ics 189-141B (1998 / 1999) . . . 5156
F.5 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in Mathematics 189-141B
(1998 / 1999) . . . . . . . . . . . 5158
F.6 Final Examination in Mathemat-ics 189-141B (1999 / 2000) . . . 5160
F.7 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in Mathematics 189-141B
(1999 / 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . 5161
F.8 Final Examination in Mathemat-
ics 189-141B (2000 / 2001) . . . 5162
F.9 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in Mathematics 189-141B
(2000 / 2001) . . . . . . . . . . . 5164
F.10 Final Examination in Mathemat-
ics 189-141B (2001 /
2002) . . . 5165F.11 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in Mathematics 189-141B
(2001 / 2002) . . . . . . . . . . . 5167
F.12 Final Examination in MATH 141
2003 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5169
F.13 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2003 01 . . . 5171F.14 Final Examination in MATH 141
2004 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5172
F.15 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2004 01 . . . 5181
F.16 Final Examination in MATH 141
2005 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5185
F.17 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2005 01 . . . 5189
F.18 Final Examination in MATH 141
2006 01 (One version) . . . . . 5192
F.19 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2006 01 . . . 5195
F.20 Final Examination in MATH 141
2007 01 (One version) . . . . . 5199
F.21 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2007 01 (One
version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5203
F.22 Final Examination in MATH 141
2008 01 (one version) . . . . . . 5207
F.23 Supplemental / Deferred Examina-
tion in MATH 141 2008 01 (one
version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5217
F.24 Final Examination in MATH 1412009 01 (one version) . . . . . . 5221
G WeBWorK 6001
G.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) 6001
G.1.1 Where is WeBWorK? . 6001
G.1.2 Do I need a password to
use WeBWorK? . . . . 6001
G.1.3 Do I have to pay an ad-
ditional fee to use WeB-
WorK? . . . . . . . . . 6001
G.1.4 When will assignmentsbe available on WeBWorK? 6002
G.1.5 Do WeBWorK assign-
ments cover the full range
of problems that I should
be able to solve in this
course? . . . . . . . . . 6002
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 7/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
G.1.6 May I assume that the
distribution of topics onquizzes and final exam-
inations will parallel the
distribution of topics in
the WeBWorK assign-
ments? . . . . . . . . . 6002
G.1.7 WeBWorK provides for
diff erent kinds of “Dis-
play Mode”. Which should
I use? . . . . . . . . . . 6002
G.1.8 WeBWorK provides for
printing assignments in
“Portable Document Format”
(.pdf), “PostScript” (.ps)
and “TEXSource” forms.
Which should I use? . . 6003
G.1.9 What is the relation be-
tween WeBWorK and We-
bCT? . . . . . . . . . . 6003
G.1.10 What do I have to do on
WeBWorK? . . . . . . 6003
G.1.11 How can I learn how to
use WeBWorK? . . . . 6004
G.1.12 Where should I go if Ihave difficulties with WeB-
WorK ? . . . . . . . . . 6004
G.1.13 Can the WeBWorK sys-
tem ever break down or
degrade? . . . . . . . . 6004
G.1.14 How many attempts may
I make to solve a partic-
ular problem on WeB-
WorK? . . . . . . . . . 6005
G.1.15 Will all WeBWorK as-
signments have the samelength? the same value? 6005
G.1.16 Is WeBWorK a good in-
dicator of examination per-
formance? . . . . . . . . 6005
H Contents of the DVD disks for
Larson / Hostetler / Edwards 6101
List of Tables
1 Schedule and Locations of Tu-
torials, as of April 9, 2010. . . . 4
2 Tutors’ Coordinates, as of April
9, 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Summary of Course Requirements,
as of April 9, 2010; (all dates
are subject to change) . . . . . . 11
4 Some Antiderivatives . . . . . . 3025
5 VeryShort Tableof Indefinite In-t e g r a l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3026
List of Figures
1 The region(s) bounded by y =
x2 and y = x4 . . . . . . . . . . 3053
2 The region(s) bounded by y =
sin x, y = sin 2 x between x = 0
and x = π2
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3055
3 The region(s) bounded by y =
8 − x2, y = x2 between x = ±3 . 3056
4 The region(s) bounded by y =√ x + 2, y = x between x = 0
and x = 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3058
5 Regions for Example C.31 . . . 3061
6 The region(s) bounded by x +
y = 3 and x = 4 − ( y − 1)2 . . . 3070
7 The curve x = cos θ +sin2θ , y =
sin θ + cos2θ . . . . . . . . . . 3158
8 The cardioid with equation r =
2(1
−sin θ ) . . . . . . . . . . . 3170
9 The limacon r = 1 − 3cos θ , . . 3172
10 The spiral with equation r = θ ,
(θ ≥ 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3174
11 The spiral with equation r = θ ,
(θ ≤ 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3175
12 The full spiral with equation r =
θ , −∞ < θ < +∞ . . . . . . . . 3176
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 8/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01
13 The “4-leafed rose” with equa-
tion r = sin 2θ , . . . . . . . . . . 317714 The “5-leafed rose” with equa-
tion r = sin 5θ , . . . . . . . . . . 3178
15 The lemniscates r 2 = sin 2θ , r 2 =
cos2θ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3179
16 Intersecting polar curves r = 1+
sin θ , r 2 = 4 sin θ . . . . . . . . 3182
17 Curves r = sin θ , r = cos θ . . . 3184
18 The strophoid r = 2cos θ − sec θ 3186
19 Curves r = 2 + sin θ , r = 3 sin θ . 3188
20 Intersections of the limacon r =
1
−2cos θ with the circle r = 1 . 3191
21 Intersections of the curve r =
sec θ with the circle r = 1 . . . . 3193
22 The curves with equations r =
1 − cos θ , (θ ≤ 0), and r = 1 +
sin θ , and the point
12
, π2
. . . . 3243
23 The cardioids with equations r =
2 + 2sin θ , r = 6 − 6sin θ . . . . 3262
24 The region bounded by cardioids
r = 2 +2sin θ , r = 6−6sin θ and
containing the point (r , θ ) = (1, 0) 3263
25 The curves with equations r =
4 + 2cos θ , r = 4cos θ + 5 . . . 329126 The limacon r = 1 + 2sin θ . . . 5071
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 9/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 1
1 General Information
Distribution Date: January 04th, 2010
(all information is subject to change)
Pages 1 - 20 of these notes may be considered the Course Outline for this course.
These notes may undergo minor corrections or updates during the term: the defini-
tive version will be the version accessible at
http: // www.math.mcgill.ca / brown / math141b.html
or on myCourses, at
http: // www.mcgill.ca / mycourses /
Students are advised not to make assumptions based on past years’ operations,
as some of the details concerning this course could be diff erent from past years.
Publications other than this document may contain unreliable information about
this course.
All details of the course could be subject to discretionary change in case of force
majeure.
1
1.1 Force Majeure
In the event of extraordinary circumstances beyond the University’s control, all details of thiscourse, including the content and / or evaluation scheme are subject to change.
1Please note that the statements about MATH 141 in an SUS publication called Absolute Zero were not given
to instructors of this course to check, and some of them may not be currently correct.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 10/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 2
1.2 Instructors and Times
INSTRUCTOR: Prof. W. G. Brown Dr. S. Shahabi Dr. A. Hundemer(Course Coordinator)
LECTURE SECTION: 1 2 3
CRN: 576 577 578
OFFICE: BURN 1224 BURN 1243 BURN 1128
OFFICE HOURS: W 15:45→16:45 F 09:30→11:30 MW 15:30→16:25
(subject to change) F 10:00→11:00 (tentative)
or by appointment
TELEPHONE: (514)-398-3836 (514)-398-3803 (514)-398-5318
E-MAIL:2 BROWN@ SHAHABI@ HUNDEMER@
MATH.MCGILL.CA MATH.MCGILL.CA MATH.MCGILL.CA
CLASSROOM: ADAMS AUD LEA 219 ADAMS AUDCLASS HOURS: MWF 11:35–12:25 h. MWF 11:35–12:25 h. MW 16:35–17:55 h.
1.3 Calendar Description
1.3.1 Calendar Description
MATH 1414 CALCULUS 2. (4 credits; 3 hours lecture; 2 hours tutorial. Prerequisites:
MATH 139 or MATH 140 or MATH 150. Restriction: Not open to students who have taken
MATH 121 or CEGEP objective 00UP or equivalent; not open to students who have taken or
are taking MATH 122 or MATH 130 or MATH 131, except by permission of the Department of
Mathematics and Statistics. Each Tutorial section is enrolment limited.) The definite integral.
Techniques of integration. Applications. Introduction to sequences and series.
Students Lacking the Prerequisite will, when discovered, be removed from the course.
Students without the prerequisite (or standing in a course recognized by the Admissions Office
as being equivalent to MATH 140) should not assume that, in possibly permitting MINERVA
to accept their registration for MATH 141, the University was tacitly approving their regis-
tration without the prerequisite. In particular, students who obtained a grade of F in MATH
139 / 140 / 150 are expressly excluded from registration in MATH 141, even if they registered in
the course before the failed or missed examination.
2Please do not send e-mail messages to your instructors through the WebCT or WeBWorK3 systems; rather,
use the addresses given in §1.2 on page 2.3E-mail messages generated by the Feedback command in WeBWorK should be used sparingly, and con-
fined to specific inquiries about WeBWorK assignments.4The previous designation for this course was 189-141, and the version given in the winter was labelled
189-141B; an earlier number for a similar course was 189-121.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 11/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 12/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 4
# CRN Day Begins Ends Room Tutor
T004 579 Fri 13:35 15:25 BURN 1B39 J. FeysT005 580 Tue 14:05 15:55 ARTS 260 H. Bigdely
T006 581 Tue 16:05 17:55 BURN 1B23 L. Candelori
T007 582 Tue 16:05 17:55 BURN 1B24 F. Castella
T008 583 Thurs 14:05 15:55 BURN 1B39 Y. Canzani
T009 584 Thurs 16:05 17:55 BURN 1B39 X. Zhang
T010 585 Thurs 16:05 17:55 BURN 1B23 A.-P. Grecianu
T011 586 Mon 13:35 15:25 ARTS W-20 J. Macdonald
T012 587 Mon 14:35 16:25 BURN 1B36 M. Prevost
T013 588 Mon 14:35 16:25 BURN 1B24 J. Tousignant-Barnes
T014 589 Wed 13:35 15:25 ARTS W-20 J. Restrepo
T015 590 Wed 14:35 16:25 LEA 14 B. Taji
T016 591 Wed 14:35 16:25 BURN 1B36 A. Tcheng
T017 2071 Mon 13:35 15:25 ENGMD 276 A. Tomberg
T018 2072 Wed 13:35 15:25 BURN 1B24 P. Rempel
T019 8194 Tue 08:05 09:55 BURN 1B23 Y. Rabhi
T020 8840 Wed 15:35 17:25 ENGMD 279 A. Farooqui
T021 8841 Fri 15:35 17:25 ENGMD 256 Y. Zhao
Some of these room assignments could change before or early in the beginning of the term, as we
have a pending request to upgrade some of the rooms. In any case, all assignments are subject to
change.
Table 1: Schedule and Locations of Tutorials, as of April 9, 2010.
• Outside of the normal quiz times in their tutorials, tutors are neither expected nor au-
thorized to administer a special quiz or a quiz that has already been administered to
others.
• Tutors in MATH 141 2010 01 are not permitted to off er paid, private tuition to students
in any tutorial section of this course.
1.4.3 Friday, April 02nd, 2010 and Monday, April 05th, 2010
These two lecture / tutorial days are lost because of the Easter holidays. While the lectures will
resume on Wednesday, April 07th, 2010, and the total number of lecture hours is similar to
past years, there will be some disruption to Monday and Friday tutorials: the Monday tutorials
will meet on Monday, April 12th, 2010, but there is no scheduled Friday available to complete
the Friday tutorials; alternative arrangements for students in Friday tutorials will be announced
later in the term.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 13/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 14/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6
3. The final examination — counting for 70%.
Where a student’s performance on the final examination is superior to her performance on the
tutorial quizzes, the final examination grade will replace the quiz grades in the calculations;
in that case the grade on the final examination will count for 90% of the final grade. It is not
planned to permit the examination grade to replace the grades on WeBWorK assignments.
1.5.2 WeBWorK
1. The WeBWorK system, developed at the University of Rochester — is designed to
expose you to a large number of drill problems, and where plagiarism is discouraged.
WeBWorK is accessible only over the Internet. Details on how to sign on to WeBWorK
are contained in Appendix G to these notes, page 6001.Only answers submitted by the due date and time will count. The WeBWorK assign-
ments which count in your term mark will be labelled A1, . . ., A6.
2. Due dates and times for WeBWorK assignments. Most due dates for WeBWorK
assignments will be on specified Sundays, about 23:30h; last minute changes in the due
dates may be announced either on WeBWorK, on my Courses, or by an e-mail message11
As mentioned in the WeBWorK FAQ (cf. Appendix G), if you leave your WeBWorK
assignment until the hours close to the due time on the due date, you should not be
surprised if the system is slow to respond. This is not a malfunction, but is simply
a reflection of the fact that other students have also been procrastinating! To benefit
from the speed that the system can deliver under normal conditions, do not delay yourWeBWorK until the last possible day! If a systems failure interferes with the due date of
an assignment, arrangements may be made to change that date, and an e-mail message
may be broadcast to all users (to the e-mail addresses on record), or a note posted in the
course announcements on my Courses; but slowness in the system just before the due
time will not normally be considered a systems failure.12
3. Numbers of permitted attempts at WeBWorK questions. While the number of times
you may attempt each problem on WeBWorK An will be limited, there will be a com-
panion “Practice” Assignment Pn (n = 1, 2, . . . , 6) with an unlimited number of attempts
at similar problems, but in which the specific data may be diff erent. Thus you have
group, and observing whether your performance was at an appropriate level. Students who deny themselves this
experience often undergo a rude awakening at the final examination.11Be sure that your e-mail addresses are correctly recorded. See 4, p. 19 of these notes.12Should you find that the system is responding slowly, do not submit your solutions more than once; you may
deplete the number of attempts that have been allowed to you for a problem: this will not be considered a systems
failure.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 15/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 16/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 8
some or all problems on quizzes.14
The quizzes may examine on only a sampling of topics. Students should not assume thattopics not examined are in any subsidiary parts of the syllabus.
5. Your tutors will normally bring graded quizzes to the tutorial to be returned to you.
University regulations do not permit us to leave unclaimed materials bearing names and
student numbers in unsupervised locations; you may be able to recover an unclaimed
quiz from the tutor who graded it, during her / his regular office hours. Be sure to attend
the tutorial following a quiz15, as claims of incorrect recording of a quiz or assignment
grade will need to be substantiated by a graded paper.
6. Your quiz grades on assignments and quizzes will be posted on myCourses within about
2 weeks after they become available. Your WeBWorK grades may not be transferred tomyCourses until the end of the term, but will be visible on the WeBWorK site.
1.5.5 Final Examination
A 3-hour-long final examination will be scheduled during the regular examination period for
the winter term (April 15th, 2010 through April 30th, 2010). You are advised not to make any
travel arrangements that would prevent you from being present on campus at any time during
this period.16
1.5.6 Supplemental Assessments
1. Supplemental Examination. There will be a supplemental examination in this course.
(For information about Supplemental Examinations, see
http: // www.mcgill.ca / artscisao / departmental / examination / supplemental / .)
2. There is No Additional Work Option. “Will students with marks of D, F, or J have the
option of doing additional work to upgrade their mark?” No. (“Additional Work” refers
to an option available in certain Arts and Science courses, but not available in MATH
141 2010 01.)
14
In Math 141 the general rule for quizzes is that full solutions are expected to all problems, unless you receiveexplicit instructions to the contrary: ALWAYS SHOW YOUR WORK! The solutions in the Student Solutions
Manual [9] to the textbook can serve as a guide to what should be included in a “full” solution.15The return of Quiz Q1 may be delayed to the 2nd week after the quiz was written.16Your instructors learn the date of your examination at the same time as you do — when the Provisional
examination timetable is published.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 17/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 18/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 10
You are also referred to the following URL:
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide /
Other Fraud. It is a serious off ence to alter a graded quiz paper and return it to the tutor
under the pretense that the work was not graded properly.
1.5.9 Corrections to grades
Grades will eventually be posted on my Courses. If you believe a grade has been recorded
incorrectly, you must advise your tutor not later than 4 weeks after the grade has been posted,
and not later than the day before of the final examination whichever of these dates is earlier. It
is hoped that grades will be posted within 2 weeks of the due date. You will have to present thegraded quiz to support your claim, which must be submitted to the tutor that graded the quiz. If
he / she believes there has been an error, the tutor will advise Professor Brown. New corrections
to the my Courses posting will appear the next time grades are uploaded to my Courses.
1.6 Published Materials
1.6.1 Required Text-Book
The textbook for the course is J. Stewart, SINGLE VARIABLE CALCULUS: Early Tran-
scendentals, Sixth Edition, Brooks / Cole (2008), ISBN 0-495-01169-X, [1]. This book is the
first half of J. Stewart, CALCULUS: Early Transcendentals, Sixth Edition, Brooks / Cole(2008), ISBN 0-495-01166-5, [2]; this edition covers the material for Calculus 3 (MATH 222)
as well, but is not the text-book for that course at the present time. The textbook will be sold
in the McGill Bookstore bundled with its Student Solutions Manual (see below). The ISBN
number for the entire bundle is 0-495-42966-X.
1.6.2 Optional Reference Books
Students are urged to make use of the Student Solution Manual:
• D. Anderson, J. A. Cole, D. Drucker, STUDENT SOLUTIONS MANUAL FOR STEW-
ART’S SINGLE VARIABLE CALCULUS: Early
Transcendentals
, Sixth
Edition
, Brooks / Col(2008), ISBN 0-495-01240-8, [3]. This book is also sold “bundled” with the text book;
we expect the Bookstore to stock the bundle numbered ISBN 0-495-42966-X [4].
The publishers of the textbook and Student Solutions Manual also produce
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 19/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 20/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 12
1.6.3 Recommended Video Materials
Use of the following materials is recommended, but is not mandatory18.
Text-specific DVDs for Stewarts Calculus, early transcendentals, 6th edition [videorecord-
ing]. The publisher of Stewart’s Calculus has produced a series of videodisks, [?]. These will
initially be available for reserve loan at the Schulich Library. There may not be DVD viewing
equipment freely available in the library; the intention is that interested students borrow disks
for viewing on their own equipment at home. Disk 1 covers Chapters 1-6 of the textbook.
Videotapes for Stewart’s Calculus The publisher of Stewart’s Calculus had earlier pro-
duced a series of videotapes, [14] Video Outline for Stewart’s Calculus (Early Transcenden-
tals), Fifth Edition. These will be available for reserve loan at the Schulich Library. There maynot be VCR viewing equipment in the library; the intention is that interested students borrow
a tape for viewing on their own equipment at home.
Larson / Hostetler / Edwards DVD Disks A set of video DVD disks produced for another
calculus book, [28] Calculus Instructional DVD Program, for use with (inter alia) Larson /
Hostetler / Edwards, Calculus of a Single Variable: Early Transcendental Functions, Third
Edition [29] is produced by the Houghton Mifflin Company. A copy has been requested to be
placed on reserve in the Schulich Library. In Appendix H of these notes there are charts that
indicate the contents of these disks that pertain to MATH 141.
Interactive Video Skillbuilder CD for Stewart’s Calculus: Early Transcendentals, 6th
Edition, (similar to [15]) 19This CD-ROM is included with certain new copies of the text-
book. It contains, after an enlightening “pep-talk” by the author, a discussion of some of the
worked examples in the text-book, followed by a quiz for each section in the book. Some stu-
dents may find the animations of the examples helpful, although the examples are all worked
in the book. You might wish to try some of the quiz questions using paper and pencil, and
then check your answers with those given on the CD. It is not recommended that you attempt
to enter your answers digitally, as this is a time-consuming process, and uses a diff erent input
method from your WeBWorK assignments, which serve the same purpose.
18
No one will check whether you have used any of these aids; a student can obtain a perfect grade in the coursewithout ever consulting any of them. No audio-visual or calculator aid can replace the systematic use of paper
and pencil as you work your way through problems. But the intelligent use of some of these aids can deepen your
understanding of the subject. However, the most important aid is the Student Solutions Manual to the textbook!19The version of this CD-ROM for the 6th edition is being catalogued by the Library; it may not be available
at the beginning of the term.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 21/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 13
1.6.4 Other Calculus Textbooks
While students may wish to consult other textbooks, instructors and teaching assistants in
Math 141 will normally refer only to the prescribed edition of the prescribed textbook for the
course. Other books can be very useful, but the onus is on you to ensure that your book covers
the syllabus to at least the required depth; where there are diff erences of terminology, you are
expected to be familiar with the terminology of the textbook.20
In your previous calculus course(s) you may have learned methods of solving problems that
appear to diff er from those you find in the current textbook. Your instructors will be pleased
to discuss any such methods with you personally, to ascertain whether they are appropriate to
the present course. In particular, any methods that depend upon the use of a calculator, or the
plotting of multiple points, or the tabulation of function values, or the inference of a trend from
a graph should be regarded with scepticism.
1.6.5 Website
These notes, and other materials distributed to students in this course, will be accessible
through a link on the myCourses page for the course, as well as at the following URL:
http: // www.math.mcgill.ca / brown / math141b.html
The notes will be in “pdf” (.pdf) form, and can be read using the Adobe Acrobat reader, which
many users have on their computers. This free software may be downloaded from the following
URL:
http: // www.adobe.com / prodindex / acrobat / readstep.html 21
The questions on some old examinations will also be available as an appendix to these notes
on the Web.22
Where revisions are made to distributed printed materials — for example these information
sheets — we expect that the last version will be posted on the Web.
The notes and WeBWorK will also be available via a link from the my Courses (WebCT)
URL:
http: // mycourses.mcgill.ca
20There should be multiple copies of the textbook on reserve in the Schulich library.21At the time of this writing the current version appears to be 8.n.22There is no reason to expect the distribution of problems on quizzes or in assignments and examinations from
previous years be related to the frequencies of any types of problems on the examination that you will be writing
at the end of the term.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 22/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 23/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 24/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 25/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 17
When to do the WeBWorK assignment. I recommend that you defer working WeBWorK
problems until you have tried some of the easier odd-numbered problems in the textbook. Forthese you (should) have the Student Solutions Manual to help you check your work. Once
you know that you have the basic concepts mastered, then is a good time to start working
WeBWorK problems. But these should be done first from a printed copy of your assignment
— not worked during real time online.
The real uses of WeBWorK and the quizzes. Students often misunderstand the true signif-
icance of WeBWorK assignments and the quizzes. While both contribute to your grade, they
can help you estimate the quality of your progress in the course. Quizzes are administered un-
der examination conditions, so poor performance or non-performance on quizzes can provide
an indicator of your expectations at the final examination; take proper remedial action if you
are obtaining low grades on quizzes27. Since WeBWorK is not completed under examination
conditions, the grades you obtain may not be a good indicator of your expectations on the ex-
amination; if you require many attempts before being able to solve a problem on WeBWorK,
you should use that information to direct you to areas requiring extra study: the WeBWorK
grades themselves have little predictive use, unless they are unusually low. However, while
both WeBWorK and the quizzes have a role to play in learning the calculus, neither is as im-
portant as reading your textbook, working problems yourself, and attending and listening at
lectures and tutorials.
What to strive for on WeBWorK assignments. Since the practice assignments give you
ample opportunity to experiment, your success rate on the assignments “that count” should beclose to 100%. If you are needing more than 2 attempts to solve a WeBWorK problem, then
you are probably not ready to work the assignment. In order to be able to solve a WeBWorK
problem successfully on the first attempt you will need to check your work, and this is a skill
that you will need on the final examination, and in the advanced studies or the real world where
you may eventually be applying the calculus.
1.8.4 Escape Routes
At any time, even after the last date for dropping the course, students who are experiencing
medical or personal difficulties should not hesitate to consult their advisors or the Student
Aff airs office of their faculty. Don’t allow yourself to be overwhelmed by such problems; theUniversity has resource persons who may be able to help you.
27The worst action is to miss the quizzes, and thereby block out an unwelcome message.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 26/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 18
1.8.5 Terminology
Do not be surprised if your instructors and tutors use diff erent terminology from what you
have heard in your previous calculus course, particularly if that course was at a high school.
Sometimes the diff erences are purely due to diff erent traditions in the professions.
“Negative x” Your instructors and tutors will often read a formula − x as minus x, not as
negative x. To a mathematician the term negative refers to real numbers which are not squares,
i.e. which are less than 0, and − x can be positive if x itself is negative.
However, mathematicians will sometimes refer to the operation of changing a sign as the
replacement of x by “its negative”; this is not entirely consistent with the usual practice, but is
an “abuse of language” that has crept into the professional jargon.
Inverse trigonometric functions A formula like sin−1 x will be read as the inverse sine of
x — never as “sine to the minus 1” or “sine to the negative 1”. However, if we write sinn x,
where n is a positive integer, it will always mean (sin x)n. These conventions apply to any of
the functions sin, cos, tan, cot, sec, csc; they also apply to the hyperbolic functions, which we
have met on general functions, so a formula like f 2( x) does not have an obvious meaning, and
we will avoid writing it when f is other than a trigonometric or hyperbolic function.
Logarithms Mathematicians these days rarely use logarithms to base 10. If you were taught
to interpret log x as being the logarithm to base 10, you should now forget that — although it
could be the labelling convention of your calculator. Most often, if your instructor speaks of alogarithm, and writes log x, he will be referring to the base e, i.e. to loge; that is, he is referring
to the function that calculus books call ln. When a logarithm to some other base is intended,
it will either be denoted by an explicit subscript, as log 2, or some comment will be made at
the beginning of the discussion, as “all logarithms in this discussion are to the base 2”. Your
instructors try to think like mathematicians even when lecturing to their classes, and so we use
the language and terminology we use when talking to each other.
1.9 Communication with Instructors and TA’s
1. E-mail messages to your instructor or your TA should be sent to the addresses shown in
Table 1.2 and Table 2. Please show your full name and / or student number, so that wecan clearly identify you.
2. The only messages sent through WeBWorK should be those generated by the Feedback
facility: this means a message that refers to a specific problem on a specific WeBWorK
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 27/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 28/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 20
1.11 Special Office Hours and Tutorials
The following chart will show any special activities that are scheduled during the term. This
table was last updated on April 09, 2010.
Review Tutorial TA / Instructor location Date Time
Polar Coordinates Dr. Y. Zhao ARTS 145 13 April 15:05–16:55
Sequences + Series J. Feys BURN 1B45 16 April 18:05–19:55
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 29/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 21
2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1
For each of the days of the week a sample quiz is given below. Our policy is that, to earn part
marks on any separately numbered part of any question a student must have, in the opinion of
the grader, earned at least half of the marks available.
2.1 Instructions to Students
1. Show all your work. Marks may not be given for answers not supported by a full solu-
tion. For future reference, the form of your solutions should be similar to those shown
in the textbook or Student Solutions Manual for similar problems.
2. In your folded answer sheet you must enclose this question sheet: it will be returnedwith your graded paper. (WITHOUT THIS SHEET YOUR QUIZ WILL BE WORTH
0.) All submissions should carry your name and student number.
3. Time = 20 minutes.
4. No calculators are permitted.
2.2 Monday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use a right Riemann sum (i.e. a Riemann sum where the component
rectangles hang by their upper right-hand corner from the graph) to compute
3 0
(10 x −
2) dx . No other method will be accepted!
Solution: If we divide the interval [0, 3] into n subintervals of equal lengths ∆ x = 3n
, the
right end-points of these intervals are ∆ x, 2∆ x, . . . , n∆ x, so the definite integral is equal
to the following limit of a (right) Riemann sum:
limn→∞
ni=1
(10i∆ x − 2) ∆ x = limn→∞
10(∆ x)2
ni=1
i − 2∆ x
ni=1
1
= limn→∞
10 · 3
2
n2 · n(n+
1)2
− 2 · 3n
· n
= limn→∞
45 · n(n + 1)
n2 − 6 · n
n
= limn→∞
45 · 1 ·
1 +
1
n
− 6
= 39 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 30/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 22
It would not have been acceptable to evaluate this integral using the Fundamental Theo-
rem, but that theorem could be used by a student to verify her work:3
0
(10 x − 2) dx =5 x2 − 2 x
3
0= 5 · 32 − 2 · 3 = 45 − 6 = 39.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a)
π3
0
(sec x)(7 sec x + 3tan x) dx .
(b)
1 0
√ x ·
5 x2 − 5 x − 4
dx .
Solution: For these problems the use of the Fundamental Theorem was not excluded.
(a)
π3
0
(sec x)(7 sec x + 3 tan x) dx =
π3
0
7sec2 x + 3sec x · tan x
dx
= [7 tan x + 3sec x]π3
0
=
7tan
π
3 + 3sec
π
3
− (7tan0 + 3sec0)
= 7√
3 + 3 · 2 − 7 · 0 − 3 · 1 = 7√
3 + 3 .
(b)
1 0
√ x ·
5 x2 − 5 x − 4
dx =
1
0
5 x
52 − 5 x
32 − 4 x
12
=
5 · 2
7 · x 7
2 − 5 · 2
5 · x 5
2 − 4 · 2
3 · x 3
2
1
0
= 10
7 − 2 − 8
3 = −68
21 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 31/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 32/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 33/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 25
=
− e2 x
1 (ln t )2 + 7 dt +
e4 x
1 (ln t )2 + 7 dt
Now we apply the Chain Rule in diff erentiating each of the summand integrals:
d
dx
e4 x
e2 x
(ln t )2 + 7 dt = − d
dx
e2 x
1
(ln t )2 + 7 dt +
d
dx
e4 x
1
(ln t )2 + 7 dt
= − d
du
e2 x
1
(ln t )2 + 7 dt
· du
dx +
d
dv
e4 x
1
(ln t )2 + 7 dt
· dv
dx
= −
(ln e2 x)2 + 7 · 2e2 x +
(ln e4 x)2 + 7 · 4e4 x
=
− (2 x)2 + 7
·2e2 x + (4 x)2 + 7
·4e4 x
= −√ 4 x2 + 7 · 2e2 x + √ 16 x2 + 7 · 4e4 x .
2.5 Thursday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use a left Riemann sum (i.e. a Riemann sum where the component rect-
angles hang by their upper left-hand corner from the graph) to compute
2 −1
x2 + 1
dx.
No other method will be accepted!
Solution: If we divide the interval [
−1, 2] into n subintervals of equal lengths ∆ x =
2−(−1)n = 3
n , the left end-points of these intervals are −1, −1 + ∆ x, −1 + 2∆ x, . . . , −1 + (n −1)∆ x, so the definite integral is equal to the following limit of a (left) Riemann sum:
limn→∞
ni=1
(−1 + (i − 1)∆ x)2
+ 1
∆ x
= limn→∞
ni=1
2 − 2(i − 1)∆ x + (i − 1)2(∆ x)2
· ∆ x
= limn→∞
2∆ x
n
i=1
1 − 2(∆ x)2
n
i=1
(i − 1) + (∆ x)3
n
i=1
(i − 1)2
= limn→∞
2 · 3
n· n − 2 ·
3
n
2
· (n − 1)n
2 +
3
n
3
· (n − 1)n(2(n − 1) + 1)
6
= lim
n→∞
6 − 9
1 − 1
n
+
9
2
1 − 1
n
2 − 1
n
= 6 − 9 + 9 = 6 .
It would not have been acceptable to evaluate this integral using the Fundamental Theo-
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 34/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 26
rem, but that theorem could be used by a student to verify her work:
2 −1
x2 + 1
dx = 2
1
3 x3 + x
2
−1
=
8
3 + 2
−−1
3 − 1
= 6 .
2. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the Chain Rule to find all
critical numbers of the function
9 e x2 +7 x+12
ln t dt .
Solution: We first determine the derivative, using the Fundamental Theorem and the
Chain Rule. Define u = e x2+7 x+12
. Then
du
dx = (2 x + 7)e x2+7 x+12
.
d
dx
9 e x2+7 x+12
ln t dt = d
dx
−e x2+7 x+12
9
ln t dt
= − d
du
e x2 +7 x+12 9
ln t dt
· du
dx
=
− ln e x2+7 x+12 ·(2 x + 7)e x2+7 x+12
= − x2 + 7 x + 12
(2 x + 7)e x2+7 x+12
= −( x + 3)( x + 4)(2 x + 7)e x2+7 x+12 .
This derivative has an exponential factor which cannot equal 0. The function is diff eren-
tiable for all x, and the derivative is 0 when x = −4, −72
, −3, so the latter 3 points are the
critical numbers of the function.
2.6 Friday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use a right Riemann sum (i.e. a Riemann sum where the component rect-
angles hang by their upper right-hand corner from the graph) to compute
2 0
x2 − 3
dx.
No other method will be accepted!
Solution: If we divide the interval [0, 2] into n subintervals of equal lengths ∆ x = 2n
, the
right end-points of these intervals are ∆ x, 2∆ x, . . . , n∆ x, so the definite integral is equal
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 35/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 27
to the following limit of a (right) Riemann sum:
limn→∞
ni=1
(i∆ x)3 − 3
∆ x = lim
n→∞
(∆ x)4
ni=1
i3 − 3∆ x
ni=1
1
= lim
n→∞
2
n
4
· n2(n + 1)2
4 − 3 · 2
n· n
= lim
n→∞
4
1 +
1
n
2
− 2
= 4 − 6 = −2 .
It would not have been acceptable to evaluate this integral using the Fundamental Theo-
rem, but that theorem could be used by a student to verify her work:
2 0
x3 − 3
dx =
1
4 · x4 − 3 x
2
0
= 4 − 6 = −2.
2. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the Chain Rule to find all
critical numbers of the function f ( x) =
4 x2−4 x−5
sinh t dt .
Solution: Define u = x2
−4 x
−5, so
du
dx
= 2 x
−4. Then
d
dx
4
x2−4 x−5
sinh t dt = d
dx
− x2−4 x−5
4
sinh t dt
= − d
du
x2−4 x−5
4
sinh t dt
· du
dx
= −sinh
x2 − 4 x − 5
· (2 x − 4) .
The sinh function is 0 if and only if its argument is 0, here if and only if ( x − 5)( x + 1) =
x2 − 4 x − 5 = 0, i.e., if and only if x = 5 or x = −1. Thus the derivative — which is
defined for all x — is 0 when x = −1, 2, 5; these are the critical numbers.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 36/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 28
3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2
For each of the days of the week a sample quiz is given below. Our policy is that, to earn part
marks on any separately numbered part of any question a student must have, in the opinion of
the grader, earned at least half of the marks available.
3.1 Instructions to Students
1. Show all your work! To be awarded partial marks on a part of a question a student’s
answer for that part must be deemed to be more than 50% correct. For future reference,
the form of your solutions should be similar to those shown in the textbook or Student
Solutions Manual for similar problems.
2. In your folded answer sheet you must enclose this question sheet: it will be returned
with your graded paper. (WITHOUT THIS SHEET YOUR QUIZ WILL BE WORTH
0.) All submissions should carry your name and student number.
3. Time = 25 minutes.
4. No calculators are permitted.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 37/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 38/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 39/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 31
3.3 Most Tuesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use appropriate substitutions to compute
(a)
e5t + 5
e5t + 25t dt
(b)
x3
√ x2 − 1 dx (Hint: Start with the substitution u = x2 − 1.)
Solution:
(a) Try the substitution u = e5t + 25t . Then du =5e5t + 25
dt = 5
e5t + 5
dt . Hence
e
5t
+ 5e5t + 25t
dt = 15
du
u= 1
5 ln u + C
= 1
5 ln
e5t + 25t
+ C .
(b) The hint suggests using the substitution u = x2 − 1 ⇒ du = 2 x dx. Then x3
√ x2 − 1 dx =
(u + 1)
√ u · du
2
= 1
5 · u
52 +
1
3u
32 + C
= 15
( x2 − 1)52 + 1
3( x2 − 1)
32 + C .
(There are variations of this substitution that could have been used. For example,
we could try the substitution u =√
x2 − 1, so u2 = x2 − 1, x2 = u2 + 1, u du = x dx.
Then x3
√ x2 − 1 dx =
(u2 + 1)u · u du
=
u4 + u2
du
= u5
5 + u
3
3 + C
= 1
5
x2 − 1
52
+ 1
3
x2 − 1
32
+ C .
2. [10 MARKS] Let R be the region in the first quadrant bounded by the lines y = 0, y = 5 x,
and the curve y = 6
x− 1. Compute the volume of the solid of revolution obtained by
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 40/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 41/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 42/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 34
2. [10 MARKS] Use integration by parts to compute the integral arctan 6
x dx.
Solution: We know that the integration of arctan x can be accomplished by integration
by parts, so we can try the same tactic here, with u = arctan
6 x
, and dv = dx. Then
v = x, and
du = 1
1 +
6 x
2 · −6
x2 dx =
−6
36 + x2 · dx .
Hence arctan
6
x
dx = arctan
6
x
· x + 6
x
36 + x2 dx .
The new integrand can be integrated by using a substitution like w = 36 + x2, where
dw = 2 x dx , so x dx = dw
2 :
arctan
6
x
dx = arctan
6
x
· x + 6
1
2wdw
= arctan
6
x
· x + 3 · ln |w| + C
= arctan
6
x
· x + 3 · ln
36 + x2
+ C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 43/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 44/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 36
Solution: One can start by defining a substitution u = x + 5, but the substitution could
be deferred, or even entirely avoided. For example, just take u = ln( x + 5), dv = x dx, so
du = dx
x + 5 , v =
x2
2 .
Then x ln( x + 5) dx = (ln( x + 5)) · x2
2 −
x2
2 · dx
x + 5 .
The last integral could be integrated by simply using long division, where x2 = ( x +
5)( x − 5) + 25, so
1
2 x2
x + 5 = x
−5
2 dx +
25
2 1
x + 5 d x =
x2
4 − 5 x
2 +
25
2 ln | x + 5| + C . (1)
Hence x ln( x + 5) dx =
x2
2 · ln( x + 5)) − x2
4 +
5 x
2 − 25
2 ln | x + 5| + C 1 .
The long division step is one of the standard operations we will see when we study the
integration of general rational functions. But one could have used, in the second integral
in equation (1), a substitution u = x + 5, to obtain
x2
2( x + 5) d x = (u
−5)2
2u du
=
u
2 − 5 +
25
2u
du
= u2
4 − 5u +
25
2 ln |u| + C =
( x + 5)2
4 − 5( x + 5) +
25
2 ln | x + 5| + C 2 .
The substitution could also have been eff ected at the beginning, and it was this sequence
that was contemplated in the problem:
x ln( x + 5) dx = (u − 5)(ln u) du .
Now we can integrate by parts, taking U = ln u, dV = (u − 5) du, so that dU = du
u,
V = u2
2 − 5u,
x ln( x + 5) dx =
(u − 5)(ln u) du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 45/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 37
= (ln u) u2
2 −5u −
u2
2 −5u ·
du
u
= (ln u)
u2
2 − 5u
−
u
2 − 5
du
= (ln u)
u2
2 − 5u
− u2
4 + 5u + C
= (ln( x + 5))
( x + 5)2
2 − 5( x + 5)
− ( x + 5)2
4 + 5( x + 5) + C 3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 46/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 38
3.6 Friday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Let R be the region bounded by the lines y = 0, y = ln7, x = 0, and
the curve y = ln x. Compute the volume of the solid obtained by revolving R about the
x-axis. [Hint: Sketch the region; then choose the appropriate method.]
Solution:
(a) (Using Cylindrical Shells): We will need to find the height of the cylindrical shell
of radius y, and this will require transforming the equation y = ln x into x = e y.
The distance from x = 0 to x = e y is then e y − 0, so the volume is
ln 7 0
2π y · e y dy ,
which we will integrate by parts, taking u = y, dv = e
y
dy, so that du = dy, v = e
y
:ln 7
0
2π y · e y dy = 2π ye yln 7
0 − 2π
ln 7
0
e y dy
= 2π ye yln 7
0 − 2π [e y]ln 70
= 2π((ln 7) · 7 − 0) − 2π(7 − 1) = 2π(7ln7 − 6) .
(b) (Using Washers): One drawback of this method is that there will be two kinds of
washers: For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 the washers have no hole in the middle, and the radius is a
constant, ln 7; but for 1 ≤
x ≤
7 there will be a hole whose radius is ln x. The area
is, therefore, a sum 1
0
π
(ln 7)2 − 02
dx +
7
1
π
(ln 7)2 − (ln x)2
dx
=
7
0
π
(ln 7)2 − 02
dx − π
7
1
(ln x)2 dx
= π(ln 7)2
7
0
dx − π
7
1
(ln x)2 dx
= 7(ln 7)2
−π
7
1
(ln x)2 dx .
To integrate (ln x)2 we could apply integration by parts twice. Start by taking u =
(ln x)2, v = 1, so that u = 2ln x
x, v = x, and
7
1
(ln x)2 dx =(ln x)2 · x
7
1− 2
7
1
ln x
x· x dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 47/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 39
= (ln x)2
· x7
1
−2
7
1
ln x dx
=(ln x)2 · x
7
1− 2[ x · ln x − x]7
1
= [7(ln 7)2 − 0] + 2[(7ln7 − 7) − (0 − 1)]
which leads to the same result as found earlier.
2. [10 MARKS] Use an appropriate substitution to compute the integral
9 0
1
6 +√
xdx .
(Hint: Start with the substitution u = 6 +√
x.)
Solution: One substitution that would simplify this integral is u = 6 + √ x ⇒ √ x =u − 6 ⇒ x = (u − 6)2 ⇒ d x = 2(u − 6) du. Thus
9 0
1
6 +√
xdx =
6+√
9
6
2(u − 6)
udu
= 2
9
6
1 − 6
u
du
= 2[u − 6 ln u]96 = 2(9 − 6 l n 9 − 6 + 6ln6) = 6 + 12ln
2
3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 48/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 49/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 202
[12] J. Stewart, Calculus (Early Transcendentals), Fifth Edition. Thomson * Brooks / Cole
(2003); bundled with Student Solutions Manual for Stewart’s Single Variable Calculus(Early Transcendentals), Fifth Edition. Thomson * Brooks / Cole (2003). ISBN 0-534-
10307-3.
[13] R. St. Andre, Study Guide for Stewart’s Single Variable Calculus (Early Transcenden-
tals), Fifth Edition. Thomson * Brooks / Cole (2003). ISBN 0-534-39331-4.
[14] Video Outline for Stewart’s Calculus (Early Transcendentals), Fifth Edition. Thomson
* Brooks / Cole (2003). ISBN 0-534-39325-X. 17 VCR tapes.
[15] Interactive Video Skillbuilder CD for Stewart’s Calculus: Early Transcendentals, 5th
Edition. Thomson * Brooks / Cole (2003). ISBN 0-534-39326-8.
[16] H. Keynes, J. Stewart, D. Clegg, Tools for Enriching Calculus, CD to accompany [7]
and [8]. Thomson * Brooks / Cole (2003). ISBN 0-534-39731-X.
[17] J. Stewart, Single Variable Calculus (Early Transcendentals), Fourth Edition.
Brooks / Cole (1999). ISBN 0-534-35563-3.
[18] J. Stewart, Calculus (Early Transcendentals), Fourth Edition. Brooks / Cole (1999). ISBN
0-534-36298-2.
[19] D. Anderson, J. A. Cole, D. Drucker, Student Solutions Manual for Stewart’s Single
Variable Calculus (Early Transcendentals), Fourth Edition. Brooks / Cole (1999). ISBN
0-534-36301-6.
[20] J. Stewart, L. Redlin, S. Watson, Precalculus: Mathematics for Calculus, Enhanced
Review Edition. Thomson * Brooks / Cole. (2006). ISBN: 0-495-39276-6.
[21] J. Stewart, Trigonometry for Calculus. Thomson * Brooks / Cole. ISBN: 0-17-641227-1.
4.2 Other Calculus Textbooks
4.2.1 R. A. Adams
[22] R. A. Adams, Calculus, Single Variable, Fifth Edition. Addison, Wesley, Longman,
Toronto (2003). ISBN 0-201-79805-0.
[23] R. A. Adams, Calculus of Several Variables, Fifth Edition. Addison, Wesley, Longman,
Toronto (2003). ISBN 0-201-79802-6.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 50/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 51/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 204
4.2.4 Others, not “Early Transcendentals”
[35] G. H. Hardy, A Course of Pure Mathematics, 10th edition. Cambridge University Press
(1967).
[36] H. S. Hall, S. R. Knight, Elementary Trigonometry, Fourth Edition. Macmillan and
Company, London (1905).
[37] S. L. Salas, E. Hille, G. J. Etgen, Calculus, One and Several Variables, 10th Edition.
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (2007). ISBN 0471-69804-0.
4.3 Other References
[38] G. N. Berman, A Problem Book in Mathematical Analysis. Mir Publishers, Moscow,
(1975) 1977
[39] D. Ebersole, D. Schattschneider, A. Sevilla, K. Somers, A Companion to Calculus.
Brooks / Cole (1995). ISBN 0-534-26592-8.
[40] McGill Undergraduate Programs Calendar 2009 / 2010. Also accessible at
http: // coursecalendar.mcgill.ca / ug200910 / wwhelp / wwhimpl / js / html / wwhelp.htm
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 52/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 53/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 54/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 55/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 002 of MATH 141 2010 01 2002
Section numbers refer to the text-book.
MONDAY WEDNESDAY FRIDAY
MARCH
01 §10.1,§10.2 03 §10.3 05 §10.3, §10.4
WeBWorK Assignment A4 due Mar. 07, 2010
08 §10.4 A4 Q3 10 §11.1, §11.2 Q3 12 §11.2 Q3
15 §11.3 17 §11.4 19 §11.4, §11.5
WeBWorK Assignment A5 due Sunday, Mar. 28, 2010
22 §11.5 A5 Q4 24 §11.6 Q4 26 §11.6 Q4
29 §11.6 31 §11.7, X
APRIL
02 NO LECTURE Q4
This week’s tutorials are the last (except for Monday tutorials).
WeBWorK Assignment A6 due Apr. 04, 2010
05 NO LECTURE 07 X 09 X
12 X 14 X
Notation: An = Regular WeBWorK Assignment An due about 23:30 hours
on the Sunday preceding this Monday
Qn = Quiz Qn will be administered at the tutorials this week.
X = reserved for eXpansion or review
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 56/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3001
C Supplementary Notes for Students in Section 001 of MATH
141 2010 01
C.1 Lecture style in Lecture Section 001
Lecture content. The timetable on pages 1001, 1002 will show you approximately what I
plan to discuss at each lecture. I suggest that you look through the material in advance. If
you have time to try some of the exercises, and find some that cause you di fficulty, you are
welcome to bring them to my attention; perhaps I may be able to work some of these examples
into the lecture.
What goes on the chalkboard? — Should I take notes? I believe strongly that students
should not sit in the lecture feverishly copying notes for fear of missing some essential topic;
in this course most of what you need to know is contained in the textbook. You should take
notes, but you should be trying to think at the same time. The chalkboard will be used for
• statement / illustration of specific definitions and theorems
• sketching solutions to problems, or classes of problems
• a scratchpad
Some of this material will be useful to you in learning the material in the course. Even when
the material on the board is equivalent to something in your textbook, the act of writing mayhelp you remember it. But much of the material will be restatements of your textbook, so you
should normally not panic if you miss something.
Graphs My emphasis is on qualitative properties of the graphs of functions, but not on the
production of extremely precise graphs. You can expect to see me draw on the chalkboard
sketches that are extremely crude approximations of functions, sometimes even caricatures
of the true graph. Mathematicians do not base proofs on sketches of graphs — the role of a
sketch is usually only to assist the reader to visualize the verbal or symbolic reasoning which
accompanies it. Sometimes a graph is used help one discover a phenomenon, but the result
would not be acceptable to a mathematician unless it could be proved in a non-graphical way. 29
These supplementary notes Section and paragraph headings follow the order of topics in
the textbook. While some of the comments or explanations may be helpful in understanding the
book, the notes are not required reading for examination purposes. Sometimes it may happen
that the discussion of a topic or an exercise evolves during the lecture into one which requires
29This is why I usually avoid problems in the textbook that appear to be drawing inferences from graphs.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 57/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3002
more detail than is practical to write on the chalkboard. In such cases you may be referred
at the following lecture to supplementary material that will be contained in the notes placedon the Web. Such evolutions are spontaneous and not planned, and cannot be announced in
advance.
Timing and corrections The notes will usually not be posted until after the lecture. While
I do try to check the notes before posting them, there will inevitably be errors: if you see
something that doesn’t look right, please ask. The notes will be progressively corrected as
misprints and other errors are discovered.
C.2 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 04th, 2010
Release Date: January 04th, 2010,subject to revision
Textbook Chapter 5. INTEGRALS.
(There will be examples, etc., in these notes that were not discussed specifically at the lecture,
because of time constraints.)
C.2.1 §5.1 Areas and Distances.
When, in [1, §2.1], the textbook was motivating the diff erential calculus, it presented two appli-
cations: “The Tangent Problem”, which was geometric; and “The Velocity Problem”, which
was physical. Now, in motivating the integral calculus, the author presents two analogous
problems: “The Area Problem”, which is geometric; and “The Distance Problem”, which is
physical.
The Area Problem. The textbook discusses approximation of the area under the graph of
y = f ( x) between x = a and x = b — more precisely, the area between the graph, the x-axis,
and the vertical lines x = a and x = b, as a limit of a sum of areas of narrow vertical rectangles.
The approximation is first motivated with simple functions where the area can be bounded
above and below by easily computable sums, which together converge to the same value as
their number approaches ∞ and their width approaches 0. You should become comfortable
using the “sigma notation”, where, for integers n1 and n2 with n1 ≤ n2, we writen2
i=n1
f (i)
to mean the sum f (n1) + f (n1 + 1) + f (n1 + 2) + . . . + f (n2) . The textbook then proposes the
following definition of the area between the graph of a function, two vertical lines, and the
x-axis:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 58/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 59/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 60/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 61/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 62/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 63/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 64/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 65/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3010
cases of the following:k + i=k
(rai + sbi) = r
k + i=k
ai + s
k + i=k
bi .
I may have more to say about the sigma notation after I discuss [1, §5.5], where we shall
encounter properties of the integral that have analogues for sums. For the present let it be
noted that the symbol i ink + i=k
ai is not a “free” variable, in that you cannot assign any values to
it: it performs a function in the symbol, but that function would be performed equally well if
we replaced i by any other symbol that is not already in use, e.g.,k + u=k
au,k + λ=k
aλ,k + ♥=k
a♥ .
The Midpoint Rule. The “Midpoint Rule” is an approximation formula for definite inte-grals. Use of an approximation formula entails a willingness to accept an error in the cal-
culation. Mathematicians normally expect to see an estimate of how good or how bad an
approximation can be before recommending their use. A partial justification of the Midpoint
Rule is contained in [1, §7.7], a section that is to be omitted from the syllabus. For that reason
you are asked to omit this subsection: you will not be expected to know anything about the
Midpoint Rule.
Properties of the Definite Integral – Linearity Properties. The textbook lists many prop-
erties of the Definite Integral, proving some of them.
1.
b a
c dx = c(b − a)
2.
b a
[ f ( x) + g( x)] dx =
b a
f ( x) dx +
b a
g( x) dx
3.
b a
c f ( x) dx = c
b a
f ( x) dx
4.
b a
[ f ( x) − g( x)] dx =
b a
f ( x) dx −b
a
g( x) dx
for any real numbers a, b, c, and any continuous functions f , g.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 66/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 67/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 68/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3013
C.4 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 08th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, January 08th, 2010, subject to correction
C.4.1 Summary of the last lectures
1. The objective was to define what we mean by the (signed) area under the graph of a
function; or, equivalently, the (signed) distance travelled by a moving particle, giving its
instantaneous velocity.
2. For a function f continuous on an interval [a, b] I defined the definite integral
b a
f ( x) dx
as a kind of limit limmax ∆ xi → 0
n → ∞
ni=1
f ( x∗i )∆ xi , called a Riemann sum, and mentioned
that this definition and introduction was simplified for your first encounter, and some-
what lacking in rigour. The treatment of the textbook, which is restricted to continuous
functions, does not require the possibility that the width ∆ xi of the ith interval be pos-
sibly diff erent from the that of other subintervals; thus we will be considering only one
width, and denote it simply by ∆ x.
3. I mentioned that it can be shown that the sum must have the same limit for all sub-
divisions of [a, b] into subintervals [a = x0
, x1
], [ x1
, x2
], . . ., [ xi−1
, xi], [ x
i, x
i+
1], . . .,
[ xn−1, xn = b], and all choices of x∗i in the ith subinterval (i = 1, . . . , n).
4. I illustrated computations with Riemann sums using the function f ( x) = x2 over the
interval [a, b]; the variation I considered had the rectangles “hanging” from the graph
of f by their upper right corners, but I suggest that students should rework the example
with the rectangles hanging by their upper left corners. In my notes, but not discussed in
class, was the example of a similar computation for the function f ( x) = x2 + 2 x − 5 over
the interval [1, 4]; for part of the interval f ( x) < 0, and the value of the integral includes
a cancellation of “negative” and “positive” contributions to area under the graph of f .
5. I reminded you of the formulæ for summing the 0th, 1st, 2nd, and 3rd powers of the first
n natural numbers, and indicated their use in the preceding computation.
6. I indicated that computation of the integral in this way will normally not be necessary,
as we will be meeting a theorem today which will enable much practical computation
for many functions. However, students are still expected to be able to carry out the
calculation of the value of a definite integral using Riemann sums.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 69/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3014
7. I stated basic properties of the definite integral, most of which can be derived from (17),
(26), (23): b
a
(r · f ( x) + s · g( x)) dx = r
b
a
f ( x) dx + s
b
a
g( x) dx c
a
f ( x) dx =
b
a
f ( x) dx +
c
b
f ( x) dx
C.4.2 §5.2 The Definite Integral (conclusion)
Properties of the Definite Integral – Comparison Properties. The textbook lists 3 proper-
ties, which are interrelated — each of them can be used to prove the other 2.
f ( x) ≥ 0 for a ≤ x ≤ b ⇒ b
a
f ( x) dx ≥ 0 (25)
f ( x) ≥ g( x) for a ≤ x ≤ b ⇒ b
a
f ( x) dx ≥ b
a
g( x) dx (26)
m ≤ f ( x) ≤ M for a ≤ x ≤ b ⇒ m(b − a) ≤ b
a
f ( x) dx ≤ M (b − a) . (27)
While the integral
b
a
f ( x) dx has, thus far, been defined only for a function f which is con-
tinuous on [a, b], we will eventually permit generalizations to that definition. Under those
generalizations, properties (25), (26), (27) will continue to hold wherever they “make sense” 33.
Some worked examples based on problems in an earlier edition of your textbook.
Example C.2 ([7, Exercise 18, p. 391]) “Express the limit as a definite integral on the given
interval: limn→∞
ni=1
e xi
1 + xi
∆ x, on the interval [1, 5].”
Solution: This problem is not stated in perfect mathematical language, but we know what the
textbook means. We are to consider the interval 1 ≤ x ≤ 5 to be subdivided into n subintervals
of equal length ∆ x, so ∆ x = 5−1n
. Then we are to interpret e xi
1+ xias f ( x∗
i), the value of a function
at a point x∗i chosen in the ith subinterval, so
1 + (i − 1)∆ x ≤ x∗i ≤ 1 + i∆ x .
33We will even have generalizations permitting infinite values for the integral, and the properties will hold
there, provided we don’t have to work with “values” like ∞ − ∞ or 0 × ∞.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 70/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 71/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3016
Solution: The integrand, sin x, is an increasing function when x is in the 1st quadrant; this
implies that, for
π
6 ≤ x ≤ π
2 ,
1
2 = sin
π
6 ≤ sin x ≤ sin
π
2 = 1 .
The length of the interval over which the integral is being evaluated is π
2 − π
6 =
π
3 . The value
of the integral is then bounded by the areas of two rectangles on the base
π
6, π
2
: the lower
bound is given by the rectangle whose height is the minimum value of the function, the value at
x = π6
; the upper bound is given by the rectangle whose height is the maximum value, attained
at x = π2
:
1
2 · π
3 ≤
π2
π6
sin x dx ≤ 1 · π
3 .
The exact value of the integral will eventually be seen to be√
32
.
Example C.5 ([7, Exercise 58, p. 392]) “Use (27) to estimate the value of the integral 2
0
( x3 − 3 x + 3) dx .”
Solution: On the real line the given function has critical numbers at ±1; of these only x = +1
is in the interval of the integral. By the 2nd Derivative Test x = 1 is a local minimum: thefunction value there is 1. At the end-points of the interval of integration, 0 and 2, the function
has values 3 and 5. We conclude that, on the given interval, the function values are bounded
as follows:
1 ≤ x3 − 3 x + 3 ≤ 5 .
The length of the interval is 2 − 0 = 2. The value of the integral is, therefore, bounded between
2 and 10. (Eventually we shall be able to evaluate this integral exactly, and shall be able to
show that its value is 24
4 − 3
2 · 22 + 3 · 2 = 4 − 6 + 6 = 4 .
5.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 22, p. 771] “Use the form of the definition of the integral...to evaluate the integral 4
1 ( x2 + 2 x − 5) dx.”
Solution: Here we are finding the area under the graph of the polynomial x2 + 2 x − 5, a
continuous function, on the interval 1 ≤ x ≤ 4, i.e., the area of the region bounded by the
graph on top, the lines x = 1 and x = 4 on the two vertical sides, and the x-axis on the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 72/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3017
bottom. We divide the interval into n parts of length x = 4−1n
, and the end-points of the
ith subinterval are xi−1 = 1 +(i−1)∆ x = 1 +(i−1)·3
n on the left and xi = 1 +i · x = 1 +i·3
non the right.
If we choose the sample points to be the right end-points of the subintervals, i.e., to find
the limit of the right Riemann sum, we find that 4
1
( x2 + 2 x − 5) dx
= limn→∞
ni=1
( x2i + 2 xi − 5)∆ x
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 +
3i
n2
+ 2
1 +
3i
n − 5
3
n
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 + 2 · 3i
n+
9i2
n2
+ 2
1 +
3i
n
− 5
3
n
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
i + 9
n2
ni=1
i2 + 2
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
i − 5
ni=1
1
3
n
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
i + 9
n2
ni=1
i2 + 2
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
i − 5
ni=1
1
3
n
= limn→∞(1 + 2 − 5)
ni=1
1 +
6 + 6
n
ni=1
i +
9
n2
ni=1
i2 3
n
= limn→∞
−2n +
12
n· n(n + 1)
2 +
9
n2 · n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
6
3
n
= limn→∞
−2n + 6(n + 1) +
3n +
9
2 +
3
2n
3
n
= 21
If we choose the sample points to be the left end-points, i.e., to find the limit of the left
Riemann sum, we obtain a very similar sum. We can write the sum, like the preceding,as a sum over the index i ranging from i = 1 to i = n, but where the function is evaluated
at the left end-points: 4
1
( x2 + 2 x − 5) dx
= limn→∞
ni=1
( x2i−1 + 2 xi−1 − 5)∆ x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 73/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3018
= limn→∞
n
i=1
1 + 3(i − 1)
n
2
+ 2 1 + 3(i − 1)
n −
53
n
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 + 2 · 3(i − 1)
n +
9(i − 1)2
n2
+ 2
1 +
3(i − 1)
n
− 5
3
n
= limn→∞
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
(i − 1) + 9
n2
ni=1
(i − 1)2 + 2
ni=1
1 + 6
n
ni=1
(i − 1) − 5
ni=1
1
3
n
At this point we can proceed in a variety of ways. One is to observe that the first term
in the sums of powers is 0, so that we are summing only n − 1 non-zero powers. A more
formal way to to that is to define
j = i − 1 (28)
and to rewrite each of the sums as a sum over j, replacing the value i = 1 by j = 0 andthe value i = n by j = n − 1. We then obtain 4
1
( x2 + 2 x − 5) dx
= limn→∞
n−1 j=0
1 + 6
n
n−1 j=0
j + 9
n2
n−1 j=0
j2 + 2
n−1 j=0
1 + 6
n
n−1 j=0
j − 5
n−1 j=0
1
3
n
= limn→∞
(1 + 2 − 5)
n−1
j=0
1 + 6 + 6
n
n−1
j=0
j + 9
n2
n−1
j=0
j2
3
n
= limn→∞
−2n +
12
n· (n − 1)(n)
2 +
9
n2 · (n − 1)n(2n − 1)
6
3
n
= limn→∞
−2n + 6(n − 1) +
3n − 9
2 +
3
2n
3
n
= 21
again. The definition of j in (28) is analogous to the changes of variables that we will be
making in definite integrals in [1, §5.5]: there, as here, we have to change the limits of
the integral to correspond to the new values of the variable of integration. What we have
here is an example of the “finite diff erence calculus”, where there are results similar to
those that we will be developing in the “infinitesimal calculus”.
[1, Exercise 40, p. 378] “Evaluate the integral by interpreting it in terms of areas:10 0
| x−5| dx.”
Solution: (While we could evaluate this integral using Riemann sums, the intention is
that the student interpret the area under the curve in terms of familiar geometric objects,
and use known formulæ to determine the value.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 74/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3019
The portion of the integral from 0 to 5 is the area of a right-angled triangle whose hy-
potenuse is on the line y = −( x − 5), with base of length 5, and height 5, so its area is52
2 =
25
2 . The portion of the integral from 5 to 10 is the mirror image of the triangle
described above, this time with hypotenuse along the line y = x − 5; its area is the same
as the previous one, so the value of the integral is 25.
C.4.3 §5.3 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
In a number of areas of mathematics there are theorems that have acquired the name “The
Fundamental Theorem of...”. The present section is devoted to such a theorem, also known as
“The Fundamental Theorem of (the) Integral Calculus”, one part of which relates the value of
a definite integral to antiderivatives of its integrand, and provides a method for evaluating suchintegrals without the need for computing limits of complicated sums. (The formulation of the
theorem as being divided into two parts is not completely standard.)
Diff erentiation and Integration as Inverse Processes.
Theorem C.6 (The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus) If f is continuous on [a, b], then
1. d
dx
x
a
f (t ) dt
= f ( x).
2. F = f ⇒ b
a f ( x) dx = F (b) − F (a) .
Definition C.2 We may represent a diff erence F (b) − F (a) by
[F ( x)]ba
or even more briefly by
F ( x)]ba
if the latter expression is unambiguous.
I sometimes use a notation which is not standard, but is unambiguous, and write the pre-
ceding diff erence as
F ( x)] x=b x=a
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 75/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3020
Example C.7 Following my discussion of [1, §5.2] in these notes there is35 a solution of
[1, Exercise 22, p. 377], in which the integral
4 1
x2 + 2 x − 5
dx is evaluated “from first
principles”, proving that its value is 21. Let’s now verify that result using the Fundamental
Theorem. One antiderivative of x2 + 2 x − 5 is x3
3 + x2 − 5 x. The value of the integral is,
therefore, x3
3 + x2 − 5 x
4
1
=
64
3 + 16 − 20
−
1
3 + 1 − 5
= 21 .
Example C.8 ([7, Exercise 12, p. 402]) “Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
to find the derivative of the function F ( x) = 10
xtan θ d θ .”
Solution: First observe that F ( x) = − x
10 tan θ d θ . Having written the integral in the form to
which the Fundamental Theorem applies, i.e., with the variable in the upper limit, we may
apply that theorem: the derivative is minus the value of the integrand, tan θ , evaluated where
θ = x, i.e., − tan x.
(Eventually we will see that F ( x) = ln cos x − ln cos(10); again students may then verify
that the Fundamental Theorem is giving us the correct derivative.)
35on pages 3016–3018
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 76/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3021
C.5 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 11th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, January 11th, 2010
updated on 12 January; subject to further updates and corrections
C.5.1 §5.3 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus (conclusion)
Example C.9 ([7, Exercise 10, p. 402]) “Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
to find the derivative of the function g(u) =
u
3
1
x + x2 d x.”
Solution: The derivative is the value of the integrand, 1
x + x2 evaluated at the upper limit of the
integral, i.e., where x = u: g(u) = 1
u + u2.
(Eventually we will see that g(u) = ln u + 1
u− ln
4
3; students may then verify that the
Fundamental Theorem is giving us the correct derivative.)
5.3 Exercises
[1, Exercise 54, p. 389] “Find the derivative of the function y =
5 x
cos x
cos(u2) du.”
Solution: Two observations are necessary:
• The Fundamental Theorem is concerned with an integral whose upper limit is vari-
able; if we wish to apply that theorem here, we shall need to transform the problem
to one where only the upper limit of the integral(s) is variable.
• The Fundamental Theorem is concerned with an integral whose upper limit is the
independent variable under consideration; should we wish to permit the upper limit
to vary in a more complicated way, we will need to apply the Chain Rule.
1. We shall transform the given integral into a sum of two where the lower limit of
each is constant. We do this by splitting the interval of integration, [cos x, 5 x] into
two parts at a “convenient” point. It is not even necessary that the point we choose
be inside the interval, since the property we are applying, (18) on page 3011 of
these notes, does not require that fact. I will choose the constant 0 to be the pointwhere the splitting occurs: 5 x
cos x
cos(u2) du =
0
cos x
cos(u2) du +
5 x
0
cos(u2) du
= − cos x
0
cos(u2) du +
5 x
0
cos(u2) du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 77/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3022
Hence
d dx
5 x
cos x
cos(u2) du = − d dx
cos x
0
cos(u2) du + d dx
5 x
0
cos(u2) du (29)
2. Each of these derivatives will be computed using the Chain Rule, with the interme-
diate variable being the function appearing as the variable upper limit. In the first
case, if we take the intermediate variable to be, say z = cos x, we have
d
dx
cos x
0
cos(u2) du = d
dz
z
0
cos(u2) du · dz
dx
= cos( z2) · dz
dx
= cos(cos2 x)·
(−
sin x)
For the second integral we take the intermediate variable to be w = 5 x. Here
d
dx
5 x
0
cos(u2) du = − d
dw
w
0
cos(u2) du · dw
dx
= cos(w2) · dw
dx
= cos(25 x2) · 5
Combining the two results gives
d
dx 5 x
cos x cos(u
2
) du =
− d
dx cos x
0 cos(u
2
) du+
d
dx 5 x
0 cos(u
2
) du
= − cos(cos2 x) · (− sin x) + cos(25 x2) · 5
= cos(cos2 x) · sin x + 5 cos(25 x2)
[1, Exercise 58, p. 389] “Find the interval on which the curve y =
x
0
1
1 + t + t 2 dt is concave
upward.”
Solution: By the Fundamental Theorem, y( x) = 1
1 + x + x2; hence y( x) =
−1 − 2 x
(1 + x + x2)2.
The denominator of the second derivative is a non-zero square, so it is always positive;
the function will be positive whenever −1 − 2 x > 0, i.e., whenever x < −1
2 : this is wherethe graph is concave upward.
(Eventually we will be able to evaluate the integral explicitly, showing that the curve is
y = 2√
3
arctan
2 x + 1√ 3
− π
6
.
Students may diff erentiate to check that I have found the correct second derivative.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 78/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3023
[1, Exercise 74, p. 390] Suppose that
b
0
e
x
dx = 3
a
0
e
x
dx . Express b in terms of a.
Solution: Substituting the values of the given integrals, from Part 2 of the Fundamental
Theorem, yields
e x]b0 = 3
e x]a
3
,
which implies that
eb − e0 = 3ea − e0
⇒ eb = 3ea − 2
⇒ b = ln (3ea
−2) .
Problems Plus
[1, Exercise 12, p. 413] Find
d 2
dx2
x
0
sin t
1
√ 1 + u4 du
dt .
Solution:
d 2
dx2 x
0 sin t
1
√ 1 + u4 du dt =
d
dx d
dx x
0 sin t
1
√ 1 + u4 du dt
= d
dx
sin x
1
√ 1 + u4 du
=
1 + sin4 x · cos x .
C.5.2 §5.4 Indefinite Integrals and the “Net Change” Theorem
Indefinite Integrals The traditional symbol for a “general” antiderivative F ( x) of a function
f ( x) (i.e., some function with the property that F ( x) = f ( x)) is
f ( x) dx, which is called the
indefinite integral of f ( x). Since two antiderivatives diff er by a constant (by a corollary to theMean Value Theorem), we usually write statements in the form
f ( x) dx = F ( x) + C
where F ( x) is one specific antiderivative, and C is a constant of integration, intended to range
over all real numbers. Once a particular antiderivative F has been chosen, the particular real
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 79/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3024
number C that applies in a particular situation has to be determined from additional information
that is usually available in the problem at hand. Much of this course will be concerned withmethods for finding indefinite integrals. While the finding of the indefinite integral may be a
difficult problem, the verification that a function F that is claimed to be an antiderivative of f
is not, since all that needs to be done is to di ff erentiate F and to check whether the derivative
is f . (In principle, if a function F has the property that F = f , then F is an antiderivative of
f : thus it is possible to find an antiderivative by guessing, or by simply copying the answer
from the back of the textbook or from your neighbour’s work. The intention in the course is
that you should normally be expected to be able to show a systematic way of determining an
antiderivative; there will be a very few special situations where you will be presented with an
antiderivative without a convincing way of finding it.)
Note the same symbol, a stylized letter S — called the integral sign — is used for
both the indefinite integral and the definite integral; while they are related by the Fundamental
Theorem, they are diff erent operations.
Even though the two operations are diff erent, they share some similar properties. For
example, parallel to property (17) of the definite integral on page 3011 of these notes, we can
also prove that (r f ( x) + sg( x)) dx = r
f ( x) dx + s
g( x) dx , (30)
where r , s are any constants. Equations like the preceding, in which an indefinite integral ap-
pears on both sides of the equal sign, are normally written without any constant of integration.
The “Net Change” Theorem This is simply the author’s name for the second part of the
Fundamental Theorem. It is not a term in standard usage, and I am not likely to use it. As
a beginning in the development of general techniques for determining indefinite integrals, we
can reformulate results that we developed for derivatives. For example, since we know that
d
dxsin x = cos x ,
we can reformulate this result as
cos x dx = sin x + C .
Some reformulations require minor changes, e.g., division by an appropriate constant. From
the result thatd
dx xn = n · xn−1 when n 0
we can conclude that xn−1 dx =
1
n xn + C when n 0
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 80/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3025
Function One antiderivative
f ( x) F ( x)g( x) G( x)
f ( x) + g( x) F ( x) + G( x)
xn (n −1) xn+1
n + 11
xln | x|
e x e x
cos x sin x
sin x − cos x
sec2 x tan x
sec x tan x sec xcsc x cot x − csc x
1
1 + x2 arctan x
1
1 + x2 −arccot x
1√ 1 − x2
arcsin x
1√ 1 − x2
− arccos x
Table 4: Some Antiderivatives
or, after the substitution of m + 1 for n, xm dx =
1
m + 1 xm+1 + C when m −1 .
Thus Table C.5.2 of antiderivatives on page 3025 of these notes, which I included last semester
in my notes in MATH 140 2009 09, can now be recast in the form of Table C.5.2 on page 3026
below.
Applications While we have been using the 2nd part of the Fundamental Theorem to express
the value of a definite integral in terms of the “net change” in the antiderivative, we can also
apply the result in the opposite way: that the net change can be found by evaluating the integral.
This is the spirit of the motivation that the author called “The Distance Problem” (see above,
page 3005, or the solution below, on page 3029 of [1, Exercise 44, p. 397]]). We will see
another example below in the solution of [1, Exercise 62, p. 398].
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 81/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3026
[r f ( x) + sg( x)] dx = r f ( x) dx + s g( x) dx k dx = kx + C xn dx =
xn+1
n + 1 + C (n −1)
1
xdx = ln | x| + C
e x dx = e x + C
a x dx =
a x
ln a+ C (a > 0)
sin x dx = − cos x + C
cos x dx = sin x + C
sec2 x dx = tan x + C
csc2 x dx = − cot x + C
sec x tan x dx = sec x + C csc x cot x =
−csc x + C
1
1 + x2 = arctan x + C
1
1 + x2 = −arccot x + C
1√ 1 − x2
= arcsin x + C
1√
1 − x2dx = − arccos x + C
Table 5: Very Short Table of Indefinite Integrals
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 82/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3027
Example C.10 ([7, Exercise 10, p. 411]) “Find the general indefinite integral of x2 + 1 +
1
x2 + 1
dx .”
Solution: Break the integrand into two parts: the summand at the end is recognizable as the
derivative of arctan x; the two terms at the beginning are multiples of powers of x, and we have
observed earlier how to integrate them. Thus x2 + 1 +
1
x2 + 1
dx =
x2 + 1
dx +
1
x2 + 1 d x
= 1
3
x3 + 1
1
x + arctan x + C
where the letter C represents the constant of integration. Even though there are two indefinite
integrals on the right side of the equation, only one constant is needed: if we were to include
two constants, as +C 1 + C 2, we would not gain any more freedom.
Example C.11 ([7, Exercise 11, p. 411]) Find the general indefinite integral of 2 − √
x2
dx .
Solution: One might be tempted, at first, to consider the possibility that the antiderivative of
the given 2nd power is a multiple of the 3rd power of 2 − √ x; unfortunately that temptationwill have to be resisted, as the resulting functions will not have the correct derivative. The
simplest approach is to expand the square: since (2 − √ x)2 = 4 − 4 x
12 + x,
2 − √ x2
dx =
4 − 4
√ x + x
dx
= 4 x − 4 · 2
3 x
32 +
1
2 x2 + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 83/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3028
C.6 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 13th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, January 13th, 2010, subject to correction
C.6.1 §5.4 Indefinite Integrals and the “Net Change” Theorem (conclusion)
5.4 Exercises
[1, Exercise 34, p. 397] “Evaluate the integral 9
1
3 x − 2√ x
dx.”
Solution: Simplify the integrand by dividing the denominator into the two summands of
the numerator: 9
1
3 x − 2√ x
dx =
9
1
3
√ x − 2√
x
dx
=
3 · 2
3 · x 3
2 − 2 · 2 · x 12
9
1
=2 x
32 − 4
√ x9
1
= (2 · 27 − 4 · 3) − (2 · 1 − 4 · 1) = (54 − 12) − (2 − 4) = 44 .
[1, Exercise 38, p. 397] “Evaluate the integral π3
0
sin θ + sin θ · tan2 θ
sec2 θ d θ .”
Solution: When the integrand involves trigonometric functions, one may have to apply a
familiar identity to simplify the integration. There is often more than one way to do this.
In the present example
sin θ + sin θ · tan2 θ
sec2 θ = sin θ · cos2 θ + sin3 θ
= sin θ · (cos2 θ + sin2 θ ) = sin θ
so π3
0
sin θ + sin θ · tan2 θ
sec2 θ d θ =
π3
0
sin θ d θ
= [− cos θ ]π3
0 = −cos
π
3 + cos0 = −1
2 + 1 =
1
2.
Eventually you will know how to evaluate the parts of this integral separately, but the
present solution is faster than evaluating and adding the parts.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 84/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3029
[1, Exercise 44, p. 397] Evaluate the integral
3π2
0
| sin x| dx.
Solution: The integrand is continuous, so we know the integral exists. However, it is
not convenient to work with an antiderivative of | sin x |. So we split the interval of
integration into the parts [0, π] andπ, 3π
2
where the integrand is respectively positive
and negative, and thereby avoid working with the absolute value. For the integrands,
respectively sin x and − sin x, we know antiderivatives − cos x and + cos x, so we may
apply the Fundamental Theorem to each part separately:
3π
2
0 |sin x
|dx =
π
0
sin x dx + 3π
2
π
(
−sin x) dx
= [− cos x]π0 + [cos x]
3π2
π
= (−(−1) + 1) + (0 − (−1)) = 3.
[1, Exercise 58, p. 398] The velocity function is v(t ) = t 2 − 2t − 8 for a particle moving along
a line. Find
(a) the displacement; and
(b) the distance travelled by the particle
during the time interval 1 ≤
t ≤
6.
Solution: Denote the position of the particle at time t by x(t ); then v(t ) = d dt
x(t ), so x is
an antiderivative of v.
(a) The displacement is simply the diff erence between initial and final positions of the
moving particle; it is equal to the area under the graph of the velocity function
between the appropriate times.
displacement = x(6) − x(1) = [ x(t )]61 =
6
1
v(t ) dt
= 6
1 (t
2
− 2t − 8) dt
=
1
3t 3 − t 2 − 8t
6
1
= (72 − 36 − 48) −
1
3 − 1 − 8
= −10
3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 85/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3030
(b) The distance travelled is equal to the area under the graph of the speed function
between the appropriate times; the speed is the magnitude of the velocity.
distance travelled =
6
1
t 2 − 2t − 8 dt =
6
1
|(t + 2)(t − 4)| dt .
The function (t + 2)(t − 4) changes sign at t = −2, which is outside the interval of
integration, and again at t = 4, which is inside the interval of integration. We can
break the integral up into two parts at x = 4, and then we can express each of the
parts without using absolute value symbols: 6
1
|(t + 2)(t − 4)| dt =
4
1
|(t + 2)(t − 4)| dt +
6
4
|(t + 2)(t − 4)| dt
= − 4
1
(t + 2)(t − 4) dt + 6
4
(t + 2)(t − 4) dt
= − 4
1
(t 2 − 2t − 8) dt +
6
4
(t 2 − 2t − 8) dt
= −
1
3t 3 − t 2 − 8t
4
1
+
1
3t 3 − t 2 − 8t
6
4
= −[−18] +
44
3
=
98
3
Note that the factorization of the quadratic was needed in order to determine where the
split the interval of integration, but it did not help in the actually integration operation,and had to be reversed at that stage.
[1, Exercise 62, p. 398] “Water flows from the bottom of a storage tank at a rate of r (t ) =
200 − 4t litres / min, where 0 ≤ t ≤ 50. Find the amount of water that flows from the tank
during the first 10 minutes.”
Solution: Let’s denote by W (t ) the amount of water (measured in litres) that has left the
tank by time t . We are told that
d
dt W (t ) = r (t ) = 200 − 4t (0 ≤ t ≤ 50).
Then
W (10) − W (0) =
10
0
dW
dt dt
=
10
0
(200 − 4t ) dt =200t − 2t 2
10
0
= (200 · 10 − 2 · 102) − 0 = 1800 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 86/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3031
so the total amount of water leaving the tank in the first 10 minutes is 1800 litres.
Example C.12 ([7, Exercise 26, p. 402]) “Use Part 2 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus
to evaluate the integral, or explain why it does not exist:
3 −2
x−5dx.”
Solution: The integrand is not defined at the point 0 in the interval [−2, 3]. This means that
we cannot even speak of the integral at this time. (Later we will generalize our definition of
integral to permit us to consider certain “improper” integrals where there is an infinite discon-
tinuity. But even that generalization will not apply to this problem, although it is premature
to consider it here. Look at this problem again when we study [1, §7.8].) The theorem is not
applicable because the integrand is not defined at one point in the domain, and the disconti-
nuity is neither removable nor a jump discontinuity: a removable discontinuity would have noeff ect at all, and a jump discontinuity could be accommodated by the method of Example C.14
above, i.e., by splitting the integral into two parts at the jump discontinuity.
Example C.13 ([7, Exercise 42, p. 403]) Let f ( x) =
x if −π ≤ x ≤ 0
sin x if 0 < x ≤ π . Use Part 2 of
the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to evaluate the integral
π −π
f ( x) dx, or explain why it
does not exist.
Solution: The function f is defined piecewise, by gluing together one function defined on
[−π, 0] and another defined on (0, +π]; however, it is continuous, as lim x→0− x = 0 = lim x→0+ sin x,and f is defined at x = 0 and equal to the common value of the two one-sided limits. We know
that one antiderivative of x is 1
2 x2; and that one antiderivative of sin x is − cos x. Consider the
function F ( x) =
x2
2 if −π ≤ x ≤ 0
1 − cos x if 0 < x ≤ π . This function is evidently diff erentiable at all
points except possibly 0; and F is an antiderivative of f on the interval −π < x < +π, with the
possible exception of the point x = 0. At x = 0 the two one-sided limits of diff erence quotients
are
lim x→0−
F ( x)
−F (0)
x=
lim x→0−
x2
3 − 0
x
= lim x→0+
x
3 =
1
3 · 0 = 0
lim x→0+
F ( x) − F (0)
x = lim
x→0+
(1 − cos x) − 0
x
= lim x→0+
1 − (1 − 2 sin2 x2
) − 0
x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 87/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3032
= lim x→
0+ sin x
2 x
2 ·sin
x
2
= lim x→0+
sin x2
x2
· lim x→0+
sin x
2 = 1 · 0 = 0 ,
so the function is also diff erentiable at x = 0, where the derivative is equal to 0, i.e., to f (0);
thus F is an antiderivative of f on the interval (−π, +π). Thus we can apply the Fundamental
Theorem:π
−π
f ( x) dx = F (π) − F (−π) = (1 − cos π) −
(−π)2
2
= 2 − π2
2 .
But finding the antiderivative was a complicated computation, and rendered the problem more
difficult than necessary. Instead, one should proceed as follows, applying (23) in these notes,page 3011:
π −π
f ( x) dx =
0 −π
f ( x) dx +
π 0
f ( x) dx
=
0 −π
x dx +
π 0
sin x dx
= x2
20
−π+ [− cos x]
π
0
=
0 − (−π)2
2
+ (− cos π + cos 0)
= −π2
2 + (−(−1) + 1) = 2 − π2
2 .
The lesson to be learned from this example is that there are often advantages to splitting up an
integral, even if it is theoretically possible to evaluate it without doing so.
Integration of “piecewise continuous” functions. The definition [1, Definition 2, p. 366]
of a definite integral given by the textbook, is more restrictive than necessary. This definitionrequires that the integrand be continuous throughout the interval of integration. In fact, the
definition can be weakened to apply to a broader class of functions. While we don’t require
full generality in this course, we do wish to be able to apply the theory to functions that have
isolated “jump” discontinuities; (we can handle removable discontinuities just be “removing”
them, i.e., by extending the function to the appropriate value at the points missing in the origi-
nal definition). If a function f is continuous on an interval [a, c], except for a point b in (a, c)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 88/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3033
where lim x→b−
f ( x) and lim x→b+
f ( x) both exist, but are not equal, we will define
c
a
f ( x) dx =
b
a
f ( x) dx +
c
b
f ( x) dx (31)
that is, we will define the integral to be such as to satisfy the additivity property (23) we saw
earlier in these notes, on page 3011. Note, however, that we cannot apply to the whole interval
the Fundamental Theorem to evaluate integralb
a
f ( x) dx if f has a discontinuity at a point c
such that a < c < b.
Example C.14 Suppose that
f ( x) = −1 if x ≤ 0
1 if x > 0
Evaluate
2
−1
f ( x) dx.
Solution: We cannot apply the Fundamental Theorem to the entire interval [−1, 2], as the
integrand is discontinuous at point 0. So we split the integral at the point x = 0, which
is the point of discontinuity. The two integrals we obtain now satisfy the conditions of the
Fundamental Theorem:
2
−1
f ( x) dx = 0
−1
f ( x) dx + 2
0
f ( x) dx
=
0
−1
(−1) dx +
2
0
1 dx
= [− x]0−1 + [ x]2
0 = (−0 + (−1)) + (2 − 0) = 1.
C.6.2 §5.5 The Substitution Rule
The “Substitution Rule” is a reformulation, in terms of the integral, of the Chain Rule.
Theorem C.15 Let u = g( x) and f ( x) be respectively di ff erentiable and continuous on a given
interval; then ( f g)( x) · g( x) dx =
f (g( x)) · g( x) dx =
f (u) du .
In applying this theorem we usually begin with a “complicated” integral, whose form we try
to interpret like the left side of the above equation, and try to find an appropriate “substitution”
of the form u = g( x) which will transform the integral into one whose integrand is one that we
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 89/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3034
are able to integrate. In practice one works with the diff erentials d x and du in a “mechanical”
way that can be justified by the theorem.Proof: Let F and g be diff erentiable. Then
F (g( x)) · g( x) = d
dxF (g( x)) .
Integrating with respect to x, we have F (g( x)) · g( x) dx =
d
dxF (g( x)) dx = F (g( x)) + C .
If we define u = g( x), f = F , then
f (g( x)) · g( x) dx =
d
dx F (g( x)) dx = F (u) + C =
f (u) du .
In practice this “substitution” is often applied by “mechanically”, substituting functions
and diff erentials, and such operations can be shown to be fully justifiable. The general idea in
looking for substitutions is to try to reduce the complication of the original indefinite integral.
This is a subjective term, and diff erent users may find a variety of distinct substitutions which
they will find helpful in evaluating an indefinite integral.
Finding the appropriate substitution is one step in solving a problem. In the first prob-
lems in the list of exercises the author suggests a substitution which will be helpful; eventually
students are expected to find an appropriate substitution on their own — often there are severalpossible choices. You should be experimenting with diff erent substitutions and getting to know
the types of problems each of them is useful in solving.
Example C.16 Earlier, in Example C.11 on page 3027 of these notes, I considered [7, Exercise
11, p. 411], which was concerned with the indefinite integral of
2 − √
x2
dx. We evaluated
this integral by expanding the square and then integrating the powers of x separately. Could
we use the same methods for the indefinite integral
2 − √
x10000
dx?
Solution: While we could expand the integrand in this case too, the result would have 10,001
terms, each of which would have to be integrated. The result we would obtain would not
be very useful. Consider the following alternative approach, that could also have been used
when the exponent was 2. We have here an integral of the form
( f g)( x) · g( x) dx, where
f ( x) = x10000, and g( x) = 2 − √ x. Define u = g( x) = 2 − √
x, so that du = − 1
2√
xdx, so
dx = −2√
x du = 2(u − 2)du .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 90/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3035
2 −
√ x
10000dx = 2 u10000(u
−2) du
= 2
u10001 − 2u10000
du
= 2
10002u10002 − 4
10001u10001 + C
= 2
10002(2 − √
x)10002 − 4
10001(2 − √
x)10001 + C
= (2 − √ x)10001
− 2
√ x
10002 − 4
(10001)(10002)
+ C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 91/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3036
C.7 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 15th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, January 15th, 2010 (subject to revision)
C.7.1 §5.5 The Substitution Rule (conclusion)
Review The Substitution Rule (cf., p. 3033) states that
Let u = g( x) and f ( x) be respectively diff erentiable and continuous on a given
interval; then ( f g)( x) · g( x) dx =
f (g( x)) · g( x) dx =
f (u) du
In Example C.16, discussed at the end of the last lecture, I showed how we could evaluate 2 − √
x10000
dx using the substitution u = g( x) = 2 − √ x, obtaining
dx = −2√
x du = 2(u − 2)du
⇒
2 − √ x10000
dx = 2
u10000(u − 2) du
= 2
u10001 − 2u10000
du
=
2
10002 u
10002
− 4
10001 u
10001
+ C
= 2
10002(2 − √
x)10002 − 4
10001(2 − √
x)10001 + C
= (2 − √ x)10001
− 2
√ x
10002 − 4
(10001)(10002)
+ C
Example C.17 [1, Example 6, p. 403] “Calculate
tan x dx.”
Solution: This problem does not, at first, appear to be a candidate for a substitution; but, by
expressing the tangent as sin x
cos x, the textbook shows that it can be simplified by treating cos x
as the new variable. That is, by defining u = cos x, which implies that du =
−sin x dx, we can
evaluate the integral as follows: tan x dx =
sin x dx
cos x
= −
d (cos x)
cos x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 92/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3037
which has the form
− du
u, which we should recognize as
− d (ln
|u
|). Thus one sub-
stitution that is indicated is u = cos x: the integral becomes −
d (ln |u|) = − ln |u| + C =
− ln | cos x| + C . The integral could also be expressed as ln | sec x| + C or as ln |k sec x|, where
C or k are constants of integration. Three other indefinite integrals can be evaluated in similar
ways; perhaps you should remember36 them together:37 tan x dx = ln | sec x | + C = − ln | cos x | + C (32) cot x dx = − ln | csc x | + C = ln | sin x | + C (33)
tanh x dx = ln cosh x + C (34) coth x dx = ln | sinh x | + C (35)
Example C.18 ([7, Exercise 2, p. 420]) “Evaluate the integral
x(4 + x2)10 dx by making the
substitution u = 4 + x2.”
Solution: First we should observe that we could solve this problem without any substitution
at all. We could expand the 10th power of the binomial into a polynomial of degree 20,
multiply each of the terms by an additional x, and then integrate the resulting sum of 11 terms
one by one. The resulting polynomial would be the correct solution. But what would you
do it the exponent were not 10, but 10000? Applying the method of substitution, we set
u = g( x) = 4 + x2, f (u) = u10, so du
dx= g( x) = 2 x. Then
x4 + x2
10dx =
4 + x2
10 · 1
2
d
dx
4 + x2
dx
= 1
2
d
dx
4 + x2
11
dx
= 1
22
4 + x2
11+ C .
In practice we often operate mechanically with diff erentials; from u = 4 + x2 we have du =
2 x dx, so x
4 + x2
10dx =
xu10dx =
u10 · x dx
=
u10 · 1
2 du =
1
22u11 + C .
36This doesn’t mean to memorize them — just to remember the “trick” needed to evaluate them.37Why are absolute signs missing in one of these cases?
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 93/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3038
But it would be bad form to stop here, since our answer has been expressed in terms of u, not
the original variable x; so we continue
= 1
22
4 + x2
11+ C .
Example C.19 ([7, Exercise 30, p. 421]) Evaluate the indefinite integral ax + b√
ax2 + 2bx + cdx .
Solution: Later in the term we will consider the integration of any function of the form
kx +
√ ax2 + 2bx + c ,
but the present problem concerns a special case which is easy to handle. (Note that the textbook
should have insisted that not all of a, b, c can be 0, as then the ratio is not defined.)
Again, we begin by attempting to simplify the integrand. It would appear that the quadratic
function whose square root appears in the denominator is the feature we should attempt to
simplify. One way to do this is to define u = ax2 + 2bx + c. This implies that
du = 2(ax + b) dx,
so we obtain ax + b√
ax2 + 2bx + cdx =
1
2
du√
u
= u12 + C
= (ax2 + 2bx + c)12 + C .
The problem could also be solved by the substitution v = (ax2 + 2bx + c)12 .
Example C.20 ([7, Exercise 38, p. 421], slightly changed) Evaluate the indefinite integral
7√
x3 + 1
· x5 dx .
Solution: The method I propose to use here is based on the fact that
d ( xn) = n xn−1dx
for any integer n. When an integrand is expressible in terms of a power of the variable, short by
just 1, then this type of substitution is often a good way to begin simplifying it, although further
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 94/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3039
steps might be needed. So, in this case, I begin with u = x3, which implies that du = 3 x2 dx,
i.e., that x2
dx =
1
3 du. I then obtain 7√
x3 + 1 · x5 dx = 1
3
7√
u + 1 · u du
after which I consider further simplification. At this point I would like to simplify the 7th root.
I can do this by either setting v = u + 1, or w = 7√
u + 1. In the first case I would obtain dv = du,
while, in the second, u + 1 = w7, so du = 7w6 dw.
1
3
7√
u + 1 · u du = 1
3
7√
v · (v − 1) dv
= 1
3 v87 − v
17 dv
= 1
3
7
15v
157 − 7
8v
87
+ C
= 1
3
7
15(u + 1)
157 − 7
8(u + 1)
87
+ C
= 1
3
7
15( x3 + 1)
157 − 7
8( x3 + 1)
87
+ C
or 1
3
7
(u + 1) · u du = 1
3
w ·
w7 − 1
· 7w6 dw
= 7
3 w14
−w7 dw
= 7
3
1
15w15 − 1
8w8
+ C
= 7
45(u + 1)
157 − 7
24(u + 1)
87 (u + 1)
87 + C
= 7
45( x3 + 1)
157 − 7
24( x3 + 1)
87 ( x3 + 1)
87 + C .
Definite Integrals Thus far I have been applying the Substitution Rule to indefinite integrals.
Substitution may be applied to a definite integral
b
a
f (g( x)) g( x) dx
in two ways:
• Apply the Substitution Rule to the corresponding indefinite integral, f (g( x))g( x) dx ;
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 95/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3040
then apply the second part of the Fundamental Theorem to the resulting antiderivative;
or
• A variant of the Substitution Rule can be formulated specifically for definite integrals.
Using the same functions as described earlier, it is b
a
f (g( x))g( x) dx =
g(b)
g(a)
f (u) du .
That is, change the limits of the new integral to the values that u has when x = a and
x = b.
These two methods are equivalent — use whichever you prefer.
Symmetry The textbook reviews the definitions of even and odd functions, and considers
their definite integrals over a finite interval centred at the origin. The author shows that the
definite integral of an even function f over the interval −a ≤ x ≤ +a will be twice the integral
over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ a; and the integral of an odd function over the same interval will be
0, because the integral to the left of 0 will cancel the integral to the right of 0. The proofs are
simple applications of the Substitution Rule.
Example C.21 Evaluate the definite integral
π6
− π6
tan2 θ d θ .
Solution: Normally we will evaluate an integral of this type by replacing the integrand, tan2
θ ,by sec2 θ − 1. In this case we can also use the symmetry of the integrand and the interval of
integration to further simplify the calculations:
π6
− π6
tan2 θ d θ =
π6
− π6
sec2 θ − 1
d θ
= 2
π6
0
sec2 θ − 1
d θ
since the integrand is an even function (Prove this!)
= 2 [tan θ
−θ ]
π6
0
= 2
1√ 3
− π
6
.
5.5 Exercises
[1, Exercise 28, p. 407] “Evaluate the indefinite integral
tan−1 x
1 + x2 dx.”
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 96/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3041
Solution: In looking for a substitution, our general intention is to try to simplify the
integrand. In the present integrand, we might be expected to consider the arctangentfactor the most complicated, so I will try to simplify by the substitution u = tan−1 x.
This implies that du = 1
1 + x2dx, which is also present in the integral. The integral
becomes tan−1 x
1 + x2 dx =
u du =
1
2u2 + C =
(tan−1 x)2
2 + C .
We can verify our work by diff erentiating the function we claim to be an antiderivative:
d
dx
1
2 tan−1 x
2
= 1
2 · 2 tan−1 x · 1
1 + x2 =
tan−1 x
1 + x2 .
[1, Exercise 24, p. 407] Evaluate the indefinite integral
(1 + tan θ )5 sec2 θ d θ .
Solution: In this case one should observe that there is a factor sec 2 θ , which we recognize
as the derivative of tan θ . A first simplification would be obtained by the substitution
u = tan θ
since then du = sec2 θ d θ , or d θ = cos2 θ du. The integral transforms to
(1 + tan θ )5 sec2 θ d θ = (1 + u)5 sec2 θ cos2 θ du
=
(1 + u)5 du .
One can observe that the integral here will be a constant multiple of (1 + u)6, and then
replace u by tan θ . If you don’t make the observation, a second substitution would be in
order. I would observe that, in the last mentioned integral, the “most complicated” factor
is 1 + u; so a substitution v = 1 + u could be attempted. This yields
dv = 0 + du
⇒ (1 + u)5 du = v5 dv
= 1
6 · v6 + C
= 1
6 · (1 + u)6 + C
= 1
6 · (1 + tan θ )6 + C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 97/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3042
[1, Exercise 36, p. 407] “Evaluate the indefinite integral sin x
1 + cos2 xdx.”
Solution: First we see the cosine in the denominator; then we see in the numerator
sin x dx, which is −d (cos x). This suggests a substitution u = cos x. The integral be-
comes
−du
1 + u2 du = −arctan u + C = −arctan(cos x) + C .
[1, Exercise 42, p. 407] “Evaluate the indefinite integral
x
1 + x4 d x.”
Solution: (I am going to begin the solution by making a poor choice for a substitution,
a choice that I will then “fix” by following it with a second substitution. Then I will
observe what would have been a better first choice.) Examining the integral we see that
the powers of x present are x
1
in the numerator, and x
4
in the denominator. A first ideamight be to try u = x4. That would yield x
1 + x4 dx =
1
4
1√
u(1 + u)du
which looks more complicated than before. However, we could then undertake a second
substitution, v =√
u, which would correspond to an original substitution of v = x2; this
would produce x
1 + x4 dx =
1
2
1
1 + v2 dv
= 12
arctan v + C = 12
arctan x2
+ C
An experienced student would have been able to see the substitution v = x2 imme-
diately: a substitution u = x2 is indicated when the entire integrand can be expressed in
simple terms of x2, with the exception of one extra single power of x that is “left over”.
[1, Exercise 57, p. 407] Evaluate the definite integral
π6
− π6
tan3 θ d θ .
Solution: Eventually you will be able to integrate the cube of the tangent; but, at this
point, you may not be able to do that. However, you can observe that the integrand is an
odd function of θ . (Why?) Hence the integral from −π
6 to 0 will be equal in magnitudebut opposite in sign to the integral from 0 to π
6; so the given integral is 0.
[1, Exercise 57, p. 407] “Evaluate the definite integral
π6
− π6
tan3 θ d θ .”
Solution: Eventually you will be able to integrate the cube of the tangent; but, at this
point, you may not be able to do that. However, you can observe that the integrand is an
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 98/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3043
odd function of θ . (Why?) Hence the integral from −π6
to 0 will be equal in magnitude
but opposite in sign to the integral from 0 to π
6 ; so the given integral is 0.
[1, Exercise 65, p. 407] “Evaluate the definite integral
2
1
x√
x − 1 dx.”
Solution: This integral can be simplified by defining u = x − 1, so du = d x.38 Then x
√ x − 1 dx =
(u + 1)
√ u du
=
u
32 + u
12
dx
=
2
5 u
52
+
2
3u
32
+ C
= 2
5( x − 1)
52 +
2
3( x − 1)
32 + C
Taking the diff erences of the values of this antiderivative (i.e., with any specific value
for C , e.g., with C = 0) at the limits yields2
5( x − 1)
52 +
2
3( x − 1)
32
2
1
= 2
5(2 − 1)
52 +
2
3(2 − 1)
32 −
2
5(1 − 1)
52 +
2
3(1 − 1)
32
=
2
5 +
2
3
− (0 + 0) =
16
15
Alternatively, the Definite Integral version of the Substitution Rule could have been used,
to obtain 2
5u
52 +
2
3u
32
2−1
1−1
=
2
51
52 +
2
31
32
−
2
50
52 +
2
30
32
etc.
The Logarithm Defined as an Integral (material in §5.6 of the 5th Edition) 39While it is
theoretical, the discussion below is an essential part of the course; its purpose is to substantiatesome of the discussions in [1, §§1.5, 1.6] by replacing the weakest parts of the definitions given
at that point in the textbook. This is one of several possible ways of treating exponentials and
38An even better substitution would be v =√
x − 1, which would imply that v2 = x − 1, so d x = 2v dv, and the
integral would be equal to1
0
(v2 + 1)v · 2v dv etc.
39The textbook material has been moved in the 6th edition to [1, Appendix G, pp. A48-A55]
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 99/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3044
logarithms “properly”; the treatment in [1, §§1.5, 1.6] was necessarily inadequate, as there
was a perceived urgency to make logarithms and exponentials available to students who didn’thave the background for a more substantial treatment.
The Natural Logarithm Previously we had “defined” the logarithm to be the inverse of
the exponential function, whose definition was, at best, intuitive. Now we sketch very briefly a
more rigorous definition of both functions, beginning with the logarithm. This theory has been
delayed until now because parts of the proofs require the concept of substitution in a definite
integral.
Henceforth we take the following as our primary definition:
Definition C.3 Let x be any positive real number. Define
ln x =
x
1
1
t dt
i.e., it is the area under the right branch of the hyperbola y = 1
t , between t = 1 and t = x.
Which Definition is “Correct”? The definitions in [1, §§1.5, 1.6] were all we had avail-
able at that time to follow the objective of the textbook to introduce the exponential and log-
arithm functions “early”. We had to rely largely on intuition in deriving properties of these
functions. Now that we have the integral available, we can return and replace those inadequate
definitions by some that are more rigorous. Even the present definitions have some issues,since we haven’t rigorously proved all the properties that we are using for the definite integral.
While most mathematicians today would probably follow the present development — of intro-
ducing the logarithm first, as a definite integral, and the exponential as its inverse — there are
other possible ways of defining the functions. Yet another way will be available to you if you
follow the theory of infinite series beyond what we will be doing in [1, Chapter 11].
Properties of the Logarithm From the first part of the Fundamental Theorem we imme-
diately obtain the fact that
Theorem C.22
d dx
ln x = 1 x
. (36)
We can also prove the following, using basic properties of the integral:
Theorem C.23 Let x, y be positive real variables. Then
1. ln( xy) = ln x + ln y
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 100/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3045
2. ln 1 = 0
3. ln 1 x
= − ln x
4. d
dxln | x| = 1
x
5. lim x→∞
ln x = ∞
6. lim x→0+
ln x = −∞
While I do not suggest you memorize the proofs, except possibly that of the first part below,
they provide simple exercises on various aspects of the integral.
Proof:
1. This is a simple application of properties of the definite integral, and in the Substitution
Rule.
ln xy =
xy
1
1
t dt
=
x
1
1
t dt +
xy
x
1
t dt
by decomposing the interval [1, xy] into [1, x] and [ x, xy]
= x
1
1
t dt +
y
1
1
xu x du
using the substitution t = xu
=
x
1
1
t dt +
y
1
1
udu = ln x + ln y
2. ln 1 =
1 1
1
t dt = 0 since the integration is over an interval of length 0.
3. Using a substitution u = 1
t , where dt = − 1
u2du, we obtain
ln 1
x=
1 x
1
1
t dt
=
x
1
u
− 1
u2
du
= − x
1
1
udu = − ln x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 101/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3046
4. Recall thatd
dx | x| = +1 if x > 0
−1 if x < 0 .
It is convenient to write these values in the form
d
dx| x| =
| x| x
if x 0
undefined if x = 0.
Hence, by the Chain Rule and the Fundamental Theorem,
d
dx(ln | x|) =
1
| x| · | x|
x=
1
x
when x 0.
5. We will reconsider this proof when we study “harmonic series” in [1, §11.2, Example 7,
pp. 691-692]. Consider the Riemann sum obtained for the definite integral
2n 1
1
t dt . We
will hang the rectangles by their upper right-hand corners, so that the Riemann sum is
clearly less than the integral. Then the area under the curve is greater than the sum
1
2 +
1
3 +
1
4 + . . . +
1
2n .
Let’s collect these terms into groups ending with the reciprocal of each power of 2. We
obtain
1
2 =
1
21
3 +
1
4 >
1
4 +
1
4 =
1
21
5 +
1
6 +
1
7 +
1
8 >
1
8 +
1
8 +
1
8 +
1
8 =
1
2. . . . . .
1
2n−1 +
1
2n−1 + 1 + . . . +
1
2n > 2n−1 · 1
2n =
1
2
We see that the area of the rectangles under the curve is n2 . As we allow n → ∞ thislower bound for the area approaches ∞, implying that the full area surely → ∞.
6. Let’s make the substitution y = 1
x, so that, as x → 0+, y → +∞. Then
lim x→0+
ln x = lim y→+∞
ln 1
y= − lim
y→+∞ln y = −∞ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 102/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3047
7. I presented the preceding proof because it is classical. The definition of the logarithm
as a definition integral permits a much simpler proof of the same result. Since
1
t ≤ 1 for
t ≥ 1,
x 1
1
t dt ≥
x 1
1 dt = x − 1 → ∞ as x → ∞.
The construction began with a formal definition for the (natural) logarithm. At this point we
can define the (natural) exponential function as the inverse of the logarithm. We begin by
calling the function exp( x); only after we prove that it behaves the way we expect a power to
behave, do we revert to the familiar notation.
The Natural Exponential Function We could now justify the various equations that we
used intuitively in the “early transcendentals” treatment in [1, §§
1.5, 1.6]. As mentioned, we
begin by showing that ln, as defined above, is invertible. Then we temporarily call the inverse
function, i.e., ln−1 x, exp( x). Thus we have,
Theorem C.24
exp x = y ⇔ ln y = x (37)
exp(ln x) = x (38)
ln(exp x) = x (39)
exp( x + y) = (exp x) · (exp y) (40)
exp( x − y) = exp x
exp y(41)
(exp x) y = exp( xy) (42)
following which, knowing that the exponent rules are satisfied, we define
Definition C.4
e = exp1 (43)
and change our notation by recognizing that
exp x = e x . (44)
We also show that
Theorem C.25d
dx (exp x) = exp x . (45)
Using standard properties of the definite integral we can also show that
Theorem C.26
lim x→−∞
exp x = 0 (46)
lim x→∞
exp x = ∞ (47)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 103/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3048
General Exponential Functions The preceding constructions have been for the natural
logarithm and the natural exponential. We may now extend these definitions to exponentialsto any positive base a 1.
Definition C.5 For any positive real number a and any real number x we define
a x = e x ln a . (48)
This leads to the exponent rules for general (positive) bases:
a x+ y = a x · a y (49)
a x− y = a x
a y (50)
(a x) y = a xy (51)
(ab) x = a x · b x (52)
and to the derivative propertyd
dx(a x) = a x · (ln a) (53)
General Logarithmic Functions Finally the inverse function of a x is named loga, and
its familiar properties are developed, e.g.,
Theorem C.27
loga x = y ⇔ a y = x (54)
d
dx
loga x
=
1
x ln a(55)
The Number e Expressed as a Limit
Theorem C.28 Let a > 0. Then lim x→0
(1 + ax)
1 x
= ea
Proof:
lim x→0
(1 + ax)
1 x
= lim x→0
eln(1+ax)
1
x
since exponential and logarithm are inverses
= lim x→0
e
1 x·ln(1+ax)
by the exponent rules
= lim x→0
e
ln(1+ax) x
= lim
x→0
e
ln(1+ax)−ln(1+0· x) x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 104/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3049
= e
lim x→
0
ln(1 + ax) − ln(1 + 0 · x)
x
by the continuity of the exponential function
= e
d
dxln(1 + ax)
x=0
by definition of the derivative at x = 0
= e
a
1 + ax
x=0 by the Chain Rule
= ea
C.7.2 5 ReviewTrue-False Quiz Students tend to avoid the True-False questions because these are unlikely
to appear on quizzes or examinations. It’s true that I would not wish to have a simple True-
False question in any test, since there would be a 50% chance of a correct guess. However,
the True-False questions in your textbook are much more difficult than that, as they ask “De-
termine whether the statement is true of false. If it is true, explain why. If it is false, explain
why or give an example that disproves the statement.” This requirement of a proof or a coun-
terexample makes these problems very challenging. The odd-numbered problems are solved
in your Student Solutions Manual [3]. I consider some of the even-numbered problems below.
[1, True-False Exercise 2, p. 409] If f and g are continuous on [a, b], then b
a
[ f ( x) · g( x)] dx =
b
a
f ( x) dx · b
a
g( x) dx
Solution: This statement is FALSE. That is, it is not true for all constants a, b and for all
functions f , g continuous on [a, b]. There will, of course, be functions and intervals for
which the statement is true, but the generalized statement, quantified for all functions
and intervals is not true. While you would have know to suspect this after we study
[1, §7.1], but you should be suspecting it already, and be able to construct a simple
counterexample. Here is one:
Define f ( x) = g( x) = x. Then b
a
f ( x) dx =
b
a
g( x) dx = x2
2
b
a
= b2 − a2
2 .
b
a
[ f ( x) · g( x)] dx =
b
a
x2 dx = x3
3
b
a
= b3 − a3
3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 105/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3050
While the polynomials b2 − a2
2 ·
b2 − a2
2
and b3 − a3
3
look diff erent, that does not consti-
tute a counterexample, as it could happen that we have two algebraic functions that are
equal by virtue of some identity that we don’t happen to recognize at the moment. So,
in order to complete the counterexample, we need to find specific values of a and b that
will entail that b
a
f ( x) dx · b
a
g( x) dx
b
a
[ f ( x) · g( x)] dx ,
i.e., thatb2 − a2
2 · b2 − a2
2
b3 − a3
3 .
One such example is a = 0, and b having any value except 0, 4
3:
b2
2 · b2
2 =
b4
4
b3
3 ;
for example, take b = 1.
But the counterexample given is far from the simplest! For example, take f ( x) = g( x) =
1 for all x. Then the left side of the claimed equation is equal to b − a, while the right
side is (b − a)2, which will be diff erent from b − a except where b − a = 1 or b = a.
[1, True-False Exercise 4, p. 409] This is very similar to [1, True-False Exercise 2, p. 409];
you should have no trouble constructing a counterexample.
[1, True-False Exercise 8, p. 409] If f and g are diff erentiable, and f ( x) ≥ g( x) for a < x < b,
then f ( x) ≥ g( x) for a < x < b.
Solution: This statement is false. Think geometrically. The condition that f ( x) ≥ g( x)
tells us that the graph of f is above the graph of g; the condition that f ( x) ≥ g( x) tells us
that the graph of f is steeper than the graph of g. So we can construct a counterexample
by finding, for a convenient function g, a function that is larger, but whose graph is not
so steep. For example, take g( x) = 0 for all x; now all we need is a positive function f
whose graph is sloping downward; for example, f ( x) = e− x will work, with any interval
a
≤ x
≤ b. A simpler counterexample is f ( x) = a + b
− x, g( x) = 0.
[1, True-False Exercise 14, p. 409] All continuous functions have antiderivatives.
Solution: This problem is interesting, as it follows [1, True-False Exercise 13, p. 409],
which states that “All continuous functions have derivatives.” That preceding statement
is false, and you should be able to give counterexamples (e.g., | x| is continuous, but lacks
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 106/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 107/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3052
C.8 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 18th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, January 18th, 2010 (subject to revision)
Textbook Chapter 6. APPLICATIONS OF INTEGRATION.
C.8.1 §6.1 Areas between Curves
If, for a ≤ x ≤ b, continuous functions f and g have the property that f ( x) ≥ g( x) — i.e., if
the graph of f is not lower than the graph of g for that interval, then the area bounded by the
graphs and the vertical lines x = a and x = b is given by the integral
b
a
( f ( x) − g( x)) dx .
Before working some examples, I make several observations:
• When g is the 0 function — i.e., when the lower boundary of the region is the x-axis —
this formula reduces to the definite integral b
a f ( x) dx.
• We can find the areas of certain regions by decomposing them into parts that can be
described as above. Sometimes there is more than one “natural” way to decompose the
region, but all decompositions should yield the same area.
• An analogous formula can be applied if we consider the “region” bounded by graphs of
the form x = f ( y), x = g( y), for a ≤ y ≤ b. In that case we say that we are integrating
with respect to y or integrating along the y-axis.
• Often we wish to find the area between two graphs determined by points where they
intersect. In these cases the vertical sides of the region have zero length.
• In solving problems it is useful to make a sketch showing an “element of area” — a
thin rectangle whose width is shown as d x or ∆ x in the case of integration with respect
to x, and analogously for the case of integration with respect to y. It is difficult for me
to include such sketches in these notes, but they will be shown on the chalkboard. The
sketch is not a formal part of the solution, but you are likely to find it helps you formulate
your solution.
• Where two graphs cross in several places, so that the area between them is in severalpieces, be sure you understand what you intend if you write an integral that extends
over several pieces: if the curves interchange positions, with the upper one becoming
the lower, then the signs of the areas will change, and some of the areas will cancel. If
this is not what you intend, you must either write the integrand with absolute signs, as
| f ( x)−g( x)|, or, equivalently, find the area of each of the pieces, and add their magnitudes
so as to prevent cancellation.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 108/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3053
Example C.29 ([7, Exercise 8, p. 442]; see Figure 1 on page 3053) To find the area of the
1.0
x
0.5
0.50.0
0.25
−0.5
1.0
0.75
0.0
−1.0
Figure 1: The region(s) bounded by y = x2 and y = x4
region bounded by the curves y = x2 and y = x4.
Solution: Note that the text-book used the word “region” in a general way. Not all authors use
the word in this way. For this problem there are two connected regions bounded by the curves,and the intention of the textbook was that you find the areas of both of them together.
To determine where the curves intersect, we solve their equations, obtaining ( x, y) = (0, 0)
and ( x, y) = (±1, 1). Note that it is not enough to guess the coordinates of these points of
intersection from the graph: you must determine the coordinates by rigorous solution of the
equations!
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 109/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3054
First solution: Integration with respect to x.
2
1
0
x2 − x4
dx = 2
x3
3 − x5
5
1
0
= 2
3 − 2
5 =
4
15.
Second solution: Integration with respect to y. I find the area of the region in the first quad-
rant. The equations of the curves are, respectively, x = √
y and x = 4√
y. The area is
1
0
y
14 − y
12
dy =
4
5 · y 5
4 − 2
3 · y 3
2
1
0
= 4
5 − 2
3 =
2
15.
Now double this area. Note that the order of the curves in this integral is the reverse
of that used when we integrated with respect to x, because we now order them by theirrelative distance from the y-axis.
While the limits of the two integrals look as though they are the same, the limits in the first
case refer to the extreme values of x, while the second refer to the extreme values of y.
Example C.30 ([7, Exercise 22, p. 442]) (see Figure 2 on page 3055) To find the area of the
region bounded by the curves y = sin x and y = sin2 x between the vertical lines x = 0 and
x = π2
.
Solution: To determine the points of intersection of the curves, we solve y = sin x with y =
sin2 x, and solve sin x
− sin 2 x = 0. Since sin 2 x = 2(sin x)
· (cos x), the intersections must
satisfy sin x · (1 − 2cos x) = 0: either
2cos x = 1
or we must be unable to divide by sin x, because
sin x = 0 .
In the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ π2
, we must therefore have either x = π3
(to make cos x = 12
) or x = 0
(to make sin x = 0). This yields the points of intersection (0, 0), and
π3
,√
32
. The
regions to be considered therefore consists of a lune-shaped region with one end at the origin
and the other at
π3
, √ 32
; and a second region which begins at
π3
, √ 32
and ends at the vertical
line x = π2
. We will find the areas of each of the regions and add them, since that appears to
be what the textbook expects. (The wording of the question is not totally unambiguous; some
readers might be justified in assuming that the author intended signed areas to be used, rather
than the absolute values, as I am taking.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 110/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3055
1.51.250.75 1.00.50.0 0.25
0.25
0.5
0.0
0.75
1.0
Figure 2: The region(s) bounded by y = sin x, y = sin 2 x between x = 0 and x = π2
For the left-most region the curve y = sin 2 x is above y = sin x, so the area will be
π
3
0
(sin 2 x − sin x) dx =
−1
2 cos 2 x + cos x
π3
0
=
−1
2 ·−1
2
+
1
2
−−1
2 + 1
=
1
4
For the right region the orders of the curves are reversed, and the area is
π2
π3
(sin x − sin2 x) dx =
− cos x +
1
2 cos 2 x
π2
π3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 111/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3056
= −0 + 1
2 ·(
−1) − −
1
2
+ 1
2−
1
2 =
1
4Thus the total area is 1
4 + 1
4 = 1
2.
6.1 Exercises
[1, Exercise 18, p. 420] (see Figure 3 on page 3056) To find the area of the region bounded
−2.5
31 20
10.0
−1
2.5
−3
0.0
5.0
−2
7.5
Figure 3: The region(s) bounded by y = 8 − x2, y = x2 between x = ±3
by the curves y = 8 − x2 and y = x2 between the vertical lines x = −3 and x = 3.
Solution: Let’s first determine where the curves intersect. Solving the equations shows
that the intersections occur when x = ±2, y = 4, i.e., in the points (±2, 4). But we are
asked to find the area from x = −3 to x = 3. Thus this region has three parts:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 112/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 113/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3058
Solution: (see Figure 2 on page 3058) We can interpret this as the area of the region
2 40−1 1
4
1
0
2
3−2
3
Figure 4: The region(s) bounded by y =√
x + 2, y = x between x = 0 and x = 4
bounded by the curve y =√
x + 2, the line y = x, and the vertical lines x = 0 and x = 4.
If we square the former equation, we obtain y2 = x+2, which can be seen to be a parabola
that is symmetric about the x-axis, with its vertex on the line x = −2 and opening to theright. Squaring the equation caused the new equation to include the lower branch of this
parabola; the original equation represents only the upper branch. The upper branch of
the parabola and the line y = x meet both in the origin and in the point (2, 2). (The other
point of intersection of the parabola and the line does not lie on the upper branch of the
parabola, and so is extraneous to this discussion.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 114/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3059
The simplest way of evaluating this integral is to break it up into two parts: 4
0
√ x + 2 − x
dx =
2
0
√ x + 2 − x
dx +
4
2
x −
√ x + 2
dx
=
( x + 2)32
32
− x2
2
2
0
+
−( x + 2)32
32
+ x2
2
4
2
=
2
3 · 4
32 − 2
−
2
3 · 2
32 − 0
+
−2
3 · 6
32 + 8
−−2
3 · 4
32 + 2
= 16
3 − 2 − 2
3 · 2
32 − 2
3 · 6
32 + 18 +
16
3 − 2
=
44
3 − 4
3
√ 2 − 4
√ 6
[1, Exercise 50, p. 421] 1. “Find the number a such that the line x = a bisects the area
under the curve y = 1
x2, 1 ≤ x ≤ 4
2. “Find the number b such that the line y = b bisects the area in part (a).”
Solution:
1. We solve for a the equation
a
1
1
x2 d x = 4
a
1
x2 dx
to obtain a = 85
. It follows that the area of half of the region is the common value
of the two integrals,
1 x
a
1= 3
8.
2. The right side of the region has an irregular boundary: the upper part has equation
y = 1 x2 , i.e., x = 1√
y; the lower part is on the line x = 4. The two parts of the
boundary meet in the point
4, 116
. Thus the area of the rectangle bounded by the
lines x = 1, x = 4, y = 0, y = 116
is 316
. As this is less than half the total, we know
that b > 116
. This fact is important, as it tells us that we can represent the upper half
of the area — the portion above the line y = b, by the integral 1
b
1√
y− 1
dy ,
where the −1 in the integrand represents the lower boundary of the region — now
viewed as being “under” x = 1√ y
and “over” x = 1. Setting this integral equal to 38
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 115/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3060
and solving, we obtain 2√
y − y1
b= 3
8, which evaluates to
1 − 2√
b + b = 3
8
⇔ (√
b − 1)2 = 3
8
⇔√
b = 1 ±
3
8
⇔ b = 11
8 ±
3
2
One of the values we obtain is greater than 1, which contradicts our assumption
that 0 ≤ b ≤ 1. The other gives the bisecting line
y = 11
8 −
3
2 ≈ 0.150255129.
The value we rejected has a geometric significance: it is the height of a horizontal
line at which the area bounded by the curve y = 1 x2 , the line x = 1 and that line is
equal to 38
.
And what would have happened if we failed to observe that b ≥ 116
? We would
have obtained an equation for b that could not be solved; it would be equivalent to
requiring that 5
8 − 3b =
5
16 when 0 ≤ b ≤ 1
16 , which are contradictory statements.The area which I found to equal 1 − 2
√ b + b by integrating with respect to y could
also be evaluated by integrating with respect to x: here the line y = b meets y = 1 x2
in the point
1√ b
, b
, so the area is
1√ b
1
1
x2 − b
dx = b − 2
√ b + 1 = (
√ b − 1)2 ,
which we must again equate to 38
and solve.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 116/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3061
C.9 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 20th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, January 20th, 2010 (subject to revision)
C.9.1 §6.2 Volumes
Just as we defined the area of a region as the limit of a sum of narrow rectangles, we can
define volumes as limits of sums of thin elements; these elements can be assembled in various
ways. In this course you will see volumes expressed either as sums of thin slices with planar
sides (called laminæ), and — for solids with rotational symmetry (called solids of revolution)
— as sums of thin shells with cylindrical sides. Some problems will lend themselves only
to one type of dissection; where a problem can be approached in more than one way, it is
instructive to try it in several ways, in order to verify your answer and also to gain experience
in choosing the method that is more efficient for diff erent types of problems. In this section we
will be considering dissections into thin slices; where the slice has the shape of a disk with a
concentric disk cut from its centre, the author uses the term washer 40.
Example C.31 1. (see Figure 1 on page 3053) ([7, Exercise 2, p. 452]) “Find the volume
1.
2.5
1.5
2
1
0
10.80.40.60.2
0.5
0
4.
7
5
1
6
4
0
210 .5 1 .50
2
3
Figure 5: Regions for Example C.31
of the solid obtained by rotating the region bounded by the curves y = e x, y = 0, x = 0,
x = 1 about the x-axis.” We will first solve the problem as stated, and then consider some
related problems obtained by changing some of the data.
40Students whose native language is not English sometimes cannot understand why the author will use the
name of a household appliance here; this is another meaning of the English word washer , which refers to a thin
disk with a hole in the middle
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 117/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3062
Solution: (Remember to come back to this problem when we study [1, §6.3], to solve it
using the methods of that section.)We will decompose the solid into laminæ that are thin disks. The “washers” will be
obtained by rotating about the x-axis the element that we would have used for the area
if we had found the area by integrating with respect to x. For the disk whose faces are
centred at points ( x, 0) and ( x + ∆ x, 0), the volume obtained by hanging the element from
its upper left corner on the curve is π y2∆ x = πe2 x∆ x. By the same reasoning that led us
to express areas as definite integrals, we have
Volume =
1
0
πe2 xdx
= π
2 · e2 x1
0=
π
2 · (e2 − 1)
2. Now let us change the problem, asking that the solid be rotated about the y-axis. Here
the description of the cross sections will depend on the height of the cross section. We
will be expressing everything in terms of y, not x, and integrating “with respect to y”.
For y ≤ 1 (the height where the curve cuts the y-axis), the cross sections are disks of
radius 1, and the volume of that part of the solid is 1
0
π12dy = π y]10 = π.
For y ≥ 1 the cross sections are “washers”, with outer radius 1 and inner radius x; to
express this in terms of y we need to rewrite the equation of the curve y = e x in an
equivalent way that expresses x in terms of y, as x = ln y. The washers at height y have
volume
π(12 − x2)∆ y = π(1 − (ln y)2)∆ y
so this part of the solid of revolution has volume
π
e
1
(1 − (ln y)2) dy .
where the upper limit of integration is the ordinate of the point where the line x = 1meets the curve y = e x. You are not quite ready to complete this integration. You can
make a substitution like x = ln y, under which the integral transforms to π 1
0 (1− x2)e x dx,
and you know how to integrate part of this integral, as
π
1
0
1e x dx = πe x]10 = π(e − 1) ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 118/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3063
but you are not ready to integrate π 1
0 x2e x dx. We will, in [1, §7.1], develop a method
to determine that
x2
e x
dx = ( x2
− 2 x + 2)e x
+ C (which is obvious by diff erentiation).With that we know that
Volume = π[e x − ( x2 − 2 x + 2)e x]10 = π[(− x2 + 2 x − 1)e x]1
0 = π .
3. As another variant on this problem, consider the following: “Find the volume of the
solid obtained by rotating the region bounded by the curves y = e x, y = 0, x = 0, x = 1
about the line y = −3.” The analysis is similar to what we did originally, except that the
laminæ now have a hole of radius 3 in the middle, and the outer radius is 3 units larger.
This leads to an integral
Volume = 1
0π(e x + 3)2 − 32
dx =
1
0πe2 x + 6e x
dx
= π
1
2e2 x + 6e x
1
0
= π
1
2e2 + 6e
−
1
2 + 6
=
π
2
e2 + 12e − 13
4. Finally, suppose that the right boundary of the region generating the solid by revolution
changed from x = 1 to y = e2( x − 1). This new right boundary also passes through (1 , 0),
but meets the curve in the point ( x, y) = 2, e2
. The volume will be
1
0
πe2 x dx +
2
1
π
(e x)2 −
e2( x − 1)
2
dx
= π
2
e2 − 1
+ π
2
1
e2 x dx − πe4
2
1
( x − 1)2 dx
= π
2
e2 − 1
+ π
e2 x
2
2
1
− πe4
1
3( x − 1)3
2
1
= π
e4 − 1
2
− π
e4
3 = π
e4
6 − 1
2
Example C.32 ([7, Exercise 8, p. 452]) Find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating the
region bounded by the curves y = sec x, y = 1, x = −1, x = 1 about the x-axis.
Solution: The lines x = ±1 intersect y = sec x in the respective points (1, ± sec 1). The area of
the washer centred on the x-axis between cross sections x = X and x = X + X is approximately
π(sec2 X − 12) · X . The volume of revolution will be 1
−1
π
sec2 x − 1· dx = π[tan x − x]1
−1 = 2π(tan 1 − 1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 119/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3064
(Had the integral involved arctan 1, you would have been expected to simplify it further; but
you cannot evaluate tan 1 without calculators or techniques that you will not meet until Calcu-lus 3.)
Example C.33 ([7, Exercise 56, p. 454]) Here is a problem where the solid is not generated
by revolving a plane region about an axis. “Find the volume of the solid S: the base of S is the
parabolic region ( x, y)| x2 ≤ y ≤ 1 ; cross-sections perpendicular to the y-axis are equilateral
triangles.”
Solution: The cross-section of the base at level y has ends with coordinates (± √ y, y), so the
length of the base is 2√
y, and the area of the triangular cross-section is 12·2 √
y·√
3√
y =√
3· y.
Integrating along the y axis we find that
Area = 1
0
√ 3 y dy = √ 3
2 y2
1
0
=
√ 3
2 (12 − 02) =
√ 3
2
Example C.34 ([7, Exercise 15, p. 458]) (Where this problem appeared in the cited textbook,
students were asked to solve it using the method of “shells”. Let’s see if we can solve it using
the method of “washers”.) To find the volume of the solid of revolution generated by revolving
the region bounded by y = x2, y = 0, x = 1, x = 2 about the axis x = 1.
Solution: The washers generated by elements of area parallel to the x-axis will have two kinds
of descriptions, depending on whether their cross sections are above or below the point where
x = 1 meets y = x2, i.e. (1, 1): below y = 1 the cross sections are rectangles of width 2 −1 = 1;above y = 1 the cross sections are rectangles obtained from such a rectangle as below y = 1
by cutting away a rectangle of length x2 starting at the left end. But, in evaluating the limit
of the sum of the volumes of these washers, we shall be integrating with respect to y, so we
need to express the dimensions and position of the rectangular element in terms of y. The
equation of the right branch of the parabola y = x2 is x = √
y. The hole in the washer has
radius x − 1 = √
y − 1; the washer will have area
π(12 − (√
y − 1)2) = π(2√
y − y) .
The line x = 2 meets the parabola in the point (2, 4), so we shall integrate for y ranging from
0 to 4: from 0 to 1 using the constant integrand π12, and from 1 to 4 using the integrandπ(2
√ y − y). The volume of revolution is
1
0
π12 dy +
4
1
π(2√
y − y) dy = π y1
0 + π
4
3 y
32 − y2
2
4
1
= π + π
4
3 · 8 − 8
− π
4
3 · 1 − 1
2
=
17π
6
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 120/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3065
which is the same result given in the textbook for the solution that could be obtained in the
next section using the method of cylindrical shells.
6.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 12, p. 430] Find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating the region bounded
by the curves y = e− x, y = 1, x = 2 about the line y = 2.
Solution: Through the point ( x, 2) on the line y = 2 the cross section will be an annulus
(ring) with outer dimension 2−e− x and inner dimension 2−1 = 1; the annulus is bounded
by concentric circles centred at the point ( x, 2). The volume will be
2
0
π
2 − e−22
− π12
dx
= π
2
0
3 − 4e− x + e−2 x
dx .
The first summand of the integrand has antiderivative 3 x; the second summand can be
integrated by using a substitution u = − x, which leads to an antiderivative +4e− x; the
last summand can be integrated by using a substitution u = −2 x, which leads to an
antiderivative −12 · e−2 x. Putting these three components together we find the value of the
integral to be
π
3 x + 4e− x − 1
2 e−2 x2
0= π
6 +
4
e2 − 1
2e4 − π
0 + 4 −
1
2
= π
5
2 +
4
e2 − 1
2e4
.
[1, Exercise 39, p. 431] The textbook asks you to use a Computer Algebra System to find the
volume of the solid generated by revolving about the line y = −1 the region bounded by
y = sin2 x, y = 0, for 0 ≤ x ≤ π. No Computer Algebra System is needed , although we
haven’t yet seen how to integrate this. Here is the full solution. The cross sections are
washers with centre on the line y = −1, outer radius ending on the curve y = sin2 x, and
inner radius ending on the line y = 0 (the x-axis). The volume is thus
π
π
0
(sin2 x − (−1))2 − 12
dx = π
π
0
1 − cos2 x
2 + 1
2
− 1
dx
= π
4
π
0
(3 − cos2 x)2 − 4
d x
= π
4
π
0
5 − 6c os2 x + cos2 2 x
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 121/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3066
= π
4 π
05 − 6c os2 x +
1 + cos 4 x
2 dx
= π
8
π
0
(11 − 12cos2 x + cos4 x) d x
= π
8
11 x − 6sin2 x +
sin 4 x
4
π
0
= π
8 · 11π =
11π2
8
[1, Exercise 44, p. 431] Describe the solid whose volume is represented by the integral
π
π2
0
[(1 + cos x)2 − 1] dx .
Solution: The d x tells us that the integration is along the x-axis. That is, the planes of the washers are perpendicular to the x-axis. The integrand is the diff erence of 2 squares,
multiplied by π. We may interpret this as the area of a washer whose outer radius is
1 + cos x, and whose inner radius is 1. If we interpret 1 + cos x as cos x − (−1), we
can interpret this as the radius of a disk whose centre is at the point ( x, y) = ( x, −1),
generated by a radius extending from that centre to the point ( x, cos x) on the graph of
the cosine function. The subtracted term −π12 can be interpreted as the area of a disk
whose centre is at the same point, but its radius extends from that point ( x, −1) to the
point ( x, 0) above it on the x-axis. Thus the integral represents the solid of revolution
about the line y = −1 of the region bounded by the graph of the cosine function, and the
x-axis, between x = 0 and x = π
2
. (This integral is not difficult to evaluate. We will see
in [1, Chapter 7] that, if we replace cos 2 x by 12
(1 + cos2 x), the value of the integral is
π
2sin x +
x
2 +
sin 2 x
4
π2
0
= 2π + π2
4 .
This is not the only way of interpreting the integral. We could also reason that it rep-
resents the volume of a region rotated about the x-axis, bounded by the y-axis, the line
y = 1, and the graph of y = cos x + 1.)
[1, Exercise 49, p. 431] Find the volume of a right circular cone with height h and base radius
r .
Solution: This is a standard problem that every student should be able to work.
A cone is a surface generated by joining to all points curve in a plane a fixed point (called
the apex outside of the plane. A cone is circular if the base curve is a circle. It is right
circular if the apex is located on the normal to the plane of the curve through the centre
of that base circle.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 122/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3067
It is convenient to set up coordinate axes so that the cone is generated by a right angled
triangle with height h and base r , i.e., with hypotenuse along the line
x
r +
y
h = 1, whichtriangle is to be rotated about the y-axis. The horizontal rectangular elements of area,
with height dy and length x are rotated about the y-axis to generate disk-shaped laminæ.
Expressing x as a function of y for the hypotenuse, we have x = r
1 − y
h
, so the cross-
sectional area at height y is πr 2
1 − y
h
2
. Hence the volume must be
h
0
πr 2
1 − y
h
2
dy .
We know how to evaluate an integral of this type by expanding the square. But it is
easier to make a change of variable: u = 1 − y
h, so du = −1
h dy, dy = −h du and
Volume = − 0
1
πr 2u2h du = πr 2h
u3
3
0
1
= 1
3(πr 2h) .
(cf. [9, p. 47]). If you remember this as 13
π × the area of the base, you will know this
as a special case of a general theorem. In fact, it is not hard to show that the area is
not aff ected by the fact that the cone is a right cone: even if the apex were moved to a
location not over the centre of the circular base, the area would not change. Moreover,
it can be shown that even the fact that the base is circular is not relevant! The volume of any “cone” is as shown:
1
3 × π × Area of base × height .
For example, the case of a square base is discussed in [1, Example 8, p. 429].
[1, Exercise 55, p. 432] Find the volume of the solid S which is a tetrahedron with three mu-
tually perpendicular faces and three mutually perpendicular edges with lengths 3 cm, 4
cm, and 5 cm.
Solution: I find it convenient to locate the three perpendicular sides along the coordi-
nate axes, with one vertex at the origin. So I locate the vertices of the tetrahedron at
(0, 0, 0), (3, 0, 0), (0, 4, 0), (0, 0, 5). This tetrahedron is just a pyramid or cone on a trian-
gular base; thus we know by the theory of [1, Example 8, p. 429] that the volume will
be 13 ×
12 × 3 × 4
× 5 = 10. But I will pretend we don’t know that.
Consider cross sections perpendicular to the z-axis. These are triangles whose x-dimension
at height z will be 35
(5 − z) (by similar triangles in the xz-plane); and whose y=dimension
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 123/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3068
at height z will be 45
(5 − z), (again by similar triangles). The area of the triangle will be1
2 (5 − z)2
, so the volume will be 5
0
1
2 · 12
25 · (5 − z)2 dz =
6
25
−1
3(5 − z)3
5
0
= − 2
25
0 − 53
= 10 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 124/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3069
C.10 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 22nd, 2010
Release Date: Friday, January 23nd, 2010, subject to revision
C.10.1 §6.3 Volumes by Cylindrical Shells
The integrand when using cylindrical shells The volume of a right circular cylinder (i.e.,
with a disk as base, axis perpendicular to the base) is — as you can easily prove using washers
or otherwise — the product of the area its base and its height. If we consider a hollowed out
cylinder of radius r 2, in which an inner cylinder of radius r 1 is removed, then the volume will
be, if the height is h,
πr 22h − πr 21h = π
r 22 − r 21
h .
Let’s assume that r 2 = r 1 + r , and expand this product:
πr 22 − r 21
h = π
(r 1 + r )2 − r 21
h
= πr 21 + 2r · r 1 + (r )2 − r 21
h
= 2πhr · r 1 + πh(r )2
Both of these products approach zero as we allow r → 0. If we wish to determine the volume
of a solid of revolution by decomposing it into cylindrical shells about the axis of revolution,
it would appear that we should add elements of volume
2πhr · r 1 + πh(r )
2
and then permit the number of shells to approach infinity, and the width ∆r → 0. It can be
shown that, in any such limiting process, the sum of the terms of type πh(r )2 approaches
0; that is, not only do the individual terms πh(∆r )2 approach 0, as we permit r → 0, but
even the sum of these terms, increasing arbitrarily in number as r → 0, also approaches 0.
Thus the volume sought can be viewed as a Riemann sum, leading to a definite integral of the
form
2πr 1h dr . Thus, to find the volume of a solid that we can decompose into elements
which are cylindrical shells, we need only consider an integral related to terms of the first type.
The integrand can be interpreted as the product of 2πr 1 and h, i.e., as the area of a rectangle
obtained by “cutting open” the inner surface of the cylindrical shell and “unrolling” it; then the
r can be interpreted as the thickness of a thin rectangular lamina based on that rectangle. Of course, when you attempt to do that, you find that there will be a small error in that product,
but, as I have mentioned, it can be shown that the totality of these errors approaches 0 as we
replace the sum of volumes of elements by the definite integral. All that remains to be done is
to express h in terms of the radius, and to determine the appropriate limits for integration.
If you choose to approach these problems by substituting in formulæ, you are urged to
remember how to generalize to situations where the axis of circular symmetry is parallel to
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 125/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3070
but diff erent from one of the coordinate axes. I do not recommend memorizing these formulæ.
Among the following examples are some that were not discussed in the lecture. One of these,which you should certainly read shows how to find the volume of a sphere; instead of this
example, I worked a more difficult — but much more instructive — example which finds the
volume of a torus.
6.3 Exercises
[1, Exercise 14, p. 436] (see Figure 6 on page 3070) “Use the method of cylindrical shells to
4
2
3
1
-1
0
431 20-2 -1
Figure 6: The region(s) bounded by x + y = 3 and x = 4 − ( y − 1)2
find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating the region bounded by the given curves
about the x-axis. Sketch the region and a typical shell: x + y = 3, x = 4 − ( y − 1)2.”
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 126/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3071
Solution: The parabola meets the line in the points (0, 3) and (3, 0), on the coordinate
axes.
1. First we follow the instructions, using the method of cylindrical shells. The ele-
ments of area that generate the shells will be narrow horizontal rectangles; at height
y the rectangle has width (4 − ( y − 1)2) − (3 − y), obtained by expressing the equa-
tions in the form x =function of y. The circumference of the base of the generated
cylinder is then 2π y, and the volume is
2π
3
0
(4 − ( y − 1)2) − (3 − y)
y dy
= 2π 3
03 y2
− y3 dy
= 2π
y3 − y4
4
3
0
= 27π
2 .
2. Now let us compute the volume using washers. The equation of the line may be
rewritten as y = 3 − x; but the parabola now splits into 2 curves — the upper
branch has equation y = 1 +√
4 − x, and the lower has equation y = 1 −√
4 − x.
The description of the element of area that generates the washer will change at
x = 3. To the left of x = 3 the element of area at horizontal position x has height
(1 +√
4 − x) − (3 − x). We need to compute the area of the annulus the element
generates. For that purpose the length of the element is not enough, as we need to
know the distance from the axis about which it is revolving. The outer radius of the washer is 1 +
√ 4 − x, and the inner radius is 3 − x, so the area of the annulus is
the diff erence between the areas of two disks:
π(1 +√
4 − x)2 − π(3 − x)2
and the volume of the solid generated up to x = 3 is
π
3
0
(1 +
√ 4 − x)2 − π(3 − x)2
dx .
The elements of area to the right of x = 3 have inner radius 1 −√
4 − x, and outer
radius 1 + √ 4 − x, so the area of the annular cross-section is
π1 −
√ 4 − x
2 − π1 +
√ 4 − x
2= 4π
√ 4 − x ,
and the volume is 4π 4
3
√ 4 − x dx. The total volume by the method of washers is
π
3
0
(1 +
√ 4 − x)2 − π(3 − x)2
dx + 4π
4
3
√ 4 − x dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 127/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3072
= π 3
0−( x
−1)( x
−4) + 2
√ 4
− x dx + 4π
4
3
√ 4
− x dx
= π
1
4
(u − 3u2 + 2√
u) (−1) du + π
0
1
4√
u(−1) du
using the substitution u = 4 − x, du = − x, x = 4 − u
= 27π
2 as before.
[1, Exercise 20, p. 437] “Use the method of cylindrical shells to find the volume generated
by rotating the region bounded by the given curves about the specified axis. Sketch the
region and a typical shell: y = x2, x = y2, about y = −1.”
Solution:
1. At height y the cylinder is generated by an element of area whose horizontal di-
mension is √
y − y2, and whose vertical dimension is ∆ y; the circumference of the
circle generate by a point at one end of this element under revolution is 2π( y−(−1))
(since the radius is the distance between a point ( x, y) and the point ( x, −1) below
it), so the volume is 1
0
√ y − y2
2π( y + 1) dy
= 2π 1
0 y
32
− y3 +
√ y
− y2 dy
= 2π
2
5 y
52 − 1
4 y4 +
2
3 y
32 − 1
3 y3
1
0
= 29
30π .
2. It wasn’t asked for in the problem, but let’s find the same volume by the method of
washers. The external radius of the vertical washer at x is√
x − (−1) =√
x + 1; the
internal radius of that washer is x2 − (−1) = x2 + 1. The area of the cross section
will be π times the diff erence of the squares of the radii, i.e.,
π( √ x + 1)
2
− ( x2
+ 1)2
.
The integral from x = 0 to x = 1 is again equal to 2930
π.
[1, Exercise 29, p. 437] The following integral represents the volume of a solid; describe the
solid: 3
0
2π x5 dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 128/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3073
Solution: Since the problem appears in this section, the textbook expects you to interpret
the integral as the result of application of the method of cylindrical shells. If we interpret2π x5 · ∆ x as (2π x) · x4 · ∆ x, we see that it is the volume of the solid generated by rotating
about the y-axis the region bounded by the x-axis and the curve y = x4 from the point
(0, 0) to the line x = 3.
But the author should not have used the definite article the, since the integral can be
interpreted in other ways. For example, we can interpret it as resulting from application
of the method of washers also. This time we interpret 2π x5 · ∆ x as π√
2 x52 · ∆ x: it
is the area of the solid obtained by rotating about the x-axis the region bounded by that
axis and the curve y =√
2 x5 between x = 0 and x = 3.
[1, Exercise 32, p. 437] The integral
π4
0
2π(π − x)(cos x − sin x) dx represents the volume of a
solid. Describe the solid.
Solution: The same integral could easily represent more than one solid. One interpre-
tation is the following: The solid is a solid of revolution around the vertical line x = π,
generated by revolving the region bounded by the y-axis and the graphs y = cos x and
y = sin x up to the point where they intersect, ( x, y) =
π4
, π4
. But the region could be de-
formed vertically without changing the volume. For example, the region could be taken
to be bounded by the lines y = 0, x = 0,
y = cos x − sin x = sin π
2 − x + x2
· cos
π2 − x − x
2 = 1√
2cos
π4 − x
from x = 0 to x = π
4.
[1, Exercise 43, p. 437] Use cylindrical shells to find the volume of a sphere of radius r .
Solution: Here is a case where the solid is prescribed, but not the way of generating it. A
sphere can be generated by the rotation of a half-disk around its diameter. I chose to take
the diameter as the y-axis, and the equation of its boundary as x2+ y2 = r 2, more precisely,
as x = +
r 2 − y2 where −r ≤ y ≤ r . The length of a vertical rectangular element of
area a distance of x from the axis is the distance between the points ( x,√
r 2
− x2) and
( x, −√ r 2 − x2), i.e., 2 √ r 2 − x2. This is the height of the cylindrical generated when the
element is rotated about the axis. The base of the shell is at a distance of x from the
axis, so it generates a circular band (annulus) of radius 2 x, hence of circumference 2π x.
Here I have not been precise about whether this is the inner or outer circumference of
the annulus, since, in the limit, these distinctions have no e ff ect on the calculations. The
thickness of the annulus is represented by the diff erential, dx, in the integral, and we
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 129/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3074
obtain a volume of r
0
2π x(2 √ r 2 − x2) dx = −4π3
(r 2 − x2)
32
r
0= 4πr 3
3 . (56)
Of course, this volume could also be evaluated by the method of washers, see [1, Exam-
ple 1, pp. 423-424]. If you found the number of variables in equation (56), you could
amplify the notation, and write x=r
x=0
2π x(2√
r 2 − x2) dx = −4π
3
(r 2 − x2)
32
x=r
x=0=
4πr 3
3 for all r . (57)
[1, Exercise 44, p. 437] Use cylindrical shells to find the volume of the solid torus generated
by rotating a disk of radius r around a line located a distance R from its centre.
Solution: We can take the disk to be bounded by ( x − R)2 + y2 = r 2, and the axis of
rotational symmetry of the torus (doughnut) to be the y-axis. The boundary of the disk
is the graphs of 2 functions, y = ±
r 2 − ( x − R)2, so the height of the element of area is
2
r 2 − ( x − R)2. The volume is R+r
R−r
2π x · 2
r 2 − ( x − R)2 dx = 2π
r
−r
(u + R)2√
r 2 − u2 du
under the substitution u = x − R
= 4π
r
−r
u√
r 2 − u2 du + 4π R
r
−r
√ r 2 − u2 du
• Here the first integral can be seen to be the area under the graph of an odd functionfrom −r to the symmetrically located value +r , so the volume is 0; it may also be
integrated as
4π
3 · (r 2 − u2)
32
r
−r
= 0.
This integral could also be evaluated “naıvely” (as I did in the lectures), by using
one of several possible substitutions, or by observation, since the integrand is ev-
idently the derivative of 3
2 ·−1
2
· (r 2 − u2)
32 , which, when evaluated between −r
and +r gives a diff erence of 0.
• The second integral is 2π R times the area under the curve y =√
r 2 − u2 from u = −r
to u = r , which can be seen to be the area of a half disk of radius r , which we knowto be
πr 2
2 . Thus the volume is 2π2 Rr 2.
[1, Exercise 45, p. 437] I began the lecture by finding the volume of a right circular cone
(already considered in [1, Exercise 49, p. 431], solved in the notes of the previous lecture.
A solution to this variation of the problem can be found in the Student Solutions Manual
[3]).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 130/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3075
C.10.2 §6.4 Work
This section has been omitted from the syllabus because it involves physical concepts that
some students from outside of the Faculties of Science and Engineering might not be prepared
for. If you are a Science or Engineering student, you are urged to peruse the section and try
the problems. Your instructors and TA’s will be happy to help you with any di fficulties.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 131/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3076
C.11 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 25th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, January 25th, 2010, subject to further revision
Review of preceding two lectures We have studied how to use a definite integral to deter-
mine volumes of solids, by expressing the solid as the limit of a union of thin layers: in [1,
§6.2] as the union of thin laminæ with planar sides and, in [1, §6.3], for solids of revolution, as
the union of thin circular cylindrical shells. Where the solid is obtained by revolving a plane
region about a line in that plane the solid can be called a solid of revolution about that line, and
the methods of both sections are, in principle, applicable. I do not recommend attacking these
problems by substitution in formulæ, as there are many variants to be considered, and the blind
use of formulæ often leads to disaster when the wrong formula is applied, or the right formula
is applied incorrectly. I list some formulæ below just to summarize the nature of the resultswe have found, with the intention that, in each case, you decompose the solid in one of the
methods that is applicable and set up the integral by carefully examining the decomposition.
1. When a solid is decomposed into thin laminæ between parallel planes which are per-
pendicular to the x-axis: the volume is expressible in the form
b a
A( x) dx, where the
decomposition ranges between values x = a and x = b, and A(u) is an expression for the
cross-sectional area at x = u. (If the decomposition is along the y-axis, then the limits of
the integral will be the limiting values of y, and we will usually express the integral in
terms of y; of course, the x or y that appears in the integral is irrelevant, since these arebound or “dummy” variables, that are part of our notation, and don’t actually a ff ect the
numerical value of the integral.)
2. When a decomposition as in item 1 above has circular symmetry as a solid of revolution
about a line x = c of a region in the xy-plane, the laminæ can be interpreted as being
generated by revolving a thin rectangle, and will consist of disks, possibly with a hole
in the middle — the textbook calls them “washers”. The integrand will be an expression
of the form π (r 2( x))2 − π (r 1( x))2, where r 2 and r 1 are the outer and inner radius of the
disk, determined by the distances of the two ends of the thin rectangle from the point of
intersection of the extended rectangle with the axis of rotational symmetry of the solid.
Here we need to be prepared to work with either x or y, and possibly to consider rotationabout a line parallel to but distinct from the coordinate axes.
3. In the case of decomposition into cylindrical shells of a solid with rotational symmetry
about an axis, the cylindrical shells can also be interpreted as being generated by rotating
a thin rectangle about the axis — but here the long dimension of the rectangle is parallel
to the axis. The integrand may also be interpreted as the area of a “flattened” cylindrical
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 132/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3077
shell, obtained by slitting the shell open and unrolling it; one dimension will be the
circumference of the circle generated by revolving any point of the cylinder around theaxis of symmetry — this factor will be of the form 2π x when we are at distance x from
the axis of rotational symmetry; the other dimension will be the height of the cylindrical
shell. Again, we need to adjust this formula according to the orientation of the axis of
rotational symmetry, and according as the axis is or is not a coordinate axis.
Before proceeding with the topics scheduled for today, I reminded students of the ease in which
we can determine the volume of a sphere of radius r . A solution using cylindrical shells ([1,
Exercise 43, p. 437]) can be found beginning on page 3073 of these notes. We can find the
volume using washers by taking the equation of circle to be x2 + y2 = r 2, and revolving the
upper semi-disk around the x-axis, obtaining −
r r 2π(r 2 − x2) dx = 2π
r 2 x − x3
3
r
−r
= 2π
r 3 − r 3
3
− 2π
−r 3 +
r 3
3
=
4
3 · πr 3 .
C.11.1 §6.5 Average value of a function
In this section the textbook defines what is meant by the term average of a continuous function
or a function “pieced” together from continuous functions over an interval a ≤ x ≤ b. The
definition is a generalization of the definition familiar to you of the average of a finite number
of numbers y1, y2, . . . , yn, i.e.,
average =
n
i=1
yi
n .
If, in the finite case just mentioned, we treat each of yi as the height of a rectangle of unit width,
situated so that its base is placed on the x-axis with its corners at (i − 1, 0) and (i, 0), and with
height yi, then the sum
ni=1
yi is the area under the graph of the function f defined by
f ( x) =
y1 if 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
y2 if 1 < x ≤ 2
. . .
yn if n − 1 < x ≤ n
For any function that is piecewise continuous on the interval a ≤ x ≤ b, we define
average of f over [a, b] = 1
b − a
b
a
f ( x) dx ,
=
b
a f ( x) dx b
a 1 dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 133/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3078
and so our definition is consistent with the earlier definition when the function is defined at a
finite number of points x1, . . . , xn: we are simply extending the definition of that function byextending the value at any integer point to the entire interval of unit length to the left of the
point.
The Mean Value Theorem for Integrals If f is continuous on [a, b], the Mean Value The-
orem may be applied to the function g( x) = x
a f (t ) dt , which we know from the Funda-
mental Theorem to be diff erentiable. It asserts the existence of a point c in (a, b) such thatg(b) − g(a)
b − a= g(c), i.e., such that
b
a
f (t ) dt = g(b)−
g(a) = f (c)·
(b−
a) ,
or f (c) =
b
a f ( x) dx b
a 1 dx
=
b
a f ( x) dx
b − a.
[1, Exercise 23, p. 445].
As mentioned in connection with the Mean Value Theorem in Math 140, the spirit of this
theorem is in the existence of the point c, not in the specific values that c takes. The theorem
is not constructive: it proves the existence without telling you how to find the point. (A
constructive proof of a theorem proves existence by providing a way of finding the point; the
proof we have given for the present theorem is not constructive.)
Example C.35 [1, Exercise 13, p. 445] The textbook asks you to prove that, if f is any contin-
uous function for which
3
1
f ( x) dx = 8, then f takes on the value 4 somewhere in the interval
1 ≤ x ≤ 3. The MVT for Integrals tells you that there is a point c such that 1 ≤ x ≤ 3 and
1
3 − 1
3
1
f ( x) dx = f (c)
and the left side of this equation is exactly 82
= 4.
What if we were to ask the same question with 4 replaced by another real number, e.g.,
4.001? The answer would now be negative: as a counterexample41 take the constant function f ( x) = 4. This function is continuous and has the desired area over the interval 1 ≤ x ≤ 3; but
it never assumes the value 4.001.
41an example to disprove a general statement: since the statement refers to all functions with a given property,
we can disprove it by exhibiting just one example.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 134/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3079
Average velocity Suppose that the position at time t of a particle moving along the x-axis is
f (t ). In [1, §3.7, p. 221] the textbook has defined the Average Velocity of the particle over atime interval a ≤ t ≤ b to be
∆ x
∆t =
f (b) − f (a)
b − a.
You may recall being told by your instructor that the use of the word average there was also
a generalization of the traditional meaning recalled above for the average of a finite set of
numbers. You can now see that, since
f (b) − f (a)
b − a=
b
a
d dt
f (t ) dt
b − a,
that use of the word is consistent with the use we have defined here. In other words, the Average
Velocity is, in fact, the average of the velocities. So the earlier use of the word “average” was,
though premature, consistent with the generalization that was planned. Previously “Average
Velocity” was a two-word name for a concept, and you would not be justified in treating the
first word as a modifier of the second; now you may interpret that as a conventional use of
language, where average is an adjective. When mathematicians name concepts we try to make
the nomenclature intuitive, and consistent with earlier usage.
6.5 Exercises
[1, Exercise 4, p. 445] Find the average value of the function g( x) = x2√
1 + x3 on the interval
[0, 2].Solution:
average = 1
2 − 0
2
0
x2√
1 + x3 dx
We apply the substitution u = x3, so du = 3 x2 dx and
average = 1
2 − 0
23
0
√ 1 + u · 1
3 du
= 1
6 · 2
3 (1+
u)
32 8
0
= 1
99
32
− 1
32
= 26
9
(We could also use the substitution u =√
1 + x3.) Had the problem asked us to “sketch
a rectangle whose area is the same as the area under the graph of g,” we could take a
rectangle based on the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 2, with height 269
.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 135/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3080
Example C.36 (taken from a problem book for students in Russian technical universities) [38,
Problem 1647, p. 126] Suppose that a trough has a parabolic cross-section with equation of the form y = K x2, and measures 1 meter across the top and is 1.5 meters deep. Determine the
average depth.
Solution: From the data we know the cross section passes through the point
12
, 32
, so 3
2 =
K
32
2, and K = 6. The depth of the trough at position x is 3
2 − 6 x2, so
average depth =
12
− 12
32 − 6 x2
dx
12 −−1
2
= 2
12
03
2 −6 x2 dx
by symmetry, since the integrand is an even function
= 2
3 x
2 − 2 x3
12
0
= 1
so the average depth is 1 meter, i.e., two-thirds of the way to the bottom of the trough.
6 Review
[1, Exercise 32, p. 447] “Let R1 be the region bounded by y = x2, y = 0, and x = b, where
b > 0. Let R2 be the region bounded by y = x2, x = 0, and y = b2, to the right of the line
x = 0.
1. “Is there a value of b such that R1 and R2 have the same area?
2. “Is there a value of b such that R1 sweeps out the same volume when rotated about
the x-axis and the y-axis?
3. “Is there a value of b such that R1 and R2 sweep out the same volume when rotated
about the x-axis?
4. “Is there a value of b such that R1 and R2 sweep out the same volume when rotated
about the y-axis?”
Solution: Note that the statement of the problem in the textbook is ambiguous, as the
description of R2 applies to one region to the right of the y-axis and another to the left;for that reason I have added the italicized words. Now the two regions combine to form
the rectangle ( x, y)| 0 ≤ x ≤ b, 0 ≤ y ≤ b2.
1. We are asked to investigate solutions of the equation b
0
x2 dx =
b
0
(b2 − x2) dx ⇔ b3
3 =
2b3
3 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 136/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3081
which has no positive solution. (We could have evaluated either or both of these
areas by integration along the y-axis, writing the equation of the right branch of theparabola as x =
√ y. With both integrations along that axis the equation would be
b2
0
(b − √ y) dy =
b2
0
√ y dy .
2. I will find the volume about the x-axis using washers, and the volume about the
y-axis using the same elements of area, using cylinders. Equating the two areas I
obtain the equation
b
0
π x22dx =
b
0
2π x
· x2 dx
⇔ π x
5
5
b
0
= 2π x4
4
b
0
which is equivalent to b4(2b − 5) = 0 and has one positive solution, b = 52
. (This
problem could be solved by evaluating either of the integrals in the “other” way.)
3. We have determined the volume swept out by rotating R1 about the x-axis to beπb5
5 . If we compute the volume obtained by rotating R2 about the x-axis, we find it
to be b
0
π
b22 −
x22
dx = π
b4 x − x5
5
b
0
= 4π
5 b5 using washers, and
b2
0
2π y · √ y dy = 2π · 25
y52
b2
0= 4π
5 b5 using cylindrical shells.
Equating the volume obtained by rotating R1 about the same axis to this, we obtainπb5
5 = 4πb5
5 , which has no positive solution.
4. The volume obtained by rotating R1 about the y-axis has been determined above to
be π2
b4. The volume obtained by rotating R2 about the y-axis is
b2
0
π(√
y)2 dy = π
b2
0
y dy = π
y2
2
b2
0
= π
2b4
using washers, or b
0
2π x
b2 − x2
dx = 2π
b2 x2
2 − x4
4
b
0
= π
2b4
using shells. Here we see that the two volumes of revolution are equal for all values
of the parameter b.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 137/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3082
C.12 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 27th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, January 27th, 2010,
subject to further revision
Textbook Chapter 7. TECHNIQUES OF INTEGRATION.
C.12.1 §7.1 Integration by Parts
Earlier we developed the Substitution Rule for evaluating integrals, from the Chain Rule for
diff erentiation. Now we will develop another procedure for evaluation of integrals, called
Integration by Parts, based on the Product Rule for diff erentiation. As with the Substitution
Rule, this rule will be applicable to both definite and indefinite integrals. If does not aff ect the
(“independent”) variable and so there will be no change to limits in definite integrals.
Starting from the Product Rule,
d
dx[ f ( x) · g( x)] =
d
dx f ( x) · g( x) + f ( x) · d
dxg( x) ,
we integrate all 3 members with respect to x: d
dx[ f ( x) · g( x)] dx =
d
dx f ( x) · g( x)
dx +
f ( x) · d
dxg( x)
dx
and observe that the integral on the left is simply f ( x)
· g( x) + C . Moving the terms around
gives the Rule of Integration by Parts:
f ( x) · g( x) =
d
dx f ( x) · g( x)
dx +
f ( x) · d
dxg( x)
dx
⇔ d
dx f ( x) · g( x)
dx = f ( x) · g( x) −
f ( x) · d
dxg( x)
dx ,
f ( x) · d
dxg( x)
dx = f ( x) · g( x) −
d
dx f ( x) · g( x)
dx ,
or, compactly, f dg = f g
− g d f .
Traditionally we often name the functions u and v, or variations of these symbols42 — since
the solution of a specific problem may require multiple applications of integration by parts.
These equations are always true for diff erentiable functions, but we shall be applying them
when they tend to replace a difficult integral by one that is “easier” to evaluate. Usually the
42like u1, v1, U , V , u, v, . . .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 138/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3083
applications will be such that the integrand admits a “natural” factorization into two factors,
where either one of them becomes “simpler” under diff erentiation, or one becomes “simpler”under integration. I begin with an example where the use of Integration by Parts is obviously
indicated.
Example C.37 To integrate
xe x dx.
Solution: If we factorize the integrand into u = x, v = e x, then u is “simplified” by diff er-
entiation, since u = 1, while v is not “complicated” by diff erentiation, where v = e x. We
obtain xe x dx = xe x −
1e x dx
= xe x
− e x
+ C .
Example C.38 Sometimes the factorization of the integral is less than obvious. Consider the
problem of integrating ln x (cf. [1, Example 2, p. 454]). The “factorization” we choose is
u = ln x, dv = d x . (58)
By (58),
du = dx
x, and
v = x
where we have chose one convenient antiderivative. ln x dx = (ln x) x −
x · dx
x
= (ln x) x − x + C .
This is a derivation you should remember, as we often need an antiderivative of a logarithm. 43
Example C.39 Similar to the preceding example is the integration of arctan x (cf. [1, Example
5, p. 456]). Here again the function does not admit a well defined factorization, but we can try
(58) and obtain arctan x dx = x · arctan x −
x
1 + x2 dx .
43Perhaps one should remember it in the “more general” form ln | x| dx = x ln | x| − x + C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 139/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3084
Now apply a substitution to the remaining integral, either
v = x2 ⇒ dv = 2 x dx or
w = 1 + x2 ⇒ dw = 2 x dx
Hence arctan x dx = x · arctan x −
1
wdw
= x · arctan x − ln |w| + C
= x · arctan x − ln |1 + x2| + C .
Of course, the absolute signs are not needed here because the argument of the logarithm func-tion is evidently non-negative.
There are several “standard” situations where we need to use integration by parts. Suppose
we need to integrate a function of one of the following forms, where P( x) is some polynomial:
P( x) · sin x, P( x) · cos x, P( x) · e x, P( x) · cosh x, P( x) · sinh x.
In each of these cases the derivative of the polynomial is “simpler” (here meaning “of lower
degree”), while the integral of the other factor is “not more complicated”. Repeated applica-
tions cause the polynomial to disappear, leaving only an integral involving the second factor.
Here again one should remember the derivation, but not memorize the formulæ, since they can
be easily reconstructed, and there are too many variations to memorize.
The rule of integration by parts need not be used in isolation: it may be necessary to
precede or follow its use by substitutions, and several applications of integration by parts could
be needed to complete the solution to a problem.
Two applications of Integration by Parts? We saw in connection with substitutions that
we might need to use the procedure more than once. Can that occur with Integration by Parts?
It can always occur, but, if not done carefully, the second iteration will reverse the action of the
first, and return us to the integral that we began with. Where the purpose of using Integration
by Parts is to truly simplify the integrand, then it is unlikely you will make this tactical error.
But consider the first example in the next paragraph.
Solving an equation to evaluate an indefinite integral Sometimes the application of inte-
gration by parts does not appear to make any progress, but a second or more applications may
eventually produce a constraint on the integral, which enables one to evaluate it. This idea will
be extended later.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 140/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3085
Example C.40 To evaluate e x cos x dx.
Solution: Set u = e x, dv = cos x, so that du = e x dx, v = sin x. Then e x cos x dx = e x sin x −
e x sin x dx .
The new integral is of similar difficulty to the old one. We apply integration by parts again:
U = e x, dV = sin x, dU = e x dx, V = −cos x: e x cos x dx = e x sin x −
e x sin x dx
= e x sin x− −e x cos x + e x cos dx
= e x sin x + e x cos x −
e x cos dx
Could this be an instance of the pitfall that was described in the preceding paragraph? Fortu-
nately not. The same integral appears on both sides of the equation, but with diff erent coeffi-
cients. If we move the integral from the right side to the left, we obtain
2
e x cos x dx = e x sin x + e x cos x dx + C (59)
which implies that
e x cos x dx = 1
2(e x sin x + e x cos x) + C (60)
Several comments are appropriate:
1. If we had taken the second application of Integration by Parts as U = sin x, dV = e x dx,
dU = cos x dx, V = e x, then we would have obtained e x cos x dx = e x sin x −
e x sin x dx
= e x sin x
− e x sin x
− e x cos dx= e x sin x − e x sin x +
e x cos dx =
e x cos x dx ,
which is a tautology. The statement obtained would not be incorrect, but we would have
wasted our time to obtain an end result that could have been stated immediately, and
which does not get us any closer to solving the problem at hand.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 141/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3086
2. Why did the constant of integration appear in equations (59), (60) but not in the preced-
ing equation? The preceding equation was of the form f ( x) dx = g( x) +
h( x) dx .
When both sides of an equation contain an indefinite integral, one understands that each
side is a set of functions which diff er by a constant; no more generality is achieved if we
add the notational comment that one may add a constant to one side. But, when one side
would consist of a single function — here it is e x sin x + e x cos x — the inclusion of a
constant changes the meaning from one specific function to all functions obtained from
it by adding any real number.
3. When we integrate the dv term, we appear to be selecting a specific antiderivative. Isthis restrictive? Should we be including a constant of integration? Try to convince
yourself that he selection of a specific antiderivative is not at all restrictive; that is, if you
do include a constant of integration, the changes to the formula will cancel each other
out. For that reason you should always choose the simplest antiderivative of v that is
convenient.
Reduction Formulæ Since integration by parts is helpful when the integrand is a product of
two functions, one of which does not become “more complicated” under diff erentiation, and
the other of which does not become “more complicated” under integration, this method should
be able to assist in the integration of the product of a polynomial and a sine, cosine, exponen-tial, or hyperbolic function. But what happens if we have to integrate other products of these
functions? In some cases the diff erentiations and integrations do not produce major changes
of simplicity, but they can lead to information that enables us to determine the integral, in the
way in which the preceding example was solved. This method is particularly important when
we wish to obtain an algorithm for evaluating certain general classes of integrals. Sometime
we will need to use the methods of the preceding paragraph in this connection, and sometimes
not.
Example C.41 Find a general formula for evaluating I (n) =
xne− x dx where n is a positive
integer.
Solution: Let u = xn, dv = e− x dx, so du = n xn−1 dx, v = −e− x. Then xne− x dx = − xne− x + n
xn−1e− x dx . (61)
or I (n) = − xne− x + n · I (n−1) . For any specific value of n, this formula may be used to evaluate
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 142/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3087
the integral recursively. For example, if we need to know x5e− x dx, we have
x5e− x dx
= I (5) = − x5e− x + 5 · I (4)
= − x5e− x + 5(− x4e− x + 4 · I (3))
= − x5e− x + 5(− x4e− x + 4(− x3e− x + 3 · I (2)))
= − x5e− x + 5(− x4e− x + 4(− x3e− x + 3(− x2e− x + 2 · I (1))))
= − x5e− x + 5(− x4e− x + 4(− x3e− x + 3(− x2e− x + 2(− x1e− x + 1 · I (0)))))
= − x5e− x − 5 x4e− x − 5 · 4 x3e− x − 5 · 4 · 3 x2e− x − 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 xe− x − 5!e− x + C
= − x5 + 5 x4 + 5 · 4 x3 + 5 · 4 · 3 x2 + 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 x1 + 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 x0
e− x + C
Example C.42 [1, Exercise 50, p. 458] Let n be an integer greater than 1. Find a procedure
— i.e., a reduction formula — that can be used to evaluate sec n x.
Solution: secn x dx =
secn−2 x ·
sec2 x dx
Applying integration by parts with u = secn−2 x, dv = sec2 x dx, we set
du = (n
−2) secn−3 x
·sec x tan x dx = (n
−2) secn−2 x
·tan x dx, v = tan x .
We obtain secn x dx = secn−2 x · tan x − (n − 2)
tan2 x · secn−2 x dx
= secn−2 x · tan x − (n − 2)
(sec2 x − 1) · secn−2 x dx
= secn−2 x · tan x − (n − 2)
secn x − secn−2 x
dx
which may be solved for the desired indefinite integral. First we move all copies of the same
integral to one side of the equation:
(n − 1)
secn x dx = secn−2 x · tan x dx + (n − 2)
secn−2 x dx .
Dividing by n − 1 yields the reduction formula secn x dx =
1
n − 1 secn−2 x · tan x +
n − 2
n − 1
secn−2 x dx . (62)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 143/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3088
Since we know the integrals of the 0th and 2nd powers of the secant we can now find the
integral of any even positive power. For the odd positive powers we may reduce the problemto the integration of sec x, which has not been achieved yet.
Example C.43 ([7, Exercise 36, p. 480]) Follow a substitution by integration by parts to inte-
grate
x5e x2
dx.
Solution: The obvious substitution is u = x2, so du = 2 x dx. Then x5e x2
dx = 1
2
u2eu du
to which we apply integration by parts with
U = u2
, dV = eu
du, dU = 2u du, V = eu
= 1
2
u2eu − 2
u du
= 1
2u2eu −
ueu du
to which we apply integration by parts with
u = u, dv = eu du, du = du, v = eu
= 1
2u2eu −
ueu −
eu du
= 1
2 u
2
e
u
− (ue
u
− e
u
)+
C
=
1
2u2 − u + 1
eu + C
=
1
2 x4 − x2 + 1
e x2
+ C
Your solution is incomplete unless you express the integral in terms of the original variable.
(This section will be discussed further at the beginning of the next lecture.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 144/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3089
C.13 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of January 29th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, January 27th, 2010, revised 01 February, 2010,
subject to further revision
C.13.1 §7.1 Integration by Parts (conclusion)
Recapitulation In the last lecture I introduced “Integration by Parts” — an integration tech-
nique related to the Product Rule of diff erentiation. I discussed the routine types of applications
we will see, as well as application to the integration of ln x and arctan x. I ended with an appli-
cation which required two successive applications of the technique, followed by the solution
of an equation.
7.1 Exercises
[1, Exercise 10, p. 457] “Evaluate the integral
arcsin x dx.”
Solution: Since you probably don’t know an antiderivative of the inverse sine, but do
know its derivative, we can try integration by parts with u = arcsin x, dv = dx, so
du = 1√
1 − x2dx and v = x. (I say try because not every attempt to apply one of the
integration rules will be successful: the rules are valid, and do convert the given integral
into another; but if you are unable to evaluate the new integral, you haven’t fully solved
the problem, and sometimes you may have made it even more difficult to solve.) arcsin x dx = x arcsin x −
x√
1 − x2dx
to which we apply the substitution w = 1 − x2, so dw = −2 x dx
= x arcsin x −
1√ w
−1
2 dw
= x arcsin x + 1
2 · 2
√ w + C
= x arcsin x +√
1 − x2 + C
Other substitutions that could have been used are w = x2, w = √ 1 − x2.
[1, Exercise 30, p. 458] Several methods suggest themselves for evaluating
1
0
r 3√ 4 + r 2
dr .
One solution using integration by parts can be based on
u = r 2, dv = r √
4 + r 2dr ⇒ du = 2r dr , v =
√ 4 + r 2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 145/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3090
Hence 1
0
r 3√ 4 + r 2
dr =r s
√ 4 + r 2
1
0− 2
1
0
r √
4 + r 2 dr
=r s
√ 4 + r 2
1
0− 2
1
2 · 2
3(4 + r 2)
32
1
0
=
r 2 − 8
3 ·
√ r 2 + 4
1
0
= 16 − 7
√ 5
3
which is approximately 0.115841, where the second integral was found by observationagain.
Some students may have difficulty observing the integral of dv, but a substitution could
make that phase easier.
For a solution that does not use integration by parts, try the substitution u =√
4 + r 2.
Then u · du = r dr , and r 2 = u2 − 4.
1
0
r 3√ 4 + r 2
dr =
√ 5
2
(u2 − 4) du
=u3
3 − 4u
√ 5
2
= 16 − 7
√ 5
3
as before.
Alternatively, one can use the substitution v = r 2 + 4, so dv = 2r dr . Then 1
0
r 3√ 4 + r 2
dr =
5
4
v − 4√ v
dv
2
=1
3 · v3
2 − 4 √ v5
4
=
5√
5
3 − 4
√ 5
−
8
3 − 8
,
which is the same value as obtained earlier twice.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 146/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3091
[1, Exercise 44, p. 458] 1. Prove the reduction formula cosn x dx = 1
ncosn−1 x · sin x + n − 1
n
cosn−2 x dx . (63)
2. Use Part 1 to evaluate
cos2 x dx .
3. Use Parts 1, 2 to evaluate
cos4 x ds.
Solution: First observe that the textbook has overlooked the restriction that n ≥ 1; the
equation is not meaningful when n = 0. We do know that, when n = 1, cos1 x dx =
1
1 sin x + 0. (64)
1. For n
≥ 2, we may take u = cosn−1 x, dv = cos x; then
du = (n − 1) cosn−2 x · (− sin x) dx
by the Chain Rule, and v = sin x. Let’s denote
cosn x dx by I n. Then a first
application of Integration by Parts yields cosn x dx = cosn−1 x · sin x + (n − 1)
cosn−2 x · sin2 x dx
= cosn−1 x · sin x + (n − 1)
cosn−2 x · (1 − cos2 x) dx
= cosn−1 x · sin x + (n − 1) ( I n−2 − I n) .
Collecting all terms in I n to the left side of the equation, and dividing by n − 1, weobtain
I n = 1
n· cosn−1 x · sin x +
n − 1
n I n−2
for n ≥ 2, as desired.
2. When n = 2, the reduction formula reduces to
I 2 = 1
2 cos x · sin x +
1
2
dx
= 1
2 cos x · sin x +
x
2 + C .
3. When n = 4, a second application gives
I 4 = 1
4 cos3 x · sin x +
3
4 I 2
= 1
4 cos3 x · sin x +
3
4
1
2 cos x · sin x +
x
2
+ C
= 1
4 · cos3 x sin x +
3
8 · cos x sin x +
3
8 · x + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 147/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3092
C.13.2 §7.2 Trigonometric Integrals
This section is concerned with integrating functions that can be expressed simply in terms of
trigonometric functions. The techniques rely on heavy use of familiar trigonometric identities.
In particular, integration of the following types of functions is considered:
• products of non-negative powers of sin x and cos x
• products of non-negative powers of tan x and sec x
The integration of other functions that can be reduced to functions of these two types is also
considered. Strategies are developed for products of these types. However, students may well
be able to use techniques already seen to integrate certain integrals of these types in ways other
than those suggested here. To reiterate: YOU MAY BE ABLE TO INTEGRATE CERTAIN
FUNCTIONS OF THE TYPES LISTED BY USING OTHER METHODS. The objective inall of these procedures is to “simplify” the integration; where the function is a product of
trigonometric functions, this “simplification” is usually measured by a reduction in the total
degree of the product, i.e., in the total number of trigonometric factors. Since the total is finite,
repeated applications of such procedures will eventually result in successful integration.
Two ways of integrating
sin2 x d x and
cos2 x d x: One way of evaluating these integrals
is to use one of the double angle formulæ from trigonometry:
sin2θ = 2sin θ · cos θ (65)
cos2θ = cos
2
θ − sin
2
θ = 2 cos
2
θ − 1 = 1 − 2sin
2
θ (66)which follow from the formulæ for the sine and cosine of a sum. Two formulæ involving cos 2θ
may be rewritten as
sin2 θ = 1
2(1 − cos2θ ) (67)
cos2 θ = 1
2(1 + cos2θ ) (68)
From these we obtain
sin2 x dx = 1
2 (1
−cos2 x) dx
= 1
2
x − 1
2 sin 2 x
+ C
cos2 x dx = 1
2
(1 + cos2 x) dx
= 1
2
x +
1
2 sin 2 x
+ C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 148/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3093
As we saw earlier in connection with cos2 x dx, another way to evaluate these integrals is
through integration by parts. See [1, Exercises 43(a), 44(a)(b) p. 458] which describe howto use the reduction formula in [1, Example 6, p. 457] and an analogue for cosines for these
purposes.
Strategy for evaluating
sin m x · cos n x d x
0. This is a recursive procedure: if the first 2 steps do not lead to a substitution producing an
integral that may be evaluated immediately, the last 2 steps will lead to a simplification
in the integrand, after which the procedure is begun again.
1. If n is odd, use the identity cos2 x = 1
−sin2 x to convert all but one of the cosine factors
into a function of sines. Then apply the substitution u = sin x with du = cos x dx.
2. If m is odd, proceed analogously to the preceding: use the same identity to convert all but
one of the sine factors into a function of cosines. Then apply the substitution u = cos x,
with du = −sin x dx.
3. If both m and n are even, use the identities cos2 x = 12
(1+cos2 x) and sin2 x = 12
(1−cos2 x)
to express the integrand as a sum of products of sines and cosines of 2 x. The degrees
of these terms will be less than the degree of the integrand we started with, so that we
have simplified the problem, and can repeat the procedure until we have completed the
integration.
4. When both m and n are odd, other identities may also be used to simplify the integrand;
for example, we can use sin 2 x = 2sin x · cos x combined with the two double angle
formulæ mentioned immediately above.
Example C.44 To determine
sin4 x · cos2 x dx.
Solution: sin4 x · cos2 x dx =
1 − cos2 x
2
2
· 1 + cos2 x
2 dx
= 1
−cos2 x
−cos2 2 x + cos3 2 x
8
dx
= 1
8 · x − 1
16 sin 2 x −
1 + cos4 x
16 dx
+ 1
16
1 − sin2 2 x
· d
dxsin(2 x) dx
etc. (Use the substitution u = sin 2 x to evaluate the last integral.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 149/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3094
(to be continued)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 150/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3095
C.14 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 01st, 2010
Release Date: Monday, February 01st, 2010,
subject to revision
C.14.1 §7.2 Trigonometric Integrals (conclusion)
Strategy for evaluating
sin m x · cos n x d x (Repetition from last lecture).
0. This is a recursive procedure: if the first 2 steps do not lead to a substitution producing an
integral that may be evaluated immediately, the last 2 steps will lead to a simplification
in the integrand, after which the procedure is begun again.
1. If n is odd, use the identity cos2
x = 1 − sin2
x to convert all but one of the cosine factorsinto a function of sines. Then apply the substitution u = sin x with du = cos x dx.
2. If m is odd, proceed analogously to the preceding: use the same identity to convert all but
one of the sine factors into a function of cosines. Then apply the substitution u = cos x,
with du = −sin x dx.
3. If both m and n are even, use the identities cos2 x = 12
(1+cos2 x) and sin2 x = 12
(1−cos2 x)
to express the integrand as a sum of products of sines and cosines of 2 x. The degrees
of these terms will be less than the degree of the integrand we started with, so that we
have simplified the problem, and can repeat the procedure until we have completed the
integration.
4. When both m and n are odd, other identities may also be used to simplify the integrand;
for example, we can use sin 2 x = 2sin x · cos x combined with the two double angle
formulæ mentioned immediately above.
Example C.45 To determine
sin4 x · cos2 x dx.
Solution: sin4 x · cos2 x dx =
1 − cos2 x
2
2
· 1 + cos2 x
2 dx
= 1
−cos2 x
−cos2 2 x + cos3 2 x
8
dx
= 1
8 · x − 1
16 sin 2 x −
1 + cos4 x
16 dx
+ 1
16
1 − sin2 2 x
· d
dxsin(2 x) dx
etc. (Use the substitution u = sin 2 x to evaluate the last integral.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 151/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3096
Strategy for evaluating
tan m x
·sec n x d x. Earlier I discussed an algorithm for integrating
products of non-negative integer powers of sines and cosines. I now consider another important
class of products of trigonometric functions.
1. The basis of the solution I propose for most of these cases is to use the facts that
d (tan x) = sec2 x dx
d (sec x) = sec x tan x dx
sec2 x = tan2 x + 1
2. If n is even and n ≥ 2, then we can replace the factor secn x by
sec2 x
n−22 d
dxtan x =
tan2 x + 1
n−22 · d
dxtan x
which, when multiplied by tanm x — where m has any value — yields an integral that is
simplified by the substitution u = tan x.
3. If n = 0 we have
tanm x dx:
(a) When m = 0, the solution is
dx = x + C .
(b) When m = 1, the function integrates as tan x = ln
|sec x
|+ C =
−ln
|cos x
|+ C .
(c) When m ≥ 2, one may detach 2 powers of the tangent from the others, replacing
them by sec2 x − 1, thereby reducing the problem to the integration of a lower
power of the tangent, and an integral of the form
tanm−2 x · sec2 x dx, which can
be integrated following a substitution u = tan x.
Henceforth we may assume that n is odd.
4. If m is odd, we may detach one power of tan x from tanm x and one power of sec x from
secn x, and write the integrand as
tan2 x
m
−1
2 · secn−1 x · d dx
sec x
which is equal to sec2 x − 1
m−12 · secn−1 x · d
dxsec x
and can be integrated after a substitution u = sec x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 152/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3097
5. In the only remaining cases m is even and n is odd. One method would be to transform
the entire integrand into powers of sec x and then to use the reduction formula [1, Exer-cise 50, p. 458] to reduce everything to the problem of integrating sec x. Other reductions
are possible: for example, into a function expressible in terms of cos x, with one factor
cos x left over — this would permit a substitution u = cos x that converts the problem to
the type we shall meet in [1, §7.3]; alternatively, one may express the integrand as a sum
of powers of tan x, and develop a reduction formula for them (cf. [1, endpapers, item 75
p. 9.]).
The integral
tan x dx. As observed above,
tan x dx = − ln | cos x| + C = ln | sec x| + C .
The integral
sec x dx. The textbook observes that
sec x dx = ln | sec x + tan x| + C .
Do not forget the absolute value signs when you quote these results, although you may expect
that in many of the problems you consider, where sec x + tan x is positive, omission of the signs
may not produce any visible error.While it is possible to prove the validity of the preceding equation simply by diff erentiation
of the alleged antiderivative, a more direct proof requires some ingenuity.44
Strategy for evaluating
cot m x · csc n x d x. Analogues of the preceding techniques can
simplify integrals of these types.
44One way to derive this result is to observe that
sec x = 1
cos x=
cos x
1
−sin2 x
= cos x(1 − sin x)(1 + sin x)
= 1
2
cos x
1 − sin x +
cos x
1 + sin x
using ideas of partial fractions that we shall be meeting in [1, §7.4]. Each of these summands can be integrated
as a logarithm (See [33, pp. 505-506 ].)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 153/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3098
“Other” trigonometric identities. By adding and subtracting the expansions of sin( A ± B)
and cos( A ± B), one may obtain the following identities
sin A · cos B = 1
2(sin( A − B) + sin( A + B)) (69)
sin A · sin B = 1
2(cos( A − B) − cos( A + B)) (70)
cos A · cos B = 1
2(cos( A − B) + cos( A + B)) (71)
These identities permit the derivation of another class of useful identities. If we replace A − B
and A + B respectively by U and V — equivalently, if we replace A by V + U
2 and B by
V − U
2 ,
we obtain
sin U + sin V = sin V + U 2
· cos V − U 2
(72)
sin U − sin V = sin −V + U
2 · cos
V + U
2 (73)
cos U + cos V = cos V + U
2 · cos
V − U
2 (74)
cos U − cos V = sin V + U
2 · sin
V − U
2 (75)
Example C.46 Integrate
(sin 50 x · cos 12 x) dx.
Solution: (One possible solution) (sin 50 x · cos 12 x) dx =
1
2
(sin 38 x + sin 62 x) dx
= −1
2 · 1
38 · cos 38 x − 1
2 · 1
62 · cos 62 x + C
Example C.47 ([7, Exercise 62, p. 488]) Find the volume obtained by rotating the region
bounded by the curves y = cos x, x = 0, y = 0, x = π2
about the axis y = 1.
Solution: I give a solution, by washers. (The problem can be solved by cylindrical shells also,
but that method is much more difficult.)
Volume = π
2
012
−(1
−cos x)2 dx
=
π2
0
(2 cos x − cos2 x) dx
=
2sin x − x
2 − sin 2 x
4
π2
0
= π
2 − π
4
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 154/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3099
7.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 30, p. 466] To evaluate
π3 0
tan5 x sec6 x dx.
Solution: This integral can be evaluated in at least two diff erent ways.
1. Since the exponent of the secant is even, we can use a substitution u = tan x, so
du = sec2 x dx.
π3
0
tan5 x sec6 x dx = tan π
3
tan0
u5
u2 + 1
2du
=
√ 3
0
u5
u2 + 12
du
=
√ 3
0
u9 + 2u7 + u5
2du
=
u10
10 +
u8
4 +
u6
6
√ 3
0
= 243
10 +
81
4 +
27
6 =
981
20
2. Alternatively, since the exponent of the tangent is odd, we can use a substitution
v = sec x, so dv = sec x · tan x dx:
π3
0
tan5 x sec6 x dx =
2
1
(v2 − 1)2v5 dv
=
v10
10 − v8
4 +
v6
6
2
1
= 981
20
[1, Exercise 48, p. 466] To evaluate
dx
cos x − 1 .
Solution: This integral is not of any of the forms shown in the chapter, so some ingenuity
is needed. I give more than one solution.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 155/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3100
1. First solution, using double angle formula. When you see cos x − 1, that should
suggest the identity cos 2θ = 1 − 2sin
2
θ . Applying that identity here, with θ =
x
2 ,yields
dx
cos x − 1 =
dx
−2 sin2 x2
= −1
2
csc2 x
2 d x = cot
x
2 + C
2. Second solution, using the identity sin2 x + cos2 x = 1. The idea here resembles
the rationalization of fractions involving square roots, seen earlier.
dx
cos x − 1 =
1
cos x − 1 · cos x + 1
cos x + 1
dx
=
cos x + 1
− sin2 xdx
= −
cos x
sin2 xdx −
csc2 x dx
The first integral may be evaluated in several ways, for example by using the sub-
stitution u = sin x, so du = −cos x dx. That integral becomes
cos x
sin2 xdx = du
u2
= −1
u+ C 1 = −csc x + C 1.
The second integral can be seen immediately to be −cot x + C 2. The two together
give us dx
cos x − 1 = csc x + cot x + C .
But, are the two answers equal? This can be seen through trigonometric identities. For
example
csc x + cot x = 1 + cos x
sin x =
2cos2 x
22 sin x
2 · cos x
2= cot
x
2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 156/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3101
C.15 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 03rd, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, February 03rd, 2010,
subject to revision
C.15.1 §7.3 Trigonometric Substitution
In this section we describe a type of substitutions which simplify certain commonly met inte-
grals. We approach these substitutions in the reverse direction from that used earlier. Whereas
earlier we investigated substitutions of the form u = g( x), this time we will usually formulate
our substitutions first in the form x = h(u); that is, we will look for a substitution that will
simplify the integrand, and then try to implement it. We usually proceed “mechanically” in
these problems; but, in principle, we are postulating the existence of an inverse function, and
should be checking that there really is an inverse whenever we use the method. I will try to
go through some of those steps in the first examples we consider, but, in practice, we often
become careless and don’t check everything unless something indicates a problem. This is
unwise; the reason that it “works” is that we usually confine the substitutions to certain well
understood pairs of functions / inverses, where all of the snags have already been worked out.
Example C.48 [1, Exercise 4, p. 472] To evaluate
2√
3
0
x3
√ 16 − x2
dx.
Solution: A first look at the integrand suggests that the complication comes from the ex-
pression√
16 − x2 in the denominator. We could try to simplify by giving this a new name,
u =
√ 16 − x
2
. That leads todu = − x√
16 − x2dx ⇒ x dx = −u du
and so the integral becomes 2
4
(u2 − 16) du =
u3
3 − 16u
2
4
= 40
3 .
But we would like to illustrate the notion of trigonometric substitution here (in a prob-
lem where it isn’t really needed!) The component√
16 − x2 suggests that we might wish
to interpret the problem geometrically, with this component arising from an application of
Pythagoras’s Theorem to a right-angled triangle; equivalently, from the identity that
sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1 .
To do this, we can first divide out the factor 16, which, when it leaves the square root, will
reappear outside as 4:√
16 − x2 = 4
1 − x2
16 = 4
1 −
x
4
2
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 157/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3102
This suggests a substitution
x
4 = sin v or, equivalently, x = 4 sin v
that will make x
4 into a sine or a cosine — either one will work. When we express the substi-
tution that way we are really working with the inverse — to conform with our earlier theory
about substitutions we should be expressing the new variable in terms of the old; so we should
be starting with
v = arcsin x
4 .
The range of values of x that interest us is 0
≤ x
≤ 2
√ 3, equivalently 0
≤ x
4 ≤
√ 3
2
, and
we know that the inverse sine function is defined over this domain. So, beginning with the
substitution above, we obtain
dv = 1
1 −
x4
2 · 1
4 d x =
dx√ 16 − x2
,
and the integral transforms as follows:
2
√ 3
0
x3
√ 16
− x2
dx =
arcsin 2
√ 3
4
arcsin 04
64 sin3 v dv
= 64
π
3
0
sin3 v dv
which we proceed to evaluate using the methods of the preceding section:
64
π3
0
sin3 v dv = 64
π3
0
sin v
1 − cos2 v
dv
= 64
− cos v +
1
3 cos3 v
π3
0
= 40
3
In practice this method works smoothly, but one must occasionally be careful about theevaluation of the inverse function, remembering our original definitions of the restricted inter-
val where the inverse was taken. The method is indicated whenever we see expressions like√ 1 − x2 or, more generally,
√ a2 − x2, since we can transform the latter into the former by di-
vision by a positive real number. The inverse cosine could be used instead of the inverse sine,
and the results would be no more difficult.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 158/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3103
Example C.49 ([7, Exercise 8, p. 494]) Evaluate √
x2 − 4
x4
dx.
Solution: We need a substitution that will convert x2 to 4 times the square of a secant. 45 One
way to achieve this is to make u have the property that
x = 2 sec u ;
so the actual substitution will be
u = arcsec x
2 ,
which implies that
dx = 2 sec u tan u du .
Under the substitution what happens to
√ x
2
− 4? It becomes
√ 4tan
2
u, i.e., 2| tan u|. Do weneed the absolute signs? Recall that the inverse secant takes its values in the two intervals
0 ≤ u < π2
and π ≤ u ≤ 3π2
. In these two intervals the tangent is always positive, so the absolute
signs may be dropped.
√ x2 − 4
x4 dx =
2 tan u
16 sec4 u· 2sec u · tan u du
= 1
4
sin2 u · cos u du
= 1
12 sin3 u + C
We can’t leave the answer in this form, as it must be expressed in terms of the original variable
x. Since
sin u = tan u · cos u
= tan u
sec u
=
12
√ x2 − 4
x2
,
112
sin3 u = 112
· ( x2 − 4)3
2
x3
Hence √ x2 − 4
x4 dx =
( x2 − 4)32
12 x3 + C .
45Alternatively, we could make x2 four times the square of a hyperbolic cosine.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 159/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3104
Example C.50 I have avoided computing the area of a disk until now. It is trivial with a
trigonometric substitution. If the disk is the set of points ( x, y) such that x2
+ y2
≤ R2
, then it isthe region bounded by the 2 graphs y = ±√
R2 − x2. Its area is R
− R
√ R2 − x2 −
−
√ R2 − x2
dx =
R
− R
2√
R2 − x2 dx
=
R
0
4√
R2 − x2 dx ,
since the integrand is even, and the interval of integration is symmetric around 0. The sub-
stitution u = cos−1 x R
for 0 ≤ x ≤ R implies that cos u = x R
or x = R cos u, where the
interval of integration is now from u = cos−1 0 = π2
to u = cos−1 1 = 0; dx = − R sin u du;
√ R2 − x2 = R| sin u| = R sin u, since the sine is positive in this interval. The integral transformsto
4
R
0
√ R2 − x2 dx = 4
0
π2
| R sin u|(− R sin u) du
= −4 R2
0
π2
sin2 u du
since the sine is positive for 0 ≤ u ≤ π2
= −4 R2
u
2 − sin
2u
4 0
π2
= −4 R20 − π
4
= π R2
If we had not used the evenness of the integrand to reduce the original problem to integrating
over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ R, there would have been a serious difficulty. That is because theinverse cosine function takes its values between 0 and π.
If we had naively carried through the substitution over the entire interval − R ≤ x ≤ R,
we would have obtained
4
R
− R R2 − x2 dx = 4
− π2
π2
| R sin u|(− R sin u) du
= 4
0
π2
| R sin u|(− R sin u) du + 4
− π2
0
| R sin u|(− R sin u) du
= 4
0
π2
( R sin u)(− R sin u) du + 4
− π2
0
(− R sin u)(− R sin u) du
= −4 R2
0
π2
sin2 u du + 4 R2
− π2
0
sin2 u du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 160/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3105
=
−4 R2
0
−π
2
sin2 u du + 4 R2 π
2
0
sin2 u du .
But note that the integrand is an even function, so the two integrals would cancel, and
the answer would be 0. This is clearly incorrect, but what went wrong? The error was
in attempting to replace x by R cos u: u is not uniquely defined for − π2 ≤ x ≤ π
2! We
could, though, have used a substitution u = sin−1 x R
over the full interval, and the correct
answer would have been obtained. We would have defined u = arcsin x R
, so sin u = x R
,
cos u du = 1 R · dx.
4
R
− R
R2 − x2 dx = 4
π2
− π2
( R cos u) R cos u du
= 4 R2 π
2
− π2
1 + cos 2u
2 du
= 2 R2
u +
sin wu
2
π2
− π2
= 2 R2
π
2 + 0
−−π
2 + 0
= π R2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 161/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3106
C.16 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 05th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, February 05th, 2010
C.16.1 §7.3 Trigonometric Substitution (conclusion)
Table of trigonometric substitutions I can expand the table of substitutions of this type
given in the textbook:
Expression Inverse Substitution Substitution Identity√
a2 − x2 θ = arcsin xa
x = a sin θ 1 − sin2 θ = cos2 θ
(−a ≤ x ≤ +a) −π2 ≤ θ ≤ π
2√ a2 − x2 θ = arccos xa
x = a cos θ 1 − cos2 θ = sin2 θ
(−a ≤ x ≤ +a) (0 ≤ θ ≤ π)
√ a2 + x2 θ = arctan x
a x = a tan θ 1 + tan2 θ = sec2 θ
(−∞ < x < +∞)−π
2 ≤ θ ≤ π
2
√
x2 − a2 θ = arcsec xa
x = a sec θ sec2 θ − 1 = tan2 θ
(−∞ < x ≤ −a orπ ≤ θ < 3π
2 or
a ≤ x < ∞) 0 ≤ θ < π2
I have shown both sine and cosine versions of the first substitution, and could similarly haveproduced a cotangent version of the tangent substitution, and a cosecant version of the secant
substitution; in practice the latter two variants are not used frequently, and usually o ff er no
advantages over the substitutions shown.
Another trigonometric substitution will be discussed in the next section. It is used not to
simplify a square root, but to simplify denominator terms of the form x2 + a2.
7.3 Exercises
[1, Exercise 24, p. 472] Evaluate 1√ t 2
−6t + 13
dt .
Solution: I shall complete the square of the quadratic polynomial in the denominator
in order that, after a first substitution, this integral will be of a type that we recognize.
Since
t 2 − 6t + 13 = (t − 3)2 + 4 = 4
t − 3
2
2
+ 1
,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 162/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3107
a first substitution u = t − 3
2 , which implies that dt = 2 du, could be applied:
dt √ t 2 − 6t + 13
=
du√
u2 + 1.
Now I take u = tan θ , i.e., θ = arctan u. Thus −π2
< θ < + π2
.
du√
u2 + 1=
sec2 θ
| sec θ | d θ
=
| sec θ | d θ
=
sec θ d θ since − π
2 < θ < π
2
= ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
= ln
± 1 + tan2 θ 1
2+ tan θ
+ C
where the + sign is taken since |θ | < π2
and the cosine
and secant are positive in Quadrants ##1,4,
= ln
1 + u2 1
2+ u
+ C
= ln 1 + t − 3
2
2
12
+ t − 3
2 + C
= ln
t 2 − 6t + 13 1
2+ (t − 3)
+ (C − ln2)
And I could rename the constant with a single letter, e.g., K = C − ln2.
Hyperbolic substitutions It is possible to achieve the same sorts of simplifications by using
inverse hyperbolic functions. Since we have spent little time in becoming comfortable with
the hyperbolic functions, I will not discuss these substitutions in general, but may apply them
in specific cases.
Example C.51 This is [1, Exercise 31, p. 472].
1. Use trigonometric substitution to show that dx√
x2 + a2= ln
x +
√ x2 + a2
+ C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 163/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 164/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3109
Example C.52 ([7, Exercise 26, p. 494]) Evaluate x2
√ 4 x − x2
dx.
Solution: Completion of the square yields
4 x − x2 = −( x2 − 4 x) = 4 − ( x2 − 4 x + 4) = 4 − ( x − 2)2 = 22
1 − x − 2
2
2 .
Hence x2
√ 4 x − x2
dx =
x2
2
1 −
x−2
2
2dx
= (2u + 2)2
2 √ 1 − u2
2 du
under substitution u = x − 2
2
= 4
sin2 v + 2sin v + 1
dv
under substitution v = arcsin u = arcsin x − 2
2
= 4
1 − cos2v
2 dv − 8cos v + 4v
= 6v − sin 2v − 8cos v + C
= 6v − 2(4 + sin v)cos v + C
Now the arcsine function takes values between −π2
and π2
, in which interval the cosine is posi-
tive; hence
cos v = +
1 − sin2 v =
√ 1 − u2 =
1
2
√ 4 x − x2 .
We conclude that x2
√ 4 x − x2
dx = 6 arcsin x − 2
2 − x + 6
2 ·
√ 4 x − x2 + C .
Example C.53 ([7, Exercise 28, p. 494]) Evaluate 1
5 − 4 x − x2 5
2 dx.
Solution: As in the preceding example, I shall complete the square of the quadratic polynomial
in the denominator in order that, after a first substitution, this integral will be of a type that we
recognize. Since
5 − 4 x − x2 = −( x2 + 4 x − 5) = 9 − ( x + 2)2 = 9
1 − x + 2
3
2 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 165/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3110
a first substitution u = x + 2
3 , which implies that d x = 3 du, could be applied:
1
5 − 4 x − x2 5
2
dx = 1
81
du
(1 − u2)52
.
Now we can apply a second substitution u = sin φ — actually it is φ = arcsin u – where
d φ = du1 − u2
12
. We obtain
1
81
du
(1 − u2)52
= 1
81
d φ
cos4 φ
= 181
sec4 φ d φ
= 1
81
tan2 φ + 1
sec2 φ d φ
= 1
81
1
3 tan3 φ + tan φ
+ C .
The function φ was defined to be an arcsine, so its values are in the interval −π2 ≤ φ ≤ π
2, in
which the cosine is positive. Hence
tan φ = sin φ
cos φ=
sin φ
+
1 − sin2 φ
= u
√ 1 − u2
=
x+23
1 −
x+23
2=
x + 2√ 9 − 4 x − x2
and 1
81
1
3 tan3 φ + tan φ
=
( x + 2)3
2435 − 4 x − x2
32
+ x + 2
815 − 4 x − x2
12
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 166/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3111
C.17 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 08th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, February 08th, 2010
C.17.1 §7.4 Integration of Rational Functions by Partial Fractions
In this section we shall see that an entire class of functions can be integrated by a systematic
algebraic decomposition procedure, followed by specific methods for the various components
into which we decompose the functions.
An example to illustrate the general procedure Before describing the general procedure
let us consider some examples that will make it easier to comprehend.
[1, Exercise 14, p. 482] Evaluate the integral
1
( x + a)( x + b) d x.
Solution: There will be two quite diff erent solutions, depending on whether a = b.
Case a = b: This can be integrated directly by observation, or by using the substitution
u = x + a. 1
( x + a)2 d x = − 1
x + a+ C .
Case a b: We try to decompose the integrand into the sum of fractions whose denom-
inators are, respectively, x + a, and x + b. The degrees of the numerators must be
less than these polynomials of degree 1, so they have to have degree 0, i.e., theyhave to be constants. So suppose that
1
( x + a)( x + b) =
α
x + a+
β
x + b.
It can be shown algebraically that such a decomposition is always possible; all that
is missing is to know the values of the constants α and β. The last equation, after
multiplication of both sides by ( x + a)( x + b), yields
1 = α · ( x + b) + β · ( x + a) .
Here are 2 ways to find α and β:
1. Express both sides of the equation as polynomials in x, and equate the coeffi-
cients of corresponding powers of x. The left side is 1 x0 + 0 x1. Thus
degree 0: 1 = α · b + β · a
degree 1: 0 = α + β
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 167/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3112
Solving these equations gives
α = 1
b − a
β = 1
a − b
2. This equation must be true for all values of x. Give x “convenient” values to
obtain equations in α and β, and solve those equations. Two “convenient” val-
ues are x = −a and x = −b. They give, respectively, the following equations:
1 = α · (−a + b) + β · 0 ⇒ α = 1
b − a
1 = β · (0) + β · (−b + a) ⇒ β =
1
a − b
We may now complete the integration: 1
( x + a)( x + b) d x =
1
a − b
− 1
x + a+
1
x + b
dx
= 1
a − b(− ln( x + a) + ln( x + b)) + C
= 1
a − bln
| x + b|| x + a| + C
=
1
a − b ln x + b
x + a
+ C
This family of functions could be written in other ways. For example, since C · (a−b) = ln eC ·(a−b), we could call eC ·(a−b) K , and write the family as
1
a − b
ln
x + b
x + a
+ ln K
=
1
a − bln
K · x + b
x + a
where K serves as the constant of integration.
Polynomials Recall that a polynomial [1, p. 28] is a function of the form
P( x) = an xn + an−1 xn−1 + · · · + a1 x1 + a0 x0
where a0, . . . , an are real numbers, called the coe fficients of the polynomial. Except for the
zero polynomial, which is the constant function 0, all polynomials will have a largest integer
m such that am 0; m is called the degree of the (non-zero) polynomial, and am is called the
leading coefficient; a0 is called the constant term. We usually write x0 simply as 1, and x1
simply as x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 168/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3113
Rational Functions A rational function is a ratio of polynomials of the form
A( x) B( x)
where A and B are polynomial functions. The function will have as discontinuities the roots of
B, if there are any.
The goal of partial fraction decompositions In a partial fraction decomposition we express
a ratio of polynomials as a sum of “partial” fractions — fractions that have special properties.
In these “partial” fractions the denominator polynomials will always be powers of one poly-
nomial that is irreducible, i.e., it cannot be factored further (unless we move beyond the real
number system to, for example, the complex number system — with which you are not ex-
pected to be familiar). It is a theorem of algebra that
Theorem C.54 If a non-zero real polynomial is irreducible then it must be of one of the fol-
lowing forms:
1. a non-zero constant
2. a polynomial of degree 1, of the form ax + b, where a 0.
3. a polynomial of degree 2 without real roots, i.e., of the form a x2 + bx + c where a 0
and b2 < 4ac.
The only type of ratio to which we apply this decomposition is one where the degree of the
numerator is strictly less than the degree of the denominator; if the rational function that we
start with does not have this property, then we will have to preprocess it to obtain a ratio of this
type; after the procedure of partial fraction decomposition is applied, the resulting “partial”
fractions will have the same property — that the degree of their numerator will always be
less than that of the denominator. We will then show that we are able to integrate all partial
fractions of these types, and so we will be able to integrate all rational polynomials A( x)
B( x).
The procedure we shall develop depends on having such a factorization of the denominator
of the given ratio into irreducible polynomials. In this course we shall not be concerned with
finding the factorization itself, beyond knowing
• that P(a) = 0 ⇒ x − a divides P( x) — the so-called “Factor Theorem”;
• how to factorize quadratic polynomials, both by using the quadratic formula, and by
“completing the square”;
• that, for any positive integer n,
an − bn = (a − b)(an−1 + an−2b + . . . + abn−2 + bn−1)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 169/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 170/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3115
Suppose that, instead of the given integral, we wished to integrate x3 + (a + b) x2 + abx + 1
( x + a)( x + b) dx .
This function cannot be expanded into partial fractions until it is arranged that the degree
of the numerator — presently 3 — be less than the degree of the denominator — 2. If
we divide the denominator into the numerator, we find that
x3 + (a + b) x2 + abx + 1 = x · ( x + a)( x + b) + 1 .
Hence the integral may be expressed as
x +
1
( x + a)( x + b)
dx, and its value will be
x2
2 +
1
a − bln
x + b
x + a
+ C
What would have happened if we had attempted to expand this function into partial frac-
tions? No such decomposition can exist. Using the first method (equating coe fficients of
corresponding powers) we would have obtained 4 equations which would overdetermine
the constants α and β, and which would be inconsistent — there would be no solution.
But, if we used the second method, and didn’t take enough equations, we might not no-
tice that there was an inconsistency, and the alleged partial fraction would be incorrect.
The general procedure. The general procedure has many facets, and some will not be ex-
plicitly discussed in the lecture; you are expected to work many problems in this section of the
textbook, not only problems discussed in the lecture or appearing on WeBWorK or the quizzes.
Remember the steps we need to follow:
1. The first step in any of these problems is to ensure that the degree of the
numerator must be less than that of the denominator. If it is not, you must
divide the denominator into the numerator, obtaining a quotient and a re-
mainder. The quotient integrates as a polynomial, and we are left with the
ratio of the remainder to the denominator, for which the methods we are
discussing will enable a complete solution.
2. Factorize the denominator into a product of polynomials of degrees 1 and 2which are irreducible, i.e., which do not factorize further into lower degree
polynomials. The quadratic factors will be those having no real roots. Group
factors which are exactly the same together, so that your denominator is a
product of powers of distinct, irreducible polynomials.
3. Then the fraction must be decomposed into partial fractions using methods
we have illustrated before, and continue in this lecture.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 171/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3116
Example C.55 [1, Exercise 28, p. 482] Evaluate the integral x2 − 2 x − 1
( x − 1)2
( x2
+ 1)
d x.
Solution: The denominator has two distinct irreducible factors: x − 1, of degree 1 and multi-
plicity 2, and x2 + 1, an irreducible quadratic factor of degree 2 and multiplicity 1. The degree
of the numerator is less than 4, which is the degree of the denominator, so there is no need for
any long division. One type of partial fraction decomposition is of the form
x2 − 2 x − 1
( x − 1)2( x2 + 1) =
α x + β
( x − 1)2 +
γ x + δ
x2 + 1
in which we take the most general numerator in each case, of degree less than the degree of the
denominator. This is not the most useful type of partial fraction decomposition, but we will
carry this step out and then improve on it. Multiplying both sides by ( x
−1)2( x2 + 1), we obtain
a polynomial equation
x2 − 2 x − 1 = (α x + β)( x2 + 1) + (γ x + δ)( x2 − 2 x + 1)
⇔ x2 − 2 x − 1 = (α + γ ) x3 + ( β − 2γ + δ) x2 + (α + γ − 2δ) x + ( β + δ)
Equating coefficients of corresponding powers of x yields equations corresponding to the terms
of degrees 3, 2, 1, 0:
α + γ = 0
β − 2γ + δ = 1
α + γ − 2δ = −2 β + δ = −1
which we proceed to solve, obtaining
(α,β,γ,δ) = (1, −2, −1, 1) ,
so the decomposition is
x2 − 2 x − 1
( x − 1)2( x2 + 1) =
x − 2
( x − 1)2 +
− x + 1
x2 + 1 .
(to be continued)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 172/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3117
C.18 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 10th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, February 10th, 2010
C.18.1 §7.4 Integration of Rational Functions by Partial Fractions (conclusion)
The general procedure (continued).
Example C.56 (continued from Example2010:31 on page 3116 of these notes, cf. [1, Exercise
28, p. 482]) We shall see that we will be able to integrate the second summand immediately, by
breaking it into two parts. We can integrate the first summand if we first apply the substitution
u = x − 1:
x − 2( x − 1)2 dx =
u − 1
u2 du =
1u
− 1u2
du
= ln |u| + 1
u + C
= ln | x − 1| + 1
x − 1 + C
In practice we anticipate the results of this substitution by refining the partial fraction decom-
position: in place of a summand of the form
an−1 xn−1 + an−2 x
n−2 + . . . + a0
( x−
a)n
we repeatedly divide x − a into the numerator, so that we can express the numerator as a sum
of powers of x −a; then we decompose the fraction and divide excess powers of x −a, to obtain
a decomposition of the form
bn
( x − a)n +
bn−1
( x − a)n−1 . . . +
b1
x − a
in which we can integrate each of the summands at sight. This decomposition can be accom-
plished as a second phase of partial fraction decomposition, or immediately, by assuming a
decomposition of the form
x2 − 2 x − 1
( x − 1)2( x2 + 1) =
ζ
( x − 1)2 +
η
x − 1 +
γ x + δ
x2 + 1
which leads to the polynomial identity
x2 − 2 x − 1 = ζ ( x2 + 1) + η( x − 1)( x2 + 1) + (γ x + δ)( x − 1)2
⇔ x2 − 2 x − 1 = (η + γ ) x3 + (ζ − η − 2γ + δ) x2 + (η + γ − 2δ) x + (ζ − η + δ)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 173/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3118
which we proceed to solve, obtaining
(ζ ,η ,γ,δ) = (−1, 1, −1, 1) ,
x2 − 2 x − 1
( x − 1)2( x2 + 1) d x
=
−1
( x − 1)2 dx +
1
( x − 1)1 d x +
− x
x2 + 1 d x +
1
x2 + 1 d x
= 1
x − 1 + ln | x − 1| − 1
2 ln | x2 + 1| + arctan x + C
= 1
x − 1
+ ln
| x
−1
| − 1
2
ln( x2 + 1) + arctan x + C
= 1
x − 1 + ln
| x − 1|√ x2 + 1
+ arctan x + C
7.4 Exercises
[1, Example 19, p. 482] Evaluate the integral
1
( x + 5)2( x − 1) d x .
Solution: Since the degree of the numerator is 0, and that of the denominator is 2 + 1 =
3 > 0, we can skip the long division step. We have to decompose the fraction into a sum
of partial fractions, which we may take to be of the form
1
( x + 5)2( x − 1) =
A
( x + 5)2 +
B
( x + 5)1 +
C
( x − 1)1 .
Multiplying both sides by ( x + 5)2( x − 1), we obtain
1 = A( x − 1) + B( x − 1)( x + 5) + C ( x + 5)2 . (76)
i.e.,
0 x2 + 0 x1 + 1 x0 = A( x − 1) + B( x2 + 4 x − 5) + C ( x2 + 10 x + 25) . (77)
One way to obtain the values of A, B, C is simply to equate coefficients of like powers of
x:
0 = B + C
0 = A + 4 B + 10C
1 = − A − 5 B + 25C
which we may solve to show that ( A, B, C ) =−1
6, − 1
36, 1
36
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 174/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3119
Another method of solution is to assign to x “convenient” values of x, and thereby obtain
more convenient equations to solve. Two values which re “convenient” are x = 1 and x = −5, and they yield from equation (76) the following equations:
x = 1 ⇒ 1 = 36C
and
x = −5 ⇒ 1 = −6 A
implying that A = −16
and C = 136
. To obtain the value of B we would need a third
equation. This could be obtained by equating coefficients, as in the earlier method, or by
simply choosing another value; e.g.,
x = −1 ⇒ 1 = −2 A − 8 B + 16C = 26 − 8 B + 16
36
which yields the same values as before. Integration is straightforward:
1
( x + 5)2( x − 1) d x =
−16
( x + 5)2 +
− 136
x + 5 +
136
x − 1
dx
= 1
6 · 1
x + 5 − 1
36 ln | x + 5| +
1
36 ln | x − 1| + K .
This indefinite integral could be further simplified, e.g., by combining the two logarith-
mic terms into the logarithm of a quotient of polynomials of degree 1.
Repeated irreducible quadratic factors.
Example C.57 [7, Exercise 38, p. 504] To integrate x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 dx.
Solution: What distinguishes this example from those studied earlier is the multiplicity of the
irreducible quadratic factor x2 + 1 in the denominator; this is the first case we have seen where
that multiplicity exceeds 1.
Before I begin the application of the methods of this section, I will apply a substitution that
could simplify this problem. By setting u = x2, I find that du = 2 x dx, x2 = u − 1, so x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 dx =
1
2
u2 + 1
u(u + 1)2 du .
We can seek a partial fraction decomposition:
u2 + 1
u(u + 1)2 =
A
u+
B
(u + 1)2 +
C
u + 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 175/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3120
which implies identity of the numerators after the right side is taken to a common denominator:
u2 + 1 = A(u + 1)2 + Bu + Cu(u + 1)
in which I will take several “convenient” values of u to obtain equations that can be solved for
the coefficients;
u = −1 ⇒ 2 = 0 − B + 0 ⇒ B = −2
u = 0 ⇒ 1 = A
u = 1 ⇒ 2 = 4 A + B + 2C ⇒ C = 0
Hence x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 dx =
1
2
1
u− 2
(u + 1)2
du
= 1
2 · ln |u| +
1
u + 1 + K
= ln | x| + 1
x2 + 1 + K .
The preceding was fortuitous, a consequence of the fact that a substitution was possible. Now
let’s use the problem as an example for the implementation of partial fraction decomposition.
We proceed analogously to the last phase of the preceding example, always taking the numer-
ator to be the most general polynomial whose degree is less than the degree of the irreducible
factor in the denominator, but now taking separate summands for the powers of that irreducible
factor. Thus we assume a decomposition of the form
x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 =
α
x +
β x + γ x2 + 1
2 +
δ x + η
x2 + 1
and multiply through by the denominator on the left, to obtain the polynomial identity
x4 + 1 = α x2 + 1
2+ ( β x + γ ) x + (δ x + η)
x2 + 1
x
in which the identification of coefficients of like powers of x leads to the 5 equations
α + δ = 1
η = 0
2α + β + δ = 0
γ + η = 0
α = 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 176/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3121
implying that
(α,β,γ,δ,η) = (1, −2, 0, 0, 0) .
x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 =
1
x +
−2 x x2 + 1
2 .
x4 + 1
x( x2 + 1)2 d x =
1
xdx +
−2 x x2 + 1
2 dx
= ln | x| + 1
x2 + 1 + K ,
the same solution as was foruitously found earlier by using a substitution.
1 x2 + 1
n dx. Should one of the partial fractions be of the form
constant x2 + 1
n , where n is
an integer greater than 1, we can begin the integration by a substitution u = arctan x, which
implies that du = 1
x2 + 1 d x, and
1 x2 + 1
n d x =
1
sec2n−2 udu
=
cos2n−2 u du
=
1 + cos2u2
n
−1
du ,
which, in principle, we know how to integrate.
Example C.58 To evaluate the indefinite integral,
1 x2 + 1
2 dx.
Let x = tan u, i.e., u = arctan x. Then du = dx
1 + x2.
1
x2 + 12 dx =
1
sec2 udu
=
cos2 u du
=
1 + cos2u
2 du
= 1
2
u
2 +
sin 2u
4
+ C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 177/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3122
= arctan x
2 +
sin u · cos u
2 + C
= arctan x
2 +
tan u
2sec2 u+ C
= arctan x
2 +
x
2tan2 u + 1
+ C
= arctan x
2 +
x
2 x2 + 1
+ C
The presence of the arctangent function in the integral indicates that this could not have been
evaluated without some step equivalent to this use of the arctangent function in a substitution.
Rationalizing Substitutions. In some integrals in which the integrand is not originally a
rational function, it can be transformed into a rational integrand by an appropriate substitution.
Example C.59 ([7, Exercise 40, p. 504]) “Make a substitution to express the integrand as a
rational function, and then evaluate the integral
1
x −√
x + 2dx.”
Solution: One substitution that suggests itself is u =√
x + 2. Under this substitution, u2 =
x + 2, d x = 2u du, 1
x −√
x + 2dx =
2u
(u − 2)(u + 1) du
=
2
3 2
u − 2 +
1
u + 1
du
= 2
3(2 ln |u − 2| + ln |u + 1|) + C
= 2
3 ln
√ x + 2 − 2
2 √
x + 2 + 1 + C
= 4
3 ln√
x + 2 − 2 +
2
3 ln√
x + 2 + 1
+ C ,
where I removed the absolute signs from the second term because√
x + 2 + 1 must be positive.
The arctangent substitution needs to be used when the quadratic, irreducible factors contain
a first degree term.
Example C.60 To integrate
dx
4 x2 + 4 x + 3.
Solution: Begin by dividing out the coefficient of the 2nd degree term, then completing the
square:
4 x2 + 4 x + 3 = 4
x2 + x +
3
4
= 4
x +
1
2
2
+ 1
2
= 2 + 4
x +
1
2
2
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 178/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3123
It is clear that we can partially simplify the integral by a substitution of the form u = x + 1
2,
where du = dx. The integral becomes
du
2 + 4u2 . In order to interpret the integral as an
arctangent, we need to make some type of scale change. for example, we could interpret it as du
2 + 4u2 =
1
2
du
1 + 2u2 =
1
2
du
1 + (√
2 · u)2.
Thus an appropriate original substitution would be v =√
2 · x + 1
2
, where dv =
√ 2 dx, and
dx
4 x2 + 4 x + 3 =
1
4 dx
x2 + x + 3
4
= 1
4√
2
dv
v2
2 + 1
2
= 1
2√
2
dv
v2 + 1
= 1
2√
2arctan v + C
= 1
2√
2arctan
√ 2 x +
1√ 2
+ C ;
you should verify the correctness of this integration by diff erentiation.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 179/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3124
C.19 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 12th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, February 12th, 2010
C.19.1 §7.5 Strategy for Integration
The textbook suggests a strategy for solving integration problems:
1. Simplify the integrand if possible.
2. Look for an obvious substitution.
3. Classify the integrand according to its form.
4. Try again. The preceding instructions are vague, depend on your experience and yourintuition, and are occasionally not appropriate, as sometimes the best way to attach a
problem will be obscured by these methods. So be prepared to try again. As for experi-
ence, you need to work many problems to acquire it.
Table of integration formulæ Many of these formulæ are just recasts of familiar diff erenti-
ation formulæ that you already know. But you should remember the integrals of tan x, cot x,
sec x, csc x, even though you may know how to derive some of them.
Can We Integrate All Continuous Functions? Read this subsection. For most of the func-
tions you will meet in this course it will be possible to integrate them. If that is not the case,it could be that we are asking you indirectly to do something else than to integrate. You are
not expected to be able to detect which functions cannot be integrated in terms of elementary
functions: this is a difficult problem even for a trained mathematician. “You may be assured,
though, that the integrals in the...exercises are all elementary functions.”
7.5 Exercises
[1, Exercise 58, p. 489] Evaluate
x ln x√
x2 − 1dx.
Solution: A first impression is that the most complicated part of the integrand is the
logarithm, and I would like to dispose of it. One way to do that would be through asubstitution, but that could well render the denominator rather complicated. I propose to
try integration by parts, and to assign u and v so that the ln x term is part of u. But how
much of the integrand should be taken for u? I observe that if I take only the ln x term,
it leaves a function that is easy to integrate, so it is an ideal first step:
u = ln x ⇒ du = dx
x
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 180/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3125
dv = x√ x2
−1
dx
But what is v? If you don’t see, use the substitution U = x2: x√
x2 − 1dx =
1
2
1√
U − 1dU .
You should be able to evaluate this last integral by sight; but, if you can’t, try the substi-
tution V = U − 1:
v = 1
2
1√
U − 1dU =
1
2
1√
V dV =
√ V + C =
√ x2 − 1 + C .
Hence x ln x√
x2 − 1dx = (ln x) √ x2 − 1 −
√ x2 − 1 x
dx .
The problem isn’t solved yet, but at least the logarithm is gone. Now I propose to try a
trigonometric substitution to simplify the square root:
w = arcsec x ⇒ x2 − 1 = tan2 w, x dx = sec2 w tan w dw :
√ x2 − 1
xdx =
| tan w|sec w
· sec w tan w dw
= tan2 w dw
=
(sec2 w − 1) dw
= tan w − w + C
=√
sec2 w − 1 − arcsec x + C
=√
x2 − 1 − arcsec x + C
from which we may conclude that
x ln x√
x2
−1
dx = (ln x)√
x2 − 1 −√
x2 − 1 + arcsec x + C 1
This was not the only way to solve this problem, and it may not have been the best! But
I have written down the way I solved it first. One shorter, but less intuitive way would
be to use the substitution u =√
x2 − 1, which implies that du = x√ x2 − 1
dx. Then
x ln x√
x2 − 1dx =
ln
√ u2 + 1 du =
1
2
ln(u2 + 1) du .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 181/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3126
Does this look simpler to you? It can be integrated by parts by taking u = ln(u2 + 1),
dv = du, so du = 2 du
u2 + 1
1
2
ln(u2 + 1) du =
1
2u ln(u2 + 1) −
u2
u2 + 1 du .
The point is that the last integrand is rational, and we know how to integrate all such
functions! (Indeed, division of the denominator into the numerator yields a quotient of
1 and a remainder of -1, so the integral can be evaluated as u2
u2 + 1 du =
1 du −
1
u2 + 1 du
= u
−arctan u + C
= √ x2 + 1 − arctan √ x2 + 1 + C
Another strategy would be to use the same trigonometric inverse substitution immedi-
ately: w = arcsec x ⇒ d x = sec w tan w dw ⇒ x ln x√
x2 − 1du =
sec2 w ln sec w
dw .
In the last integral you should recognize ln sec w as being an antiderivative of tan w. This
suggests using integration by parts with u = ln sec w and d v = sec2 w dw: d u = tan w dw,
v = tan w.
sec2 w ln sec w
dw = (ln sec w)(tan w) −
tan2 w dw
= (ln sec w)(tan w) −
(sec2 w − 1) dw
= (ln sec w)(tan w) − tan w + w + C
= (ln x)√
x2 − 1 −√
x2 − 1 + arcsec x + C
In several places I have casually suppressed absolute value signs; these steps can be
justified, and are consequences of the way in which we defined the inverse functions.
Exercise C.1 To integrate 2π
0
√ 1 + sin x dx.
Solution: This is an interesting integral which, at first glance, does not appear to fit into any of
the families of integrals we have been studying. However, it can easily be seen that, except for
the determination of a sign, the integral is not very difficult to evaluate. But the sign question
is delicate, and even the previous edition of a well known text book overlooked this di fficulty.
In the Student Solution Manual to that textbook the answer was given to be −2√
1 − sin t + C ,
and the following hint was given for integration:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 182/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3127
“Multiply numerator and denominator of the integrand by√
1 − sin x.”
The hint is a good one, and does, indeed, lead to one way of solving the problem. Unfortu-
nately, the answer that was given in that textbook was correct only within certain intervals.
Solution following the suggestion
√ 1 + sin x dx =
√ 1 + sin x ·
√ 1 − sin x√ 1 − sin x
dx =
1 − sin2 x
1 − sin xdx
=
cos2 x
1 − sin xdx =
| cos x|√ 1
−sin x
dx
Had the absolute signs not been present, we could make the substitution u = sin x, subject to
which we would have du = cos x · dx cos x√
1 − sin xdx =
1√
1 − udu
= −2√
1 − u + C
= −2√
1 − sin x + C
Unfortunately, this function has derivative√
1 + sin x only when cos x is non-negative, i.e.,
only when 4n−12
·π
≤ x
≤ 4n+1
2
·π, where n is any integer. For example, the value of the definite
integral
2π
0
√ 1 + sin x dx is certainly not equal to
−2
√ 1 − sin x
2π
0= 0 , since the integrand
is positive for most x, so the area under the curve y =√
1 + sin x must be positive; the correct
value is −2
√ 1 − sin x
π2
0+2
√ 1 − sin x
3π2
π2
+−2
√ 1 − sin x
2π
3π2
=2
√ 1 − sin x
3π2
π2
+−2
√ 1 − sin x
π2
−π2
= 2√
2 + 2√
2 = 4√
2 0
Other ways to find the indefinite integral While we cannot remove the sign difficulties
in this problem, we can show that the problem does, in fact, lend itself to a more systematic
integration — i.e., the hint given above is not really necessary. One way to see this is to
remember that we have a trigonometric identity that expresses 1 + cos θ as a square. But, as
the trigonometric function given here is a sine, and not a cosine, one must first arrange for the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 183/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3128
presence of a cosine. One way is as follows:
√ 1 + sin x dx =
1 + cos
π
2 − x
dx
=
2cos2
π
4 − x
2
dx
=√
2
cos
π
4 − x
2
dx
Another approach, suggested by a student in this course several years ago, is to observe that
√ 1 + sin x =
sin2 x2
+ cos2 x2
+ 2sin x2 · cos x
2
=
cos x
2 + sin
x
2
.
To integrate this we need to determine the sign of the function inside the absolute signs. This
can be done by observing that it is equal to√
2 sin
x
2 +
π
4
, essentially the same function as
determined just above.
A more systematic approach would have been to attempt to simplify the original integral
by the substitution u = sin x, which would imply that du = cos x dx, so
√ 1 + sin x dx =
√ 1 + u
cos x du
= ± √
1 + u√ 1 − u2
du = ±
1√ 1 − u
du
= ∓2√
1 − u + C = ∓2√
1 − sin x + C
where the sign still depends upon the interval in which x is located.
What, then, is one antiderivative of √
1 + sin x? We have found that, if we confine
ourselves to one interval of the form 4n+1
2 π < x < 4n+3
2 π, any antiderivative has the form−2√
1 − sin x + C ; and, if we confine ourselves to one interval of the form 4n+32
π < x <4n+5
2 π, any antiderivative has the form 2
√ 1 − sin x + C . By choosing the constants to make
the function continuous (indeed, diff erentiable) we can patch such subfunctions together to
form an antiderivative which is valid over an extended domain. The function f defined by the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 184/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3129
following table is one such antiderivative:
x f ( x)
· · · · · ·−32
π ≤ x < −12
π −4√
2 + 2√
1 − sin x−12
π ≤ x < 12
π 0√
2 − 2√
1 − sin x12
π ≤ x < 32
π 0√
2 + 2√
1 − sin x32
π ≤ x < 52
π 4√
2 − 2√
1 − sin x52
π ≤ x < 72
π 4√
2 + 2√
1 − sin x72
π ≤ x < 92
π 8√
2 − 2√
1 − sin x92
π ≤ x < 112
π 8√
2 + 2√
1 − sin x11
2 π ≤ x <
13
2 π 12 √ 2 − 2 √ 1 − sin x· · · · · ·
We can verify that the value of the definite integral
2π
0
√ 1 + sin x dx is [ f ( x)]2π
0 = f (2π) −
f (0) =4
√ 2 − 2
√ 1 − sin 2π
−0
√ 2 − 2
√ 1 − sin0
= 4
√ 2.
C.19.2 §7.6 Integration Using Tables and Computer Algebra Systems (OMIT)
This section “is not examination material, but students are to try to solve the problems manu-
ally.”
C.19.3 §7.7 Approximate Integration (OMIT)
This section is not part of the syllabus of this course.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 185/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3130
C.20 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 15th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, February 15th, 2010
C.20.1 §7.8 Improper Integrals
Piecewise continuous integrands Consider a function f that is continuous everywhere in an
interval [a, b], including continuity from the right at b and from the left at a. For such functions
we have developed the theory of the definite integral, and the Fundamental Theorem applies.
Now suppose that there is a point c such that a < c < b, where f has a jump discontinuity:
lim x→c−
f ( x) and lim x→c+
f ( x) both exist, but are diff erent. It is possible to define the integral of f as
follows: b
a f ( x) dx =
c
a f ( x) dx +
b
c f ( x) dx ,
and it can be shown that the familiar properties of the definite integral hold here, with the
exception of the Fundamental Theorem. We can proceed in the usual way with such integrals,
until we need to actually evaluate them; then we must split them up at the jump discontinuity
before we attempt to apply the Fundamental Theorem. More generally, this definition “works”
for functions with many jump discontinuities.46 47
Other types of generalizations In this section we wish to consider other types of general-
izations related to a condition of the original definition of the definite integral that fails to be
satisfied. We will follow the terminology of the textbook, calling two types of “impropriety”
Type 1 and Type48 2, but students should be aware that these terms are not in universal use. The
general spirit of these definitions, and of the preceding generalization to jump discontinuities,
is that the familiar properties of integrals proved for continuous functions should hold for these
broader classes wherever they make sense. We shall still have to keep away from any situation
that might lead us to attempt to, for example, add +∞ to −∞, and any other undefinable oper-
ations. Remember that, in this theory, you must rely on the definition, and not attempt to write
down what “makes sense”. The restrictions in some of these definitions are needed to avoid
paradoxes elsewhere.
46We will not explore here what limits — if any — exist on the number of discontinuities.47We have already seen that there may be other situations where the splitting of an integral into pieces for
diff erent parts of the domain may simplify the integration; but, where there is a jump discontinuity, the splittingis not by choice, it is by our definition of the meaning of the generalized symbol.
48Note that the terms Type 1 and Type 2 refer to a type of “impropriety” — not to a type of integral. One
improper integral could contain multiple instances of Type 2, and as many as 2 instances of an impropriety of
Type 1.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 186/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3131
Type 1: Infinite Intervals Our original definition of the definite integral was given for a
finite interval. If we wish to speak of an integral where either or both limits are infinite, weneed to define what these are to mean. The definition we give is one that is consistent with the
definition for finite intervals, and preserves those properties of the integral that are meaningful
when the limits before infinite. I repeat the boxed definition on [1, p. 509]:
Definition C.6 1.
∞ a
f ( x) dx = limt →∞
t a
f ( x) dx provided the integral on the right exists for
all t ≥ a, and the limit exists as a finite number. The “improper” integral on the left
is then said to converge or to be convergent . If the limit does not exist, the improper
integral is divergent .
2. An analogous definition holds when the upper limit is −∞, or when the lower limit iseither of ±∞. Read the textbook.
3. When both limits of the definite integral are infinite, we define the value to be the sum
of two integrals obtained by splitting the domain. It can be shown that it doesn’t matter
where the line is split, the following definition will always give the same value:
∞ −∞
f ( x) dx =
a −∞
f ( x) dx +
∞ a
f ( x) dx .
Of course, the integrand f must have the entire real line R as its domain!
4. It is ESSENTIAL to understand that, in the definition of
∞ −∞
, TWO limits have to be de-
termined independently. IT IS NOT CORRECT TO CONSIDER ONLY limt →∞
t −t
f ( x) dx.
In this case one has to add two finite numbers; if either of the limits does not exist as a fi-
nite number — and that includes being infinite — the sum is not finite, and the improper
integral does not exist .
Type 2: Discontinuous Integrands I have observed above how to cope with a finite, jumpdiscontinuity in the integrand. Here we are interested in other types of discontinuity, in partic-
ular, discontinuities where the function has a vertical asymptote. If the discontinuity occurs at
the left end-point of the interval, then the value of the “improper” integral is defined by
b a
f ( x) dx = limt →a+
b t
f ( x) dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 187/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3132
If the discontinuity is at the right end-point b, then the value of the “improper” integral is
defined by b a
f ( x) dx = limt →b−
t a
f ( x) dx .
And, if the discontinuity occurs at a point c between a and b, then the definition is based on
splitting the integral into two parts:
b a
f ( x) dx =
c a
f ( x) dx +
b c
f ( x) dx ,
where both of the summands on the right are defined to be limits as above, and the two limits
have to be evaluated independently. It is important to understand that in this case it is not acceptable that the two limits be linked so that one may a ff ect the other.
Example C.61 The improper integral
2 0
1
x − 1 d x does not converge, since at least one of the
limits
limt →1−
t 0
1
x − 1 d x , lim
t →1+
2 t
1
x − 1 d x
does not exist; indeed, neither of them exists! We say that this improper integral diverges.
Without this severe definition we might find that some of the properties we wish the integralto possess might not be present.
Example C.62 ([1, Example 4, p. 511]) “For what values of p is the integral
∞
1
1
x p d x con-
vergent?”
Solution: ∞
1
1
x p dx = lim
t →∞
t
1
1
x p dx
=
limt →∞
[ln x]t 1 when p = 1
limt →∞1
1 − p x
1
− pt
1 when p
1
=
limt →∞
[ln t − 0] = ∞ when p = 1
1
1 − plimt →∞
1
t p−1 − 1
=
1
p − 1 when p > 1
1
1 − plimt →∞
t 1− p − 1
= ∞ when p < 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 188/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3133
This result will be needed in Chapter 11 in connection with the “ p-series test” [1, p. 700]. In
the special case p = 1, it states that the area under the hyperbola y = 1
x from x = 1 indefinitely
to the right is unbounded. By symmetry, that region should have the same area as the area
between x = 0 and x = 1 under the same curve, and over the line y = 1. That area is the value
of the improper integral 1
0
1
x d x = lim
t →0+
1
t
1
x d x
= limt →0+
[ln x]1t
= − limt →0+
ln t = +∞
Example C.63 Consider the improper integrals +∞
−∞
1
x2 + 1 d x ,
+∞
−∞
x
x2 + 1 d x .
In both of these cases we must split the interval of integration at a finite point, and consider
two improper integrals of Type 1 independently. In the first case an antiderivative is arctan x,
so +∞
−∞
1
x2 + 1 d x =
0
−∞
1
x2 + 1 d x +
+∞
0
1
x2 + 1 d x
= lima→−∞
0
a
1
x2 + 1 d x + lim
b→+∞
b
0
1
x2 + 1 d x
= lima→−∞
(0 − arctan a) + limb→+∞
(arctan b − 0)
= −−π
2
+
π
2 = π ,
and the improper integral is convergent. (We could have split the interval at any convenient
point other than 0.)
But, in the second case, we have
+∞
−∞
x
x2 + 1 d x = 0
−∞
x
x2 + 1 d x + +∞
0
x
x2 + 1 d x
= lima→−∞
0
a
x
x2 + 1 d x + lim
b→+∞
b
0
x
x2 + 1 d x
= lima→−∞
0 − ln( x2 + 1)
2
+ lim
b→+∞
ln( x2 + 1)
2 − 0
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 189/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3134
Here we find that each of the limits is infinite: the integral is said to be divergent . In as-
signing a meaning to a doubly infinite integral we do not permit +∞ and −∞ to be ap-proached at the same rate. That is, it is not permitted to interpret this integral as being equal
to lima→∞
a −a
x
x2 + 1 d x. (Here the finite, symmetric integral is 0, so the limit is 0. But we do not
give that meaning to the original, improper integral, which we insist diverges.
Extended Definition of the Integral The original definition in the textbook — in terms of
Riemann sums — was for continuous functions f , where the interval of integration was a finite
interval [a.b]. This definition has been extended in several diff erent ways.
1. First extension: to functions with a finite number of finite jump discontinuities. The
same notation, viz.b
a
f ( x) dx
is used; but it now means the sum of integrals over the various (disjoint) subintervals
where the function is continuous. Remember that continuity over a closed interval [ a, b]
means
• continuity at every point x such that a < x < b,
• continuity from the right at x = a; and
• continuity from the left at x = b. (When a = b the integral is defined to be 0, with
no continuity restrictions.)
There is a need for an explicit definition here, since, where a function f defined on
a ≤ x ≤ b has a jump discontinuity at c, where a < c < b, then the function will usually
be continuous on one side of c, so, for the subinterval on the other side of c, there is still
the need for a limiting operation of some kind, since our original definition did require
continuity of the integrand over the full closed interval of the integral. If it happens that
the jump discontinuity is removable, then it can simply be ignored.)
2. Type 1 Improper Integral with one limit of integration equal to+
∞. We define
+∞ a
f ( x) dx = limb→+∞
b a
f ( x) dx ; and
a +∞
f ( x) dx = limb→+∞
a b
f ( x) dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 190/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3135
3. Type 1 Improper Integral with one limit of integration equal to−∞. We define
b −∞
f ( x) dx = lima→−∞
b a
f ( x) dx ; and
−∞ b
f ( x) dx = lima→−∞
a b
f ( x) dx .
4. Type 1 Improper Integral with one limit of integration equal to −∞ and one limit
of integration equal to +∞. We define
+∞ −∞
f ( x) dx =
a −∞
f ( x) dx +
+∞ a
f ( x) dx and,
−∞
+∞ f ( x) dx =
−∞
a
f ( x) dx +
a
+∞ f ( x) dx ,
where a is any convenient point chosen to break the line into two semi-infinite rays. In
practice one often chooses a = 0, but that is not required. It is not permitted to compute
the two limits together — each of them must exist as a finite limit, independent of the
other.
5. Type 2 Improper Integral where end-point a is a point of infinite discontinuity. Here
we “excise” the point a and define
b a
f ( x) dx = limc→a+
b c
f ( x) dx .
6. Type 2 Improper Integral where end-point b is a point of infinite discontinuity. Here
we “excise” the point b and define
b
a
f ( x) dx = limc→b−
c
a
f ( x) dx .
7. Type 2 Improper Integral where a point c such that a < c < b is a point of infinite
discontinuity. Here we “excise” the point c and define
b a
f ( x) dx =
c a
f ( x) dx +
b c
f ( x) dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 191/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3136
This means that the integral is the sum of two separate limits, where the “bad” point
has been excised at one end of each of the smaller intervals of integration. The twolimits must be computed separately, and both of them must exist (as finite limits) for the
integral to be said to converge. It is not permitted to compute the two limits at the same
time in a symmetric way.
With these extended definitions we can show that the familiar rules for definite integrals are
still operational, where they make sense. Because the definitions for improper integrals in-
volve limits, we use the terminology of convergence and divergence, the same terminology we
could use in connection with other limits, and which we will see again when we study infinite
sequences and series.
Comparison Test for Improper Integrals The definitions I have sketched concern limits of the values of certain integrals. Where we are unable to evaluate certain integrals directly, we
can still justify a comparison theorem similar to that we saw in connection with finite integrals:
Theorem C.64 (Comparison “Test” for Improper Integrals) Suppose that f and g are con-
tinuous functions such that, on the interval a ≤ x ≤ ∞, 0 ≤ g( x) ≤ f ( x). Then
∞ a
f ( x) dx converges ⇒∞
a
g( x) dx converges
∞
a
g( x) dx diverges ⇒∞
a
f ( x) dx diverges
Example C.65 Evaluate the definite integral
e3 1
dx
x√
ln x. Show that the integral is a conver-
gent, improper integral, and find its value.
Solution: The integrand is not defined at x = 1, since one factor in the denominator is expressed
in terms of ln x. For x > 1 the substitution u = ln x is valid. Hence
e3 1
dx
x√
ln x= lim
t →1+
e3 t
dx
x√
ln x
= limt →1+
3 ln t
1√ u
du
= limt →1+
2
√ u3
ln t
= limt →1+
2
√ 3 − 2
√ ln t
= 2
√ 3 − 2 lim
t →1+
√ ln t
= 2
√ 3 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 192/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3137
since, as t → 1+, ln t → 0, so√
ln t →√
0 = 0, by the continuity of the function√
t from the
right at t = 1.
7.8 Exercises
[1, Exercise 18, p. 515] Determine whether the integral
∞ 0
dz
z2 + 3 z + 2 is convergent or di-
vergent. Evaluate it if it is convergent.
Solution: Using standard methods of Partial Fractions we can show that
dz
z2 + 3 z + 2 =
1
z + 1 − 1
z + 2 dz
= ln | z + 1| − ln | z + 2| + C
= ln
z + 1
z + 2
+ C .
Hence
∞ 0
dz
z2 + 3 z + 2 = lim
a→∞
ln
z + 1
z + 2
a
0
= lima→∞ ln
1 + 1a
1 + 2a − ln
1
2= ln 1 − ln
1
2 = ln 2
Note that we could not have expressed
∞ 0
dz
z2 + 3 z + 2 as the diff erence of the improper
integrals
∞ 0
dz
z + 1 and
∞ 0
dz
z + 2, as both of these improper integrals are divergent and the
diff erence of their “values” is not defined.
[7, Exercise 52, p. 516] “Use the Comparison Theorem to determine whether the integral∞ 1
x√ 1 + x6
dx is convergent or divergent.”
Solution: At first glance, this integral suggests a substitution u = x2. While that would
simplify its form, it would not enable us to integrate it immediately, and it is not nec-
essary, since we can prove the convergence without this step. A simpler attack is to
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 193/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3138
observe that 1 + x6 > x6, so, for positive x,√
1 + x6 > x3, 1
√ 1 + x6
< 1
x3. Hence we can
consider the limit limt →∞
t 1
x
x3 dx = lim
t →∞
−1
x
t
1
= 1 − limt →∞
1
t 1 = 1. The convergence of the
larger, improper integral implies the convergence of the given one.
[1, Exercise 75, p. 517] “Show that
∞ 0
x2e− x2
dx = 1
2
∞ 0
e− x2
dx .”
Solution: This is an interesting question, because we cannot express an antiderivative
of e− x2 in terms of elementary functions. So, at first glance, one wonders how it will be
possible to work with these integrals. Before doing that, I must prove that the integrals
are convergent — otherwise we don’t have any right to include them as numbers in an
equation.
I note that
x ≥ 1 ⇒ − x2 ≤ − x (multiplying the inequality by a negative number)
⇒ e− x2 ≤ e− x (exponential function is increasing)
⇒ for t ≥ 1
t
1
e− x2
dx ≤t
1
e− x dx = 1
e − 1
et
Hence, as t → ∞, the integral on the right approaches 1
e, i.e., the improper integral
∞ 1
e− xdx = 1
e .
By the [1, Comparison Theorem, p. 514], the improper integral
∞ 1
e− x2
dx is also con-
vergent, and is less than 1
e. But we were considering the integral from 0, not from 1!
The integral from 0 to 1 can be bounded in another way, since the reasoning given above
is valid only for x ≥ 1. For example,
− x2 < 0 ⇒ e− x2
< e0 = 1
⇒1
0
e− x2
dx <
1 0
1 dx = 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 194/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3139
Hence
∞ 0
e− x2
dx =
1 0
e− x2
dx +∞
1
e− x2
dx < 1 + 1e
.
This is not the exact value of the integral; in fact, it can be shown that
∞ 0
e− x2
dx =
√ π
2 ,
but you are not expected to know this fact, nor how to prove it.
Now to prove the desired equality. Let us apply integration by parts with dv = xe− x2
dx
and u = x, so v = −12 e− x
2
, and du = d x:
t 0
x2e− x2
dx = −1
2 xe− x2
t
0
+ 1
2
t 0
e− x2
dx
= t
2et 2 +
1
2
t 0
e− x2
dx.
By l’Hospital’s Rule,
limt →∞t
et 2 = limt →∞1
2tet 2 = 0 .
Hence
∞ 0
x2e− x2
dx = limt →∞
t 0
x2e− x2
dx
= 1
2 limt →∞
y
0t e− x2
dx
= 1
2
∞
0
e− x2
dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 195/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3140
C.21 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 17th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, February 17th, 2010
Textbook Chapter 8. FURTHER APPLICATIONS OF INTEGRATION.
C.21.1 §8.1 Arc Length
Just as with the earlier concepts of area, volume, and average, we are faced first with adopting
a definition that appears to have the properties that we associate with the concept, and, at the
same time, is workable in practice. The length of an arc will be defined to be the limit — if
there is a limit — of the sum of the lengths of the sides of an approximating polygon formed
by choosing points closer and closer together on the curve, and joining them by line segments.
Note that we haven’t even defined what we mean in general by a curve, so the definition we
give will apply at first only to the graph of a function.
Suppose that we wish to find the length of the arc of the graph of y = f ( x) between the
points (a, f (a)) and (b, f (b)). We can subdivide the interval [a, b] on the x-axis by intermediate
vertices, so that we have a sequence a = x0, x1, x2, . . . , xn = b of points on the x-axis. If we
define
∆ xi−1 = xi − xi−1, and
∆ f ( xi−1) = ∆ yi−1 = yi − yi−1 = f ( xi) − f ( xi−1)
then the distance between successive points Pi−1 = ( xi−1, f ( xi−1)) and Pi = ( xi, f ( xi)) is
|Pi−1Pi| =
( xi − xi−1)2 + ( yi − yi−1)2 =
(∆ xi)2 + (∆ yi)2 ,
which square root can be expressed as either of the following: 1 +
∆ f ( xi)
∆ xi
2
· ∆ xi =
1 +
∆ xi
∆ yi
2
· ∆ yi .
Note that the orientation of the increments in x and y is not relevant, as the increments appear
in these formulæ only as magnitudes. When we pass to the limit, as the “mesh” of points
selected on the x-axis become closer and closer together, the first of these expressions, gives
rise in the limit to the following integral representing the length of the arc:
b a
1 + ( f ( x))2 dx.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 196/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3141
If the curve is given by an equation in the form x = g( y), then we find the arc length from the
point (g(k ), k ) to (g( ), ) to be k
1 + (g( y))2 dy.
When the function whose graph is y = f ( x) is invertible, both formulæ are applicable, and they
give the same length.49
Evaluation of these integrals can often require an approximation method, as the integrands
tend to be of types for which a function expressible in terms of elementary functions is un-
available. For that reason the problems that one meets in calculus books are often confined to
a small set of functions for which antiderivatives can be found.
The Arc Length Function. If we fix a point on a curve, we can then define a function
that expresses distance along the curve from the fixed point. This distance is expressed as an
integral with a variable upper limit, and is signed , so that, in eff ect, we have parameterized the
curve with a variable — usually denoted by the symbol s — uniquely denoting the position of
a point on a path along the curve. This practice diff ers from that employed when we evaluate
the length of the arc between two points, where only the magnitude is of interest. I have written
“...on a path along the curve” rather than “...on the curve”, because we shall be generalizing
these ideas in [1, Chapter 10], to consider curves that are not the graphs of functions; in those
generalizations a curve may cross itself, and the same point could be traversed more than once
by a point whose path we are studying: in that case it is the length of the path that will be
given by the arc length function.
Example C.66 Circumference of a circle. What is the circumference of the circle x2+ y2 = R2
(where R > 0)?
Solution: Since the equation given is not the graph of a function (because the curve crosses
some vertical lines more than once), let’s find the length of the upper arc from x = − R to
x = + R, and double it. This is given by the function f ( x) =√
R2 − x2 = R
1 −
x
R
2
.
y = − x R
1 − x
R2
1 + y2
= 1
1 −
x R
2
49Passage between the two forms can be seen to result from the change of variable given by y = f ( x).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 197/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3142
Circumference =
2
R
− R
1 1 −
x R
2 dx
= 4
R 0
1 1 −
x R
2dx
since the integrand is even, and the interval symmetric around 0
= 4 limt → R−
t 0
1 1 −
x R
2
dx
since the integral has a Type 2 impropriety at x = R
= 4 R limt → R−
t R
0
1√ 1 − u2
du
under the substitution u = x
R
= 4 R lima→1−
a 0
1√ 1 − u2
du
under the substitution a = t
R
= 4 R lima→1−
arcsin a arcsin 0
cos v
| cos v| dv
under the substitution v = arcsin u
= 4 R lima→1−
arcsin a 0
1 dv
since cos v is non-negative for −π2 ≤ v ≤ π
2
= 4 R lima→1−
[v]arcsin a0
= 4 R arcsin 1 by continuity of arcsin= 4 R · π
2 = 2π R .
Of course, we didn’t need to apply this last substitution v = arcsin u because we know two
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 198/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3143
antiderivatives of 1
√ 1 − u2
:
4 R limt → R−
t R
0
1√ 1 − u2
du = 4 R limt → R−
[arcsin u]t
R
0
= 4 R limt → R−
arcsin
t
R− 0
= 4 R [arcsin 1 − 0] by continuity of arcsin
= 4 R
π
2 − 0
= 2π R .
Example C.67 ([7, Exercise 8, p. 552]) Find the length of the arc y = x2
2 − ln x
4 , (2 ≤ x ≤ 4).
Solution: Note the way in which the information is presented: we need a description of the
underlying curve, here given by an equation, and specifications of the portion of the curve
whose length is to be determined, here given by an interval 2 ≤ x ≤ 4 or in the alternative
notation x ∈ [2, 4]. Only the absolute value of the length is of interest, so we need not be
careful about which of the end-points 2, 4 is in which limit of the integral; alternatively, it is
the absolute value of the integral that we seek.
y = x2
2 − ln x
4 ⇒ dy
dx= x − 1
4 x
⇒
1 + ( y)2 =
1 +
x2 − 1
2 +
1
16 x2
⇒
1 + ( y)2 =
x2 +
1
2 +
1
16 x2 =
x + 1
4 x
Hence the arc length between x = 2 and x = 4 (where the function
x + 1
4 x
is equal to x + 1
4 x
is
4
2
x +
1
4 x
dx =
4
2
x +
1
4 x
dx
=
x2
2 +
ln x
4
4
2
= 8 + 2 ln 2
4 − 2 − ln 2
4 = 6 +
ln 2
4 = 6 + ln
4√
2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 199/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3144
Example C.68 ([7, Exercise 12, p. 552]) Find the length of the curve y = ln x for 1 ≤ x ≤√
3.
Solution: Let’s attack this problem by integrating along either axis.Integrating along the x-axis:
y = ln x ⇒ dy
dx=
1
x
⇒
1 +
dy
dx
2
=
1 +
1
x2
Hence
arc length =
√ 3
1
1 + 1
x2 d x .
To complete the integration, one approach is to try the substitution u =√
x2 + 1 to
simplify the integral. Then
x dx = u du√ 3
1
1 +
1
x2 d x =
2 √
2
u2
u2 − 1 du
=
2
√ 21 +
12
u − 1 −
12
u+
1 du
=
u + ln
u − 1
u + 1
2
√ 2
= 2 −√
2 + ln 1√
3− ln
√ 2 − 1√ 2 + 1
= 2 −√
2 − ln 3
2 − ln
1√ 2 + 1
= 2
−
√ 2
− ln 3
2
+ ln(√
2 + 1) , etc.
Integrating along the y-axis: Here the curve can be rewritten as x = e y, whose length is to
be found for 0 ≤ y ≤ ln 32
.
arc length =
ln 32
0
√ 1 + e2 y dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 200/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3145
=
2
√
2
v2
v2 − 1 dv
under substitution v =√
1 + e2 y
=
2 √
2
1 +
12
v − 1 −
12
v + 1
dv
=
v +
1
2 ln
v − 1
v + 1
2
√ 2
= 2
−√
2
− ln 3
2 − 1
2
ln
√ 2 − 1
√ 2 + 1
= 2 −√
2 − ln 3
2 − 1
2 ln
√
2 − 1√ 2 + 1
·√
2 − 1√ 2 − 1
= 2 −
√ 2 − ln 3
2 − 1
2 ln√
2 − 12
= 2 −√
2 − ln 3
2 + ln(
√ 2 + 1) .
Example C.69 ([7, Exercise 14, p. 552]) Find the length of the curve y2 = 4 x, 0 ≤ y ≤ 2.
Solution: Since x =
y2
4 ,
dx
dy =
y
2 , and the arc length is the integral
2 0
1 +
y2
4 dy =
π4
0
sec v · 2sec2 v dv
under the substitution y = 2 tan v, i.e., v = arctan y
2
= [tan v · sec v + ln | sec v + tan v|]π4
0
=√
2 + ln
√ 2 + 1
.
(I have applied the reduction formula for sec3 v dv determined in [1, p. 458, Exercise 50,
§7.1].)
8.1 Exercises
[1, Exercise 12, p. 530] Find the length of the curve y = ln(cos x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ π
3.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 201/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3146
Solution: y =
−tan x
⇒ 1 + ( y)2 =
|sec x
|.
Arc length =
π3
0
| sec x| dx
=
π3
0
sec x dx
= [ln | sec x + tan x|]π3
0
= ln |2 +√
3| − ln |1 + 0| = ln(2 +√
3) .
C.21.2 §8.2 Area of a Surface of Revolution
I develop a formula for the area of a surface of revolution by observing that an element of arc
of length ∆ s will, when rotated about an axis whose distance from the element is r , generate
an element of surface whose area is approximately 2πr · ∆s. Remembering that
∆s =
1 +
∆ f ( x)
∆ x
2
· ∆ x =
1 +
∆ x
∆ y
2
· ∆ y .
we can integrate with respect to either x or y as the conditions of the problem demand (provided
the derivative exists).(to be continued)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 202/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3147
C.22 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of February 19th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, February 19th, 2010; corrected 10 March, 2010
subject to further correction
C.22.1 §8.2 Area of a Surface of Revolution (conclusion)
8.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 12, p. 537] Find the area of the surface obtained by rotating the curve x = 1 + 2 y2
(1 ≤ y ≤ 2) about the x-axis.
Solution:
x = 1 + 2 y2 ⇒ dx
dy = 4 y
⇒
1 +
dx
dy
2
=
1 + (4 y)2
⇒ Surface Area = 2π
2 1
y
1 + (4 y)2 dy
=
π
24
1 + 16 y2
32
2
1
=
π
24 · 65 √ 65 − 17 √ 17
[1, Exercise 22, p. 537] ...Find the area of the surface obtained by rotating the curve y =√ x2 + 1 (0 ≤ x ≤ 3) about the x-axis.
Solution:
y =√
x2 + 1
⇒ y = x√ x2 + 1
⇒ 1 + ( y)2 =
√ 1 + 2 x2
√ 1 + x2
⇒ Area of revolution =
3 0
2π√
1 + x2 ·√
1 + 2 x2
√ 1 + x2
dx
= 2π
3 0
√ 1 + 2 x2 dx
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 203/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3148
=
2π
√ 2
arctan3√
2
0
sec3
θ d θ
under the substitution θ = arctan( x√
2)
= π√
2
arctan3√
2 0
sec θ d θ + π√
2[tan θ · sec θ ]arctan 3
√ 2
0
by the reduction formula [1, Exercise 50, p. 458]
= π√
2[tan θ · sec θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ |]arctan 3
√ 2
0
= π
3 √ 19 +
1
√ 2 ln( √ 19 + 3 √ 2)
.
Note that the textbook suggested the use of either a table of integrals or a computer
algebra system, but that neither was needed, as the solution of this problem is well
within the abilities of a student in this course (if she has time to do the calculations).
[1, Exercise 24, p. 537] Find the area of the surface obtained by rotating the curve y = ln( x+1)
(0 ≤ x ≤ 1) about the y-axis.
Solution:
y = ln( x + 1)
⇒ dy =
dx
x + 1
⇒
1 + ( y)2 =
1 +
1
( x + 1)2
Area of surface = 2π
1 0
x
1 +
1
( x + 1)2 dx
= 2π
2 1
(u − 1)
1 +
1
u2 du
under the substitution u =
x+
1
= 2π
2 1
√ 1 + u2 du − 2π
2 1
√ 1 + u2
udu
2 1
√ 1 + u2 du =
arctan2 π4
sec3 θ d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 204/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3149
under the substitution θ = arctan u
= 1
2 [tan θ · sec θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ |]arctan 2π4
by the reduction formula [1, Exercise 50, p. 458]
= 1
2
2
√ 5 + ln(
√ 5 + 2)
−√
2 + ln(√
2 + 1)
2 1
√ 1 + u2
u du =
arctan2 π4
(sec θ · tan θ + csc θ ) d θ
under the substitution θ = arctan u
= [sec θ + ln | csc θ − cot θ |]arctan2π4
=
√ 5 + ln
√ 5 − 1
2
−√
2 + ln(√
2 − 1)
etc.
Here again the integral does not require special software or tables, just patience.
[1, Exercise 4, p. 562] 1. The curve y = x2, (0 ≤ x ≤ 1), is rotated about the y-axis. Find
the area of the resulting surface.
2. Find the area of the surface obtained by rotating the curve in part 1 about the x-axis.
Solution:
1. Since dy
dx= 2 x,
Area = 2π
1
0
x√
1 + 4 x2 dx
= 2π
2
3 · 1
8 ·
1 + 4 x2 3
2
1
0
= π
6
5
32 − 1
.
2. Here Area = 2π
1 0
x2 √ 1 + 4 x2 dx . To simplify this integral I begin with the sub-
stitution 2 x = tan θ , i.e., θ = arctan 2 x. Then 2 dx = sec2 θ d θ , so
Area = 2π
arctan 2 0
tan2 θ
4 · sec θ · sec2 θ
2 d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 205/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3150
=
π
4
arctan2
0
tan
2
θ · sec
3
θ d θ
= π
4
arctan2 0
sec5 θ − sec3 θ
d θ .
Earlier, in Example C.42 on 3087 I had solved [1, Exercise 50, p. 458], proving
a reduction formula (Equation (62))for integrals of positive integer powers of the
secant:
secn x dx = 1
n − 1
secn−2 x
·tan x +
n − 2
n − 1 secn−2 x dx .
From this formula we see that sec3 θ d θ =
1
2 sec θ · tan θ +
1
2
sec θ d θ
= 1
2 sec θ · tan θ +
1
2 ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
sec5 θ d θ = 1
4 sec3 · tan θ +
3
4
sec3 θ d θ
= 1
4
sec3
·tan θ +
3
4
1
2
sec θ
·tan θ +
1
2
ln
|sec θ + tan θ
|+ C
= 1
4 sec3 · tan θ +
3
8 sec θ · tan θ +
3
8 ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
Note that the value of these antiderivatives (with C = 0) at θ = 0 is 0, and that
sec arctan 2 =√
5. Hence
Area = π
4
1
4 sec3 θ · tan θ − 1
8 sec θ · tan θ − 1
8 ln | sec θ + tan θ |
arctan2
0
= π
32
2 · 5
32 · 2 − 5
12 · 2 − ln
√
5 + 2
= π 9
16√ 5 − ln
√ 5 + 2
32
.
C.22.2 §8.3 Applications to Physics and Engineering (OMIT)
Omit this section. (But read it if you are majoring in Physics or Engineering!)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 206/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3151
C.22.3 §8.4 Applications to Economics and Biology (OMIT)
Omit this section. (But read it if you are majoring into economics or biology.)
C.22.4 §8.5 Probability (OMIT)
Omit this section.
Textbook Chapter 9. DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. (OMIT)
No parts of this chapter are included in the syllabus.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 207/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3152
C.23 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 01st, 2010
Release Date: Monday, March 01st, 2010
Important Announcement
In earlier versions of the timetable for Section 1 of MATH 140 2010 01, the
times shown for Quizzes Q3, and Q4 were not correct. Quiz Q3 will be ad-
ministered during the week March 08-12, and Quiz Q3 will be administered
during the week March 22–26. The timetable has now been corrected.
Textbook Chapter 10. PARAMETRIC EQUATIONS AND POLARCOORDINATES.
C.23.1 §10.1 Curves Defined by Parametric Equations
A parameter is just a variable. When we call a variable by this term we usually are thinking
of a function or set of functions involving the variable as representing a family of objects. In
this first contact, the family will be a set of points. We will be taking the variable to be a
real variable, and so it is natural to consider not only the family of points on the graphs of a
function, but also the way in which the points are generated by the assignment of real numbers
to the parameter as representing a point moving along the curve. We can name the parameter
with any available symbol. Often we use the letter t ; and a common use for this representation
is to treat t as time, so that the curve can be thought of as the trajectory of (i.e., the path
traced out by) a moving point. If we adopt this point of view, and if the parameter values are
chosen from an interval a ≤ t ≤ b, then we can speak of the curve ( x(t ), y(t )), and can think
of ( x(a), y(a)) and ( x(b), y(b)) as, respectively, the initial and terminal points. Curves given
parametrically in this way need not be graphs of functions: a curve may cross vertical lines
more than once, and may even cross itself, possibly more than once.
Graphing Devices This subsection may be omitted, as, in this course, we shall not be con-
cerned with the use of graphing devices.
Can the graph of a function, given non-parametrically, be expressed in parametric form?
The curve y = f ( x) can be expressed in parametric form as, for example, x = t , y = f (t ). But
there are infinitely other ways of expressing it parametrically, for example
x = t 3, y = f (t 3),
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 208/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3153
but not necessarily
x = t
2
, y = f (t
2
),since the latter would include only the points with non-negative abscissæ.
Parametric vs. nonparametric representation of a curve When we represent a curve in
parametric form, the parametrization sometimes contains information beyond what is available
in a non-parametric representation. Often we can see a dynamic way of actually tracing out
the curve by allowing the parameter to range through its domain. So, for example, the curve
x = cos t
y = sin t
can be thought of as being traced out by a point that moves around the unit circle centred at
the origin, starting at the point (1, 0) at time t = 0, counterclockwise at a rate of 1 radian per
unit time as t increases (and clockwise at a rate of 1 radian per unit time as t decreases). If we
compare the curve with
x = cos2t
y = sin2t
we see that both trace out the same circle, covering the curve infinitely often, but the second
curve moves twice as fast. If we wanted to eliminate the multiple covering, we could include
the inequalities 0 ≤ t < 0 in the first case, or 0 ≤ t < π
2 in the second.The standard way to transform from parametric to non-parametric equations is to eliminate
the parameter “between” the equations, which can be interpreted as solving one equation for
the parameter, and substituting that value into the second equation. However, this operation
sometimes “loses information”.
“Cartesian” representation of curves Where the textbook speaks of a Cartesian represen-
tation, I prefer to speak of a non-parametric representation. All the representations for curves
considered in these two sections are Cartesian, since they all refer to the system of represen-
tation associated with Rene Descartes. In the following two sections we will be considering
curves represented in another way — in the so called polar representation.
Example C.70 [7, Exercise 13, p. 656] asks you to find a Cartesian equation of the curve
x = cos2 θ , y = sin2 θ ,−π
2 < θ < π
2
. We can eliminate θ by solving one equation for θ and
substituting into the second; or, more elegantly, by adding the two equations together, obtaining
an equation that does not involve θ :
x + y = 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 209/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3154
But this equation does not convey all of the information we started with. One type of infor-
mation that has been lost is the fact that both x and y, being squares, are non-negative. Thusit is not the whole line x + y = 1 that is equivalent, but only the line segment joining the
points (0, 1) and (1, 0). This feature is essential, since the doubly-infinite line is not the curve
represented by the parametric equations. Another type of information that is contained in the
parametrization is the way in which this line segment is traversed. The point is moving back
and forth between the point (1, 0) and the point (0, 1), covering the open segment in a parame-
ter interval of length π4
. Distance is not covered at a constant speed — the point moves fastest
in the middle of the segment; but, so far, we are not interested in how fast the point is moving.
There is more than one correct way to describe this curve, but giving the equation x + y = 1
is not enough.
Example C.71 [7, Exercise 17, p. 656]
(a) Eliminate the parameter to find a Cartesian equation of the curve.
(b) Sketch the curve and indicate with an arrow the direction in which the curve is traced as
the parameter increases:
x = cosh t y = sinh t
For every value of t a point with these coordinates can be seen to lie on the curve x2 − y2 = 1,
which is a hyperbola with two branches, one opening to the right, and passing through the point
(1, 0), the other opening to the left, and passing through the point (−1, 0); the curves are both
asymptotic to the lines y = ± x. But, since the hyperbolic cosine is positive, the parametrizationapplies only to the right branch of the hyperbola: the curve comes in from −∞ from below,
passes through (1, 0) at t = 0, and the moves off along the upper half as t → +∞. So one way
to describe the curve non-parametrically is
x2 − y2 = 1
x ≥ 0.
This curve may be parameterized in other ways. For example, we could represent it as
x = sec t
y = tan t
(cf. [7, Exercise 14, p. 656]) but this time we need to restrict the values the parameter may
take, for example by
−π
2 < θ <
π
2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 210/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3155
The Cycloid In this subsection the textbook describes the construction of this interesting
curve. You are not expected to remember specific properties of this curve, nor its history.However, you should be able to work with this curve if the parametric equations are given
to you, in the same way as you would be expected to be able to work with any reasonable
curve given parametrically. The particular parametrization developed in the textbook is x =
r (θ − sin θ ), y = r (1 − cos θ ).
Families of Parametric Curves Here the author considers a family of curves given para-
metrically, in which the various members of the family all have a similar equation obtained
by assigning diff erent values to a variable in the parametric equations. That variable is also
called a parameter , and the family of curves could be called a parametric family of curves
represented by parametric equations. Of course, the parameter that represents the family of
curves is not the same as the parameter that represents the family of points on any specific
curve. For example, x2 + y2 = a2 could be considered a parametric family of curves (circles)
given in non-parametric form; we could represent the same family in parametric form by
x = a cos t
y = a sin t
where the parameter t represents position on a specific curve, and the parameter a represents
the diff erent curves in the family. We could also interpret the equation by switching the roles
of the parameters: the curve
x = a cos t y = a sin t (78)
with t constant and a variable represents the points on the line through the origin inclined to
the positive x-axis by an angle of t radians. This point of view will become important in [1,
§10.3].
Here again, you are expected to be able to work with reasonable families of parametric
curves, but not to know specific properties of those families (with the exception of the obvious
parametric equations for familiar curves, like the circle).
Example C.72 Equation of a line in the plane. The line in the plane through the point
( x0, y0) and with slope m has non-parametric equation y = y0 + m( x − x0). It can be represented
parametrically in infinitely many ways. If we choose to relate the parameter to distance along
the line, one can show that the following equations represent the line:
x = x0 + t
y = y0 + mt
Check that the line segment joining any two points on this line has slope m
1 = m. (Take two
points with coordinates ( x0 + a, y0 + ma) and ( x0 + b, y0 + mb).)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 211/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3156
C.23.2 §10.2 Calculus with Parametric Curves
Tangents If a curve is given parametrically by ( x, y) = ( x(t ), y(t )), then (subject to certain
conditions) we can diff erentiate y with respect to x by passing through an intermediate variable
t . Recalling thatdx
dt · dt
dx=
dx
dx= 1 ,
we have
dy
dx=
dy
dt · dt
dx
= dy
dt · 1
dx
dt
so we can determine the first derivative dy
dx in terms of the derivatives of the functions f and
g. This calculation can be extended to the second derivative d 2 y
dx2, although the expressions are
not as pretty:
d 2 y
dx2 =
d
dx
dy
dx
= d
dt dy
dx ·
dt
dx
= d
dt
dy
dt dx
dt
· 1
dx
dt
=
d 2 y
dt 2 · dx
dt − d 2 x
dt 2 · dy
dt dx
dt
2
· 1
dx
dt
=
d 2 y
dt 2 · dx
dt − d 2 x
dt 2 · dy
dt dx
dt
3
Rather than substituting in this formula, memorized, you are advised to be able to carry out
this computation for a specific parameterized curve. It enables us to study the concavity of
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 212/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3157
a parameterized curve, and to apply the 2nd derivative test if necessary in an optimization
problem.At this point in the lecture I began to discuss the curve which is featured in [1, Exercise 6,
p. 636]. The discussion will be continued at the next lecture.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 213/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3158
C.24 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 03rd, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, March 03rd, 2010
C.24.1 §10.2 Calculus with Parametric Curves (continued)
Example C.73 (cf. [1, Exercise 6, p. 636]) (see Figure 7 on page 3158) Let’s investigate the
1
0
-2
0.5
-0.5
-1.5
-1
1.510.50-1 -0.5-1.5
Figure 7: The curve x = cos θ + sin 2θ , y = sin θ + cos2θ
curve given parametrically by
x = cos θ + sin2θ (79)
y = sin θ + cos2θ (80)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 214/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3159
Diff erentiating the parameterizing functions, we obtain
dxd θ
= − sin θ + 2cos2θ
= −4sin2 θ − sin θ + 2
= −4
sin2 θ +
1
4 sin θ − 1
2
= −4
sin θ + 1
8
2
− 33
64
= −4
sin θ + 1 +
√ 33
8
sin θ + 1 −
√ 33
8
dyd θ
= cos θ − 2sin2θ
= −4cos θ
sin θ − 1
4
The textbook asks us to find an equation for the tangent to the curve at the point with parameter
value θ = 0. We find that, when θ = 0,
dx
d θ , dy
d θ
= (2, 1), so the slope of the tangent at the
point ( x(0), y(0)) = (1, 1) is 12
, and an equation for the tangent is
y = 1 +
1
2 ( x − 1)
or x − 2 y + 1 = 0.
We can now use the same curve to illustrate some of the other theory of this section. For
example, we can determine where the curve is horizontal, by solving the equation dy
dx= 0,
which implies that dy
d θ = 0. We find that this happens when
cos θ = 0 or sin θ = 1
4 ,
which we could proceed to solve. We can also determine where the curve is vertical, by
determining where dxd θ
= 0; this happens when
sin θ = −1 ±
√ 33
8
All of these equations could be solved. Since the curve is expressed entirely in terms of
sin θ , cos θ , sin 2θ , cos 2θ , and these functions are periodic, repeating themselves after θ passes
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 215/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3160
through an interval of length 2π, we can see the whole curve by confining θ to the interval
0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π. In that interval the cosine vanishes when θ = π
2 , 3π
2 , and sin θ = 1
4 when
θ = arcsin 1
4 and π − arcsin
1
4. These are the 4 points where the curve is horizontal; one of
those point is the origin, because the curve passes through the origin several times, one of those
times with a horizontal tangent. The curve has the shape of a “3-leafed rose” or a “trefoil” (3-
leafed clover) centred at the origin, with one petal bisected by the y-axis. We will see other
curves with this shape when we study polar coordinates in [1, §10.3].
For the same curve given parametrically by equations (79), (80), let’s consider the follow-
ing question, similar to [1, Exercise 25, p. 636]: “Show that the curve..has (several)...tangents
at ( x, y) = (0, 0), and find their equations.”
Solution: If we set the coordinates equal to zero and solve, we can simplify the resulting
equations, to obtain:
cos θ · (1 + 2sin θ ) = 0
(sin θ − 1) · (1 + 2sin θ ) = 0 .
The curve passes through the origin whenever both of the equations are satisfied. This means
that either
sin θ = −1
2 , (81)
or both50 of the following equations must hold:
cos θ = 0 (82)
sin θ = 1 . (83)
For θ between 0 and 2π, these last equations are satisfied when θ = π
2; equation (81) is satisfied
when θ = 7π
6 ,
11π
6 . The curve, which has the shape of a 3-leafed clover or a “3-leafed rose”,
passes through the origin 3 times, and we can find the slopes of the tangents in the usual way,
by taking the ratio
dy
d θ dx
d θ
.
50Note that the second equation implies the first, but the first does not imply the second; we could thus have
shown only the second equation.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 216/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3161
Areas. Consider the arc of the curve x = f (t ), y = g(t ) determined by points with parameter
value t between α ≤ t ≤ β. Since β
α
g(t ) · f (t ) dt =
f ( β)
f (α)
y · dx ,
the first integral represents the area between the arc and the x-axis. Remember, though, that
the curve need no longer be the graph of a function, so it could cross vertical lines more than
once. This means that the area could be “folded”, and there might be portions that could be
counted negatively and canceling the portions that you are interested in. For that reason you
should use this integral only where you are clear about the shape of the region whose area you
are finding, and there might be situations where the region should be broken up into parts and
the areas of the parts found separately.
Arc Length. In a similar way to the preceding, we can argue that the length of the arc
α ≤ t ≤ β of the curve x = u(t ), y = v(t ) between α ≤ t ≤ β is given by the integral
β
α
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
dt .
Note that, when we consider the parametrization
x = t y = f (t ) (a
≤ x
≤ b)
of the graph of the function y = f ( x) between the points (a, f (a)) and (b, f (b)), this reduces
to the formula we derived earlier. Here again, be careful that you are finding the length of the
curve that you intend. In this case there cannot be any cancellation, since the integrand is a
square root, which cannot be negative. If you obtain a negative length, it could simply be a
consequence of the direction in which you have parameterized the curve, which is harmless;
or of an error you have made in you calculations, which is serious.
Surface Area. We can also adapt, in the obvious ways, our previous formulæ for area of
surfaces of revolution.
Example C.74 Let’s determine a formula for the surface area of a doughnut. Suppose that the
doughnut is generated by the curve
x = R + r cos θ
y = 0 + r sin θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 217/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3162
where 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π, where this circle, centred at the point ( x, y) = ( R, 0), is revolved around the
y-axis. Assume R ≥ r .
Area of revolution =
2π
0
2π( R + r cos θ )
dx
d θ
2
+
dy
d θ
2
d θ
=
2π
0
2π( R + r cos θ )√
r 2 d θ
= 2πr [ Rθ + r sin θ ]2π0 = 2πr [ R · 2π − R · 0] = 4π2rR.
Volumes. The textbook appears to say little about this, but here again the earlier formulæ can
be adapted, to determine, for example, the volume of revolution generated by a given curve
about a given axis.
10.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 54, p. 637] “Find the total length of the astroid x = a cos3 t , y = a sin3 t .”
Solution: This curve is generated over an interval of length 2π: we can take 0 ≤ t ≤ 2π.
the curve looks like a deformed circle, that has been pinched towards the centre at the
points away from where it crosses the coordinate axes.
Total length = 2π
0 dx
dt 2
+dy
dt 2
dt
=
2π
0
−3a cos2 · sin t 2
+3a sin2 t · cos t
2dt
=
2π
0
3|a| · | cos t · sin t | dt
By symmetry we can find the length of one quarter of the curve:
Total length = 4
π
2
0
3|a| · | cos t · sin t | dt
= 4|a|
π2
0
3cos t · sin t dt
= 6|a|sin2 t
π2
0= 6|a| .
[1, Exercise 48, p. 637] Find the length of the loop of the curve x = 3t − t 3, y = 3t 2.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 218/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3163
Solution: Where does this loop begin and end? We need to find all parameter values
t 1, t 2 where t 1
t 2 but
3t 1 − t 31 = 3t 2 − t 32
3t 21 = 3t 22
The equations can be simplified to
(t 1 − t 2)(3 − t 21 − t 1t 2 − t 22) = 0
(t 1 − t 2)(t 1 + t 2) = 0
When we know that t 1 t 2, the equations further simplify to the system
3 − t 21 − t 1t 2 − t 22 = 0
t 1 + t 2 = 0
which imply that t 1 = −t 2 = ±√
3. Thus these two curves intersect in the points that
have parameter values ±√
3.
Since dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
=
3 − 3t 2
2
+ (6t )2
= 3(1 + t 2
) ,
the length of the arc of the loop is
√ 3
−√
3
3(1 + t 2) dt = 23t + t 3
√ 3
0= 12
√ 3 ,
since the integrand is an odd function, and the limits of integration are symmetrically
located around t = 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 219/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3164
C.25 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 05th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, March 05th, 2010
C.25.1 §10.2 Calculus with Parametric Curves (conclusion)
One topic remaining, not discussed in the previous lectures is summarized in the following
subsection, which was included earlier in these notes on page 3160:
Areas. Consider the arc of the curve x = f (t ), y = g(t ) determined by points
with parameter value t between α ≤ t ≤ β. Since
β
α
g(t )
· f (t ) dt =
f ( β)
f (α)
y
·dx ,
the first integral represents the area between the arc and the x-axis. Remember,
though, that the curve need no longer be the graph of a function, so it could cross
vertical lines more than once. This means that the area could be “folded”, and there
might be portions that could be counted negatively and canceling the portions that
you are interested in. For that reason you should use this integral only where you
are clear about the shape of the region whose area you are finding, and there might
be situations where the region should be broken up into parts and the areas of the
parts found separately.
I illustrate this theory with the following example:
10.2 Exercises (conclusion)
[1, Exercise 34, p. 637] “Find the area of the region enclosed by the astroid x = a cos3 θ ,
y = a sin3 θ .” This is the same curve considered above in [1, Exercise 54, p. 637]. Let’s
consider the arch in the first quadrant. The area will be 4 times the area in the first
quadrant, which is
a 0
y dx =
π2
0
y(θ ) · dx(θ )
d θ d θ
=
π2
0
a sin3 θ ·−3a cos2 θ · (− sin θ )
d θ
.
You know one way to evaluate an integral of this type — by replacing sin 2 θ and cos2 θ
respectively by 1 − cos2θ
2 and
1 + cos2θ
2 . A variant of that method is as follows:
π2
0
a sin3 θ ·−3a cos2 θ · (− sin θ )
d θ
= 3a2
π2
0
a sin4 θ · cos2 θ d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 220/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3165
= 3a2
π2
0
1
−cos2θ
2 · sin2θ
22
d θ
= 3a2
8
π2
0
sin2 2θ − sin2 2θ · cos2θ
d θ
= 3a2
8
π2
0
1 − cos4θ
2 − sin2 2θ · cos2θ
d θ
= 3a2
8θ
2 −
sin4θ
8 −
sin3 2θ
6
π2
0
= 3πa2
32 ,
so the area of the interior of the astroid is 3πa2
8 .
Laboratory Project: Bezier Curves Omit this subsection.
C.25.2 §10.3 Polar Coordinates
Polar Curves. In the polar coordinate system we locate points in the plane by taking a special
point, called the pole, a special half-line or ray which emanates from the pole, called the polar
axis and a direction for measuring positive angles — usually taken to be the counter-clockwise
direction. Any point can be located if we know its distance from the pole, usually denoted by
r , and the angle that the line joining them makes with the polar axis in the positive direction,
usually denoted by θ . However, the angle is not unique, since angles of θ and θ + 2nπ will
give the same point for any integer n. So here we have one of the essential diff erences between
polar and cartesian coordinates:
Theorem C.75 The polar coordinates of a point are never unique.
In the case of the pole itself, the angle θ is totally undetermined: once we know that r = 0, any
angle θ will give the same point.
Convention permitting negative r . It is convenient to broaden the multiplicity of coordi-
nates by permitting the distance from the pole to be negative. We do this by agreeing that ( r , θ )
and (−r , θ + π) represent the same point. This convention permits for continuous representation
of certain curves, but causes complications at various stages: occasionally additional care is
required.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 221/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3166
Relations between polar and cartesian coordinates. In theory we can set up polar and
cartesian systems independently in the plane, placing the pole at any convenient place. Inpractice we often place the pole at the origin of a cartesian system, with the polar axis along the
positive x-axis. When the author of the textbook suggests that you are to consider two systems
at the same time, and gives no other information, this is what he expects you to do.51 When
the polar and cartesian systems are placed in this “standard” way, the following relationships
hold:
x = r · cos θ
y = r · sin θ
x2 + y2 = r 2
y
x
= tan θ
Note that, while it is possible to transform from polar to cartesian coordinates without ambi-
guity, it is not always possible to move painlessly in the other direction; this is because of the
non-uniqueness of polar coordinates, about which much more will be said. If you are given an
equation in cartesian coordinates, you can transform it to polar by substituting the appropriate
formulæ for x and y and simplifying — try [1, Problems 21-26, p. 648]; if you are given the
coordinates of a point in polar coordinates, you can transform to cartesian in the same way —
try [1, Exercises 3-4, p. 647].
Consequences of Non-uniqueness of Polar Coordinates. This is a difficult topic, and will
require considerable practice before you will become comfortable with it! Some of the prob-
lems you will have are related to understanding what is meant by an equation for a curve:
you need to understand that any curve can be represented in multiple ways, even when we use
cartesian coordinates. But, when the representation of the points themselves is not unique, the
results can be confusing.
We saw with parametric equations that the same point on a curve can appear more than once
on a “curve”. In that context there was a “natural” way of tracing out the curve, by following
increasing values of the parameter. When we come to study polar coordinates, the situation is
much more complicated, because there is no “natural” way of following the generation of the
curve, and no one set of coordinates for a point has preferential status with respect to others.
Polar curves can be expressed by any relationship between r and θ , although more often than
not the equation will be in the form r = f (θ ); however, you will see some equations in the formθ = f (r ) — for example, the equation θ =
π
4 represents the line through the pole inclined at an
angle of π
4 to the polar axis.
51However, there is an important application, involving conic sections — ellipses, parabolæ, hyperbolæ, where
we place the origin at a diff erent point; this topic is not on the syllabus of the present course, but you may read
about it in [1, §10.6].
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 222/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3167
Symmetry When we studied symmetry in the context of cartesian coordinates, we could
have considered [1, pp. 19-20, 308]
• reflective symmetry in a vertical line, particularly in the y-axis;
• reflective symmetry in a horizontal line, particularly in the x-axis;
• rotational symmetry about a point, particularly about an angle of π around the origin
(which is equivalent to reflective symmetry in both the x-axis and the y-axis); and
• periodicity of a graph under a horizontal shift.
These are not the only types of symmetries that a graph can possess, so the study in the textbook
is selective, and we haven’t investigated thoroughly what principles were involved.Similarly, when we consider symmetry in the context of polar coordinates, we will not
attempt a thorough study, but will consider types of symmetries which the polar system is
particularly able to accommodate. Here are the types of symmetry that the textbook mentions:
• reflective symmetry in the polar axis — exhibited by the invariance of the equation of a
curve under the substitution θ → −θ .52
• rotational symmetry under a rotation through an angle of π around the pole — exhibited
by the invariance of the equation under the transformation r → −r or under θ → θ + π
• reflective symmetry under reflection in the line θ =
π
2
, exhibited by invariance under the
transformation θ → π − θ .
Again, these are not the full range of symmetries that can occur in the plane. Because of
the non-uniqueness of coordinates, curves can have the symmetries listed without exhibiting
invariance under the transformations listed. For example, the curve θ = π is the line that
extends the polar axis. It certainly has symmetry in the polar axis, but the equation is not
unchanged when we replace θ by −θ . You are not expected to be an expert in the subject of
symmetries.
Graphing Polar Curves with Graphing Devices. Omit this section — this is a device-free
course.52This description is incomplete. See the discussion below on page 3177 of Example C.78 ([7, Exercise 37, p.
678]).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 223/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3168
Where is the point with polar coordinates (r , θ )? The ambiguity in polar coordinates is not
in locating a point with given coordinates — it is only that all points possess multiple sets of coordinates. If you are given the coordinates (r , θ ), you may locate the point by:
• First, locating the ray obtained by turning the polar axis (the distinguished ray that em-
anates from the pole, relative to which we refer all coordinate angles) through an angle
of θ in the positive direction; and
• then
– if r ≥ 0, proceeding along that ray a distance of r ; or
– if r ≤ 0, proceeding along the extension of the polar axis beyond the pole a distance
of
−r .
Example C.76 ([7, Exercise 2, p. 677]) Plot the point whose polar coordinates are−1, −π
2
.
Then find two other pairs of polar coordinates of this point, one with r > 0, and one with r < 0.
Solution: The second coordinate tells us that the point is on the line inclined to the polar axis
at an angle of −π2
radians measured in the positive direction: this takes us to the ray which is
obtained by turning the polar axis in the clockwise direction through a right angle. But then
the negative first polar coordinate tells us to proceed along the opposite ray for 1 unit. If the
polar system is superimposed on a cartesian system in the usual way, the point is the unit point
on the positive y-axis. This point has the following other sets of polar coordinates:
with positive r : 1, π2
+ 2nπwith negative r :
−1, −π
2 + 2mπ
or
−1, 3π
2 + 2π
where n, m, and are any integers.
Example C.77 ([7, Exercise 12, p. 677]) “Sketch the region in the plane consisting of points
whose polar coordinates satisfy the conditions −1 ≤ r ≤ 1, π4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
4 .”
Solution: Let’s separate the portion of the region described by positive r , zero r , and negative
r :
positive r . 0 < r ≤ 1, π4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
4 describes a sector of the unit disk centred at the pole — all
points in the region bounded by two perpendicular radii bisecting the first and second
quadrants. The points on the radii and the bounding circle are included.
zero r . The region described by r = 0, π4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
4 consists of the pole alone: the θ coordinate
is irrelevant for the pole.
negative r . −1 ≤ r < 0, π4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
4 describes the region antipodal to the one described for
positive r — between radii at angles π + π4
and π + 3π4
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 224/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3169
10.3 Exercises
[1, Exercise 14, p. 648] “Find a formula for the distance between the points with polar coor-
dinates (r 1, θ 1) and (r 2, θ 2).”
Solution: One way to solve this problem is to transform to cartesian coordinates, then
apply the usual distance formula, after which cancellations will occur. A more direct
way is to apply the Law of Cosines to a triangle whose vertices are the pole and the two
given points. That is easy if we assume that r 1 and r 2 are non-negative, so they represent
the lengths of the sides of the triangle. To solve the problem in this way we need to
consider several cases. The result is the same: the distance is
r 21
+ r 22
−2r 1r 2 cos(θ 1
−θ 2) .
[1, Exercise 18, p. 648] Identify the curve r = 2 cos θ + 2sin θ .
Solution: The textbook suggests finding a cartesian equation first. This is not always
easy, but is not impractical in the present problem. If we multiply the given equation by
r , we obtain the equation
r 2 − 2r cos θ − 2r sin θ = 0
which we see is equivalent to
x2 + y2 − 2 x − 2 y = 0
i.e., to
( x − 1)2 + ( y − 2)2 = 2
which is a circle with radius√
2 centred at the point (1, 1). However, we must note that,
in multiplying an equation by a factor — equivalently in multiplying the two equations
r = 2cos θ + 2sin θ (84)
r = 0 (85)
we were, in the second equation, possibly permitting new points to be included in the
“curve”. We must carefully analyze whether the equation r = 0 did that. But we know
that r = 0 represents only the pole! And the pole was already on the given curve: itappears there as
(r , θ ) =
0,
3π
4
.
So multiplying by r = 0 does not introduce any new points.53
53But what would happen if you were to multiply an equation like r = 1 by r = 0?
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 225/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3170
[1, Exercise 30, p. 648] Describe the curve with the equation r 2 − 3r + 2 = 0.
Solution: The equation can be rewritten as
(r − 1)(r − 2) = 0 ,
which is satisfied by all points whose r -coordinate is either 1 or 2, i.e., by all points on
either of two concentric circles around the pole.
[1, Exercise 33, p. 648] Describe the curve with the equation r = 2(1 − sin θ ) (θ ≥ 0).
Solution: (see Figure 8 on page 3170) Under the transformation θ → π − θ the equation
0
-2
-1
-3
-4
210-1-2
Figure 8: The cardioid with equation r = 2(1 − sin θ )
is unchanged, so the curve has symmetry in the y-axis. This is a “heart-shaped” curve,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 226/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3171
called a cardioid . The textbook describes another example in [1, Example 9, pp. 645-
646], where the author shows, as we could show here, that the curve is tangent to the y-axis. We call the point of tangency (here, the pole) a cusp. (The condition θ ≥ 0 does
not restrict the curve in any way, since the function 2(1 − sin θ ) is periodic with period
2π: any part of the curve that might require a negative value θ 0 of θ to represent it, can
also be represented by the θ 0 + 2πn, where n is any integer; taking n sufficiently large
will make this value positive.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 227/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3172
C.26 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 08th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, March 08th, 2010
C.26.1 §10.3 Polar Coordinates (continued)
10.3 Exercises (conclusion)
[1, Exercise 34, p. 648] Describe the curve with equation r = 1 − 3 cos θ . (see Figure 9 on
page 3172)
2
0
1
-1
-2
0-1-2-3-4
Figure 9: The lima¸con r = 1 − 3cos θ ,
Solution: It is not practical to represent this curve in cartesian coordinates. We note
that, when θ is replaced by −θ , the equation is unchanged. This tells us that the curve is
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 228/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3173
symmetric about the polar axis. Try tracing it out by starting with the point with θ = 0. If
we superimpose a cartesian system in the usual way, that point is the point with cartesiancoordinates (−2, 0). The curve passes through the pole first when θ = arccos 1
3, about
70 degrees. It crosses the y-axis at the point with cartesian coordinates ( x, y) = (0, 1),
and then moves to its maximum distance of 1 + 3 = 4 from the pole when θ = π. Then
it returns, crossing the negative y-axis at ( x, y) = (0, −1), and passing again through the
pole. The curve is one of the family called limacons, see them sketched in [1, Example
11, p. 647].
Tangents to Polar Curves I discuss how to determine the tangents to curves of the form
r = f (θ ). The discussion is based on the observation that, if we superimpose polar and cartesian
systems in the most usual way, we can express x and y in terms of θ by
x = f (θ ) · cos θ
y = f (θ ) · sin θ
and thereby interpret θ as a parameter in the parametric representation of a curve. We find that
dy
dx=
dy
d θ dx
d θ
=
dr
d θ · sin θ + r · cos θ
dr
d θ · cos θ − r · sin θ
. (86)
In the case of the cardioid r = 2(1 − sin θ ), we find that
dy
dx =
2 sin θ − 1
4cos θ
when cos θ 0. When θ = 0, at the unit point on the initial ray, the tangent has slope −14
. As θ
increases to π6
the tangent becomes vertical; then, as θ > π6
and θ → π2
−, the tangent approaches
the vertical, with positive slope. Similarly, as θ → π2
+, the tangent approaches the vertical, with
negative slope. We say that this curve has a cusp at the pole.
[1, Exercise 35, p. 648] Describe the curve with equation r = θ , with θ ≥ 0.
Solution: This curve is a spiral, turning around the pole. (see Figure 10 on page 3174)If, however, we were to ask about the curve with equation r = θ , with θ ≤ 0, it is also a
spiral around the pole. (see Figure 11 on page 3175) The superposition of the two curves
is shown in Figure 12 on page 3176.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 229/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3174
30
10
-30
30
20
20-20-30
-20
10
-10
-10
0
0
Figure 10: The spiral with equation r = θ , (θ ≥ 0)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 230/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3175
30
10
-30
30
20
20-20-30
-20
10
-10
-10
0
0
Figure 11: The spiral with equation r = θ , (θ ≤ 0)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 231/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3176
30
10
-30
20
0
3010-30
-20
-10
-20 -10 200
Figure 12: The full spiral with equation r = θ , −∞ < θ < +∞
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 232/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3177
Example C.78 ([7, Exercises 37, 40, p. 678]) Describe the curves with equations r = sin 2θ ,
r = sin 5θ .Solution: First let’s consider the curve r = sin2θ . (see Figure 13 on page 3177) While the
0.6
0.2
-0.6
0.4
0
-0.4
-0.2
0.60.40.20-0.2-0.6 -0.4
Figure 13: The “4-leafed rose” with equation r = sin 2θ ,
equation does not remain unchanged when we replace θ by
−θ , it changes to r =
−sin 2θ ,
which contains the same points, since it can be rewritten as −r = sin 2(θ + π), which can beobtained from the original equation by the transformation
(r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π) .
Thus this curve is symmetric about the polar axis. It is also symmetric about the y-axis, since
the replacement of θ by π2 − θ leaves the equation unchanged. The curve is a “4-leafed rose”,
where each petal is tangent to the cartesian axes, if located in the usual way.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 233/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3178
But, when the multiplier of θ is an odd integer, the situation changes. (see Figure 14 on
page 3178) The curve r = sin 5θ is again a “rose”, passing through the pole every 36 degrees.
0.8
0
0.4
-0.4
-0.8
0.80 0.4-0.8 -0.4
Figure 14: The “5-leafed rose” with equation r = sin 5θ ,
It is not symmetric about the y-axis, nor about the x-axis. (It is symmetric under reflections in
other axes, and also under rotation through certain angles around the pole.)
Example C.79 ([7, Exercises 42, p. 678]) Sketch the curve with the polar equation r 2 = sin 2θ .
Note that there are no points on this curve for π2
< θ < π2
since, in that interval, sin 2θ < 0. The
entire curve is traced out for 0 ≤ θ ≤ π2
: every value of θ gives rise to two points on the graph.
(see Figure 15 on page 3179)
Example C.80 Where is the curve r = sin 2θ horizontal?
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 234/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3179
0.8
0
0.4
-0.4
0.80.40-0.8 -0.4
-0.8
0.3
0.1
-0.3
0.2
0
-0.2
-1 0 0.5 1
-0.1
-0.5
Figure 15: The lemniscates r 2 = sin 2θ , r 2 = cos 2θ
Solution: We set dy
dx= 0 in (86):
dr
d θ · sin θ + r · cos θ = 0
⇔ 2cos2θ · sin θ + sin2θ · cos θ = 0
⇔ 2(1 − 2sin
2
θ ) · sin θ + 2sin θ · cos
2
θ = 0⇔ 2 sin θ (2 − 3sin2 θ ) = 0
so the tangents will be horizontal when
sin θ = 0, ±
2
3 ,
i.e., when
θ = 0, ± arcsin
2
3, π ± arcsin
2
3 .
C.26.2 §10.4 Areas and Lengths in Polar Coordinates
Areas To find the area bounded by a curve given in polar coordinates we express the area as
the limit of a sum of narrow triangles whose bases are along the bounding curve, and whose
upper vertex is at the pole. It was shown in the lecture that the area subtended by the arc of the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 235/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3180
curve r = f (θ ) between θ = a and θ = b is then
b a
1
2 · ( f (θ ))2 d θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 236/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3181
C.27 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 10th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, March 10th, 2010
C.27.1 §10.4 Areas and Lengths in Polar Coordinates (continued)
Areas To find the area bounded by a curve given in polar coordinates we express the area as
the limit of a sum of narrow triangles whose bases are along the bounding curve, and whose
upper vertex is at the pole. It was shown in the lecture that the area subtended by the arc of the
curve r = f (θ ) between θ = a and θ = b is then
b
a
1
2 ·( f (θ ))2 d θ .
(This could be shown in two diff erent ways: by treating the element of area as a sector of a cir-
cle, or as a narrow, isosceles triangle.) As with all other formulæ involving polar coordinates,
one must use this formula with care. Be sure that you know precisely what the region looks
like; in case of doubt, break the region up into parts, and find the areas of the parts separately.
The limits must be chosen carefully, to be sure that, for example, you are not computing more
area than you intend. For example, the curve r = cos θ is a circle of radius 12
centred at the
point
12
, 0
, and passing through the pole. The curve is swept out as θ ranges from 0 to π, so
the area of the disk is
1
2
π 0
cos2 θ d θ = 1
4
π 0
(1 + cos2θ ) d θ = π
4 .
Compare this with the area of the disk r = 1, centred at the pole, where the curve is swept out
as θ ranges from 0 to 2π;
Area = 1
2
2π 0
1 d θ = π .
In that case, if we were to stop at π, we would obtain only the area of the upper half-disk.
Rather than attempting to memorize rules about limits for integrals, I suggest you carefullyanalyze each problem individually.
Finding the intersections of curves in polar coordinates The textbook [1, p. 651-652]
discusses the difficulties that of finding intersections which are a consequence of the multiple
sets of coordinates for points. Some textbooks suggest that finding the intersections can only
be done visually, and that is not true. In fact, intersections can be found algebraically, but one
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 237/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3182
must be careful and thorough. I attach below a discussion I prepared for a class some years
ago, where another textbook had made a false statement that I felt obliged to correct; the erroris continued in the current edition of the same textbook.
Example C.81 In an example in another textbook [31, Example 8, p. 579], [30, Example 8, p.
635] the objective is to find the points where the curves
r = 1 + sin θ (87)
r 2 = 4 sin θ (88)
intersect. It was stated in the textbook solution that only one of the points of intersection
can be found algebraically, and that the others can be found only “when the equations are
graphed”. We show here all intersection points can be found algebraically! We never resort to
calculations on a sketch: all procedures can be justified theoretically — the sketch serves onlyto help visualize a situation that can be adequately described verbally and / or with mathematical
formulæ.
(cf. Figure 16, page 3182) Had the curves been given in cartesian coordinates, we could
–2
–1
0
1
2
–1 –0.5 0.5 1
Figure 16: Intersecting polar curves r = 1 + sin θ , r 2 = 4 sin θ
have found all intersections by solving the equations simultaneously. Why can’t we solve the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 238/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3183
polar equations in the same way? The difficulty derives from the fact that any point has in-
finitely many diff erent polar representations. More precisely, a point that can be representedby polar coordinates (r , θ ) also has coordinates ((−1)nr , θ + nπ), where n is any integer — pos-
itive or negative; moreover, the pole can be represented by (0, θ ), where θ is any real number.
To determine the points of intersection, one must consider the possibility that the same point
appears with di ff erent coordinates.
Solve the given equations algebraically: By eliminating sin θ between the two equations, we
obtain r 2 = 4(r −1), which implies that (r −2)2 = 0, so r = 2, and sin θ = 2−1 = 1. Hence
θ = π
2+2mπ, where m is any integer, and the points of intersection are
2,
π
2 + 2mπ
: but,
by the convention described above, these are representations of the same point, whose
“simplest” representation is 2, π
2.
Transform the equations in all possible ways and solve again: Apply to one of the equa-
tions the transformation
(r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π) (89)
and solve it with the original form of the other equation. Repeat this process until the
equations transform to a pair already solved. Equation (87) transforms to
−r = 1 + sin(θ + π) (90)
which is equivalent to
r = −
1 + sin θ (91)
which equation we solve with (88). Eliminating sin θ yields r = 2 ± 2√
2, so sin θ =
3 ± 2√
2. The upper sign is inadmissible, as a sine cannot exceed 1 in magnitude. Hence
r = 2 − 2√
2 and
sin θ = 3 − 2√
2 . (92)
The solutions to (92) are θ = sin−13 − 2
√ 2
+ 2mπ and θ = π − sin−13 − 2
√ 2
+ 2mπ;
we may take m = 0, as all other values of m give the same two points:2 − 2
√ 2, sin−1
3 − 2
√ 2
and2 − 2
√ 2, π − sin−1
3 − 2
√ 2
.
As the first coordinate in these cases is negative, we could equally well represent the
points as 2
√ 2 − 2, sin−1
3 − 2
√ 2
+ π
and 2
√ 2 − 2, − sin−1
3 − 2
√ 2
.
A second application of (89), to (90), restores the original equation; hence there are no
other intersection points, except possibly the pole.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 239/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3184
Check whether the pole is on both curves: On (87) the pole appears as 0, 3π
2, etc.; on (88)
it appears as (0, 0), etc. Thus the pole is also a point of intersection. The reason we did
not find it when we solved pairs of equations is that it appears on the two curves only
with diff erent sets of coordinates, no two related by (89).
Example C.82 [7, Exercise 29, p., 683] “Find the area of the region that lies inside both
curves: r = sin θ , r = cos θ .”
Solution: (see Figure 17 on page 3184) The curves are circles through the pole. To see this,
0.75
0.5
0.0
0.25
−0.5
1.0
1.0
0.75
0.25
0.5
−0.25
0.0−0.25−0.5
Figure 17: Curves r = sin θ , r = cos θ
multiply the first by r = 0 (which, of course, could be bringing the pole into the curve). The
resulting equation is r 2 = r sin θ , which, in cartesian coordinates, would be x2 + y2 = y, a
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 240/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3185
circle with centre (in cartesian coordinates) 0, 12 and radius 1
2. The operation of multiplying
by r = 0 did not, however, alter the curve, since the pole was already on the curve, with polarcoordinates (r , θ ) = (0, 0). In the same way we can show that the second curve is a circle of
the same radius centred at the point (r , θ ) =
12
, 0
; polar coordinates for the centre of the first
circle are, for example,
12
, π4
.
Where do the curves meet? (This was [7, Exercise 37, p. 683], which should have pre-
ceded the present problem in the exercises!) We can begin this investigation by solving their
equations, which imply that tan θ = 1, so θ = π4
+ nπ, where n is any integer; that implies that
r = ± 1√ 2
: the + sign is associated with the cases where n is even, the − sign with those where
n is odd. But (r , θ ) =
1√ 2
, π4
+ 2mπ
and (r , θ ) =− 1√
2, π
4 + (2m + 1)π
are all the same point —
having cartesian coordinates 12
, 12.
But the curves also meet at the pole, even though this did not show up when we solved theequations. This is because the pole appears on the first curve with θ = nπ, and on the second
curve with θ = (n + 12
)π. The only practical way to determine whether curves intersect at the
pole is to examine each of them separately for that point.
Could it be that the curves meet in any other points? While a sketch does not suggest that,
we should never rely on a sketch! If we transform the first equation under the transformation
(r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π), we find that the equation does not change (except for a sign change on
both sides); the same applies to the second equation. Thus, in the present example, there are no
intersections other than the pole in which a point will appear on the two curves with di ff erent
coordinates. We can comfortably proceed to the integration part of the problem, confident that
we have not missed any points of intersection.
We can see that the region whose area is sought is symmetric about the line θ = π4
, so it
suffices to find half of it and to double it. The lower half of the area is subtended at the pole by
the arc 0 ≤ θ ≤ π4
of the circle r = sin θ ; hence
Area = 2 · 1
2
π4
0
sin2 θ d θ
= 1
2
π4
0
(1 − cos2θ ) d θ
= 1
2
θ − sin 2θ
2
π4
0
= π
8 − 1
4 .
(You could have solved this problem using Cartesian coordinates.)
10.4 Exercises
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 241/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3186
[1, Exercise 22, p. 653] “Find the area enclosed by the loop of the strophoid r = 2cos θ −sec θ .”Solution: (see Figure 18 on page 3186) (The textbook did not expect a rigorous proof
0.2
-0.2
-0.6
10.80.60.40.2-0.2-0.4
0.6
0.4
0
-0.4
0
Figure 18: The strophoid r = 2 cos θ − sec θ
that the curve crosses itself only at the pole.) First we observe that the curve is entirelytraced out when θ passes through an interval of length 2π; so, without limiting generality,
we may confine ourselves to such an interval, say −π2
< θ < π2
, and thereby remove the
some possible ambiguity of coordinates. We must exclude the points where sec θ is
undefined. For convenience, let’s confine θ to the union of intervals
−π
2 < θ <
π
2 and
π
2 < θ <
3π
2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 242/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3187
Consider a point on the second branch, say with θ = φ + π, where −π2
< φ < π2
. We find
that, for this point,
r = 2 cos(φ + π) − sec(φ + π)
= −2cos φ + sec φ
= −(2 cos φ − sec φ)
So we see that the point is the same as the point (−r , φ). Thus, in order to see the whole
curve, it suffices to investigate angles θ between − π2
and π2
; some of the points will,
however, appear with negative r -values.
We observe that the replacement of θ by −θ does not change the equation: this tells us
that the curve is symmetric about the polar axis and its extension.
For the problem to be meaningful, there should be just one loop. The curve passes
through the pole when 0 = 2 cos θ −sec θ , equivalently, when cos θ = ± 1√ 2
. In the interval
to which we have confined θ , this will occur when θ = ±π4
. If we follow the curve as θ
comes from −π2
, we find that r is negative, and the point is in the 2nd quadrant. It passes
through the pole first when θ = −π4
, and is then in the fourth quadrant, striking the polar
axis when θ = 0, at the point (r , θ ) = (1, 0) and it then moves into the first quadrant,
following the mirror image of the portion in the fourth quadrant, passing through the
pole again when θ = π4
, and moving into the 3rd quadrant. If we consider the cartesian
coordinates of the curve in parametric form, we have
x = 2cos2 θ − 1
y = sin2θ − tan θ
and see that, as cos θ → 0, x → −1, and y → ±∞, so the curve is asymptotic to the
vertical line x = −1. Our present problem is to determine the area of the loop from
θ = −π4
to θ = π4
, or, by symmetry,
2
1
2
π4
0
(2cos θ − sec θ )2 d θ =
π4
0
4cos2 θ + sec2 θ − 4
d θ
=
π4
0
2cos2θ + sec2 θ − 2
d θ
= [sin 2θ + tan θ − 2θ ]π4
0
=
1 + 1 − π
2
− 0 = 2 − π
2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 243/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3188
[1, Exercise 26, p. 653] Find the area of the region that lies inside the curve
r = 2 + sin θ (93)
and outside the curve
r = 3 sin θ . (94)
Solution: (see Figure 19 on page 3188) The first step is to determine where the curves
3
1
2
1 20-2 -1
-1
0
Figure 19: Curves r = 2 + sin θ , r = 3 sin θ
intersect. We can start by solving equations (93) and (94) algebraically. We find that
r = 3 and θ = π2
+ 2nπ, where n is any integer. The second curve is a circle with centre at
the point (r , θ ) =
32
, π2
. The first curve appears to be some sort of oval, and touches the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 244/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3189
circle at its topmost point, which we shall call A, with coordinates (r , θ ) = 3, π2. Could
there be any other points of intersection? There don’t appear to be any, from the sketch,but we can resolve this question algebraically. The pole does not lie on first curve, since
that would entail that 0 = 2 + sin θ , i.e., that the sine of an angle exceeds 1 in magnitude.
Since that is not possible, the pole cannot lie on the curve. If there were to be any other
intersections, they would have to have diff erent sets of coordinates on the 2 curves. We
investigate what happens to (94) under the transformation
(r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π)
and find that the equation does not change significantly: it becomes −r = sin(θ + π) =
− sin θ , which is evidently equivalent to the original equation. Equation (93) changes to
−r = 2 + sin(θ + π) = 2 − sin θ , or
r = −2 + sin θ. (95)
When we solve this equation with (94), we find that r = −3, sin θ = −1: in the interval
0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π we find only the point (r , θ ) =−3, 3π
2
, which is the same point as (r , θ ) =
3, π2
, so we don’t find any new intersections. Thus there are no other intersections than
A.
A direct way to solve this problem is to find the area of the region bounded by the outer
curve, and then subtract from it the area of the disk inside. The outer curve is traced out
as θ ranges from 0 to 2π, so the area of the region it bounds will be
1
2
2π 0
(2 + sin θ )2 d θ = 1
2
2π 0
(4 + 4sin θ + sin2 θ ) d θ
= 1
2
2π 0
4 + 4sin θ +
1 − cos2θ
2
d θ
= 1
2
9θ
2 − 4cos θ − 1
4 sin 2θ
2π
0
= 9π
2
The inner curve bounds an area of
1
2
π 0
9sin2 θ d θ = 9
4
π 0
(1 − cos2θ ) d θ
= 9
4
θ − 1
2 sin 2θ
π
0
= 9
4 · π .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 245/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3190
What would have happened if we had taken the upper limit of integration to be 2π? We
would have found twice the area, because the entire circle is swept out as θ ranges overan interval of length π.
Thus we see that the area of the region between the curves is
9π
2 − 9π
4 =
9π
4 .
Could we find the area by taking the diff erence of two squares under the integral sign,
as is suggested in [1, Example 2 and Figures 5 and 6, p. 651]? We could do this for the
portion of the area above the polar axis and its extension, where we would obtain
1
2
π 0
(2 + sin θ )2 − (3 sin θ )2
d θ
= 1
2
π 0
(4 + 4sin θ − 4(1 − cos2θ )) d θ
= 1
2 [−4cos θ + 2sin2θ ]π
0 = (2 + 0) − (−2 + 0) = 4
For the remainder of the area only curve (93) and the extended polar axis serve as a
boundary:
1
2
2π π
(2 + sin θ )2 d θ = 1
2
9θ
2 − 4cos θ − 1
4 sin 2θ
2π
π
= 1
2
(9π − 4 − 0) −
9π
2 − (−4) − 0
=
9π
2 − 4
which, when added to the area of the upper portion, gives the same area as before.
What would have happened if we had subtracted the square of 3 sin θ over the full range
of the integration? We would have been subtracting the area of the inside disk twice!
And what would have happened if we had taken (95) as the equation of the outer curve?
If we used it only to find the area of the (larger) region bounded, we would obtain thecorrect value there. But, if we had taken the diff erence of squares under the integral sign,
we would obtain values for regions that do not correspond to the one whose are we are
trying to find.
Before finding an area in polar coordinates, (or, indeed, in cartesian coordinates as well),
you are urged to make a sketch and study the element of area that you are summing in
the limit, to ensure that the integral represents the area that you are seeking.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 246/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3191
Example C.83 Another example of finding the intersections of curves.
Find the intersections of the lima¸con r = 1 − 2cos θ and the circle r = 1. [29]
Solution: (see Figure 20 on page 3191) When we solve the given equations, we find the inter-
1.5
0
1
0.5
-0.5
-1.5
10-1-2-3
-1
Figure 20: Intersections of the limacon r = 1
−2cos θ with the circle r = 1
section points (r , θ ) for which cos θ = 0, i.e.,1, ±π
2
. But a glance at the graphs shows that
there appears to be a third point of intersection. Under the transformation (r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π),
the given equation for the circle r = 1 does not change in a significant way. However, the
equation of the lima¸con changes to r = −1 − 2cos θ ; when we solve this latter equation with
the equation r = 1, we find that cos θ = −1, so the point (r , θ ) = (1, π) is another point of
intersection: i.e., (1, π) on the circle, (−1, 0) on the original equation for the limacon.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 247/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3192
To finish this investigation we should investigate whether the pole is on both curves, since
that may not be detected by this method of transforming the equations. We note, however, thatthe curve r = 1 cannot possibly contain the pole, since all of its points are 1 unit from the
pole. Thus the investigation is complete: there are three point of intersection, and we have
now found them all.
Example C.84 A problem from a recent examination:
[12 MARKS] Use polar coordinates — no other method will be accepted — to
find the area of the region bounded by the curve r = 2 and the line r = 1
cos θ , and
containing the pole.
Solution: (see Figure 21 on page 3193) The first step is to determine where the two curves
intersect. While the points of intersection can all be found algebraically, that procedure istedious, so it is best to make a sketch first to see whether the elaborate procedure is required.
You should be able to see immediately that the curve r = 2 is a circle of radius 2 centred at
the pole. But what about r = sec θ ? Since the secant is never less than 1 in magnitude, you
know this curve does not pass through the pole. You also know that, as θ ranges between −π2
and π2
, the function ranges from −∞ to +∞ monotonely, so the curve will be closest to the pole
when θ = 0 — when it is 1 unit from the pole. As θ increases to + π2
, r increases steadily —
monotonely — the curve crossing the circle r = 2 and moving a greater and greater distance
from the pole. What happens when r < 0? A point with coordinates (−a, θ ), where a > 0 will
still be a distance a from the pole! (It’s located on the ray obtained by turning the polar axis
through an angle of θ + π.) So, as r
→ −∞, the curve again crosses each of the circles centred
at the pole and moves a greater and distance from the pole. This is all you need to know inorder to solve the problem, but you should be able to see that this is a very simple curve: just
multiply both sides of r = 1
cos θ by cos θ , and you see that the equation is r cos θ = 1, or, in
cartesian coordinates, x = 1 — the curve is a straight line perpendicular to the polar axis!
We have seen that there will be just 2 points of intersection of the curves. Solving their
equations by eliminating r we obtain cos θ = 12
, so θ = ±π3
: the points of intersection are
(r , θ ) =
2, ±π
3
.
We saw that the element of area in the form of a thin triangle with apex at the pole (or a thin
sector of a disk with centre at the pole) has area of the form 1
2r 2 d θ . In this problem such an
element would have to be described in two diff erent ways:
−π
3 ≤ θ ≤ π
3: The area of this triangle is
1
2
π3
− π3
1
cos2 θ d θ =
1
2[tan θ ]
π3
− π3
=√
3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 248/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3193
2
0
1
-1
20 1-2
-2
-1
Figure 21: Intersections of the curve r = sec θ with the circle r = 1
π
3 ≤ θ ≤ 5π
3 : The area of this portion of the disk is
1
2
5π3
π3
22
d θ =
1
2 [4θ ]
5π3
π3 =
8π
3 .
Thus the area of the region determined by the two curves, and containing the pole, is√
3 +8π
3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 249/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3194
This problem could also have been solved by subtracting from the area of the disk, π22, the
area given by
1
2
π3
− π3
(22 − sec2 θ ) d θ = 1
2[4θ − tan θ ]
π3
− π3
= 4π
3 −
√ 3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 250/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3195
C.28 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 12th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, March 12th, 2010
C.28.1 §10.4 Areas and Lengths in Polar Coordinates (conclusion)
Arc Length To develop a formula for the arc length of a curve given in polar coordinates as
r = f (θ ), we can apply the theory of curves given in parametric form to the curve
x = f (θ ) · cos θ
y = f (θ ) · sin θ
We find that
dx
d θ 2
+dy
d θ 2
=dr
d θ 2
+ r 2
so the length is given by the integral
L =
b a
dr
d θ
2
+ r 2 d θ
where the limits θ = a and θ = b need to be determined from the parametrization of the curve.
As usual, you should be careful to determine the appropriate values of θ to define the portion
of the curve that interest you.
10.4 Exercises (continued)
[1, Exercise 46, p. 654] Find the exact length of the arc of the polar curve r = e2θ from θ = 0
to θ = 2π.
Solution:
Length =
2π 0
dr
d θ
2
+ r 2 d θ
=
2π
0
2e2θ 2+ e2θ r 2 d θ
=√
5
2π 0
e2θ d θ
=
√ 5
2
e2θ 2π
0=
√ 5e4π − 1
2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 251/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3196
[1, Exercise 54, p. 654] Graph the curve r = cos2 θ 2
, and find its length.
Solution: The equation can be simplified to read
r =1 + cos
2 · θ
2
2
which we recognize to be a cardioid. As θ ranges over the interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π the entire
curve is traced out once.
Length =
2π 0
dr
d θ
2
+ r 2 d θ
= 1
2
2π 0
(− sin θ )2 + (1 + cos θ )2 d θ
= 1
2
2π 0
2(1 + cos θ ) d θ
= 1
2
2π 0
2
2cos2
θ
2
d θ
=
2π 0
cos
θ 2
d θ
=
2sin
θ
2
π
0−
2sin θ
2
2π
π
= 2 − (−2) = 4 .
C.28.2 §10.5 Conic Sections
Omit this section.
Textbook Chapter 11. INFINITE SEQUENCES AND SERIES.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 252/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3197
C.28.3 §11.1 Sequences
A sequence is an ordered set of objects, usually labelled with either the non-negative integers
0, 1, . . . , n, . . . or the positive integers 1, 2, . . . , n, . . . . In this chapter we shall be interested in
sequences of real numbers or of real functions. Technically, such a sequence is a function that
maps either the non-negative integers or the positive integers on to the set of real numbers (or
to the set of real functions). We usually denote a sequence by a single letter, e.g. a, and show
the labelling by either a parenthesized value, as a(n), or a subscripted values, as an; when we
wish to talk about a sequence with specific terms, we may just list the terms with a general
term that shows the pattern we are describing, if there is one, as in
1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 24, 55, 89, . . .
which is the Fibonacci sequence, in which every entry past the second is the sum of the twoentries immediately preceding it. Unless the general term is described unambiguously (as here,
where F n+2 = F n+1 + F n for all n ≥ 3), there will be more than one way to generalize a pattern
that appears to hold between a few terms at the beginning of the sequence.
Notation When a sequence consists of terms a0, a1, a2, . . . we may speak of the sequence
an, or perhaps the sequence ann=0,1,..., or sometimes simply the sequence an. Other notations
are also possible, and should be understandable from the context.
The limit of a sequence We define limn→∞
an = L in a way analogous to the definition of
lim x→∞ f ( x) = L; another way of writing the same definition is
an → L as n → ∞.
The precise definition is to be found as [1, Definition 2, p. 677], but is not on the syllabus —
you are not expected to be able to work with the precise definition of the limit of a sequence.
Note that we usually do not write the braces and when we speak of the limit of a sequence.
Since you bring to this course some understanding of limits of functions, we will occasion-
ally appeal to the following
11.1 Exercises
[1, Exercise 32, p. 685] Determine whether the sequence
ln nln 2n
converges.
Solution:
ln n
ln 2n=
ln n + ln 2 − ln 2
ln n + ln 2
= 1 − ln 2
ln 2n
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 253/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3198
The subtracted fraction has a constant numerator, but the denominator is increasing, so
the fraction is decreasing as n increases; hence 1 minus the fraction is increasing; infact, we can see that the subtracted fraction is approaching 0, so the given fraction is
approaching 1.
C.28.4 Sketch of Solutions to Problems on the Final Examination in MATH 141 2005
01
(not for discussion at the lecture)
The best way to prepare for the examination in MATH 141 2010 01 is to study the textbook,
working problems, and verifying your solutions using the Student Solutions Manual: for sev-
eral reasons I don’t recommend your studying exclusively from old examinations. However
the old examinations do have some uses, and I am including one of them here, with solutions,
as a timely reminder that less than 1 month remains between now and the final examination in
this course. I am hoping to discuss last April’s examination briefly in a final lecture; there will
not be time for me to discuss the following examination in the lectures.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate 3
0 | x
−1
|dx .
Solution:
3
0
| x − 1| dx =
1
0
| x − 1| dx +
3
1
| x − 1| dx
=
1
0
(1 − x) dx +
3
1
( x − 1) dx
=
x − x2
2
1
0
+
x2
2 − x
3
1
= 1
2 −0 + 3
2 − −1
2 =
5
2
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
5
x
√ 4 + t 2 dt .
Solution: d
dx
5
x
√ 4 + t 2 dt = − d
dx
x
5
√ 4 + t 2 dt = −
√ 4 + x2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 254/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3199
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
2π
sec t dt .
Solution: Let u = x2. By the Chain Rule
d
dx
x2
2π
sec t dt = d
du
u
2π
sec t dt · du
dx= sec u · 2 x = sec( x2) · 2 x .
(d) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
x5
3√
x3 + 1
dx .
Solution: Let u = x3 + 1
13
, so u3 = x3 + 1, 3u2 du = 3 x2 dx.
x5
3
√ x3 + 1
dx =
u3 − 1·u·u2 du = u
7
7 −u
4
4 +C =
x3 + 1 73
7 − x3 + 1 4
3
4 +C
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case you
must answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
2 − cos n
n
Solution: This is a positive series. Since 0 < 1
n≤ 2 − cos n
n, for all n, the terms
are bounded below by the terms of the harmonic series, a positive series known
to diverge. We may apply the Comparison Test to such pairs of series, and may
conclude that the given series also diverges.
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=0
n(−3)n
4n
Solution: As formulated in your textbook, we may apply the Ratio Test to the
sequence of absolute values of ratios of terms to their predecessors. Here
limn→∞
(n+1)(−3)n+1
4n+1
n(−3)n
4n
= limn→∞
1 +
1
n
· 3
4 =
3
4 < 1 ,
from which we may conclude that the given series is (absolutely) convergent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 255/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3200
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=2
1
n ln nSolution: Define f ( x) = 1
x ln x. Then f is a positive, continuous function, taking
on the values of the given sequence at the positive integer points. By the Integral
Test, the series and the following improper integral will either both converge or
both diverge. ∞
2
dx
x ln x= lim
b→∞
b
2
dx
x ln x= lim
b→∞[ln ln x]b
2 = limb→∞
lnln b − lnln2
which approaches +∞ as n → ∞. Hence the series diverges (to ∞).
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integralor a sum, product, or quotient of several definite integrals, but do not evaluate the inte-
gral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals must have integrand
and limits specific to the given problems:
(a) [6 MARKS] The area of the region bounded by the parabola y = x2, the x-axis, and
the tangent to the parabola at the point (1, 1).
Solution: The tangent to the parabola at the point x, x2
has slope 2 x; at (1, 1) the
slope is 2. The equation of the tangent is y = 1 + 2( x − 1) = 2 x − 1, which line
intercepts the x-axis in the point
12
, 0.
If we evaluate the area by integration with respect to x, we have
12
0
x2 dx +
1
12
x2 − (2 x − 1)
dx =
x3
3
12
0
+
( x − 1)3
3
1
12
= 1
24 +
1
24
= 1
12
We can also integrate with respect to y: 1
0
− √
y + y + 1
2
dy =
−2
3 y
32 +
y2
4 +
y
2
1
0
= −2
3 +
1
4 +
1
2 =
1
12 .
(Note that you were not expected to evaluate the integrals: I did so in order to use
the opportunity of having 2 methods in order to verify my work.)
(b) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 4 the
region bounded by x = 0 and the curve x =
sin y (0 ≤ y ≤ π).
Solution: This problem is from your textbook [7, Exercise 25, p. 459], and is solved
in the Student Solution Manual, [9, p. 269]; it is one of the problems for which the
CD-Roms accompanying the textbook provide extra help.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 256/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3201
Integrating by the method of Cylindrical Shells centred on the line y = 4, we obtain
the volume to be 2π π
0(4 − y)
sin y dy.
(c) [3 MARKS] The area of the surface obtained by revolving about the y-axis the
curve y = e x, 1 ≤ y ≤ 2.
Solution: Integrating with respect to x gives the integral
ln 2
0
2π x√
1 + e2 x dx. Inte-
grating with respect to y gives the integral
2
1
2π(ln y)
1 +
1
y2 dy.
(d) [2 MARKS] The average value of the function 2 x
(1 + x2)2 over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤
2.
Solution: The answer expected was either 12
2
0
2 x(1+ x2)2 d x or
2
0
2 x(1+ x2)2 d x 2
0 1 dx
. The inte-
gral can be evaluated by using substitutions like u = x2, or u = x2 + 1.
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral 2 x3 + 3 x2 + 3
x2 + x − 12 dx .
Solution: Since the degree of the numerator of the rational function which is the inte-grand is not less than the degree of the denominator, the first step is to divide denominator
into numerator, obtaining
2 x3 + 3 x2 + 3
x2 + x − 12 = (2 x + 1) +
23 x + 15
x2 + x − 12 .
The polynomial quotient may be integrated to
(2 x + 1) dx = x2 + x + C . The excess
must be expanded using the method of Partial Fractions. Assuming an expansion of the
form23 x + 15
( x + 4)( x
−3)
= A
x + 4 +
B
x
−3
,
we multiply both sides by ( x+4)( x−3) to obtain the identity 23 x+15 = A( x−3)+ B( x+4).
We may obtain 2 equations for A, B by assigning to x the successive values x = 3 and
x = 4, obtaining B = 12 and A = 11. Hence 2 x3 + 3 x2 + 3
x2 + x − 12 dx =
2 x + 1 +
11
x + 4 +
12
x − 3
= x2 + x + 11ln | x + 4| − 12ln | x − 3| + C ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 257/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3202
which I then checked by diff erentiation.
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [9 MARKS] Use integration by parts to prove that, for integers
m ≥ 2, cosm x dx =
1
mcosm−1 x · sin x +
m − 1
m
cosm−2 x dx
Solution: (The instructions asked that the problem be solved using Integration by
Parts. Otherwise, the reduction formula could also have been proved by di ff erenti-
ating both sides and showing that the same derivative was obtained.)
Let u = cosm−1 x, dv = cos( x)
· dx, so du = (m
− 1) cosm−2 x
· (
−sin x) dx and
v = sin x. Then cosm x dx = cosm−1 x · sin x +
sin2 x(m − 1) cosm−2 x dx
= cosm−1 x · sin x + (m − 1)
cosm−2 x − cosm x
dx
⇒ m
m
x dx = cosm−1 x · sin x + (m − 1)
cosm−2 x dx
⇒
cosm x dx = 1
mcosm−1 x · sin x +
m − 1
m
cosm−2 x dx .
(b) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, use the formula you have proved to evaluate π2
0
cos6 x dx.
Solution:
cos6 x dx = 1
6 cos5 x · sin x +
5
6
cos4 x dx
= 1
6 cos5 x · sin x +
5
6
1
4 cos3 x · sin x +
3
4
cos2 x dx
= 1
6 cos5 x +
5
24 cos3 x sin x +
5
81
2 cos x
·sin x +
1
2 dx
=
1
6 cos5 x +
5
24 cos3 x +
5
16 cos x
sin x +
5
16 x + C .
Evaluating between 0 and π
2 we obtain 0 +
5π
32 =
5π
32.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 258/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3203
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C defined by
x = 2cos t − cos2t
y = 2sin t − sin2t .
(a) [8 MARKS] Determine the points where the arc of the curve given by
π
4 ≤ t ≤ 7π
4
has a vertical tangent.
Solution:
dx
dt = −2sin t + 2sin2t
dy
dt = 2cos t − 2cos2t
Tangents are vertical where dy
dx is infinite, i.e., where dx
dt = 0 but
dy
dt 0.
dx
dt = 0 ⇔ −2sin t + 4sin t · cos t = 0
⇔ sin t
cos t − 1
2
= 0
⇔ sin t = 0 or cos t = 1
2
⇔ t = π, π
3, 5π
3
for t restricted to lie in the interval π
4 ≤ t ≤ 7π
4 . We check the values of
dy
dt at these
three points, and find that the respective values are −4, 2, 2, none of which is 0.
Hence the tangents will be vertical at the following points:
t = π ( x, y) = (−3, 0)
t = π
3 ( x, y) =
3
2,
√ 3
2
t =
5π
3 ( x, y) =
3
2, −−
√ 3
2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 259/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3204
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the length of the arc of the curve given by
0 ≤ t ≤ 2π .
Solution:
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
= (−2sin t + 2sin2t )2 + (2 cos t − 2cos2t )2
= 4 + 4 − 8(sin t · sin 2t + cos t · cos2t )
= 8 − 8 cos(2t − t ) = 8(1 − cos t ) .
The length of the arc is
√ 8
2π
0
√ 1 − cos t dt =
√ 8
2π
0
2sin2 t
2 dt
= 4
2π
0
sin t
2
dt
= 4
2π
0
sin
t
2
dt
= −8
cos
t
2
2π
0= −8(−1 − 1) = 16 .
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following integral is convergent; if it is con-
vergent, determine its value: 1
−1
dx√ 1 − x2
Solution: The integral is improper because the integrand is not defined — becomes
infinite — at both ends of the interval of integration. According to the definition,
we must integrate between points away from ±1, and allow the limit to be taken
independently. The safest way to do that is to split the improper integral into two,
and then to evaluate the two of them separately. 1
−1
dx√ 1 − x2
= lima→−1+
0
a
dx√ 1 − x2
+ limb→+1−
b
0
dx√ 1 − x2
= lima→−1+
(arcsin 0 − arcsin a) + limb→+1−
(arcsin b − arcsin 0)
= 0 −−π
2
+
π
2
− 0 = π .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 260/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3205
(b) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following series is conditionally convergent,
absolutely convergent, or divergent.∞
n=1
(−1)n n!
nn
Solution: I will apply the Ratio Test to the sequence of absolute values of the ratios
of terms to their predecessors:
(−1)n+1 (n+1)!
(n+1)n+1
(−1)n n!nn
= (n + 1)!
(n + 1)n+1 · nn
n! =
1 +
1
n
−n
→ 1
e
as n → ∞. As this limit is less than 1, the given series is absolutely convergent,
hence divergent.
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine whether the sequence an
= ln(n + 1)−
ln n is convergent;
if it is convergent, carefully determine its limit.
Solution: This is not a question about telescoping series! It is a problem about
sequences!
ln(n + 1) − ln n = ln
1 +
1
n
. As n → ∞, 1 + 1
n → 1, so ln
1 + 1
n
→ ln 1 = 0 (by
continuity of the logarithm function from the right at the point 1).
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves
r = 4 + 4sin θ r sin θ = 3
which does not contain the pole.
Solution: The problem is to determine the area cut o ff from the cardioid r = 4 + 4 sin θ
by the line y = 3. First we must determine where the curves cross. Solving the polar
equations by eliminating sin θ between them we obtain r 2 − 4r − 12 = 0, equivalent
to (r − 6)(r + 2) = 0. The values r = 6, −2 yield corresponding values sin θ = 12
, −32
.
Of these the second is impossible, as a sine cannot be less than 1. We conclude that
sin θ = 12
and the values of θ in the interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π are θ = π6
, 5π6
: the curves intersect
in (r , θ ) =
6,
π
6
and (r , θ ) =
6,
5π
6
. A naive way to solve the problem is to integratedirectly,
Area = 1
2
5π6
π6
(4 + 4sin θ )2 − (3 csc θ )2
d θ
= 1
2
5π6
π6
16
1 − cos2θ
2 + 2sin θ + 1
− 9csc2 θ
d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 261/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3206
= 1
2 [24θ
−32 cos θ
−4sin2θ + 9cot θ ]
5π6
π6
= 8π + 12 √ 3 .
Another way to find the area is to observe that the triangle with base on y = 3 between
the points of intersection and its third vertex at the pole has area 12
(6√
3) ·3 = 9√
3. Then
one can simply subtract this area from 1
2
5π6
π6
(4 + 4sin θ )2 d θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 262/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3207
C.29 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 15th, 2010
Release Date: Monday, March 15th, 2010
C.29.1 §11.1 Sequences (conclusion)
Theorem C.85 [1, Theorem 3, p. 678] If f is a function, and an is such that f (n) = an for all
n, and if lim x→∞
f ( x) = L, then limn→∞
an = L.
We also generalize our definition of the limit of a sequence to permit limits to be ±∞; the
definition is again analogous to the corresponding definition for the meaning of lim x→∞
f ( x) =
±∞.
A sequence that has limit L is said to converge to L; if there is no limit, the sequence issaid to diverge. We do not permit L to be ±∞ in this usage, so a sequence whose limit is ±∞is said to diverge.
Limit Laws We can prove limit laws for sequences analogous to the limit laws we saw in
the previous course for functions. I shall not give the details in these notes. Remember the
usual restriction that we cannot divide by 0, so there must be a restriction on the quotient law.
The limit laws can be extended to infinite limits whenever the operations can be justified; so,
we can think of ∞ + ∞ = ∞, but we cannot attach a meaning to ∞ + (−∞), nor of 0 · ∞, as it is
not possible to assign to these expressions a meaning that will be consistent with the algebraic
operations on real numbers.
Increasing and Decreasing Sequences We defined the concepts of increasing and decreas-
ing in connection with real functions of a real variable (cf. [1, p. 20]. The identical defini-
tions apply for sequences, where we consider the domain of the function to be the positive
or non-negative integers. When a sequence is either increasing or decreasing we say that it is
monotonic or monotone. Sometimes we find it convenient to work with a slightly weaker prop-
erty than increasing, and may speak of a sequence as being non-decreasing, which permits the
function to remain constant for a while.
A function is bounded above if there exists a number M which is greater than all values of
the function. For example, the sine function is bounded above, since sin x ≤ 1 for all x in its
domain. We could also have observed that sin x < 10000, and conclude that such a statement justifies the conclusion that the function is bounded above: we don’t care how high above the
graph of the function the bounding line appears, only that such a line exists. But the function
tan x is not bounded above. In the same way we can define bounded below and bounded —
meaning bounded both above and below. An important theorem we shall need in this chapter
is
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 263/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3208
Theorem C.86 1. A sequence that is bounded above and monotonely increasing (or even
monotonely non-decreasing) is convergent.
2. A sequence that is bounded below and monotonely decreasing (or even monotonely non-
increasing) is convergent.
(Note that the theorem stated here is stronger than [1, Monotonic Sequence Theorem, p., 683].)
Example C.87 [1, Exercise 36, p. 685] Determine whether the sequence an = ln(n + 1) − ln n
converges.
Solution: We might be tempted to analyze a diff erence by using the diff erence law for limits.
But we find that each of the terms approaches +∞, and we cannot give a meaning to ∞ − ∞.
So that approach will not work.
However, if we observe that the diff erence of logarithms is
ln n + 1
n= ln
1 +
1
n
we can reason as follows. As n → ∞, 1n → 0, 1 + 1
n → 1 + 0 = 1. By continuity of the
logarithm, the sequence will approach ln 1 = 0. (I am using Theorem C.85 above.)
Sequences of powers For a fixed real number a we know the behavior of a function a x as
x → ∞, and how it depends on a; this permits us to study the behavior of an when the exponent
is restricted to integer values:
limn→∞
an = +∞
if a > 1
limn→∞
an = 1 if a = 1
limn→∞
an = 0 if −1 < a < 1
limn→∞
an does not exist if a ≤ −1
(Note that, when a limit is ±∞, as in the first case above, we still say that the limit does not
exist!)
Example C.88 Consider the sequence an, where an = n!
nn. Does it converge? If so, to what
value?
Solution: Consider the limit of the ratio of an+1 to an. It isan+1
an
= (n + 1)!
n! · nn
(n + 1)n+1 =
11 + 1
n
n → 1
e
as n → ∞. Thus, for sufficiently large n, every term is less than half of the one before it, which
is positive. Compared to the nth term, the (n + 10)th will be less than 11000
of the size; the
n + 20th will be less than one-millionth the size, etc. The sequence is thus approaching 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 264/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 265/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 266/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3211
definition, to permit us to speak of the sum of all the terms in a sequence. In this context we
no longer write the sequence with commas, as
a0, a1, . . . , an, . . . ,
but, instead, place plus signs between the terms, writing
a0 + a1 + . . . + an + . . . ,
or, more compactly, as∞
n=0
an ,
and we speak of a series, rather than a sequence. Note that the word series is both singularand plural in English: there is no word “serie” in English55. Our definition proceeds from the
partial sums, which we define to be the terms in the sequence
a0, a0 + a1, a0 + a1 + a2, . . . , a0 + a1 + . . . + an, . . .
or, more compactly, as
0n=0
an,
1n=0
an, . . . ,
mn=0
an, . . . ,
all of which are finite sums, and therefore well defined. (Note that we had to use a diff erentletter — m — for the general term in this sequence, because the letter n was “busy”56.) We say
that ∞n=0
an = L
if L is the limit of the sequence of partial sums of the series. The series is then said to converge,
or to be convergent ; if it does not converge, it diverges or is divergent . Here, as with series
and functions, we generalize to write that a sum = ∞ or = −∞, but still describe such series as
divergent. We will often consider series which we will know to be convergent, without being
able to specify the precise value of the limit.
“Geometric” series. A geometric series is one, each of whose terms after the first is a con-
stant multiple of its predecessor. We will often represent such series as
a + ar + ar 2 + . . . + ar n + . . .
55But the singular word for “series” in French is s ´ erie, and the plural is s´ eries.56Technically, we call n a bound variable in this case.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 267/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3212
where a 0 and the “common ratio” is the ratio of each term to its predecessor, here denoted
by r . By “standard” methods, usually seen in high school, one can prove that the value of thepartial sum of m + 1 terms is
a + ar + . . . + ar m =
mn=0
ar n =
a (1 − r m)
1 − r if r 1
(m + 1)a if r = 1.
This ratio can be seen to have the following limit properties:
a + ar + . . . + ar m + . . . = limm
→∞ m
n=0
ar n =
= a
1 − r if −1 < r < 1
= +∞ if r ≥ 1 and a > 0
= −∞ if r ≥ 1 and a < 0diverges if r ≤ −1 and a 0
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 268/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3213
C.30 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 17th, 2010
Release Date: Wednesday, March 17th, 2010
C.30.1 §11.2 Series (conclusion)
Divergence of the “harmonic” series. The harmonic series is
1 + 1
2 +
1
3 + . . . +
1
n+ . . . .
In the next section we will see a proof, using an improper integral, that this series diverges.
Here we shall see a simpler proof without integrals. We need only observe the following
inequalities:
12 ≥ 1
2
13
+ 14
> 14
+ 14
= 24
= 12
15
+ 16
+ 17
+ 18
> 18
+ 18
+ 18
+ 18
= 48
= 12
. . .
1
2n−1 + 1 +
1
2n−1 + 2 + . . . +
1
2n − 1 +
1
2n > 2n−1 · 1
2n =
1
2
Thus we can make the partial sums as large as we like by proceeding out sufficiently far in theseries. It follows that ∞n=1
1
n= +∞ ,
so the harmonic series diverges.
“Necessary” and “sufficient” conditions. Suppose that A and B are sentences that may be
true or false. If A cannot be true except when B is true, we say that the truth of A entails the
truth of B, or that
A implies B
and write this symbolically as
A ⇒ B .
We call A a su fficient condition for B. An example of such an implication where x and y are
members of the “universe” of real numbers is
x = y2 − 2 y + 4 ⇒ x ≥ 3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 269/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3214
since y2 − 2 y + 4 = ( y − 1)2 + 3, and a square cannot be negative.
We can interpret the statement A ⇒ B
in another way, by observing that, when A is true, B cannot be false. We can say that B is a
necessary condition for A, since A cannot be true unless B is true.
Mathematicians usually search for conditions that are both necessary and sufficient, since
these can characterize a situation. But often we have to be satisfied with conditions that are
either of one type or the other.
A “necessary” condition for convergence of a series The implication that interests use here
is in the “universe” of series of real numbers. It states that
∞n=0
an is convergent ⇒ limn→∞
an = 0 .
This — once it has been proved — is a test that can be applied to a series to see whether
the series is convergent. It can never prove that a series is convergent! What it can prove,
sometimes, is that a certain series is not convergent, since no series that “fails the test” can
be convergent. Many textbooks call this test the “nth term test”; your textbook calls it “‘The’
test for divergence”. This is not a standard term, and you might wish to avoid using it, since
a listener who has not read Stewart’s books might not know what you are referring to. 57 In
practice you should “internalize” this test and always apply it, since you might otherwise
waste time trying to prove that a divergent series is convergent.
“Telescoping” series. Sometimes the partial sums can be interpreted as sums where there
is heavy cancellation of intermediate terms, leaving only a few at each end. An example is∞
n=1
1
n(n + 1) =
∞n=1
1
n− 1
n + 1
where the partial sum of the first N terms is simply 1 − 1
N + 1.
(cf. [1, Example 6, p. 691]).
Changes of variable in a sum. We have already seen the concept of changing a variable in
connection with definite integrals. We can carry out similar changes in sums — both finite and
infinite, although we will not investigate all the details. So, for example, we can change the
57You will meet other tests that could be given such a name, although this is the most likely one to distinguish
in this way. Stewart’s name for the test may be no more objectionable than the name in general use: it is not good
form to use the symbol n in the name of a test, since the test does not depend on giving that particular name to
the variable that indexes the members of the sequence; my objections to the name Stewart assigns are that (1) it is
not universally accepted; and (2) the definite article suggests uniqueness, and this is not the only test that exists.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 270/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3215
name of the index of summation, and write
m
r =0
ar in place of the sum
m
n=0
an, by a “change of
variable” given by r = n. More generally, we could define s = n + 4, say, and change
mn=0
an
into
m+4s=4
as−4. Notice how the “limits of summation” have to be changed in the same way that
we changed the limits of integration in a definite integral.
Operations on series. Convergent series may be added term by term, or multiplied by a
constant: ∞n=0
(an + bn) =
∞n=0
an +
∞n=0
bn
∞n=0
can = c
∞n=0
an
But note well: while you may add convergent series term by term, you may not rearrange a
series; we shall see later that rearrangement of the terms can result in a series having a di ff erent
sum, or even in a convergent series being rendered divergent.
11.2 Exercises
[1, Exercise 36, p. 695] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
2n2 + 4n + 3
is convergent or diver-
gent by expressing the partial sum as a telescoping sum (as in [1, Example 6, p. 691]).
If it is convergent, find its sum.
Solution: Since
2
n2 + 4n + 3 =
2
(n + 1)(n + 3) =
1
n + 1 − 1
n + 3 ,
the N th partial sum is equal to
N n=1
2
n2 + 4n + 3 =
N n=1
1
n + 1 − 1
n + 3
=
N n=1
1
n + 1 −
N n=1
1
n + 3
=
N n=1
1
n + 1 −
N +2m=3
1
m + 1
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 271/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3216
setting m = n + 2 in the second sum
=
N n=1
1n + 1
− N +2n=3
1n + 1
replacing the variable m by n
=
2n=1
1
n + 1 +
N n=3
1
n + 1 −
N n=3
1
n + 1 −
N +2n= N +1
1
n + 1
=
2n=1
1
n + 1 −
N +2n= N +1
1
n + 1
= 1
2 +
1
3 −
1
N + 2 −
1
N + 3 .
As N → ∞, this partial sum approaches 12
+ 13
= 56
. (In this type of problem we don’t
expect students to be write the proof out formally in this way; I have included this
solution so that you can see how the problem can be solved “properly”, without the use
of “dots”.
[1, Exercise 40, p. 695] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
ln n
n + 1 is convergent or divergent
by expressing sn is a telescoping sum (as in [1, Example 6, p. 691]). If it is convergent,
find its sum.
Solution: In a similar way to that shown above in the solution to [1, Exercise 36, p. 695],
we can show that the partial sum of the first N terms of the series is ln 1 − ln N + 1. As
N → ∞ the partial sum approaches −∞: the series diverges.
[1, Exercise 44, p. 695] Express the “repeating decimal expansion” 6.254 as a ratio of inte-
gers.
Solution: By a “repeating decimal expansion”, we intend that the digits under the hori-
zontal line are to be repeated as a subsequence of the expansion indefinitely; thus
6.254 = 6.25454545454...,
which we can interpret as the sum of a series
6 + 2
10 +
54
1000 +
54
100000 +
54
10000000 + . . .
which can be seen as a constant added to a geometric series:6 +
2
10
+
54
1000
1 + 1
100 +
1
100
2
+
1
100
3
+ . . .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 272/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3217
whose sum is
6 +
2
10 +
54
1000 · 1
1 − 1100
= 6 +
1
5 +
3
55 =
344
55 .
(In this way we can show that any “repeating decimal” is a rational number.)
[1, Exercise 50, p. 695] Find the values of x for which the series
∞n=0
( x + 3)n
2n converges. Find
the sum of the series for those values of x.
Solution: The given series can be rewritten as
∞n=0
( x + 3)
2
n
: it can be viewed as a
geometric series with initial term 1, and common ratio x + 3
2
. We know that a geometric
series converges if and only if its common ratio is less than 1 in magnitude. Thus the
given series converges iff
x + 3
2
< 1. Solving this inequality for x we obtain
x + 3
2
< 1 ⇔ −1 < x + 3
2 < +1
⇔ −2 < x + 3 < 2
⇔ −5 < x < −1 .
Thus the given series converges for and only for x ∈ (−5, −1). For x in this interval the
sum of the series is
first term
1 − common ratio =
1
1 − x+32
= − 2
1 + x .
C.30.2 §11.3 The Integral Test and Estimates of Sums
Thus far we have met only one “test” that can be applied to series to investigate whether the
series converges. That is the test Stewart calls “The Test for Divergence”, and it gives negative
information: it states that, if limn→∞
an does not exist, or if the limit does exist but its value is
not 0, then the series
∞
n=0
an is divergent; this test cannot be used to confirm a suspicion that a
series does converge. This is the only test we shall have that can be applied to “general” series,
where the signs of the terms do not follow a specific pattern.
The Integral Test. The idea of this test is to interpret the terms of a series
∞n=1
an as a sum
of areas. We can do this by interpreting an as the area of a rectangle whose width is 1, and
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 273/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3218
whose height is an. The test will be restricted to sequences where the terms are monotonely
decreasing. Suppose that we know of a function f defined on the interval [1, ∞), whose graphpasses through the left upper end-points of the rectangles. Then the area under the curve will
be less than the sum of the areas of the rectangles. If we can show that the area under the curve
is infinite, we will be able to conclude that the sum of the series is divergent. In a similar way,
if we can pass the graph of a function f through the right upper endpoints of the rectangles,
then the area under the curve will exceed the sum of the areas of the rectangles: if the area
under the curve is convergent, then the same can be said about the series. In these ways we
can shown that the series converges precisely when the integral representing the area under
the curve converges! We call this result The “Integral” Test.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 274/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3219
C.31 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 19th, 2010
Release Date: Friday, March 19th, 2010; corrected on 08 April, 2010; subject to further
correction
Review of the preceding lecture
• Theorem:
∞i=0
ai converges ⇒ limn→∞
an = 0
• The contrapositive of this theorem is “The” Test for Divergence: If limn→∞
an either does
not exist, or does exist but does not equal 0, then the series
∞
i=0
ai diverges.
• The harmonic series diverges — proved by grouping successive terms.
• “telescoping” series
• evaluating a “repeating” decimal expansion as a rational number
• The Integral Test — requiring the association with a positive series of a continuous,
decreasing, positive function f taking, at the positive integer points, values equal to the
terms of the series
C.31.1 §11.3 The Integral Test and Estimates of Sums (conclusion)
Theorem C.91 (The Integral Test) If f is a continuous, positive, decreasing 58 function de-
fined on the interval [1, ∞), and if the sequence an has the property that an = f (n). Then
∞n=1
an is convergent ⇔∞
1
f ( x) dx is convergent .
The convergence or divergence of both the series and the improper integral do not depend on
the lower limits of the sum and the definite integral. (However, when, below, we investigate
bounds for the actual value of the sum of the series, then our bounds will depend on the specificvalues we choose for the limits of sum and integral.)
58Actually, it suffices for the function to be non-increasing: we can permit the function values to stay at the
same level so long as they eventually decrease again and eventually approach 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 275/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3220
Tests of Positive Series for convergence. Most of the tests we shall meet require a specific
arrangement of signs for the terms. In fact, all but one of them will require that all the signsare the same. We call such series “positive” series, thinking of all the signs as being +; but
similar results hold when all signs are −. The first test of positive series will be discussed in
this section. I do not think of this as the most elementary of the tests, and would have preferred
to discuss the material of the next sections first; but I will grudgingly follow the order of topics
in the textbook.
“Ultimate” satisfaction of properties imposed on the terms of a series. In the statement
given for the a sum beginning with the 1st term, and compared it with the integral whose
lower bound was x = 1. Both of these lower bounds can be replaced by any integers you
like, provided the series and function are defined whenever you refer to them. Changing these
lower bounds does not change the truth of the logical equivalence. It could, however, change
the value of the sum of the series or the definite integral.
Application: the “ p-series”. The “ p-series” are the series 1
n p, where p is a positive
constant. The integral test shows that 1
n p is convergent if and only if p > 1 .
The case p = 1 is the harmonic series, which we have already shown to be divergent, using
a diff erent proof. (This application is sometimes called the “ p-series test”.) Since the tests
we will meet in [1, §11.4] involve comparing a given series with series that we know to beconvergent and divergent, the p-series are particularly important as they provide us with a
family of series that can be used for comparison purposes.
Estimating the Sum of a Series In the proof of the Integral Test we compared the sum of a
series of decreasing positive terms with the area under the graph of a function that is positive
and decreasing. This comparison can be refined, and gives rise to inequalities that bound the
value of the sum from below and above.
By associating with a decreasing, positive series
an a decreasing positive function f , we
are able to “trap” the value of the partial sums
N
n=1
an between the definite integrals giving the
areas for regions respectively contained in and containing the region represented by the partial
sum, when interpreted as the area of a region formed by rectangles of width 1 and respective
heights 1, 2, . . ., N . From the inequalities
N n=1
an ≤ a1 +
N
1
f ( x) dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 276/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3221
N
n=1
an
≥ N +1
1
f ( x) dx
we are able to relate the convergence of the infinite sum to that of the improper integral ∞
1
f ( x) dx.
Let us, extending the notation used in the enunciation of the theorem, define
Rn =
∞m=n+1
am;
that is, Rn is the sum of the “tail” or Remainder of the series, starting with the (n + 1)st term.
Then ∞
n+1
f ( x) dx ≤ Rn ≤ ∞
n
f ( x) dx ,
or, alternatively, ∞
n+1
f ( x) dx ≤ Rn ≤ an+1 +
∞
n+1
f ( x) dx ,
or
0 ≤ Rn − ∞
n+1
f ( x) dx ≤ an+1 .
In particular, when n = 0, this gives the inequalities
0 ≤∞
n=1
an − ∞
1
f ( x) dx ≤ a1 .
While, for the purposes of testing convergence, it is su fficient to demand “ultimate” sat-
isfaction of the conditions of the Integral Test, this is not sufficient if we wish to determine
bounds for the sum. In that case the estimations discussed above depend on the comparison of
the area under a curve and the sum of the areas of the step function that represents the series;
these comparisons are valid only when the condition the the function be decreasing is satisfied.
It is possible to refine this type of bounding of partial sums and remainders, as in [1, Examples
5,6, pp. 701-702], but we will not go further in this course.
Example C.92 We proved earlier that the telescoping series∞
n=1
1
n(n + 1) converges, and we
found the sum. The integral test could be used to prove that it converges, but the test would
not give the exact value of the sum, although it would provide bounds which compare the sum
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 277/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3222
to the improper integral ∞
1
1
x( x + 1) d x = lim
a→∞((ln a − ln 1) − (ln(a + 1) − ln 2))
= lima→∞
ln
a
a + 1 + ln 2
= ln 1 + ln 2 = 0 + ln 2 = ln 2 ,
so the sum of the series is bounded between ln 2 = 0.6931471806 and ln 2+ 12
= 1.1931471806,
which is a weaker result than the fact we already know that the sum is equal to 1.
11.3 Exercises
[1, Exercise 6, p. 703] Use the Integral Test to determine whether the series∞
n=1
1√ n + 4
is
convergent or divergent.
Solution: We begin by verifying that the Integral Test is applicable to this series:
• Since the terms are reciprocals of square roots, they are positive.
• The function f ( x) = 1√
x + 1is decreasing. This can be shown either by showing
that f ( x) = −12
( x + 1)− 32 < 0, or by the following reasoning:
x is an increasing function of x⇒ x + 1 is an increasing function of x
⇒√
x + 1 is an increasing function of x since√
preserves order
⇒ 1√ x + 1
is a decreasing function of x.
The Integral Test tells us that the series will converge iff the improper integral
∞ 1
dx√ x + 1
converges. But
∞ 1
dx√ x + 1
= lima→∞
a 1
dx√ x + 1
= lima→∞
2 √ x + 1
a
1= +∞ .
so the series must also diverge.
[1, Exercise 20, p. 704] To investigate the convergence of
∞n=1
1
n2 − 4n + 5.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 278/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3223
Solution: We know that 1
x2 − 4 x + 5 d x =
1
( x − 2)2 + 1 d x = arctan( x − 2) + C ,
and might be tempted to compare the integral
∞
1
1
x2 − 4 x + 5 d x with the series. This,
however, is not directly possible from the Integral Test, because the function f ( x) =1
x2 − 4 x + 5 is decreasing only for x ≥ 2: from x = 1 to x = 2 the function is increasing.
Thus we can apply the integral test to the series
∞n=2
1
x2 − 4 x + 5, provided we first verify
that the necessary conditions are satisfied by the function f whose values at the positive
integers coincide with the terms of the series:
1. Is f decreasing?
d
dx f ( x) =
−(2 x − 4) x2 − 4 x + 5
=
−2( x − 2)( x − 2)2 + 1
2 .
The numerator is negative for x > 2; the denominator is a non-zero square, always
positive. Thus the ratio is negative for x > 2, and so f is decreasing for x > 2.
2. Is f continuous? f is a rational function, and [1, Theorem 5(b), p. 122] all rational
functions are continuous on their domain. (The domain of f is all of R.)
Bounding the sum for n ≥ 2 from below yields
∞n=2
1
n2 − 4n + 5 ≥
∞
2
dx
x2 − 4 x + 5
= lima→∞
arctan(a − 2) − arctan 0
= π
2 − 0 =
π
2 .
Bounding the sum for n ≥ 3 from above yields
∞n=3
1
n2 − 4n + 5 ≤
∞
2
dx
x2 − 4 x + 5
= π
2 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 279/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 280/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3225
C.32 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 22nd, 2010
Distribution Date: Monday, March 22nd, 2010, subject to further revision
Review of the last lecture
• After reviewing the previous lecture, I completed my treatment of the Integral Test.
• It time permits, I may return to further discussion of the use of integrals to bound series.
• Discussion included [1, Exercise 28, p. 704],
∞n=3
1
n(ln n) (lnln n) p , which can be shown
to behave “similarly” to p-series.
• There are often many, significantly diff erent choices of series with which to compare.
You need to work problems and check your solutions afterward in the manual to develop
the necessary experience.
C.32.1 §11.4 The Comparison Tests
We continue to study series in a “reverse-logical” order. That is, as we proceed, we will be
encountering properties that are more and more basic. In this section we will meet another
theorem that — like the Integral Test — applies only to series whose terms all have the same
sign, the so-called “positive series”, or “series of positive terms”. Finally, in [1,
§11.6] we will
see a theorem [1, Theorem 3, p., 715] that will justify our continued investigation of serieswith positive terms. When we have covered all the sections on the syllabus, I hope to return to
the various tests.
The comparison tests are designed so that we can infer the convergence or divergence of
a given positive series by comparison of its terms with those of another series that we know
to be convergent or divergent. So, in order to use this test, we need to have available as large
as possible a family of positive series whose convergence or divergence are known. Let’s
remember for which series we know such facts; these include
• positive geometric series of common ratio less than 1 (convergent)
• positive geometric series of common ration 1 or more (divergent)
• harmonic series (divergent)
• p-series (convergent if and only if p > 1)
• positive series whose terms do not approach 0 (divergent)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 281/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 282/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3227
Estimating Sums This question will be illustrated by the solution below of part of [1, Exer-
cise 32, p. 709].
Example C.95 ([7, Exercise 20, p. 735]) Determine whether the series
∞n=1
1 + 2n
1 + 3n converges
or diverges.
Solution: We could not compare the terms of this series naively with those of 2n
3n, which is a
convergent geometric series because the terms here are slightly larger. However a number of
other possibilities suggest themselves. For example, we have
1 + 2n
1 + 3n ≤ 1 + 2n
3n =
1
3n
+ 2
3n
< 2 2
3n
which is the general term of a geometric series with common ratio 23
< 1, which is conver-
gent. Other comparisons are possible, some of them complicated to prove. For the purpose of
proving only convergence (and not bounding the series) one tries to find the simplest possible
comparison.
This problem can also be solved by applying the Limit Comparison Test, again in compar-
ison with
23
n:
limn
→∞
1 + 2n
1 + 3n
23n = lim
n
→∞ 1 + 2n
2n · 3n
1 + 3n = lim
n→∞
2−n + 1 · 3−n + 1
= 1 × 1 = 1.
Since the limit is a positive real number, and since the geometric series
23
nconverges, the
given series must also converge.
Example C.96 ([7, Exercise 34, p. 735]) Estimate the error when the sum of the first 10 terms
of the following sum is used to approximate the sum of the series:
∞
n=1
1 + cos n
n5 .
Solution: The “tail” of the series will be estimated from above. Observe that
1 + cos n
n5 ≤ 2
n5 .
We know that1
n5 ≤ 1
x5 for n − 1 ≤ x ≤ n .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 283/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3228
Comparing the sum of the terms on the left — interpreted as rectangles of width 1 lying under
the graph of f ( x) =
1
x5 — we have∞
n=11
1
n5 ≤
∞
10
dx
x5 =
1
104 .
It follows that the “tail” of the series — the sum beginning with term n = 11 — is no greater
than 2 × 10−4. This gives an upper bound for the error if the series is truncated at term n = 10.
This method will not give a useful lower bound for the error, however, since we know only that
1 + cos n
n5 ≥ 0
n5 .
This is certainly not the best possible lower bound, but we can’t do better in this course.
11.4 Exercises In some of the discussions below I give only hints about the solution.
[1, Exercise 12, p. 709] Determine whether the series converges or diverges:
∞n=0
1 + sin n
10n .
Solution: The Limit Comparison Test cannot be used, since the terms behave erratically
because of the sine function, and there is not likely to exist a limit, no matter what series
you choose to compare with. But
1 + sin n10n
< 210n
,
so the terms of the series are smaller than the terms of a geometric series with common
ratio 110
, which is less than 1, and must converge.
[1, Exercise 14, p. 709] Determine whether the series converges or diverges:
∞n=0
√ n
n − 1.
Solution: The terms can be made smaller by making the denominator larger, into n. That
yields a divergent p-series.
[1, Exercise 18, p. 709] Determine whether the series converges or diverges:∞
n=0
12n + 3
.
Solution: The terms can be made smaller by making the denominator into 2n + 4. The
new series is a multiple
12
of a harmonic series. The harmonic series diverges, and that
property doesn’t change if we discard 2 terms at the beginning, nor if we then multiply
by 12
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 284/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3229
[1, Exercise 30, p. 709] Determine whether the series
∞
n=1
n!
nn
converges or diverges.
Solution: The general term is
n!
nn =
1
n· 2
n· 3
n· . . . · n − 1
n· n
n
≤ 1
n· 2
n· 1 =
2
n2
for n ≥ 3, which is the general term in a convergent p-series. Hence the given series
is convergent. It is impractical to use the limit comparison test here, because the limit
would be difficult to compute, and because it would be zero or infinite, depending on
which series is in the numerator; our version of this test does not permit the limit to be
either 0 or ∞.
[1, Exercise 31, p. 709] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
sin 1
nconverges or diverges.
Solution: We know the value of limn→∞
sin 1n
1n
to be 1; so the Limit Comparison Test shows
this series diverges because the harmonic series diverges. Could we have used the Com-
parison Test? Unfortunately, the geometric argument that we used to prove the result
quoted earlier showed [1, p. 190-191] that
0 < sin 1n
< 1n
.
In its present form this inequality is not useful for proving the divergence of the given
series, since the series known to be divergent occupies the outer position rather than
lying between the terms of the given series and 0.
[1, Exercise 32, p. 709] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
1
n1+ 1n
converges or diverges.
Solution: It appears that the series “resembles” the Harmonic Series, and we will try to
compare it in the limit. The guess is a fortunate one, since the limit does exist.
limn→∞
1n1+
1n
1n
= limn→∞
1
n1n
= limn→∞
1
eln n
n
= 1
elim
n→∞ln n
n
by continuity of exponential
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 285/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3230
= 1
e0 = 1 by L’Hospital’s Rule
We apply the Limit Comparison Test: since the Harmonic Series diverges and the ratio
of the terms of the given series to those of this divergent series approaches a non-zero
positive real number, the given series also diverges.
The same argument could have been used to prove that the series
∞n=1
1
n1+ 1ln n
is also divergent; the terms in this last series are smaller than those of the series we were
given.
C.32.2 Sketch of Solutions to Problems on the Final Examination in MATH 141 2006
01
(not for discussion at the lecture)
The best way to prepare for the examination in MATH 141 2009 01 is to study the textbook,
working problems, and verifying your solutions using the Student Solutions Manual: for sev-
eral reasons I don’t recommend your studying exclusively from old examinations. However
the old examinations do have some uses, and I am including a second one of them here, with
solutions. I am hoping to discuss last April’s examination briefly in a final lecture; there will
not be time for me to discuss the following examination in the lectures.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case you
must answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
(tanh n)2 + 1
Solution: As n → ∞, tanh n = en−e−n
en+e−n = 1−e−2n
1+e−2n → 11
= 1 , so the terms summed in
this series have limit 112+1
= 12 0. By the “Test for Divergence” this series cannot
converge.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 286/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3231
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
n2ne−n2
Solution:
nth root of nth term =n
n2ne−n2= n2e−n =
n2
en .
By l’Hospital’s Rule ( ∞∞ case) the limit of this nth root as n → ∞ is
limn→∞
n2
en = lim
n→∞2n
en = lim
n→∞2
en = 0 < 1 .
By the Root Test, the series is convergent.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
n2 − 85n + 12
n(n + 6)2
Solution: The ratio of the nth term of this series to the nth term of the Harmonic
series∞
n=1
1n
is
n2 − 85n + 12
(n + 6)2 =
1 − 85n
+ 12n2
1 + 6n
2 → 1 0 .
By the Limit Comparison Test the given series is divergent, since the Harmonic
series is divergent.
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
2
−1
| x| dx .
Solution: 2
−1
| x| dx =
0
−1
| x| dx +
2
0
| x| dx
=
0
−1
(− x) dx +
2
0
x dx
= − x2
20
−1 + x2
22
0
= 1
2 + 2 =
5
2
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
e3 1
dt
t √
1 + ln t .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 287/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3232
Solution: Under the substitution u = ln t , du = dt t
and
e3 1
dt
t √
1 + ln t =
3
0
du√ 1 + u
= 2(1 + u)12
3
0= 2(
√ 4 −
√ 1) = 2(2 − 1) = 2
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
0
et 2 dt .
Solution: With u = x2,
d
dx
x2
0
et 2 dt = d
dx
u
0
et 2 dt = eu2
2 x = e( x2)2
2 x = 2 xe x4
,
by the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus.
(d) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
limn→∞
1
n
0
n
7
+
1
n
7
+
2
n
7
+ . . . +
n − 1
n
7 .
Solution: You are asked to evaluate the limit of a Riemann sum for 1
0 x7 dx =
x8
8 1
0= 1
8, (where the values of the function are taken at the left end-point of each
subinterval). Accordingly the value is 18 .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
3. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case you
must answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
(tanh n)2 + 1
Solution: As n → ∞, tanh n = en−e−n
en+e−n = 1−e−2n
1+e−2n → 11
= 1 , so the terms summed in
this series have limit 112+1
= 12 0. By the “Test for Divergence” this series cannot
converge.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 288/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3233
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
n2ne−n2
Solution:
nth root of nth term =n
n2ne−n2= n2e−n =
n2
en .
By l’Hospital’s Rule ( ∞∞ case) the limit of this nth root as n → ∞ is
limn→∞
n2
en = lim
n→∞2n
en = lim
n→∞2
en = 0 < 1 .
By the Root Test, the series is convergent.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
n2
−85n + 12
n(n + 6)2
Solution: The ratio of the nth term of this series to the nth term of the Harmonic
series∞
n=1
1n
is
n2 − 85n + 12
(n + 6)2 =
1 − 85n
+ 12n2
1 + 6n
2 → 1 0 .
By the Limit Comparison Test the given series is divergent, since the Harmonic
series is divergent.
4. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integralor a sum, product, or quotient of several definite integrals, but do not evaluate the inte-
gral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals must have integrand
and limits specific to the given problems, and should be simplified as much as possible,
except that you are not expected to evaluate the integrals.
(a) [3 MARKS] Expressed as integral(s) along the x-axis only, the area of the region
bounded by the parabola y2 = 2 x + 6 and the line y = x − 1. An answer involving
integration along the y-axis will not be accepted.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 289/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3234
Solution: −1
−3
2
2( x + 3) dx + 5
−1
2( x + 3) − ( x − 1)
dx
(b) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 1 the
region bounded by the curves y = x3 and y = x2. For this question you are to use
only the method of “washers”.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: Only the first integral was required.
π
1
0
1 − x3
2 −
1 − x22
dx
= π
1
0
−2 x3 + x6 + 2 x2 − x4
dx
= π −2 x4
4 +
x7
7 +
2 x3
3 − x5
5 1
0
= π
−2
4 +
1
7 +
2
3 − 1
5
=
23π
210 .
(c) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 1 the
region bounded by the curves y = x3 and y = x2. For this question you are to use
only the method of “cylindrical shells”.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: Only the first integral was required.
2π
1
0
(1 − y) y
13 − y
12
dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 290/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3235
= 2π 1
0 y 1
3
− y
43
− y
12 + y
32 dy
= 2π
3
4 − 3
7 − 2
3 +
2
5
=
23π
210
(d) [3 MARKS] The length of the curve whose equation is
x2
4 +
y2
9 = 1 .
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: This is a special case of [7, Exercise 20, p. 553].
x2
4 +
y2
9 = 1 ⇔ 9 x2 + 4 y2 = 36
⇒ dy
dx= −9 x
4 y
⇒
1 +
dy
dx
2
=
81 x2 + 16 y2
4| y|
⇒ arc length = 2
2
−2
1
2
16 + 5 x2
4 − x2 dx
where the factor 2 is needed because the integral is the length of either the top or
the bottom arc of the ellipse; this integral is improper. A cleaner solution is found
by parameterizing the curve as x = 2cos θ , y = 3sin θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π). Then the arc
length is
2π
0
4sin
2
θ + 9cos2
θ d θ .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral x5 + x
x4 − 16 d x .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 291/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3236
Solution: The first step is to divide denominator into numerator:
x5 + x = x( x4 − 16) + 17 x ⇒ x5 + x
x4 − 16 = x +
17 x
x4 − 16 .
Next we could separate the resulting remainder fraction, whose numerator has degree
less than that of its denominator, into partial fractions:
17 x
x4 − 16 =
Ax + B
x2 − 4 +
C x + D
x2 + 4
= E
x − 2 +
F
x + 2 +
C x + D
x2 + 4
⇒ 17 x = E ( x + 2)( x2 + 4) + F ( x
−2)( x2 + 4)
+C x( x − 2)( x + 2) + D( x − 2)( x + 2)
We can determine the constants by a combination of the standard methods: giving x
convenient values, and equating coefficients of like powers of x:
x = 2 ⇒ 34 = 32 E ⇒ E = 17
16
x = −2 ⇒ −34 = −32F ⇒ F = 17
16 x = 0 ⇒ 0 = 6 E − 6F − 8 D ⇒ D = 0
coeff x3 : ⇒
0 = E + F + C ⇒
C = −
17
8
Hence x5 + x
x4 − 16 = x +
17
16
1
x − 2 +
1
x + 2 − 2 x
x2 + 4
Hence
x5 + x
x4 − 16 d x =
x2
2 +
17
16 ln
x2 − 4
x2 + 4
+ C
A better tactic would have been to make a substitution u = x2 in the integral prior to
separation into partial fractions: 17 x
x4 − 16 d x =
17
2
du
(u − 4)(u + 4) =
17
16
1
u − 4 − 1
u + 4
du =
17
16 ln
u − 4
u + 4
+ C
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 292/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3237
(a) [4 MARKS] cos x
·cosh x dx
Solution: Using integration by parts,
u = cos x ⇒ du = −sin x dx
dv = cosh x dx ⇒ v = sinh x
⇒
cos x · cosh x dx = (cos x)(sinh x) +
sinh x · sin x dx .
A second integration by parts yields
U = sin x ⇒ dU = cos x dx
dV =
sinh x dx ⇒ V =
cosh x⇒
sin x · sinh x dx = (sin x)(cosh x) −
cosh x · cos x dx
⇒
cos x · cosh x dx = (cos x)(sinh x) + (sin x)(cosh x) −
cos x · cosh x dx.
Now we can move the integral from the right side of the equation to join the same
integral with opposite sign on the left side, yielding
2
cos x · cosh x dx = (cos x)(sinh x) + (sin x)(cosh x) + C
or
cos x · cosh x dx = (cos x)(sinh x) + (sin x)(cosh x)
2 + C .
(b) [5 MARKS]
1 −3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx
Solution: We begin by completing the square:
1
−3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx =
1
−3 ( x + 1)2 + 4 dx .
Then the integrand can be changed to the form of √
X 2 + 1:
1 −3
( x + 1)2 + 4 dx = 2
1 −3
x + 1
2
2
+ 1 dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 293/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3238
Here an appropriate substitution would be to set x+12
equal to either tan θ or sinh θ ;
I have chosen to use the trigonometric substitution: x + 1
2 = tan θ ⇒ θ = arctan
x + 1
2
⇒ dx = 2 sec2 θ d θ
⇒1
−3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx = 2
π4
− π4
| sec θ | · 2sec2 θ d θ
⇒1
−3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx = 8
π4
0
sec3 θ d θ
Finally we have to find an antiderivative of sec3 θ , which can be integrated by
“standard” methods, e.g., by integration by parts with u = sec θ , dv = sec2 θ d θ :
du = sec θ tan θ d θ
v = tan θ sec3 θ d θ = sec θ tan θ −
sec θ tan2 θ d θ
= sec θ tan θ −
sec θ (sec2 θ − 1) d θ
= sec θ tan θ − sec
3
θ d θ +
sec θ d θ
= sec θ tan θ −
sec3 θ d θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
⇒ 2
sec3 θ d θ = sec θ tan θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
⇒
sec3 θ d θ = sec θ tan θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ |
2 + C .
Here1
−3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx = 8
π4
0
sec3 θ d θ = 4√
2 + 4ln(√
2 + 1) .
(c) [4 MARKS]
sin2 x · cos2 x dx
Solution: One way to simplify this integral is to use the identity
sin x cos x = sin2 x
2 :
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 294/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3239
sin2 x
·cos2 x dx =
1
4 sin2 2 x dx
= 1
8
(1 − cos4 x) dx =
1
8
x − sin4 x
4
+ C
= x
8 − sin4 x
32 + C .
This could also have been simplified using the algorithm proposed in the textbook: sin2 x · cos2 x dx =
1
4
(1 − cos2 x)(1 + cos2 x) dx
= 1
4 (1
−cos2 2 x) dx
= 1
4
1 − 1 + cos4 x
2
dx
= 1
8
(1 − cos4 x) dx etc.
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C defined by
x = x(t ) = 10 − 3t 2
y = y(t ) = t 3
− 3t ,
where −∞ < t < +∞.
(a) [8 MARKS] Determine the value of d 2 y
dx2 at the points where the tangent is horizon-
tal.
Solution:
dx
dt = −6t
dy
dt = 3t 2
−3
dy
dx=
dy
dt dx
dt
= t 2 − 1
−2t = −1
2
t − 1
t
d 2 y
dx2 =
d
dx
dy
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 295/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3240
= d
dt
dy
dx ·
dt
dx
=
d
dt
dy
dx
dx
dt
=
d
dt
−1
2
t − 1
t
dx
dt
= −1
2
d
dt t
− 1
t
−6t
= −1
2
1 + 1
t 2
−6t =
t 2 + 1
12t 3 .
The tangent is horizontal when dy
dx= 0, i.e., when t 2 − 1 = 0 or t = ±1. At such
parameter valuesd 2 y
dx2 =
2
±12 = ±1
6 .
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface of revolution about the x-axis of thearc
( x(t ), y(t )) : −√
3 ≤ t ≤ 0
.
Solution: The area of the surface of revolution about the x-axis is
2π
0
−√
3
y(t )
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
dt = 2π
0
−√
3
(t 3 − 3t )
36t 2 + 9(t 2 − 1)2 dt
= 2π
0
−√
3
(t 3 − 3t )(3t 2 + 3) dt
= 2π
0
−√
3
(t 5 − 2t 3 − 3t ) dt
= 6π
t 6
6 − 2t 4
4 − 3t 2
2
0
−√
3
= 27π .
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 296/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3241
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value: 0
−1
dx
x23
.
Solution: This integral is improper because the integrand is undefined, hence dis-
continuous at the right endpoint. 0
−1
dx
x23
= limb→0−
b
−1
dx
x23
by definition
= limb→0−
3 x13
b
−1= 3 lim
b→0−b
13 − (−3) = 0 + 3 = 3.
Since the limit exists, the improper integral is convergent.
(b) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following series is conditionally convergent,
absolutely convergent, or divergent.
∞n=1
(−1)n
n − ln n
Solution: Let f ( x) = 1
x − ln x. then
f ( x) =
−
1 − 1 x
( x − ln x)2
.
For x > 1, 1− 1 x
> 0, so f ( x) < 0. Thus the terms of the given series are monotonely
decreasing in magnitude, and alternating in sign.
We observe that
lim x→∞
ln x
x= lim
x→∞
1 x
1 = 0;
it follows that the limit of the ratio of corresponding terms of the given series and
the series
1n
is
limn→∞
1n−ln n
1
n
= limn→∞
1
1 − ln n
n
= 1
1 − limn→∞ln n
n
= 1 .
Since the Harmonic Series diverges, this implies (by the Limit Ratio Test) that the
series of absolute values of the given series is divergent; and the given series is
either conditionally convergent or divergent. The limit of the terms of the series is
limn→∞
1
n − ln n= lim
n→∞1
n· lim
n→∞1
1 − ln nn
= 0 · 1 = 0 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 297/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3242
This, combined with the property that the terms of the given series are alternating
in sign and monotonely decreasing in magnitude, permits us to conclude by theLeibniz Test that the series converges. Thus this alternating series is convergent,
but not absolutely convergent: it is conditionally convergent.
(c) [3 MARKS] Give an example of a sequence an with the property that limn→∞
an = 0
but
∞n=1
an = +∞. You are expected to give a formula for the general term an of
your sequence.
Solution: The Harmonic Series an = 1n
is one example of a series which has the
desired property.
9. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] The arc
r = 1 − cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ π)
divides the area bounded by the curve
r = 1 + sin θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π)
into two parts. Showing all your work, carefully find the area of the part that contains
the point (r , θ ) =
12
, π2
.
Solution: Since the functions defining the curves are both periodic with period 2π, we
can confine our attention to any parameter interval of length 2π. We need to determinewhere the curves intersect. Solving the two given equations algebraically gives tan θ =
−1, implying that θ = 3π4
, 7π4
in the interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π. The only point whose parameter
value is in the intervals given for the two arcs is θ = 3π4
. However, we always need to be
alert to the possibility that there are intersections of the curves in which the parameter
values could be diff erent on the two curves. One place where precisely that occurs for
these two curves is the pole: on r = 1−cos θ the pole appears as (r , θ ) = (0, 0), which is in
the restricted interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ π; on the cardioid r = 1 + sin θ the pole appears as0, 3π
2
.
Could there be any other points of intersection? Any others could be found by solving
the variants of the equations obtainable by applying the transformation (r , θ ) = (−r , θ +π)
repeatedly. We can show that there are no such points that appear in this way.It follows that the region whose area we seek is bounded by two arcs:
• The arc of r = 1 − cos θ bounded by 0 ≤ θ ≤ 3π4
.
• One arc of r = 1 + sin θ : either −π2 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
4 or 3π
4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
2 . (In the first of these
I have, for convenience, used the negative value θ = −π2
. You might wish to object
that the prescribed interval for θ was 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π. I could, instead have described
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 298/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3243
2
1
1.5
0.5
0
1-1.5 -1 0.5-0.5-2 0
Figure 22: The curves with equations r = 1 − cos θ , (θ ≤ 0), and r = 1 + sin θ , and the point12
, π2
the first of these arcs as being made up of two pieces: one being 3π2 ≤ θ ≤ 2π, and
the second being 0 ≤ θ ≤ 3π4
.)
But the point
12
, π2
is only in the region whose boundary contains the arc 3π
4 ≤ θ ≤ 3π
2 of
the curve r = 1 − cos θ .
To find the area, think of a line segment being drawn from the pole to1 +
1
√ 2 ,
3π
4. The
area is then the sum of the area below the line segment and the area above it, i.e.,
1
2
3π4
0
(1 − cos θ )2 d θ + 1
2
3π2
3π4
(1 + sin θ )2 d θ
= 1
2
3π4
0
1 − 2cos θ +
1 + cos2θ
2
d θ +
1
2
3π2
3π4
1 + 2sin θ +
1 − cos2θ
2
d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 299/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3244
= 1
23θ
2 −2 sin θ +
sin 2θ
4
3π4
0
+ 1
23θ
2 −2cos θ
− sin 2θ
4
3π2
3π4
= 9π
8 −
√ 2 − 1
4 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 300/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3245
C.33 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 24th, 2010
Distribution Date: Wednesday, March 24th, 2010, subject to further revision
C.33.1 §11.5 Alternating Series
I continue to follow the syllabus in the order of topics in the textbook. This order is the reverse
of that which I would prefer, in that the most basic results for this topic will appear in the next
section, where the textbook considers theorems about positive series. As with the preceding
section, we are investigating a specialized topic concerning series prior to meeting a more
general theorem in [1, §11.6] at the next lecture. The present section will broader the class of
series that we can work with, albeit to a very special class of series.
An alternating series is one in which the signs alternate. Our main interest, as in the
preceding sections will be in three questions, listed in the order of our priorities:
1. Does the series converge?
2. If the series converges, what is its sum?
3. If we truncate the series at a specific partial sum, can we obtain a “good” upper bound
for the error — i.e., for the diff erence between the sum of the series and the given partial
sum.
Our interest in alternating series derives partly from some specific series that will arise later in
[1, Chapter 11], in the portion of the chapter assigned to Calculus III. There we would meetseveral important power series which represent some familiar functions; and many of those
series have alternating signs.
By the “Test for Divergence”, an alternating series cannot converge unless the limit of the
sequence of its terms is 0. For these series, and these series alone, we have a partial converse
of that test:
Theorem C.97 (Leibniz’s Alternating Series Test) An alternating series∞
n=1
(−1)n−1bn for which:
(i) 0 ≤ bn+1 ≤ bn for all n; and
(ii) limn→∞
bn = 0
converges.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 301/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3246
Estimating Sums While the estimation of errors can be complicated for other series, the
following very simple bounds hold for alternating series:
Corollary C.98 (to the Leibniz Alternating Series Test) Continuing with the same notation
as the theorem, the remainder upon truncation of an alternating series
∞n=1
(−1)n−1bn (bn ≥ 0; n =
1, 2, . . .) at the N th term cannot exceed the very next term; more precisely,∞
n= N +1
(−1)n−1bn
< |b N +1| .
Example C.99 Determine whether the series
∞
n=0
(−
1)n 1
2n + 1 converges.
Solution: This is an alternating series. Since the denominators are increasing, while the nu-
merators stay fixed, the terms are decreasing; the limit of the denominators is ∞, so the terms
are approaching 0. By the Leibniz Theorem, the series converges. (It is beyond this course,
but it can be shown that this series converges to arctan 1, i.e., to π4
, and thereby provides a way
of approximating π to any desired accuracy. It is, however, not a good series for that purpose,
since it converges rather slowly.)
Example C.100 Determine whether the series
∞n=0
(−1)n 1
n + 1 converges.
Solution: This is an alternating series. Since the denominators are increasing, while the nu-merators stay fixed, the terms are decreasing; the limit of the denominators is ∞, so the terms
are approaching 0. By the Leibniz Theorem, the series converges. (It is beyond this course,
but this series can be proved to converge to ln(1 + 1), i.e., to ln 2.)
Example C.101 ([7, Exercise 26, p. 740]) How many terms of the series
∞n=1
(−1)nn
4n do we
need to add in order to find the sum to within an error of 0 .002?
Solution: As n → ∞ lim n4n = lim 1
4n ln n = 0. The terms are decreasing, since
n
4n
> n + 1
4n+1
⇔ 4n > n + 1
⇔ n >
1
3
.
Thus the Leibniz Theorem is applicable, and we apply the error estimate associated with that
Theorem. If we truncate the series at the N th term, then we know that the error will be less
than N + 1
4 N +1 . If we can find N satisfying the condition that
N + 1
4 N +1 < 0.002 , (96)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 302/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3247
we will have the desired accuracy. Since
d dx
x4 x
= 1 · 4 x − x · 4 x · ln 4
(4 x)2 = 1 − x ln 4
4 x ,
which is negative provided x > 1ln 4
, which is certainly true if x ≥ 1. Thus we need only find the
first value of N for which inequality (96) holds. By repeated calculations we find the first value
is N = 5. That is, the series may be truncated by summing so that the last term we include is(−1)55
45 and the error will be within the prescribed tolerance.59
The student should understand that the Leibniz estimate for error is not necessarily as sharp
as it might be. It is often possible to obtain much better approximations than the Leibniz esti-
mate might guarantee; such investigations are beyond this course. The Leibniz theorem states
that an alternating series whose terms are non-decreasing in magnitude and are approaching0 is convergent. However, an alternating series whose terms are not decreasing, but whose
terms do approach 0, may still converge! For example, suppose that we modify the “alternat-
ing harmonic series”∞
n=1
(−1)n+1 1n
in the following way: term number 2n is the negative fraction
(−1)2n+1 12n . Let’s divide just these terms by 2. The resulting alternating series can be shown
to still be convergent; but it will converge to a sum which is less than the sum of the original
series; in fact, the reduction converges to a sum of
1
2 ·
12
1 − 12
= 1
2 .
But the condition of the Leibniz Theorem that requires that the terms be monotonely decreasing
in magnitude is not satisfied, so the convergence cannot be inferred from the Leibniz Theorem.
Nonetheless, the series does converge (since the partial sums are equal to the diff erence of the
partial sums of two series known to converge).
11.5 Exercises
[1, Exercise 14, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞n=1
(−1)n−1 ln n
n.
Solution: The series is alternating. The limit of the terms can be seen by L’Hospital’s
Rule to be limn→∞1n = 0. To determine whether the terms are decreasing, we can consider
d
dx
ln x
x
=
1 − ln x
x2 < 0
59We can actually sum this infinite series, using methods analogous to the method used to sum a geometric
progression. The sum can be shown to be − 425
. The sum of the first 5 terms is approximately -0.161133, so the
error is approximately 0.001133, which is within the desired tolerance.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 303/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3248
for x > e. Hence the Leibniz Theorem applies, and the series must converge. It’s not
important where the terms start to decrease — only that they ultimately decrease.60
[1, Exercise 10, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞n=1
(−1)n
√ n
1 + 2√
n.
Solution: The general term of the given series is,
(−1)n
√ n
1 + 2√
n= (−1)n 1
1√ n
+ 2
whose magnitude → 1
2 as n → ∞. Thus the sequence of terms of this series does not
have a limit as n → ∞, and the series cannot converge, by the “Test for Divergence”. Infact, the other condition of the Leibniz Theorem, that the terms decrease in magnitude,
also fails to hold! But here we can say more: not only can we state that the Leibniz Test
yields no information, but we can state that the Test for Divergence shows that the series
actually diverges.
[1, Exercise 14, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞n=1
(−1)n−1 ln n
n .
Solution: The series is alternating. The limit of the terms can be seen by L’Hospital’s
Rule to be limn
→∞
1n
= 0. We have determined this limit for 2 reasons:
• as an application of “The” Test for Divergence — our result is inconclusive, and
gives no information about divergence;
• as a condition of the Leibniz Alternating Series Test — here our result is positive,
and, when combined with the yet unproved fact that the terms are decreasing in
magnitude, will show that the series does, indeed, converge.
To determine whether the terms are decreasing, we can consider
d
dx
ln x
x
=
1 − ln x
x2 < 0
for x > e. Hence the Leibniz Theorem applies, and the series must converge. It’s not
important where the terms start to decrease — only that they ultimately decrease.61
60However, the Leibniz estimate for the error would not be valid until the terms have begun to decrease.61However, the Leibniz estimate for the error would not be valid until the terms have begun to decrease.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 304/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3249
[1, Exercise 17, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞
n=1
(
−1)n sin
π
n
.
Solution: This problem should be compared with [1, Exercise 31, p. 709] (cf. these
notes, p. 3229). In the earlier problem we proved the divergence of a series whose terms
resemble those of the present series, except that it was not alternating. But the present
series satisfies the conditions of the alternating series test, as the terms alternate in sign,
are monotonely decreasing (because the sine function is an increasing function to the
right of 0), and the limit of the terms is 0. Thus the series converges. When we have
covered [1, §11.6] we will be able to describe the present series as being Conditionally
Convergent — it is convergent, but loses that property if all terms are replaced by their
absolute value.
[1, Exercise 18, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series∞
n=1
(−1)n cos πn
.
Solution: Since the magnitudes of the terms of this series approach 1 as n → ∞, the
terms of the series have no limit! By “The” Test for Divergence, this series diverges!
[1, Exercise 19, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞n=1
(−1)n nn
n! (cf. [1, Ex-
ercise 30, p. 709][1, Exercise 18, p. 720])
Solution: The terms may be factorized as
(−1)n nn
n! = (−1)n n
1 · n
2 · . . . n
n − 1 · n
n.
While this is an alternating series, the limit of the terms cannot be 0, since the fractions
into which I have factored the terms are, in magnitude, all greater than or equal to 1;
thus the series must diverge, by “The” Test for Divergence; this also shows that not all
conditions of the Leibniz Alternating Series Test are satisfied, but from that we can only
conclude that that test does not apply, not that the series diverges.
[1, Exercise 20, p. 713] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞n=1
(−1)n
n
5
n
.
Solution: This series also diverges, because the terms to not have limit 0.
C.33.2 Solutions to Problems on the Final Examination in MATH 141 2007 01
Among the instructions for this examination was the following:
There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as
to its type.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 305/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3250
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where
the question is printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the
facing page. Any solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back
cover of the booklet, but you must indicate any continuation clearly on the
page where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only
BRIEF SOLUTIONS
for these you are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided;
you are not asked to show your work, and you should not expect partial marksfor solutions that are not correct.
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please
inform the invigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate 2
−1 | x
|2 dx.
Solution: 2
−1
| x|2 dx =
2
−1
x2 dx =
x3
3
2
−1
= 8 − (−1)
3 = 3 .
(b) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
0 1
t 4dt √ t 5 + 1
.
Solution: Either by observation, or by applying a substitution like u = t 5, or u =
t 5 + 1, or u =√
t 5 + 1, we can show that
0 1
t 4dt √ t 5 + 1
= 2
5
√ t 5 + 1
0
1=
2
5(1 − √
2) = −2
5(√
2 − 1) .
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine the value of
1
n
0
n
3
+
1
n
3
+
2
n
3
+ . . . +
n − 1
n
3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 306/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 307/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3252
which simplifies to 2 x · e x(2 x2); when x = 1, the value is 2e.
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence to determine whether the series is absolutely convergent, condition-
ally convergent, or divergent. All tests used must be named, and all statements must be
carefully justified.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−n − 2)n(n − 2)n
(2n2 + 1)n
Solution:∞
n=1
(−n − 2)
n
(n − 2)
n
(2n2 + 1)n =
∞n=1
(−1)n (n
2
− 4)
n
(2n2 + 1)n .
This is an alternating series. Applying the Root Test to the series of absolute values
of the terms of the given series, we have
n
(n2 − 4)n
(2n2 + 1)n =
n2 − 4
2n2 + 1
=1 − 4
n2
2 + 1n2
for n ≥ 2. As n → ∞, this ratio → 12
< 1 . Since the limit of the ratio is less
than 1, the original alternating series is absolutely convergent.
(b) [4 MARKS]∞
n=1
(−1)n+1 n!
n22n
Solution: If we define an = (−1)n+1 n!
n22n, we find, using the Ratio Test, that
an+1
an
= (n + 1)n2
(n + 1)21
= n2
2(n + 1) → ∞ > 1 .
Hence the original series diverges.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n sin 1
n
Solution: The series of absolute values may be compared, using the Limit Compar-
ison Test, with the Harmonic series, a positive series known to be divergent. Since
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 308/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3253
limn→∞
sin 1n
1n
= 1 0, the series of absolute values is also divergent, and the original
series is either (1) conditionally convergent, or (2) divergent. But
d
dx
sin
1
x
=
cos
1
x
·− 1
x2
< 0
as x > 1. Hence the given series of alternating terms are monotonely decreasing
in magnitude. As n → ∞, sin 1n → sin0 = 0, by the continuity of the sine func-
tion. Thus the conditions of the Alternating Series Test are satisfied, and the series
converges. We conclude that the given series is conditionally convergent.
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express each of the following as a definite integral or a sum,
product, or quotient of several definite integrals, simplified as much as possible; you arenot expected to evaluate the integrals.
R is defined to be the region enclosed by the curves x + y = 6 and y = x2; C is the arc
y = 3 x (−1 ≤ x ≤ 2).
(a) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the x-axis. Give an integral or sum of
integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: By solving the equations of the line x + y = 6 and the parabola y = x2,
we find the points of intersection to be (−3, 9) and (2, 4). Either of the following
integrals or sums of integrals was acceptable. (Students were not expected to eval-
uate the integrals; I have done so here in order to verify my own work, and to show
you that the integrals weren’t really hard to evaluate.)
i. Using the method of “Washers”, we find the volume to be
π 2
−3(6 − x)
2
− ( x
2
)
2 dx = π
2
−3− x
4
+ x
2
− 12 x + 36
dx
which can be shown to be equal to 500π
3 .
ii. Using the method of cylindrical shells, we find the volume to be 4
0
(2π y) · (2√
y) dy +
9
4
(2π y) · (6 − y + √
y) dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 309/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3254
whose value can again be shown to equal 500π
3 .
(b) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line x = 5. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: Here again, students were expected only to state the integrals, but not to
evaluate them.
i. Using the method of cylindrical shells: We will be rotating about x = 5
vertical elements of area; the width can be taken to be ∆ x, as integration will
be with respect to x. The element extends from a point ( x, x2) to ( x, 6 − x), so
its height is 6 − x − x2. The volume is 2
−3
2π(5 − x) · (6 − x − x2) dx = 2π
x4
4 − 4 x3
3 − 11 x2
2 + 30 x
2
−3
= 1375π
6 .
ii. Using the method of washers:
π 4
0
(5 + √ y)
2
− (−5 + √ r )2
dy + π 9
4 ((5 + √ y)2
− (5 − (6 − y))2
) dy
= 20π
4
0
√ y dy + π
9
4
(24 + 10√
y + 3 y − y2) dy = 1375π
6 .
(c) [3 MARKS] Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the
average length that R cuts off from the vertical lines which it meets.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: The length of the segment cut off from the line x = a has been shown
above to be 6 − a − a2. The average of this function over the interval −3 ≤ a ≤ 2 is
the ratio 2
−3(6 − a − a2) da
2 − (−3) =
25
6 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 310/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3255
Students weren’t asked to evaluate the integral. I have done so here to verify my
work; in this case I can’t verify by comparing answers obtained in two diff erentways, but I can, at least, examine the magnitude of my answer, and decide whether
it is reasonable for the given data. For example, if my answer had been 25, I
would know something was wrong, by considering the sizes of the numbers being
averaged, and the maximum value obtained by the function on the given interval.
(d) [2 MARKS] Give an integral whose value is the length of C; you need not evaluate
the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution: When y = 3 x, y = 3 x ln 3. The arc length is 2
−1
1 + (3 x ln 3)2 dx .
(e) [3 MARKS] Given an integral whose value is the area of the surface generated by
rotating C about the line y = −1; you need not evaluate the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
Solution:
2π
2
−1
(3 x + 1)
1 + 32 x(ln 3)2 dx
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral x x2 − 4
( x − 2) + 4
x2 − 4
( x − 2) dx .
Solution: The numerator of the integrand has degree not less than that of the denomina-
tor. Accordingly, the first step is to divide denominator into numerator and to integrate
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 311/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3256
the quotient separately, and to factorize the denominator and group like factors together:
x x2 − 4
( x − 2) + 4
x2 − 4
( x − 2) dx =
x +
4
( x + 2)( x − 2)2
dx
= x2
2 +
4
( x + 2)( x − 2)2 d x .
Next we apply to the new integrand the method of partial fractions:
4
( x + 2)( x − 2)2 =
A
x + 2 +
B
x − 2 +
C
( x − 2)2
⇒ 4 = A( x − 2)2 + B( x + 2)( x − 2) + C ( x + 2)
⇒ 4 = 4C when x = 2; and4 = 16 A when x = 2
implying that A = 14
and C = 1. Comparing coefficients of x2 on both sides of the
identity yields 0 = A + B, implying that B = − 14
. Now we can continue integration of
the original function:
x x2 − 4
( x − 2) + 4
x2 − 4
( x − 2) dx =
x2
2 +
4
( x + 2)( x − 2)2 d x
= x2
2 +
1
4 1
x + 2 − 1
x
−2 dx +
dx
( x
−2)2
= x2
2 +
1
4 ln
x + 2
x − 2
− 1
x − 2 + C .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
(a) [4 MARKS]
e− x · cos x dx
Solution: I will apply Integration by Parts twice. First, with u = e− x, dv = cos x dx
(so du = −e− x dx, v = sin x) yields e− x cos x dx = e− x sin x +
e− x sin x dx ,
and the second (applied to the integral resulting from the first application), with
U = e− x, dV = sin x dx (so dU = −e− x dx, V = −cos x) yields e− x cos x dx = e− x (sin x − cos x) −
e− x cos x dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 312/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3257
By collecting both integral terms on one side, and dividing by 2, we obtain e− x cos x dx =
12
e− x(sin x − cos x) + C .
Another way to solve this problem is to assume — from experience — that the
indefinite integral is equal to a sum of the form e− x · cos x dx = e− x( A sin x + B cos x) + C ,
where A and B are “undetermined” constants, to be determined. One could then
diff erentiate this equation, top obtain
e− x cos x = −
e− x( A sin x + B cos x)e− x( A cos x−
B sin x) .
This is an identity – true for all values of x. If we assign “convenient” values, for
example x = 0 and x = π
2, we obtain equations
A − B = 1 ,
A + B = 0 ,
which we can solved, to obtain A = 12
, B = −12
, yielding the same solution as found
earlier.
(b) [5 MARKS]
52
− 1
2
x
√ 8 + 2 x − x2 dx
Solution:
52
− 12
x√ 8 + 2 x − x2
dx =
52
− 12
x 9 − ( x − 1)2
dx
= 1
3
52
−1
2
x
1 −( x−1
3 )2
dx .
I will use the substitution u = x − 1
3 , so du =
dx
3 .
1
3
52
− 12
x 1 − ( x−1
3 )2
dx = 1
3
12
− 12
3u + 1√ 1 − u2
.3 du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 313/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3258
= −3
√ 1
−u2 + arcsin u
12
12
=
−3
3
4 + arcsin
1
2
−−3
3
4 − arcsin
1
2
= 2 arcsin
1
2 = 2 · π
6 =
π
3 .
(c) [4 MARKS]
cos2 x +
1
cos2 x
· tan2 x dx
Solution:
cos2 x + 1
cos2
x ·
tan2 x dx = sin2 x + tan2 x
·sec2 x dx
=
1 − cos2 x
2 + tan2 x · sec2 x
dx
= x
2 − sin 2 x
4 +
tan3 x
3 + C .
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the arc C defined by
x = x(t ) = cos t + t sin t
y = y(t ) = sin t −
t cos t ,
where 0 ≤ t ≤ π2
.
(a) [6 MARKS] Determine as a function of t the value of d 2 y
dx2.
Solution:
dx
dt = − sin t + sin t + t cos t = t cos t
dy
dt = cos t − cos t + t sin t = t sin t
dydx
=
dy
dt dxdt
= t sin t t cos t
= tan t when t 0, π2
,
d 2 y
dx2 =
d
dx
dy
dx
=
d
dt
dy
dx
· dt
dx
=
d dt
dy
dx
dxdt
=
d dt
tan t
t cos t =
sec2 t
t cos t =
1
t cos3 t ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 314/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3259
when t 0, π2
.
(b) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface generated by revolving C about the y-axis.
Solution: The area of the surface generated is
2π
π2
0
x(t )
(t cos t )2 + (t sin t )2 dt
= 2π
π2
0
(cos t + t sin t )|t | dt = 2π
π2
0
(t cos t + t 2 sin t ) dt .
At this point I interrupt the calculations to integrate by parts. First, taking u = t ,
dv = cos t dt (so du = dt , v = sin t ), t cos t dt = t sin t −
sin t dt = t sin t + cos t + C 1 .
Then, taking u = t 2, dv = sin t dt (so du = 2t dt and v = −cos t ), t 2 sin t dt = −t 2 cos t + 2
t cos t dt = −t 2 cos t + 2(t sin t + cos t ) + C 2 .
Incorporating these results into the earlier integral yields
2π
π2
0 (t cos t +
t
2
sin t ) dt
= 2π(t sin t + cos t ) + (−t 2 cos t + 2t sin t + 2cos t )
π2
0
= 6π
π
2 − 1
.
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value:
π
π2
sec x dx .
Solution: The integrand has an infinite discontinuity at x = π
2.
π
π2
sec x dx = lima→( π
2 )+
π
a
sec x dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 315/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3260
= lima
→( π
2 )+
[ln | sec x + tan x|]πa
= lima→( π
2 )+
(ln | − 1 + 0| − ln | sec a + tan a|)
= 0 − lima→( π
2 )+
ln | sec a + tan a| .
Here both sec a and tan a are negative, as the argument is in the second quadrant,
so they both approach −∞. This implies that their sum also approaches −∞, and
that ln | sec a + tan a| approaches +∞; hence the improper integral approaches −∞,
and is not convergent.
(b) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully determine whether the series
∞
n=3
4
n ln nis convergent.
Solution: Since both factors in the denominator are increasing, the terms of this
positive series are decreasing monotonely. We can apply the Integral Test with the
function f ( x) = 4 x ln x
. But ∞
3
dx
x ln x= lim
b→∞[ln ln x]b
3 = +∞
is a divergent, improper integral, so the series is also divergent.
(c) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following sequence
converges; if it converges, find its limit:
a1 = 1.
a2 = 1.23
a3 = 1.2345
a4 = 1.234545
a5 = 1.23454545
a6 = 1.2345454545
etc., where each term after a2 is obtained from its predecessor by the addition on
the right of the decimal digits 45.Solution:
1.23 + 45(0.0001 + 0.000001 + . . .) = 1.23 + 45
10000
1 +
1
100 +
1
1002 + . . .
= 1.23 + 45
104 · 1
1 − 1100
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 316/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 317/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3262
4
-4
0
4 80-8 -4
-12
-8
Figure 23: The cardioids with equations r = 2 + 2sin θ , r = 6 − 6 sin θ
and (98)
r = 6 − 6 sin θ
π
6 ≤ θ ≤ π
2
(99)
Technically the first of these curves is described incorrectly, since the values shown for
the angle are not in the given interval; so we should write, instead,
r = 2 + 2 sin θ
3π
2 ≤ θ ≤ 2π
, (100)
r = 2 + 2 sin θ
0 ≤ θ ≤ π
6
, (101)
and (102)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 318/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3263
r = 6 − 6 sin θ π
6 ≤ θ ≤ π
2 . (103)
There are various ways in which the area can be calculated (see Figure 24 on page
3263)). One method is to first draw a line joining (0, 0) and3, π
6
. The area of the
1.5
0.5
1
2
0
2.51.50.5 10
-0.5
Figure 24: The region bounded by cardioids r = 2 + 2sin θ , r = 6 − 6sin θ and containing the
point (r , θ ) = (1, 0)
subregion above the line is 1
2
π2
π6
(6 − 6sin θ )2 dt ; the area of the region below the line is
1
2
π6
− π2
(2 + 2sin θ )2 d θ . To evaluate these definite integrals, observe that
(1 − sin θ )2 d θ =
(1 − 2sin θ + sin2 θ ) d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 319/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3264
= 1
−2 sin θ +
1 − cos2θ
2 d θ
= 3θ
2 + 2cos θ − sin 2θ
4 + C .
In a similar fashion we can prove that (1 + sin θ )2 d θ =
3θ
2 − 2cos θ − sin2θ
4 + C .
Hence
1
2
π2
π6
(6 − 6sin θ )2
dt =
27θ + 36 cos θ − 9
sin2θ
2 π
2
π6
= 27π
2 −
9π + 36 ·√
3
2 − 9
2 ·
√ 3
2
= 9π − 63
√ 3
4
1
2
π6
− π2
(2 + 2sin θ )2 dt =
3θ + 4cos θ − sin 2θ
2
π6
− π2
=
π
2 + 4 · √ 3
2 − √ 3
2
−−−3π
4
= 2π + 7
√ 3
4 ,
so the total area is 11π − 18√
3. This area could have been computed in other ways. For
example, half the area of the smaller cardiod can be seen to be 3π, and from this one
could subtract the integral
1
2
π2
π6
(2 + 2sin θ )
2
− (6 − 6sin θ )22
d θ ,
which can be shown to equal 18√
3 − 8π. The integration of this diff erence of squares
depends on the fact that the two curves are “traced out” in the same direction; this should
be verified before using this “combined” method.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 320/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3265
C.34 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 26th, 2010
Distribution Date: Friday, March 26th, 2010, subject to further revision
C.34.1 §11.6 Absolute Convergence and the Ratio and Root Tests
Finally, after meeting, in [1, §§11.2–11.4] several tests for the convergence of positive series,
we see a reason for our interest in this type of series. To state the theorem we require two
definitions:
Definition C.7 1. A series
an is absolutely convergent if the series |an| is convergent.
2. A series an is conditionally convergent if an is convergent but not absolutely con-
vergent, i.e., if
an converges but |an| diverges.
Note that, thus far, you must not interpret the word absolutely as an adverb modifying the
participle convergent ; until the following theorem is available, you should treat absolutely
convergent as a two-word name for a property, nothing more. Now we state the theorem that
will permit a broader interpretation of the name.
Theorem C.102 A series which is absolutely convergent is convergent.
(I shall not prove the theorem in the lectures, but a short proof can be found in your textbook.)
Now that we have this theorem, we can interpret the word absolutely as a modifier —
if we drop the word from a statement, the resulting statement is still true; we didn’t need
such a reservation with the term conditionally convergent , since the definition stated that a
conditionally convergent series is convergent and . . . .
While investigation of the convergence of general series, i.e., series whose terms have both
plus and minus signs, can be difficult, we can begin by considering the series of absolute
values: if the resulting series converges, we can infer that the original series is convergent.
But, if the series of absolute values diverges, or if we are unable to say anything about it, then
we can make no inference at all.
The Ratio Test. The Ratio Test is a test for positive series which considers the limit of the
ratio of a term to its predecessor. The textbook states the test in terms of the absolute values of
terms of a general series, so we will present it in that variant:
Theorem C.103 (Ratio Test) 1. If limn→∞
|an+1||an|
= L < 1, then the series
an is absolutely
convergent.
2. If limn→∞
|an+1||an|
= L > 1, then the series
an is divergent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 321/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 322/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3267
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: I will apply the Root Test. The nth root of the absolute value of the nth term is1
arctan n, which approaches
2
π< 1. Hence the series is absolutely convergent.
11.6 Exercises
[1, Exercise 3, p. 719] I modify the problem: Determine whether the series
∞n=0
(−1)n 1, 000, 000n
n!
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: Apply the Ratio Test to the series of absolute values. The ratio of the (n + 1)th
term to the nth is 100000
n + 1 , and
100000
n + 1 → 0 as n → ∞. Thus, by the Ratio Test, the
series is absolutely convergent. This conclusion could also be proved in other ways.
[1, Exercise 12, p. 719] Determine whether the series
∞n=0
sin4n
4n
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: Neither the Root Test nor the Ratio Test is useful here, because the limits do
not exist. Compare the series of absolute values with the geometric series
14n . Since
the latter converges, so does the former. Thus the given series is absolutely convergent.
[1, Exercise 16, p. 720] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
3 − cos n
n23 − 2
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: For n > 1000 — (we don’t need the best bound here) — this is a positive
series; the numerator behaves erratically, and we will not be able to calculate a limit
using the Ratio or Root Tests. But since, for large n, the denominator is larger than
n23 , we would expect this series to diverge by comparison with the appropriate p-series.
More precisely, the divergence of the p-series with p = 23
implies the divergence of the
given series, since3 − cos n
n23 − 2
> 3 − 1
n23 − 2
> 3 − 1
n23
= 2
n23
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 323/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3268
C.35 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of March 29th, 2010
Distribution Date: Monday, March 29th, 2010, subject to further revision
C.35.1 §11.6 Absolute Convergence and the Ratio and Root Tests (conclusion)
Review of the last lecture After reviewing the Leibniz Alternating Series Test, I worked
examples on these series, and mentioned the concept of conditional convergence, to be defined
in the next section. In §11.6 we finally saw some justification for our development of tests for
the convergence of positive series.
• definitions of absolute and conditional convergence
• Theorem: Absolute convergence implies convergence.
• The Ratio Test and Root Test are essentially tests for the convergence of positive series,
but they are formulated in your textbook for any series, since the limits involved are each
applied to the absolute values of roots and / or ratios.
• In each of these tests a limit is investigated, and that limit must be diff erent from 1 for
the test to yield any useful information. If the limit does not exist, or if the limit exists
and is equal to 1, the test fails to give any information.
• When the limit exceeds 1, that implies that the terms do not approach 0, and so diver-
gence follows from “The” Test for Divergence.
11.6 Exercises (continued)
[1, Exercise 4, p. 719] Determine whether the series
∞n=1
(−1)n−1 2n
n4 is absolutely convergent,
conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: This is an alternating series: the only test we have to apply directly to such
series is the Leibniz Alternating Series Test (and the Test for Divergence, which forms a
part of the Leibniz Test). To determine limn→∞
2n
n4, where both numerator and denominator
become infinite, we can use L’Hospital’s Rule. This will need to be applied 4 times, afterwhich we have lim
n→∞2n(ln 2)4
24 = +∞ . The terms of the original series do not approach
+∞, since they are alternating in sign; but the non-existence of a limit shows that, in
particular, the limit of terms is not 0, so the Test for Divergence tells us that this series
must diverge. We don’t even need to check the second condition of the Leibniz Test
(which could be shown to fail). Thus, even though we thought we were applying the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 324/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 325/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3270
is far beyond this course. The obvious test to try is the Ratio Test, since the terms
are products, and the ratio of successive terms has many factors which cancel. Wefind that the ratio of the (n + 1)st term to the nth is
2(n + 1)
n2 = 2
1
n +
1
n2
which
approaches 0 as n → ∞. Since this limit exists, and is less than 1, the Ratio Test
tells us that the series of absolute values is convergent — i.e., that the original series
is absolutely convergent.
(cf. [1, Exercise 17, p. 720]) Determine whether the series
∞n=0
(−1)n
n ln n
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
Solution: Here the ratio of the absolute value of the (n + 1)th term to that of the nth is1 +
1
n
· ln(n + 1)
ln n
in which the first factor approaches 1, and the second (by L’Hospital’s Rule) also ap-
proaches 1. Thus the Ratio Test fails to give useful information about this series. We are
not helpless, however. Let’s first consider the series of absolute values. The terms are
decreasing and approaching 0, so we may use the Integral Test to show that it is diver-
gent. On the other hand, the original series is alternating, and the terms are decreasingand approaching 0; hence, by the Leibniz Test, that series converges; consequently it is
conditionally convergent .
[1, Exercise 17, p. 720] is concerned with the series
∞n=0
(−1)n
n ln n. The preceding discussion
shows that a series with terms which are smaller in magnitude is not absolutely conver-
gent; hence, by the Comparison Test, the series of this exercise is surely not absolutely
convergent; we could also probe the absence of absolute convergence by comparing with
the harmonic series. But it is conditionally convergent, since the conditions of the Leib-
niz test are easily shown to be satisfied. (We could also probe the absence of absolute
convergence by comparing with the harmonic series.)
[1, Exercise 26, p. 720] Determine whether the series
2
5 +
2 · 6
5 · 8 +
2 · 6 · 10
5 · 8 · 11 +
2 · 6 · 10 · 14
5 · 8 · 11 · 14 + . . .
is absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 326/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3271
Solution: The ratio of the (n + 1)st term to the nth is 4n + 2
3n + 5, which approaches 4
3 > 1.
By the Ratio test, this series diverges.
[1, Exercise 30, p. 720] The terms of a series
an are defined “recursively” by a1 = 1, an+1 =2 + cos n√
n· an (n ≥ 1). Determine whether
an converges or diverges.
Solution: The ratio of the (n + 1)st to the nth term is 2 + cos n√
n (n ≥ 1). As n → ∞ the
numerator is bounded between 1 and 3, while the denominator becomes infinitely large;
by the Squeeze Theorem, applied to
0 ≤ an+1
an
≤ 3√ n
,
we see that limn→∞
an+1
an
= 0. By the Ratio Test, this shows that the series converges abso-
lutely.
[1, Exercise 32, p. 720] For which positive integers k is the series
∞n=1
(n!)2
(kn)! convergent?
Solution: The ratio of the (n + 1)st term to the nth is
((n + 1)!)2
(k (n + 1))!
(n!)2
(kn)!
=
(n + 1)!(n + 1)!(kn)!
n!n!(kn + k )! =
(n + 1)2
(kn + k )(kn + k − 1) · . . . · (kn + 1)
in which the factors in the denominator are k in number, and all of them lie between
n + 1 and kn + k . As long as k > 2, this fraction has more 1st degree factors in the
denominator than in the numerator, so it will approach 0 as n → ∞, and we note that
0 < 1; when k = 2 the fraction is (n + 1)2
(2n + 2)(2n + 1), which approaches 1
4 < 1 as n → ∞;
when k = 1 the fraction is equal to n + 1, and approaches +∞. By the Ratio Test the
series will converge for k ≥ 2, and will diverge when k = 1.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 327/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3272
C.36 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of Wednesday, March 31st,
2010Distribution Date: Wednesday, March 31st, 2010
subject to correction
C.36.1 §11.7 Strategy for Testing Series
This section is concerned with improving your methods for attacking series problems. Plan-
ning strategies really needs some experience: after you have worked a substantial number of
questions from earlier sections in the chapter, you might wish to read the 8 points that the
textbook gives on [1, p. 721]. These points will be of much more use to you after you have
accumulated some experience in applying the individual tests.Exercise C.2 ([7, Problems 2 and 4, p. 748]) You are asked to test for convergence or diver-
gence the series
∞n=1
n − 1
n2 + nand
∞n=1
(−1)n−1 n − 1
n2 + n.
Solution:
1. Consider the given positive series.
(a) It is useful, where possible, to formulate a good conjecture (guess) about the out-
come of the investigation, in order to know whether to concentrate e ff orts on at-
tempting to prove convergence or divergence. I suggest that a valuable first strate-
gic step is to replace the general term by a “simpler” term: in this case I wouldlook at
n
n
n2. Since this gives the harmonic series, a first guess in this case would
be that the series diverges. I would thus try to use some test that relates the given
series to the harmonic series.
(b) The simplest method would be to use the Limit Comparison Test:
limn→∞
n − 1
n2 + n1
n
= limn→∞
n − 1
n + 1 = 1 0 .
Hence the given series and the Harmonic Series converge or diverge together. Weknow that the Harmonic Series diverges; hence the given series also diverges.
(c) We could also have attacked this problem naively by using the Integral Test, with
f ( x) = x − 1
x2 + x. Since
f ( x) = − x2 + 3 x
x2 + x2
= − x( x − 3) x2 + x
2 ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 328/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3273
the function is decreasing for n > 3; and
limn→∞
n − 1
n2 + n= lim
n→∞
1 − 1n
1 + n= 0 .
Then the series will converge or diverge according as the following improper inte-
gral converges or diverges: ∞
3
x − 1
x2 + xdx =
∞
3
−1
x+
1
x + 1
dx
expanding by partial fractions
= limb→∞
b
3−
1
x
+ 2
x+
1 dx
= limb→∞
[− ln x + 2 ln( x + 1)]b3
= limb→∞
ln
( x + 1)2
x
b
3
= limb→∞
ln
(b + 1)2
b − ln
16
3
= limb→∞
ln
b + 2 +
1
b
− ln
16
3
= ∞ .
Thus this integral diverges, and the given series must also diverge.
2. Now consider the series
∞n=1
(−1)n−1 n − 1
n2 + n. We know from the preceding discussion
that the given alternating series does not converge absolutely. However, the Alternating
Series Test may be applied to show that the alternating series does converge. Thus the
series converges conditionally. So the answer to the question as stated is that the given
series does converge.
11.7 Exercises
[1, Exercise 10, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series∞
n=1
n2e−n3
.
Solution: The terms suggest a function with an obvious antiderivative. More precisely,
if f ( x) = x2e− x3
, then
f ( x) dx = −13
e− x3
+ C . Thus it would appear that we could use
the Integral Test here. But let’s check that the conditions for that test are satisfied:
• Is the given series positive: YES
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 329/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3274
• Does the function f match the series values at integer terms: YES
• Is f (continuous and) positive (not just at the integer points): YES
• Is f decreasing? NOT CHECKED YET!
f ( x) = x2 − 3 x3
e− x3
, a product of 3 factors. The first factor is positive for x > 0; the
last factor is an exponential, so it is always positive; and the middle factor is negative
for x >
23
13
, so it is certainly negative for x ≥ 1. Thus f < 0, and f is decreasing. The
Integral Test tells us that the series will converge or diverge according as the improper
integral ∞
1 f ( x) dx converges or diverges. But
a
0
x2e− x3
dx =
−1
3e−a
−e−1 →
1
3e
as a
→ ∞.
From the convergence of the integral we infer the convergence of the given series.
Another approach would have been to use the Ratio Test:
limn→∞
(n + 1)2e−(n+1)3
n2e−n3 =
1 +
1
n
2
· 1
e3n2+3n+1→ 12 · 0 = 0 < 1 as n → ∞.
The Root Test could also be used, although the calculation is more difficult:
n
n2 · e−n3= e
2 ln nn · e−n2 → e0 · 0 = 1 · 0 = 0 < 1 as n → ∞ ,
by l’Hospital’s Rule. In either of these cases the limit being less than 1 implies that the
series is absolutely convergent.
[1, Exercise 12, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series∞
n=1
sin n.
Solution: Here is a case where the Test for Divergence is needed. None of the other
tests you know will be helpful. As n → ∞, sin n does not approach a limit. (However,
students in this course could not be expected to prove that fact rigorously without some
strong hint.) Thus the series cannot converge.
[1, Exercise 20, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞k =1
k + 55k .
Solution: The series looks at first like a geometric series; but the numerators are increas-
ing, so we can’t compare with a geometric series; the Limit Comparison Test will also
not be helpful, at least not in comparing with the Geometric Series 1
5k . But several
other possibilities suggest themselves.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 330/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3275
Compare with a geometric series which converges more slowly: e.g., with25
k . Here
limk →∞
k + 5
5k 2
5
k = lim
k →∞k + 5
2k = lim
k →∞1
2k ln 2 = 0 .
Unfortunately, this limit being 0, we cannot use the form of the Limit Comparison
Test given in your book. We could use the version given in [1, Exercise 40(a), p.
709], but that was not studied in our course.
Ratio Test:
limk →∞
ak +1
ak
= 1
5
limk →∞
k + 6
k + 5
= 1
5
< 1
hence the given positive series converges.
Root Test:
limk →∞
k √
ak = 1
5 limk →∞
k √
k + 5 = 1
5 limk →∞
e
ln(k + 5)
k = 1
5e
limk →∞
ln(k + 5)
k .
It can be shown by l’Hospital’s Rule that the exponent approaches 0, so the k th root
approaches 15
, which is less than 1.
In fact one can determine the actual sum here, but it involves techniques slightly beyond
the course.
[1, Exercise 23, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series∞
n=1
tan
1n
.
Solution: As n → ∞, 1n → 0, and tan 1
n → 0 (since it is the ratio of sin 1
n to cos 1
n, and
cos 1n → cos0 = 1, while sin 1
n → 0). Thus the Test for Divergence does not eliminate
the possibility that the series may converge, just as the same test did not eliminate the
possibility that the Harmonic Series might converge. If you remember that
limn→∞
tan 1n
1n
= limn→∞
sin 1n
1n · cos 1
n
= limn→∞
sin 1n
1n
· limn→∞
sec 1n
= 1 · 1 = 1
you can apply the Limit Comparison Test, comparing the given series with the Harmonic
Series. Since the limit is a non-zero real number, and since the Harmonic Series is known
to diverge, the given series must also diverge.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 331/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3276
[1, Exercise 36, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞
n=2
1
(ln n)ln n
.
Solution: Observe that
1
(ln n)ln n =
1elnln n
ln n =
1
e(lnln n)(ln n) =
1eln n
lnln n =
1
nlnln n .
We can arrange for the exponent, i.e., ln ln n, to be greater than, for example, 2, by taking
n > ee2
= 1618.17799.... Thus we may compare the given series with the p-series
1n2 ,
which is known to converge, and infer that the given series also is convergent.
[1, Exercise 38, p. 722] Test for convergence or divergence the series
∞
n=1
n√
2
−1.
Solution: I start with the observation that the following factorization holds:
an − bn = (a − b)an−1 + an−2b + . . . + abn−2 + an−1
,
for any real numbers a and b, Taking a = n√
2 and b = 1, we have
n√
2 − 1 =
n√
2n − 1
n√
2
n−1
+
n√
2
n−2
+ . . . + n√
2 + 1.
The numerator is equal to 1. All of the n terms in the denominator are smaller than n√
2n ≤ 2, so the denominator is smaller than 2n. Thus the terms are greater than terms
in a multiple of the harmonic series, so the series must diverge, by the Comparison Test.
We could have used the Limit Comparison Test also, since we know that
limn→∞
n√
2 = limn→∞
eln 2
n = elimn→∞ ln 2n e0 = 1 .
Now apply l’Hospital’s Rule:
limn→∞
n√
2
−1
1
n
= limn→∞
− ln 2
n2
n√
2
− 1
n2
= limn→∞
(ln 2) n√
2 = ln 2 ,
since
limn→∞
n√
2 = limn→∞
eln 2
1n
= limn→∞
eln 2
n = elim
n→∞ln 2
n = e0 = 1 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 332/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3277
By the Limit Comparison Test, the divergence of the harmonic series implies the diver-
gence of the given series. (Note that, if we alternate the signs in this problem, we obtaina series whose terms are decreasing and approaching 0, so the Alternating Series Test
tells us that that series converges, i.e., that it is conditionally convergent.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 333/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 334/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3279
Students are advised to spend time checking their work; for that purpose you could verify
your answers by solving problems in more than one way. Remember that indefinite integralscan be checked by diff erentiation.
W. G. Brown, Examiner.
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation
dictionaries are permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 9 containing questions; and
Pages 10, 11, and 12, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this test may be different
from yours.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the question
is printed; in some of these problems you are instructed to write the answer in a box,but a correct answer alone will not be sufficient unless it is substantiated by your work,
clearly displayed outside the box. When space provided for that work is exhausted, you
may write on the facing page . Any solution may be continued on the last pages, or the
back cover of the booklet, but you must indicate any continuation clearly on the page
where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform the
invigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 335/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3280
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate 4 − 6 x
1 + x2 dx .
Solution: 4 − 6 x
1 + x2 dx = 4
dx
1 + x2 − 3
2 x
1 + x2 dx
= 4 arctan x − 3 ln(1 + x2) + C
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
2 0
y2
y3 + 1 dy .
Solution: I apply the change of variable u = y3 (or v = y3 + 1), under which
du = 3 y2 dy:
2 0
y2
y3 + 1 dy =
8
0
√ u + 1 · 1
3 du
= 1
3 · 2
3
(u + 1)
32
8
0
= 2
9
9
32 − 1
32
=
52
9 .
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
sin(18 θ ) · cos(30 θ ) d θ .
Solution:
i. The easiest way to solve this problem is by using a trigonometric identity
which relates products to sums: sin(18 θ ) cos(30 θ ) d θ =
1
2
(sin 48θ + sin(−12θ )) d θ
= − 1
96 cos 48θ +
1
24 cos 12θ + C .
ii. The problem could also be solved laboriously by two applications of inte-
gration by parts: Take u = sin 18θ , dv = cos 30θ d θ , implying that du =
18cos18θ , v = 130
sin 30θ : sin(18 θ ) · cos(30 θ ) d θ =
1
30 sin 18θ · sin 30θ − 18
30
cos 18θ · sin 30θ d θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 336/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3281
A second application of integration by parts, with U = cos 18θ , dV = sin 30θ d θ ,
implying that dU = −18sin18θ d θ , V = − 1
30 cos 30θ , yields sin(18 θ ) · cos(30 θ ) d θ
= 1
30 sin 18θ · sin 30θ − 18
30
− 1
30 cos 18θ · cos 30θ − 18
30
sin 18θ · cos30θ d θ
.
This equation may be solved for the desired indefinite integral, yielding sin(18 θ ) cos(30 θ ) d θ
= 1
1 − 1830
2 1
30
sin 18θ
·sin 30θ +
18
302
cos 18θ
·cos 30θ + C
= 1
96(5sin18θ · sin 30θ + 3cos18θ · cos30θ ) + C .
The validity of this solution can be demonstrated by diff erentiation.
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [3 MARKS] Simplifying your answer as much as possible, evaluate d
dx
√ 3
− x
earcsin z dz .
Solution:
d
dx
√ 3
− x
earcsin z dz = − d
dx
− x
√ 3
earcsin z dz
= −earcsin(− x) · d
dx(− x)
= earcsin(− x) = e− arcsin x
(The last simplification was not required.)
(b) [4 MARKS] For the interval 2 ≤ x ≤ 5 write down the Riemann sum for the
function f ( x) = 3 − x, where the sample points are the left end-point of each of n
subintervals of equal length.
Solution: The intervals have length 5 − 2n
= 3n
; f (2) = 1, xi = 2 + 3in
, f ( xi) =
3 −
2 + 3i
n
= 1 − 3i
n. The Riemann sum is
3
n
n−1i=0
1 − 3i
n
or
3
n
ni=1
1 − 3(i − 1)
n
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 337/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 338/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3283
the ratios of successive terms is 1, so that test is useless here. But we can apply the
Limit Comparison Test, comparing with the divergent p-series
n−12
:
limn→∞
√ 4n + 5
3n + 101
n12
= limn→∞
4 + 5
n
3 + 10n
= 2
3 > 0 .
Since this limit is positive, and since the p-series to which we have compared is
divergent, we may conclude that the series of absolute values is also divergent; and
hence that the original series we were given is not absolutely convergent. But that
still leaves open the question of whether that series is conditionally convergent or
divergent. I will check whether the conditions of the Leibniz Alternating SeriesTest are satisfied:
limn→∞
√ 4n + 5
3n + 10 = lim
n→∞
1√
n·
4 + 5
n
3
= 0
d
dx
√
4 x + 5
3 x + 10
=
1
2 · 2 · 1√
4 x + 5· (3 x + 10)) − (
√ 4 x + 5 · 3)
(3 x + 10)2
= −9 x − 5
(3 x + 10)2 √ 4 x + 5
< 0 ,
hence we may apply the Leibniz Test, and conclude that the given series is conver-
gent. Since it has been shown to not be absolutely convergent, it is conditionally
convergent.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
cot−1
1
n + 1
− cot−1
1
n
Solution: This is a telescoping series:
N
n=0
cot−1 1
n + 1 −
cot−1 1
n =
−cot−1 1 + cot−1 1
N + 2
.
As N → ∞ this partial sum approaches − cot−1 1 + cot−1 0 = −π4
+ π2
= π4
, so this is
the value to which the series converges. Since the derivative of cot−1 x is − 1
1 + x2,
the function is monotonely decreasing. Hence the terms of the given series are all
positive: a positive series which is convergent is absolutely convergent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 339/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3284
(The problem did not require the student to find the precise value of the sum. If
one did not notice that the given series was telescopic, one could still have appliedthe integral test to prove that it is absolutely convergent. It can be seen that ∞
0
cot−1 1
x + 1 − cot−1 1
x
dx
=
∞
0
(arctan( x + 1) − arctan( x)) dx
= lima→∞
arctan( x + 1) − ln(1 + ( x + 1)2)
2
−
arctan x − ln(1 + x2)
2
a
1
= lima→∞ arctan( x + 1)
−arctan x +
1
2
ln 1 + x2
1 + ( x + 1)2
a
1
= 0
− 1
2
ln 2
5
.4. BRIEF SOLUTIONS R is defined to be the region in the first quadrant enclosed by the
curves 2 y = x, y = 2 x, and x2 + y2 = 5.
(a) [4 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line x = −1. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
Solution:
Using “Washers”:
π 1
0
(2 y + 1)2 − (
4
2 + 1)2
dy + π 2
1
5 − y2 + 1
2
− y2 + 1
2 dy
Using Cylindrical Shells:
2π
1
0
( x + 1)
2 x − x
2
dx + 2π
2
1
( x + 1)
√ 5 − x2 − x
2
dx
(b) [4 MARKS] Let L(a) denote the length of the portion of line y = a which lies inside
R. Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the average of
the positive lengths L(a).
Solution:
1
2
1
0
2 y − 4
2
dy +
2
1
5 − y2 − 4
2
dy
(c) [4 MARKS] Let C1 be the curve x(t ) = t , y(t ) = cosh t (0 ≤ t ≤ ln 2). Simplifying
your answer as much as possible, find the length of C1.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 340/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3285
Solution:
dx
dt = 1
dy
dt = sinh t
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
=
1 + sinh2 t = |cosh t | = cosh t
Length =
ln 2
0
cosh t dt
= [sinh t ]ln 20
= sinhln2 − sinh 0
= 3ln 2 − e− ln 2
2 − 0
=
2 − 1
2
2 =
3
4 .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [8 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 dx .
Solution: We observe that the degree of the numerator of the integrand is less than
the degree of the denominator; thus we do not need to divide denominator into
numerator and obtain a quotient and remainder. Next we need to find a Partial
Fraction decomposition of the integrand. Assuming a decomposition of the form
36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 =
A
x + 4 +
B
x − 2 +
C
( x − 2)2
we obtain, by taking the right side to a common denominator,
36 = A( x − 2)2 + B( x + 4)( x − 2) + C ( x + 4) .
Students should know two methods to find the values of these constants: either,
by assigning “convenient” values to x and thereby obtaining enough equations that
can be solved for the coefficients, or by comparing coefficients of powers of x on
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 341/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3286
the two sides of the equation. These methods, or a combination of them, yield
A = 1, B = −1, C = 6. Hence 36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 d x =
1
x + 4 − 1
x − 2 +
6
( x − 2)2
dx
= ln
x + 4
x − 2
− 6
x − 2 + C .
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine whether
∞ 3
36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 dx converges. If it converges,
find its value.
a
3
36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 dx =
ln
1 + 4
a
1 − 2
a
− 6
a − 2
− (ln7 − 6)
→ 0 − 0 − (ln7 − 6) = 6 − ln 7 as a → ∞ .
Since the limit exists, the integral converges to the limiting value, 6 − ln 7.
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
(a) [4 MARKS]
e √ x dx
Solution: This integral can be solved by a series of substitutions; for example, the
substitution u =
√ x
2 , which implies that x = 4u2, d x = 8u du yields
e
√ t dt =
e
√ x
2 dx = 8
u · eu du ,
which can then be integrated by parts, as follows: with u = u, dv = eu du, du = du,
v = eu, so
e √ t dt = 8
u · eu du
= 8
u · eu −
eu du
= 8 ((u − 1)eu) + C
=4
√ x − 8
e
√ x
2 + C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 342/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3287
(b) [5 MARKS]
0
− 1
2
x
√ 3 − 4 x − 4 x2 dx
Solution:
√ 3 − 4 x − 4 x2 =
4 − (1 + 2 x)2
= 2
1 −
1 + 2 x
2
2
.
0
−12
x√ 3
−4 x
−4 x2
dx = 1
2 0
− 12
x
1 − 1+2 x
22
dx
= 1
2
12
0
u − 12√
1 − u2du
= 1
2
−
√ 1 − u2 − 1
2 · arcsin u
12
0
= 1
2
−
√ 3
2 − 1
2 arcsin
1
2
− (−1 − 0)
=
1
2 −√
3
2 − 1
2 · π
6 + 1 =
1
2 − π
24 −
√ 3
4 .
(c) [4 MARKS]
π
0
sin2 t cos4 t dt .
Solution: To evaluate integrals of this type the method of the textbook is to replace
the square powers of sines and cosines by functions of the cosine of twice the angle.
The following is a variant of that method, using both the sine and the cosine of the
double angle. π
0
sin2 t cos4 t dt =
π
0
(2sin t · cos t )2
4 · cos2 t dt
= π
0
sin
2
2t 4
· 1 + cos2t 2
dt
=
π
0
sin2 2t
8 +
sin2 2t · cos2t
8
dt
=
π
0
sin2 2t
8 +
(2 sin 2t · cos2t )2
3 2
dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 343/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3288
= π
01 − cos4t
16
+ sin2 2t
32 dt
=
t
16 − sin 4t
64 +
sin3 2t
48
π
0
= π
16 .
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C2 defined by x = x(t ) = 1 + e−t , y = y(t ) = t + t 2 .
(a) [2 MARKS] Determine the coordinates of all points where C2 intersects the x-axis.
Solution:
y = 0 ⇒ t + t 2 = 0 ⇒ t = 0, −1
t = 0 ⇒ ( x, y) = (2, 0)
t = −1 ⇒ ( x, y) + (1 + e, 0) ,
so the points of intersection with the x axis are (2, 0) and (1 + e, 0).
(b) [2 MARKS] Determine the coordinates of all points of C2 where the tangent is
horizontal.
Solution:
dx
dt = −e−t
dy
dt = 1 + 2t
dy
dx= 0 ⇒
dy
dt
dxdt
= 0 ⇒ dy
dt = 0 ⇒ t = −1
2
t = −1
2 ⇒ ( x, y) =
1 +
√ e, −1
4
.
(c) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the finite region bounded byC
2 and the x-axis.
Solution: The area is
2 1+ 1
e
y dx =
0
−1
y(t ) · dx
dt (t ) dt =
0
−1
t + t 2
−e−t dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 344/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3289
= e−t (t + 1) + e−t
t 2 + 2t + 20
−1
=e−t ·
t 2 + 3t + 3
0
−1
= 3 − e(1 − 3 + 3) = 3 − e .
The preceding evaluation required two indefinite integrals that could be obtained
by integration by parts:
• Taking u = t , v = e−t , which imply that u = 1, v = −e−t , t · e−t dt = −te−t +
e−t dt = −e−t (t + 1) + C
• Taking U =
t
2
, V =
e−t
, which imply that U =
2t , V =
−e−t
, t 2 · e−t dt = −t 2e−t +
2t · e−t dt = −(t 2 + 2t + 2)e−t + C .
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the series
∞n=2
√ n√
n + 2 −√
n − 2
is convergent or divergent.
Solution: This is a telescoping series.
N n=2
√ n√
n + 2 −√
n − 2
=
N n=2
√ n ·
√ n + 2 −
N −2m=0
√ m ·
√ m + 2
= −√
3 +
N ( N + 2) +
( N − 1)( N + 1)
→ ∞ as N
→ ∞.
As the partial sums are approaching infinity, they do not have a finite limit, and the
series is, by definition, divergent.
Alternatively, one could argue that
√ n√
n + 2 −√
n − 2
=
√ n (n + 2 − n + 2)√ n + 2 +
√ n − 2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 345/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3290
= 4
√ n
√ n + 2 + √ n − 2
= 4 1 + 2
n +
1 − 2
n
→ 2 0 as n → ∞.
By “The” Test for Divergence, the series diverges.
(b) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following sequence
converges; if it converges, find its limit:
a1 = 3.
a2 = 3.14
a3 = 3.1414
a4 = 3.141414
a5 = 3.14141414
a6 = 3.1414141414
etc., where each term after a2 is obtained from its predecessor by the addition on
the right of the decimal digits 14.
an = 3 + 0.14
1 +
1
100 +
1
1002 + . . . +
1
100n−1
= 3 +0.14
1 − 1100n
1 − 1
100
→ 3 + 0.14
0.99 =
311
99 as n → ∞ .
9. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Curves C3 and C4, respectively represented by polar equations
r = 4 + 2cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) (104)
and
r = 4cos θ + 5 (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) , (105)
divide the plane into several regions.
(a) [8 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully find the area of the one region which
is bounded by C3 and C4 and contains the pole.
Solution: (cf. Figure 25 on page 3291 of these notes) Solving the given equations
yields θ = 2π
3 ,
4π
3 and r = 3. The points of intersection are
3,
2π
3
,
3,
4π
3
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 346/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3291
6
2
-6
4
0
-4
-2
8420-2 6
Figure 25: The curves with equations r = 4 + 2cos θ , r = 4 cos θ + 5
(Strictly speaking, the student should also solve using equations −r = 4 + cos(−θ )
and −r = 4 cos(−θ )+5, taking all 2×2 combinations of the equations, in case a point
of intersection appeared on the two given curves with diff erent sets of coordinates;
that would not have yielded any new points of intersection in this problem. It could
also have been necessary to check for the curves’ possibly passing through the pole— but that does not happen in this problem, since, when we set r = 0, we obtain
an equation for θ which cannot be solved.)
There are several diff erent ways of finding the area in question.
i. Find the area of the small oval (a limacon) and subtract that of the region
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 347/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3292
on the left. The area of the limacon is
1
2
2π
0
(2cos θ + 4)2 d θ = 1
2
2π
0
(2(1 + cos2θ ) + 16 cos θ + 16) d θ
= 1
2 [18θ + sin2θ + 16 sin θ ]2π
0 = 18π .
The area of the region to be subtracted is
2 · 1
2
π
2π3
(4 + 2cos θ )2 − (4 cos θ + 5)2
d θ
=
π
2π3
((16 + 16 cos θ + 2(1 + cos2θ )) − (8(1 + cos2θ ) + 40 cos θ + 25)) d θ
= [−15θ − 3si n2θ − 24 sin θ ]π2π3
= (−15π − 0 − 0) −−10π + 3 ·
√ 3
2 − 24 ·
√ 3
2
=
21√
3
2 − 5π ,
so the area of the region in question is 18π − 21√
3
2 + 5π = 23π − 21
√ 3
2 .
ii. Find the area of the larger outer oval and subtract the area of the region
to the right of the desired region. The area bounded by the larger oval is
1
2
2π
0
(4cos θ + 5)2 d θ = 1
2
2π
0
(8(1 + cos2θ ) + 40 cos θ + 25) d θ
= 1
2 [33θ + 4sin2θ + 40 sin θ ]2π
0 = 33π .
The area to be subtracted is
2 · 1
2
2π3
0
(4 cos θ + 5)2 − (4 + 2cos θ )2
d θ = [15θ + 3sin2θ + 24 sin θ ]
2π3
0
= 10π − 3√
3
2 +
24√
3
2 − 0
= 10π + 21
√ 3
2 .
Thus the net area is equal to
33π −10π +
21√
3
2
= 23π − 21√
3
2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 348/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3293
iii. Join the pole by line segments to the points of intersection of the two
curves. Then compute the areas of the two subregions of the desired regionbounded by these line segments. The area to the right of the line segments is
21
2
2π3
0
(2 cos θ + 4)2 d θ =
2π3
0
(2(1 + cos2θ ) + 16 cos θ + 16) d θ
= [18θ + sin2θ + 16 sin θ ]2π3
0
=
12π −√
3
2 +
16√
3
2
− 0 = 12π + 15
√ 3
2 .
The area to the left of the line segments is
21
2
π
2π3
(4cos θ + 5)2 d θ
= [33θ + 4sin2θ + 40 sin θ ]π2π3
= 11π − 18√
3 .
Summing these two areas yields 23π − 21√
3
2 .
(b) [4 MARKS] Find another equation — call it (105*) — that also represents C4, and
has the property that there do not exist coordinates (r , θ ) which satisfy equations
(104) and (105*) simultaneously. You are expected to show that equations (104)and (105*) have no simultaneous solutions.
Solution: In my discussion of the preceding part of the problem I have shown (by
replacing (r , θ ) by (−r , θ + π)) that an alternative equation for the second curve is
−r = 4 cos(−θ )+5, equivalently r = −4cos θ −5. When this equation is solved with
r = 4 + 2cos θ , we obtain, as a consequence, that cos θ = −3
2, which is impossible.
C.37.2 Draft Solutions to the Final Examination in MATH 141 2009 01 (Version 4)
Instructions
1. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
2. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation dictio-
naries are permitted.
3. . . . A TOTAL OF 75 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 349/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3294
4. You are expected to simplify all answers wherever possible.
• Most questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
. . . To be awarded partial marks on a part of a question a student’s answer for that part
must be deemed to be more than 50% correct.
• Some questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; . . . you are not asked to
show your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
t 3 cos t 2 dt .
Solution: One substitution is u = t
2
, which implies that du = 2t dt , t 3 cos t 2 dt =
1
2
u cos u du .
Now we can integrate by parts, taking U = u, dV = cos u du, so dU = du, V =
sin u. t 3 cos t 2 dt =
1
2
u cos u du
= 1
2
u sin u −
sin u du
= 12
(u sin u + cos u) + C
= 1
2
t 2 sin
t 2
+ cost 2
+ C .
This problem could also have been attacked by an immediate application of inte-
gration by parts: u = t 2, dv = t cos t 2 dt ⇒ du = 2t dt , v = 12
sin t 2: t 3 cos t 2 dt = t 2 · 1
2 sin t 2 −
sin t 2
· 2t dt
= 1
2 t 2 · sin t 2 + cos t 2 + C .
Of course, whichever method you used, you should check your answer by di ff er-
entiation.
(b) [4 MARKS] Simplifying your answer as much as possible, evaluate the derivative
d
dt
t 2 0
tanh x2 dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 350/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3295
Solution: Let u = t 2.
d
dt
t 2
0
tanh x2 dx = d
dt
u
0
tanh x2 dx
=
d
du
u
0
tanh x2 dx
· du
dt
=tanh u2
· du
dt =
tanh t 4· 2t .
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
12
1√ 2
dx√ 1 − x2 · arcsin x
.
Solution: Let u = arcsin x, so du = dx√
1 − x2. Then
12
1√ 2
dx√ 1 − x2 · arcsin x
=
arcsin 12
arcsin 1√ 2
du
u
=
π6
π4
du
u
= ln |u|]π6π4
= ln π
6 − ln
π
4 = ln
2
3.
It should be no surprise that this answer is negative, since 1√
2>
1
2, and the inte-
grand is positive in the interval 12
, 1√ 2.
(b) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
2 y y2 − y + 1
dy
Solution: By completion of the square we find that
y2 − y + 1 =
y − 1
2
2
+ 3
4
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 351/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3296
= 3
41 + 2
√ 3 y − 1
2
2
=
3
4
1 +
2 y − 1√
3
2 .
We may thus substitute u = 2 y − 1√
3, obtaining du =
2√ 3
· dy, y = u
√ 3 + 1
2 .
2 y
y2 − y + 1
dy =
u√
3 + 1√
32
√ 1 + u2
·√
3
2
du
= √ 3 u
√ 1 + u2 du + du
√ 1 + u2
=√
3 ·√
1 + u2 +
du√
1 + u2
= 2
y2 − y + 1 +
du√
1 + u2.
TO BE CONTINUED
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 352/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3297
C.38 Supplementary Notes for the Lecture of Friday, April 09th, 2010
Distribution Date: Friday, April 09th, 2010, subject to correction
C.38.1 Final Examination in MATH 141 2009 01 (Version 4, continued)
2. (b) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
2 y y2 − y + 1
dy
Solution: By completion of the square we find that
y2 − y + 1 =
y − 1
2
2
+ 3
4
= 34
1 +
2√ 3
y − 1
2
2=
3
4
1 +
2 y − 1√
3
2 .
We may thus substitute u = 2 y − 1√
3, obtaining du =
2√ 3
· dy, y = u
√ 3 + 1
2 .
2 y
y2
− y + 1
dy =
u√
3 + 1√
32
√ 1 + u2
·√
3
2
du
=√
3
u√
1 + u2du +
du√
1 + u2
=√
3 ·√
1 + u2 +
du√
1 + u2
= 2
y2 − y + 1 +
du√
1 + u2.
Now we can apply a trigonometric (or hyperbolic) substitution, like tan θ = u =2 y − 1√
3, i.e., θ = arctan
2 y − 1√ 3
, so du = sec2 θ d θ . Thus
2 y y2 − y + 1
dy = 2
y2 − y + 1 +
sec θ d θ
= 2
y2 − y + 1 + ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C
= 2
y2 − y + 1 + ln
1 +
2 y − 1√
3
2
+ 2 y − 1√
3
+ C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 353/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3298
= 2 y2
− y + 1 + ln 2 y
2 − y + 1 + 2 y − 1
√ 3 + C
= 2
y2 − y + 1 + ln2 y2 − y + 1 + 2 y − 1
+ C .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
3. For each of the following series determine whether the series diverges, converges condi-
tionally, or converges absolutely. All of your work must be justified; prior to using any
test you are expected to demonstrate that the test is applicable to the problem.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
(−
1)n+1 cos n
2n
Solution: We can’t use the nth root test here, as the sequence
cos n
2
n=1,2,...
has no
limit as n → ∞. But, if we first consider the positive series of the magnitudes of
the terms of the given series, we have
0 ≤
cos n
2
n ≤ 1
2n .
Since the series whose general term is 1
2n is a convergent (geometric) series, we
may apply the Comparison Test to conclude that the series of absolute values of
the terms of the original series is convergent; hence the original series is absolutely
convergent.
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(−1)n 1
n√
ln n.
Solution: As x → ∞, x, ln x, and√
x are all increasing. Hence f ( x) = 1
x√
ln xis
decreasing. As it is a continuous function for sufficiently large x, we may apply the
Integral Test. The divergence of the improper integral
∞ 2
dx x
√ ln x
= lima→∞
2 √ ln x
a
2= +∞ ,
implies the divergence of the series of absolute values. Thus the series
∞n=2
(−1)n 1
n√
ln n
is at most conditionally convergent. Since x, ln x, and√
x are increasing functions
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 354/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3299
of x, 1 x ln x
is a decreasing function; and, as x → ∞, this last function approaches
0. Since the conditions of the Leibniz Alternating Series Theorem are satisfies, theoriginal series is convergent; but, as it is not absolutely convergent, is is therefore
conditionally convergent.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=4
(−1)n 1
nln (3n + 1)
Solution: I apply the “ Test for Divergence”:
limn→∞
ln (3n + 1)
n= lim
n→∞
3n · ln 3
3n + 1
1
= (ln 3) · limn→∞
1
1 + 13n
= ln 3 > ln e = 1 .
Hence the limit limn→∞
(−1)n ln (3n + 1)
n
does not exist, and the given series diverges.
4. [9 MARKS] SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [3 MARKS] Evaluate limn→∞
1
n ·
n
r =1
cos2
r π
n
. (Hint: This could be a Riemann
sum.)Solution: First consider the area under the graph of f ( x) = cos2 x between x = 0
and x = π. Divide the interval into n parts of equal width ∆ x = π
n. If we hang
rectangular elements of area from the curve by their upper right-hand corners, then
the area of the ith rectangle will be π
n· cos2 iπ
n. In order to be able to interpret the
given sum as a Riemann sum, we will need to scale the function by a constant. So
let’s use the function cos2 x
π. Thus the area will be
π 0
cos2 x
π dx =
π 0
1 + cos2 x
2π dx = 1
2π x +
1
2 sin 2 xπ
0=
1
2 .
(b) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, prove divergence, or find the limit of an =
arctan(−2n) as n → ∞.
Solution: As n → ∞, 2n → ∞, and arctan(−2n) → −π
2.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 355/587
Information for Students in Lecture Section 1 of MATH 141 2010 01 3300
(c) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, prove divergence, or find the value of
∞
n=1
∞
i=1
1
5i
n
.
Solution: Since∞
i=1
1
5i = lim
n→∞
15
1 −
15
n1 − 1
5
=
15
45
= 1
4 ,
∞n=1
∞i=1
1
5i
n
=
∞n=1
1
4
n
=
14
1 − 14
= 1
3 .
TO BE CONTINUED
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 356/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5001
D Problem Assignments from Previous Years
D.1 1998 / 1999
The problem numbers listed below refer to the textbook in use at that time, [31], [33]. For
many of the problems there are answers in the textbook or in the Student Solution Manual
[34].
D.1.1 Assignment 1
§5.2: 5, 11, 15, 21, 29
§5.3: 3, 9, 15, 35, 47
§5.4: none
§5.5: 17, 27, 33, 41
§5.6: 47, 55, 59, 65
§5.7: 21, 27, 33, 39, 45, 51, 57
§5.8: 33, 39, 45, 51, 57
D.1.2 Assignment 2
§6.1: none
§6.2: 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 31, 35, 41
§6.3: 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 31, 39, 43
§6.4: 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 31, 35, 41
§3.8: none
Chapter 7: none
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 357/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5002
D.1.3 Assignment 3
§8.2: 5, 13, 21, 29, 39, 45, 53
§9.2: 5, 13, 21, 29, 39
§9.3: 5, 13, 21, 29, 39, 41
§9.4: 5, 13, 21, 29, 39
§9.5: 5, 9, 17, 21, 29, 33
§9.6: 5, 9, 17, 21, 29, 33
D.1.4 Assignment 4
§9.7: 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33
§9.8: 21, 23, 29, 33, 39
§10.2: 39, 41, 43, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 57
§10.3: 9, 13, 17, 21, 23, 29, 33, 35
§10.4: 3, 5, 9, 13
D.1.5 Assignment 5
§11.2: 9, 17, 23, 33, 39
§11.3: 3, 9, 15, 21, 29, 35, 47
§11.4: 3, 9, 15, 21, 29, 35, 45, 47
§11.5: 3, 9, 15, 21, 23
§11.6: 3, 9, 15, 21, 29
§11.7: 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 33
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 358/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5003
D.2 1999 / 2000
(Students had access to brief solutions that were mounted on the web.)
D.2.1 Assignment 1
Before attempting problems on this assignment you are advised to try some “easy” problems
in the textbook. In most of the following problems there is a reference to a “similar” problem
in the textbook. You should always endeavour to show as much of your work as possible, and
to reduce your solution to “simplest terms”. Remember that the main reason for submitting
this assignment is to have an opportunity for your tutor to grade your work; the actual grade
obtained should be of lesser significance.
In Exercises 1-5 below, evaluate the indefinite integral, and verify by di ff erentiation:
1. (cf. [31, Exercise 5.2.5, p. 294])
3
x4 − 5 x
12 − x2 + 4 x−3
dx
2.
3
x− 2
1 + x2
dx
3. (cf. [31, Exercise 5.2.13, p. 294])
xe x2 − e4 x
dx
4. (cf. [31, Exercise 5.2.19, p. 294]) (1
−
√ x)(2 x + 3)2 dx
5. (cf. [31, Exercise 5.2.27, p. 294])
(4cos8 x − 2sin π x + cos2π x − (sin 2π) x) dx
6. (cf. [31, Example 5.2.8, p. 289]) Determine the diff erentiable function y( x) such thatdy
dx=
1√ 1 − x2
and y2− 1
2
=
π
2.
7. (This is [31, Exercise 5.2.51, p. 295] written in purely mathematical terminology.) Solve
the initial value problem: d
dx
dy
dx
= sin x, where y = 0 and
dy
dx= 0 when x = 0. [Hint:
First use one of the initial values to determine the general value of dy
dx from the given“diff erential equation”; then use the second initial value to determine y( x) completely.]
8. ([31, Exercise 5.3.4, p. 306]) Write the following in “expanded notation”, i.e. without
using the symbol
:
6 j=1
(2 j − 1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 359/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5004
9. (cf. [31, Exercise 5.3.18, p. 306]) Write the following sum in “summation notation”:
x − x3
3 +
x5
5 − x7
7 + ... ± x999
999
where the signs are alternating +, −, +, −, ... The sign of the last term has not been given
— you should determine it.
10. (cf. [31, Example 5.3.6, p. 302]) Given that
ni=1
i = n(n + 1)
2 ,
ni=1
i2 = n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
6 ,
ni=1
i3 = n2(n + 1)2
4 ,
determine limn→∞(n + 1)3 + (n + 2)3 + ... + (2n)3
n4 .
D.2.2 Assignment 2
1. Evaluate the following integrals:
(a)
3
1
( x − 1)4 dx
(b)
1
0
(2e x − 1)2 dx
(c) π
0 sin 4 x dx.
2. Interpreting the following integral as the area of a region, evaluate it using known area
formulas: 6
0
√ 36 − x2 dx.
3. Use properties of integrals to establish the following inequality without evaluating the
integral: 1
0
1
1 +√
xdx ≤
1
0
1
1 + x3 dx.
4. Deduce the Second Comparison Property of integrals from the First Comparison Prop-
erty [31, p. 325, §5.5].
5. Apply the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus [31, p. 331, §5.6] to find the derivative of
the given function: x
−1
(t 2 + 2)15 dt .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 360/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5005
6. Diff erentiate the functions
(a)
x3
0
cos t dt
(b)
3 x
1
sin t 2 dt .
7. Solve the initial value problem dy
dx=
√ 1 + x2 , y(1) = 5 . Express your answer in
terms of a definite integral (which you need not attempt to evaluate). This problem can
be solved using the methods of [31, Chapter 5].
8. Evaluate the indefinite integrals:
(a)
2 x
√ 3 − 2 x2 dx
(b)
x2 sin(3 x3) dx
(c)
x + 3
x2 + 6 x + 3 d x
9. Evaluate the definite integrals:
(a) 8
0
t √
t + 2 dt
(b)
π/2
0
(1 + 3sin η)3/2 cos η d η
(c)
π
0
sin2 2t dt .
10. Sketch the region bounded by the given curves, then find its area:
(a) x = 4 y2, x + 12 y + 5 = 0
(b) y = cos x, y = sin x, 0 ≤ x ≤ π
4 .
11. Prove that the area of the ellipse x2
a2 +
y2
b2 = 1 is A = πab. This problem can be
solved using the methods of [31, Chapter 5]. It is not necessary to use methods of [31,
Chapter 9].
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 361/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5006
D.2.3 Assignment 3
In all of these problems you are expected to show all your work neatly. (This assignment is
only a sampling. Your are advised to try other problems from your textbook; solutions to some
can be found in the Student Solution Manual [32].)
1. [31, Exercise 6.1.6, p. 382] As n → ∞, the interval [2, 4] is to be subdivided into n
subintervals of equal length ∆ x by n − 1 equally spaced points x1, x2, ..., xn−1 (where
x0 = 2, xn = 4). Evaluate limn→∞
ni=1
1
xi
∆ x by computing the value of the appropriate
related integral.
2. (a) [31, Exercise 6.2.6, p. 391] Use the method of cross-sections to find the volume of
the solid that is generated by rotating the plane region bounded by y = 9 − x2 and
y = 0 about the x-axis.
(b) (cf. Problem 2a) Use the method of cylindrical shells to find the volume of the solid
that is generated by rotating the plane region bounded by y = 9− x2 and y = 0 about
the x-axis.
(c) Use the method of cross-sections to find the volume of the solid that is generated
by rotating the plane region bounded by y = 9 − x2 and y = 0 about the y-axis.
(d) (cf. Problem 2c) Use the method of cylindrical shells to find the volume of the solid
that is generated by rotating the plane region bounded by y = 9− x2 and y = 0 about
the y-axis.
3. (a) [31, Exercise 6.2.24, p. 392] Find the volume of the solid that is generated by
rotating around the line y = −1 the region bounded by y = 2e− x, y = 2, and x = 1.
(b) (cf. Problem 3a) Set up an integral that would be obtained if the method of cylin-
drical shells were used to represent the volume of the solid that is generated by
rotating around the line y = −1 the region bounded by y = 2e− x, y = 2, and x = 1.
YOU ARE NOT EXPECTED TO EVALUATE THE INTEGRAL.
4. (cf. [31, Exercise 6.2.40, p. 392]) The base of a certain solid is a circular disk with di-
ameter AB of length 2a. Find the volume of the solid if each cross section perpendicular
to AB is an equilateral triangle.
5. (a) [31, Exercise 6.3.26, p. 401] Use the method of cylindrical shells to find the volume
of the solid generated by rotating around the y-axis the region bounded by the
curves y = 1
1 + x2, y = 0, x = 0, x = 2.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 362/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5007
(b) (cf. Problem 5a) Use the method of cross sections to find the volume of the solid
generated by rotating around the y-axis the region bounded by the curves y =1
1 + x2, y = 0, x = 0, x = 2.
6. (cf. [31, Exercise 7.3.69, p. 450]) Find the length of the arc of the curve y = e x + e− x
2between the points (0, 1) and (ln 2, 2).
7. (a) [31, Exercise 6.4.30, p. 411] Find the area of the surface of revolution generated
by revolving the arc of the curve y = x3 from x = 1 to x = 2 around the x-axis.
(b) (cf. 7a) Set up an integral for, BUT DO NOT EVALUATE, the area of the surface
of revolution generated by revolving the arc of the curve y = x3 from x = 1 to x = 2
around the y-axis.
8. [31, Exercise 7.2.44, p. 442] Evaluate the indefinite integral x + 1
x2 + 2 x + 3 d x
9. (cf. [31, Exercise 7.2.36, p. 442]) Determine the value of the function f ( x) =
x
−1
t 2
8 − t 3 dt
for any point x < 2.
10. (cf. [31, Exercise 7.3.70, p. 450]) Find the area of the surface generated by revolvingaround the x-axis the curve of Problem 6.
D.2.4 Assignment 4
1. Diff erentiate the functions:
(a) sin−1( x50)
(b) arcsin(tan x)
(c) cot−1 e x + tan−1 e− x
2. Showing all your work, evaluate the integrals:
(a)
dx√
1 − 4 x2
(b)
dx
2√
x(1 + x)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 363/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5008
(c) e x
1 + e2 x dx
(d)
cot
√ y csc
√ y√
ydy
(e)
(ln t )8
t dt
(f)
tan4 2 x sec2 2 x dx
(g) THIS PROBLEM SHOULD BE OMITTED. IT MAY BE INCLUDED IN AS-
SIGNMENT 5. x2
√ 16 x2 + 9
dx
3. Use integration by parts to compute the following integrals. Show all your work.
(a)
t cos t dt
(b)
√ y ln y dy
(c) THIS PROBLEM SHOULD BE OMITTED. IT MAY BE INCLUDED IN AS-
SIGNMENT 5.
x2 arctan x dx
(d)
csc3
x dx
(e)
ln(1 + x2) dx
4. Showing all your work, evaluate the following integrals:
(a)
cos2 7 x dx
(b)
cos2 x sin3 x dx
(c)
sin
3
2 xcos2 2 x
dx
(d)
sec6 2t dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 364/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5009
D.2.5 Assignment 5
1. [31, Exercise 9.5.6, p. 540] Find
x3
x2 + x − 6 d x. (Your solution should be valid for x
in any one of the intervals x < 3, −3 < x < 2, x > 2.)
2. [31, Exercise 9.5.8, p. 540] Find
1
( x + 1)( x2 + 1) d x.
3. (a) [31, Exercise 9.5.23] Find
x2
( x + 2)3 dx.
(b) Find the volume of the solid of revolution generated by the region bounded by
y = x
( x + 2)
3
2
, y = 0, x = 1, and x = 2 about the x-axis.
(c) Find the volume of the solid of revolution generated by the region bounded by
y = x
( x + 2)32
, y = 0, x = 1, and x = 2 about the y-axis.
4. [31, Exercise 9.5.38, p. 540] Make a preliminary substitution before using the method
of partial fractions: cos θ
sin2 θ (sin θ − 6)d θ
5. [31, Exercise 9.6.6, p. 547] Use trigonometric substitutions to evaluate the integral
x2
√ 9 − 4 x2 dx.
6. [31, Exercise 9.6.26, p. 547] Use trigonometric substitutions to evaluate the integral 1
9 + 4 x2 dx.
7. [31, Exercise 9.6.35, p. 547] Use trigonometric substitutions to evaluate the integral √ x2 − 5
x2 dx.
8. [31, Exercise 9.7.14, p. 553] Evaluate the integral x√
8 + 2 x − x2 dx.
9. [31, Exercise 9.8.17, p. 561] Determine whether the following improper integral con-
verges; if it does converge, evaluate it:
∞
−∞
x
x2 + 4 d x.
10. [31, Exercise 9.8.27, p. 561] Determine whether the following improper integral con-
verges; if it does converge, evaluate it:
∞
0
cos x dx.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 365/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5010
11. (cf. [31, Exercise 9.8.14, p. 561]) Determine whether the following improper integral
converges; if it does converge, evaluate it: +8
−8
1( x + 4)
23
dx.
12. [31, Exercise 10.2.2, p. 580] Find two polar coordinate representations, one with r ≥ 0,
and the other with r ≤ 0 for the points with the following rectangular coordinates:
(a) (−1, −1),
(b) (√
3, −1),
(c) (2, 2),
(d) (−1,√
3),
(e) ( √ 2, − √ 2),
(f) (−3,√
3).
13. For each of the following curves, determine — showing all your work — equations in
both rectangular and polar coordinates:
(a) [31, Exercise 10.2.20, p. 580] The horizontal line through (1, 3).
(b) [31, Exercise 10.2.26, p. 580] The circle with centre (3, 4) and radius 5.
14. (a) [31, Exercise 10.2.56, p. 581] Showing all your work, find all points of intersection
of the curves with polar equations r = 1 + cos θ and r = 10 sin θ .
(b) Showing all your work, find all points of intersection of the curves with polar equa-
tions r 2 = 4 sin θ and r 2 = −4sin θ .
[Note: The procedure sketched in the solution of [31, Example 10.2.8, p. 579] for finding
points of intersection is incomplete. Your instructor will discuss a systematic procedure
in the lectures.]
D.2.6 Assignment 6
1. Find the area bounded by each of the following curves.
(a) r = 2 cos θ,(b) r = 1 + cos θ.
2. Find the area bounded by one loop of the given curve.
(a) r = 2 cos 2θ,
(b) r 2 = 4 sin θ.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 366/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5011
3. Find the area of the region described.
(a) Inside both r = cos θ and r = √ 3sin θ.
(b) Inside both r = 2 cos θ and r = 2 sin θ .
4. Eliminate the parameter and then sketch the curve.
(a) x = t + 1, y = 2t 2 − t − 1.
(b) x = et , y = 4e2t .
(c) x = sin 2πt , y = cos 2πt ; 0 ≤ t ≤ 1. Describe the motion of the point ( x(t ), y(t )) as
t varies in the given interval.
5. Find the area of the region that lies between the parametric curve x = cos t , y =sin2 t , 0 ≤ t ≤ π, and the x-axis.
6. Find the arc length of the curve x = sin t − cos t , y = sin t + cos t ; π/4 ≤ t ≤ π/2.
7. Determine whether the sequence an converges, and find its limit if it does converge.
(a) an = n2 − n + 7
2n3 + n2 ,
(b) an = 1 + (−1)n
√ n
(3/2)n ,
(c) an = n sin πn,
(d) an =
n − 1
n + 1
n
.
8. Determine, for each of the following infinite series, whether it converges or diverges. If
it converges, find its sum.
(a) 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + . . . + (2n − 1) + . . . ,
(b) 4 + 43
+ . . . + 43n + . . . ,
(c)
∞
n=1
(5−n − 7−n),
(d)
∞n=1
e
π
n
.
9. Find the set of all those values of x for which the series
∞n=1
x
3
n
is a convergent geomet-
ric series, then express the sum of the series as a function of x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 367/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5012
10. Find the Taylor polynomial in powers of x − a with remainder by using the given values
of a and n.
(a) f ( x) = sin x; a = π/6, n = 3.
(b) f ( x) = 1
( x − 4)2; a = 5, n = 5 .
11. Find the Maclaurin series of the function e−3 x by substitution in the series for e x.
12. Find the Taylor series for f ( x) = ln x at the point a = 1.
13. Use comparison tests to determine whether each of the following infinite series converge
or diverge.
(a)
∞n=1
1
1 + 3n,
(b)
∞n=1
√ n
n2 + n,
(c)
∞n=1
sin2(1/n)
n2 .
D.3 2000 / 2001
(In the winter of the year 2001 Assignments based on WeBWorK were used, although the
experiment had to be terminated in mid-term because of technical problems.)
D.4 2001 / 2002
This was the first time WeBWorK assignments were used exclusively in this course.
D.5 MATH 141 2003 01
WeBWorK assignments were used exclusively for assignments. The questions are not avail-
able for publication.
D.6 MATH 141 2004 01
WeBWorK assignments were used exclusively for assignments. The questions are not avail-
able for publication.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 368/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5013
D.7 MATH 141 2005 01
WeBWorK assignments were used for online assignments; the questions are not available for
publication. In addition, these written assignments were intended to provide students with in-
dividualized opportunities to work problems for which the textbook often provided examples;
at the time, appropriate materials available from WeBWorK for this purpose were limited. The
individualization was often based on the student number.
D.7.1 Written Assignment W 1
Your written assignments will usually be mounted on the WeBWorK site, and will usually be
individualized, that is, your problems will not be exactly the same as those of other students.
This first written assignment is based on your WeBWorK assignment R1. Subsequent written
assignments may be designed in other ways. Because of its general form, it was possible to
release this assignment in the document Information for Students in MATH 141 2005 01; some
of the other assignments may appear only on your WeBWorK site.
Your completed assignment must be submitted together with your solutions to quiz Q1,
inside your answer sheet for that quiz. No other method of submission is acceptable.
Purpose of the written assignments These assignments are designed to help you learn how
to write full solutions to problems. While they carry a very small weight in the computation of
your final grade, conscientious completion of the assignments should help you substantially in
learning the calculus, and help prepare you for your final examination.
Certificate Your assignment will not be graded unless you attach or include the following
completed certificate of originality:
I have read the information on the web page
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide / ,
and assert that my work submitted for W 1 and R1 does not violate McGill’s
regulations concerning plagiarism.
Signature(required) Date(required)
The assignment questions Your assignment consists of the following problems on your ver-
sion of R1:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 369/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5014
##3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
(Teaching Assistants are not primarily checking for plagiarism; but, if they detect it, they may
be obliged to report any apparent violations to the Associate Deans.)
Complete solutions are required It is not enough to give the correct answer; in fact, the
numerical answer alone may be worth 0 marks. You should submit a full solution, similar to
solutions in Stewart’s textbook or the Student Solutions Manual, which are where you should
look if you have doubts about the amount of detail required in a solution.
Use of calculators You are expected to complete the entire assignment without the use of
a calculator. In particular, you are expected to be familiar with the values of trigonometric
functions at “simple” multiples and submultiples of π.
Not all problems may be graded On all of the written assignments it is possible that the
Teaching Assistant will grade only a small number of the solutions you submit. The numbers
of the questions that will be graded will not be announced in advance, even to the tutor. For
that reason you are advised to devote equal attention to all of the problems.
D.7.2 Written Assignment W 2
Written assignment W 2 is based on your WeBWorK assignment R3, but some problems are
being modified. Your completed assignment must be submitted together with your solutions toquiz Q2, inside your answer sheet for that quiz. No other method of submission is acceptable.
Purpose of the written assignments These assignments are designed to help you learn how
to write full solutions to problems. While they carry a very small weight in the computation of
your final grade, conscientious completion of the assignments should help you substantially in
learning the calculus, and help prepare you for your final examination.
Certificate Your assignment will not be graded unless you attach or include the following
completed certificate of originality, signed in ink:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 370/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5015
I have read the information on the web page
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide / ,
and assert that my work submitted for W 2 and R3 does not violate McGill’s
regulations concerning plagiarism.
Signature(required) Date(required)
The assignment questions Your assignment consists of the following problems on your ver-
sion of R1:
1. Problem 1 of R3, solved by integration with respect to x. Include in your solution a rough
sketch of the region, showing a typical element of area.
2. Problem 1 of R3 solved by integration with respect to y. This will require rewriting the
equations of the curves appropriately. You may assume without proof that ln x dx = x(ln x − 1) + C ,
a fact which you will see derived later in the course. Include in your solution a rough
sketch of the region, showing a typical element of area.
3. Problem 6 of R3, evaluated using the Method of Washers. Include in your solution a
rough sketch of the plane region which generates the solid, showing a typical element of
area which will generate a typical washer.
4. Problem 6 of R3, evaluated using the Method of Cylindrical Shells. Include in your
solution a rough sketch of the plane region which generates the solid, showing a typical
element of area which will generate a typical cylindrical shell.
Complete solutions are required It is not enough to give the correct answer; in fact, the
numerical answer alone may be worth 0 marks. You should submit a full solution, similar to
solutions in Stewart’s textbook or the Student Solutions Manual, which are where you should
look if you have doubts about the amount of detail required in a solution.
Use of calculators You are expected to complete the entire assignment without the use of a
calculator.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 371/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5016
Not all problems may be graded On all of the written assignments it is possible that the
Teaching Assistant will grade only a small number of the solutions you submit. The numbersof the questions that will be graded will not be announced in advance, even to the tutor. For
that reason you are advised to devote equal attention to all of the problems.
D.7.3 Written Assignment W 3
Unlike the preceding written assignments Written Assignment W 3 is not directly based on your
WeBWorK assignments, although some problems will be similar to WeBWorK assignment
problems. Your completed assignment must be submitted together with your solutions to quiz
Q3, inside your answer sheet for that quiz. No other method of submission is acceptable.
Certificate Your assignment will not be graded unless you attach or include the followingcompleted statement of originality, signed in ink:
I have read the information on the web page
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide / ,
and assert that my work submitted for W 3 does not violate McGill’s regula-
tions concerning plagiarism.
Signature(required) Date(required)
The assignment questions The parameters in these problems are based on the digits of your
9-digit McGill student number, according to the following table:
Parameter name: A B C D E F G H J
Your student number:
Before starting to solve the problems below, determine the values of each of these integer
constants; then substitute them into the descriptions of the problems before you begin your
solution.
1. Showing all your work, systematically determine
Ax2 + Bx + C
e− x dx by repeated
integration by parts: no other method of solution will be accepted. Verify by diff erenti-
ation that your answer is correct.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 372/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5017
2. Showing all your work, use trigonometric or hyperbolic substitutions to evaluate
each of
du u2 − (F + 1)2
,
du u2 + (F + 1)2
,
du −u2 + (F + 1)2
.
Verify that your answers are correct by diff erentiation.
3. Let K =
J +42
=
J +42
.62 Showing all your work, develop for this integer K a reduction
formula of the following type that can be used to evaluate
I n( x) =
xn (sin(K x)) dx in terms of I n−2( x):
xn (sin K x) dx = L· xn cos K x + M
· xn−1 sin K x + N xn−2 (sin K x) dx
where n ≥ 2 and L, M , N are constants that you are expected to determine only by
integration by parts. Again showing all your work, use the reduction formula you have
just determined to evaluate
x2 sin K x d x, and test by diff erentiation the answer that it
gives — you should recover x2 sin K x.
4. Showing all your work, evaluate both of the integrals sinF +1 x · cos2 x dx and
sinF +2 x · cos2 x dx
Complete solutions are required It is not enough to give the correct answer; in fact, the
final answer alone may be worth 0 marks. You should submit a full solution, similar to solu-
tions in Stewart’s textbook or the Student Solutions Manual, which are where you should look
if you have doubts about the amount of detail required in a solution.
Not all problems may be graded On all of the written assignments it is possible that the
Teaching Assistant will grade only a small number of the solutions you submit. The numbers
of the questions that will be graded will not be announced in advance, even to the tutor. If for
no other reason, you are advised to devote equal attention to all of the problems.
D.7.4 Written Assignment W 4
Your completed assignment must be submitted together with your solutions to quiz Q4, inside
your answer sheet for that quiz. No other method of submission is acceptable.
62Determine K from J using the greatest integer function, defined in your textbook, page 110. Your textbook
uses the notation
J +42
, but some authors write the function as
J +4
2
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 373/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5018
Certificate Your assignment will not be graded unless you attach or include the following
completed statement of originality, signed in ink:
I have read the information on the web page
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide / ,
and assert that my work submitted for W 4 does not violate McGill’s regula-
tions concerning plagiarism.
Signature(required) Date(required)
The assignment questions Some of the parameters in these problems are based on the digits
of your 9-digit McGill student number, according to the following table:
Parameter name: A B M D E F G H J
Your student number:
Before starting to solve the problems below, determine the values of each of these integer
constants; then substitute them into the descriptions of the problems before you begin your
solution. It is not enough to give the correct answer; in fact, the final answer alone could be
worth 0 marks. You should submit a full solution, similar to solutions in Stewart’s textbook or
the Student Solutions Manual, which are where you should look if you have doubts about the
amount of detail required in a solution. Not all problems may be graded.
1. Showing all your work, systematically determine the value of the following integral: x
( x + J )2( x − H − 1)1 dx . Verify your work by diff erentiation of your answer: you
should recover the integrand. (Systematically means that you to use the methods you
learned in this course for the treatment of problems of this type, even if you happen to
see some other method that could be used in this particular example.)
2. Showing all your work, use a substitution to transform the integrand into a rational
function, then integrate the particular integral that is assigned for your particular valueof G:
If G = 1,4,or 7:
1
x −√
x + 2dx
If G = 0, 2, 5, or 8:
cos2 x
sin2 2 x + sin 2 xdx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 374/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5019
If G = 3, 6, or 9: 1
x − 2 − 2 √ x + 1
dx
3. Problem 55, pages 504-505 of your textbook, describes a substitution discovered by Karl
Weierstrass (1815-1897) for the evaluation of rational functions of sin x and cos x into
an ordinary rational function. It states that if, for x such that −π < x < π, we define
t = tan x2
, then cos x = 1 − t 2
1 + t 2 and sin x =
2t
1 + t 2 and that, at a consequence, dx =
2
1 + t 2 dt . You are not asked to verify these facts. You are asked to use the substitution
to transform the following integral and then to evaluate it:
π
2
π3
1
1 + sin x − cos xdx
4. Use the trigonometric identities given in your textbook on page 487 to evaluate the fol-
lowing integral:
cos M x ·cos Dx ·sin x dx where M and D are the digits of your student
number, defined above.
5. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following integrals is convergent
or divergent. If it is convergent, determine its value (again showing all your work):
(a)
4
0
1
2 + E
·F
dx
(b)
∞
0
x2 − E − F
x2 + E + F dx
(c)
π B+4
0
1
x sin((G + 2) x) d x
D.7.5 Written Assignment W 5
Your completed assignment must be submitted together with your solutions to quiz Q5, inside
your answer sheet for that quiz. No other method of submission is acceptable.
Certificate Your assignment will not be graded unless you attach or include the followingcompleted statement of originality, signed in ink:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 375/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5020
I have read the information on the web page
http: // www.mcgill.ca / integrity / studentguide / ,
and assert that my work submitted for W 5 does not violate McGill’s regula-
tions concerning plagiarism.
Signature(required) Date(required)
The assignment questions Some of the parameters in these problems are based on the digits
of your 9-digit McGill student number, according to the following table:
Parameter name: A B D E F G H J K
Your student number:
Before starting to solve the problems below, determine the values of each of these integer
constants; then substitute them into the descriptions of the problems before you begin your
solution. It is not enough to give the correct answer; in fact, the final answer alone could be
worth 0 marks. You should submit a full solution, similar to solutions in Stewart’s textbook or
the Student Solutions Manual, which are where you should look if you have doubts about the
amount of detail required in a solution. Not all problems may be graded.
1. For the point with polar coordinates H , −
π
K 2 + 5
,
(a) find four other pairs of polar coordinates, two with r ≤ 0 and two with r > 0:
(b) Find the cartesian coordinates, assuming that the positive x-axis is along the polar
axis, the origin is at the pole, and the positive y-axis is obtained by turning the polar
axis through a positive angle of π2
.
2. For the point whose cartesian coordinates are (F 2+1, F 2−2), determine polar coordinates
(r , θ ) with the following properties:
(a) r > 0, 0 ≤ θ < 2π
(b) r < 0, 0 ≤ θ < 2π
(c) r > 0, 5π2 ≤ θ < 9π
2
3. For the following curve given in polar coordinates, determine, showing all your compu-
tations, the slope of the tangent at the point with θ = π
4:
r = A + cos( B + 2)θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 376/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5021
4. Showing all your work, find the area contained between the outer loop and the inner loop
of the curver = 1 + 2sin θ .
Explain carefully how you have established the limits for your definite integral.
5. The curve C is given by the parametric equations
x = 1 + (C + 2)t 2
y = t − ( E 2 − 2)t 3
Showing all your work, determine the value of d 2 y
dx2(t ).
6. Giving an explanation, determine whether or not the following sequences converge.
Where a sequence converges, find its limit.
(a) an = ln n − ln(n + A + 1)
(b) an = ln n
ln(( A + 2)n)
(c) an =√
n2 + A2 −√
n2 + A2 + 2
D.8 MATH 141 2006 01
D.8.1 Solution to Written Assignment W 1
Release Date: Friday, 27 January, 2006
The Assignment was posted to the class via WeBCT on January 2nd, 2006
Instructions to Students
1. Your solution to this assignment should be brought to your regular tutorial, during the
week 16-20 January, and folded inside your solution sheet to the quiz which will be
written at that time.
2. Your TA may make special arrangements for submission at other times, but, no solutionsare ever accepted after the end of the week.
3. Your solution must use the data on your own WeBWorK assignment, as described be-
low.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 377/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5022
The Assignment Question Problem 7 of WeBWorK assignment R1 requires that you eval-
uate a definite integral of the form C
D
( E x2 − Ax + B) dx,
where A, B, C , D, E are various combinations of constants, individualized for each student.
Your written assignment is to evaluate a simplified version of this integral as the limit of a
sequence of Riemann sums, using left endpoints63. You may simplify your problem only in
the following way: you may take the lower limit of the integral (here called D) to be 0; this
is purely to make the algebra a little easier. You should model your proof on that given in [7,
Example 2(b), pp. 383-385]. You are expected to provide a full solution for your version of the
problem — it is not enough to supply the correct answer, and you must solve the version of
the problem on your own WeBWorK assignment R1. In your solution you will need to use the
well known formulæ for the sums of the 1st and 2nd powers of the natural numbers from 1 to n;
these formulæ are in your textbook [7, Formulæ ##4, 5, p. 383], and you will not be expected
to prove them here.64 (This is a time-consuming exercise; the purpose of the assignment is to
ensure that you will have correctly solved a problem of this type during the term.)
The Solution (This solution has been composed with variables, so that it will produce valid
numerical solutions for all students. The particular solution for your version of the problem
should look much simpler, because, in place of all variables except n, there will be specific
integers.)
The length of each of n subintervals is
∆ x = C − D
n.
Thus xi = D + i∆ x = D + i
C − D
n
. Since we are using left endpoints we apply [7, top
formula, p. 381] C
D
E x2 − Ax + B
dx
= limn→∞
ni=1
E x
2
i−1 − Axi−1 +
B ·
∆ x
= limn→∞
ni=1
E
D2 +
2 D(C − D)
n · (i − 1) +
(C − D)2
n2 · (i − 1)2
63Note that the solution given in the textbook uses right endpoints.64Of course, these formulæ may be proved by induction, and students who took MATH 140 2005 09 should
know how to write up such proofs if they had to.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 378/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5023
− A D + C − D
n· (i − 1) + B · ∆ x
= limn→∞
( ED2 − AD + B)n
i=1
1 + (2 DE − A)(C − D)
n
ni=1
(i − 1) + E (C − D)2
n2
ni=1
(i − 1)2
· ∆ x
Nown
i=1
1 = sum of n 1’s
= nn
i=1
(i − 1) =
n−1 j=1
j
= (n
−1)n
2 by [7, Formula 4, p. 383]
ni=1
(i − 1)2 =
n−1 j=1
j2
= (n − 1)n(2n − 1)
6 by [7, Formula 5, p. 383].
Substituting the values of these sums yields C
D
E x2 − Ax + B
dx
= limn→∞C
− D
n · ( ED2
− AD + B)n +
(2 DE
− A)(C
− D)
n · (n
−1)n
2
+ E (C − D)2
n2 · (n − 1)n(2n − 1)
6
= limn→∞
( ED2 − AD + B)(C − D) +
(2 DE − A)(C − D)2
2
1 − 1
n
+ E (C − D)3
6 ·
1 − 1
n
2 − 1
n
= ( ED2 − AD + B)(C − D) + (2 DE − A)(C − D)2
2 · 1 +
E (C − D)3
6 · 1 · 2
= ( ED2
− AD + B)(C − D) +
(2 DE
− A)(C
− D)2
2 +
E (C
− D)3
3
= E C 3 − D3
3
− AC 2 − D2
2
+ B(C − D)
It was suggested that you simplify your problem by taking D = 0; in that case the value would
have worked out to be EC 3
3 − AC 2
2 + BC .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 379/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5024
The Grading Scheme The assignment was to be graded OUT OF A TOTAL OF 10 MARKS.
(In the version of this solution circulated to TA’s, there followed some technical details about the grad-ing.)
D.8.2 Solution to Written Assignment W 2
Release Date: Mounted on the Web on February 8th, 2006; corrected on March 16th, 2006
Solutions were to be submitted inside answer sheets to Quiz Q2, at tutorials during the period
January 30th – February 2nd, 2006.
The Problem. In [7, Example 6, p. 441] of your textbook, the author solves the following
problem: “Find the area enclosed by the line y = x
− 1 and the parabola y2 = 2 x + 6,” by
integrating with respect to y. The textbook then states the following: “We could have foundthe area in Example 6 by integrating with respect to x instead of y, but the calculation is
much more involved. It would have meant splitting the region in two, and computing the
areas labelled A1 and A2 in Figure 14. The method we used in Example 6 is much easier.” Your
assignment is to solve the problem by integrating with respect to x, and you may find the figure
in the textbook helpful. The computation is not really very hard, but it does involve working
with√
2. You should not approximate√
2; just write it that way and work with it carefully,
and the square roots will cancel by the time you finish your solution.
You know the numerical answer to this question; the purpose of the assignment is to nudge
you into solving problems in two ways, so that you can verify your work; and to show you that
there really is nothing to fear, even if you do happen to choose the “wrong” way to approach a
problem.
Your TA will be alert to the possibility that students might be copying their solutions from
others. Please write up your own solution, so that your TA will not have to waste everyone’s
time by sending exact copies to the disciplinary officer of the Faculty. You need to know how
to solve problems of this type, since you could be expected to demonstrate that ability at a
future quiz or on the examination.
The Solution. The integration must be carried out separately for two subregions. This is
because the area to the left of the line x = −1 is bounded above and below by the parabola;
while the area to the right of x =
−1 is bounded above by the parabola, and below by the line
y = x − 1. The method you know for finding the area between two curves requires that theequations of the curves be written as the graphs of functions of x. But the parabola y2 = 2 x + 6
is not the graph of a function, since it crosses some vertical lines twice. However, we can
factorize the equation in the form y −
2( x + 3)
y +
2( x + 3)
= 0 :
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 380/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5025
the parabola is the graph of two functions — the upper arm of the parabola is the graph of
y = √ 2( x + 3), while the lower arm is the graph of y = − √ 2( x + 3). To the left of x = −1the region A1 is bounded above by the graph of y =
√ 2( x + 3), and below by the graph of
y = −√ 2( x + 3); thus the height of the vertical element of area is the diff erence between these
two functions, i.e.,√
2( x + 3) − (− √ 2( x + 3)) = 2
√ 2( x + 3), and this will be the integrand for
the integral; the area to the right of x = −1 is bounded above by the parabola y =√
2( x + 3),
and below by the line y = x−1, so the element of area for the integral will be√
2( x + 3)−( x−1).
The total area is thus −1
−3
2
2( x + 3) dx +
5
−1
2( x + 3) − ( x − 1)
dx
= 2 √ 2
· 2
3 ·( x + 3)
32
−1
−3
+ √ 2
· 2
3 ·( x + 3)
32
− x2
2 − x
5
−1
= 4
√ 2
3
2
32 − 0
+
2
√ 2
3 · 8
32 −
25
2 − 5
−2
√ 2
3 · 2
32 −
1
2 + 1
= 16
3 +
56
3 − 6
=
16
3 +
38
3 = 18.
The Grading Scheme. The assignment was to be graded out of a maximum of 15 marks.
(In the version of this document prepared for TA’s there were additional details on the marking
scheme.)
D.8.3 Solutions to Written Assignment W 3
Release Date: March 25th, 2006
Solutions were to be submitted inside answer sheets to Quiz Q3, at tutorials during the period
13-16 February, 2006
The Problems
1. Use two integrations by parts to evaluate the integral
(sin x) · (sinh x) dx. You will
need, at the last step, to solve an equation. The solution should resemble the solution in
your textbook to [7, Example 4, p. 478], where the author evaluates
e x sin x dx.
2. Write your student number (9 digits) in the following chart.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
Student # :
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 381/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5026
Some of the digits are to be used in solving the following problem.
(a) You are to evaluate the following integral by integration by parts: A7 x
2 + A8 x1 + A9
e A1 x dx
Your answer should be simplified as much as possible.
(b) Then you are to diff erentiate the function you have obtained, to verify that it is
indeed an antiderivative of the given integrand.
Remember the rules: McGill’s Code of Student Conduct and Disciplinary Procedures appears in
the Handbook on Student Rights and Responsibilities (PDF English version - French version). Article
15(a) of the Code, which is devoted to plagiarism, reads as follows:
No student shall, with intent to deceive, represent the work of another person as his or
her own in any academic writing, essay, thesis, research report, project or assignment
submitted in a course or program of study or represent as his or her own an entire essay or
work of another, whether the material so represented constitutes a part or the entirety of
the work submitted.
Please don’t cause yourself embarrassment and waste everyone’s time: it isn’t worth it, and you really
need to learn how to solve these kinds of problems yourself.
The Solutions1. Let u = sin x, v = sin x. Then u = cos x, v = cosh x (or cosh x plus any real constant
— I have taken the constant to be 0, as all choices of constant here will lead to the same
solution.) (sin x) · (sinh x) dx = (cos x) · sinh x −
(cosh x) · (cos x) dx .
To evaluate
(cosh x) · (cos x) dx I will set U = cos x, V = cosh x, so U = − sin x,
V = sinh x. (cosh x) · (cos x) dx = (cos x) · sinh x +
(sinh x) · sin x dx .
Combining these results yields (sin x) · (sinh x) dx = (sin x) · (cosh x) − (cos x) · (sinh x) −
(sin x) · (sinh x) dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 382/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 383/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5028
Combining our results yields A7 x
2 + A8 x1 + A9
e A1 x dx
=
A7
A1
x2 +
A8
A1
− 2 A7
A21
x1 +
A9
A1
− A8
A21
+ 2 A7
A31
· e A1 x + C
(b) Remember that you were to diff erentiate the preceding product of polynomial and
exponential by the Product Rule to show that, indeed, its derivative is the given
integrand.
D.8.4 Solutions to Written Assignment W 4
Release Date: March 25th, 2006
Solutions were to be submitted at inside answer sheets to Quiz Q4, at tutorials during the
week 06 – 09 March, 2006
The Problems This assignment is based on your WeBWorK assignment R5. You are asked
to write out complete solutions to the following modifications of your versions of problems on
that assignment. Note that, in some cases, the question asks for more than was asked on the
assignment. You are not permitted to use a Table of Integrals.
1. Problem 10:
(a) Evaluate the following integral with the specific values of the constants given in
your own WeBWorK assignment: E x2 + E x + F
x3 + Gx2 + H x + J dx .
HINT: −C is a root of the denominator.
(b) No marks will be given unless you verify your integration by diff erentiating your
answer.
2. Problem 12:
(a) Evaluate the following integral with the specific values of the constants given in
your own WeBWorK assignment: Bx + C
( x2 + A2)2 d x .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 384/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5029
(b) No marks will be given unless you verify your integration by diff erentiating your
answer.
3. Problem 16: Determine whether the following integral (with the constants given in your
own WeBWorK assignment) is divergent or convergent. If it is convergent, evaluate it.
If not, prove that fact. A
−∞
1
x2 + 1 d x .
In each case your solution should begin by your writing out the full problem with your data,
so your TA does not have to look up your data on the WeBWorK system.
While these problems were generated by WeBWorK, they now constitute a conventional
mathematics assignment, and it does not suffice to make unsubstantiated statements. You are
expected to prove everything you state. Thus, for example, in Problem 10, you have to show
how you use the fact that a certain number is stated to be a root of the denominator.Remember the rules: McGill’s Code of Student Conduct and Disciplinary Procedures appears in
the Handbook on Student Rights and Responsibilities (PDF English version - French version). Article
15(a) of the Code, which is devoted to plagiarism, reads as follows:
No student shall, with intent to deceive, represent the work of another person as his or
her own in any academic writing, essay, thesis, research report, project or assignment
submitted in a course or program of study or represent as his or her own an entire essay or
work of another, whether the material so represented constitutes a part or the entirety of
the work submitted.
Please don’t cause yourself embarrassment and waste everyone’s time: it isn’t worth it, and you really
need to learn how to solve these kinds of problems yourself.
The Solutions
1. Under a change of variable of the form u = x
A, the integral reduces to one of the form
Ku + Lu2 + 1
2 du. The term
Ku
u2 + 1 du simplifies under a substitution v = u2 to a multiple
of dv
(v + 1)2. The term
L
u2 + 12 du simplifies under a substitution θ = arctan u,
eventually proving to be a multiple of θ + tan θ
2(tan2 θ + 1), etc.
2. An antiderivative is arctan x. This is evaluated between an upper limit of some constant
A, and a lower limit we may call B. We need to observe that lim B→−∞
arctan B = −π2
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 385/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5030
D.8.5 Solutions to Written Assignment W 5
Release Date: Solutions were to be submitted inside answer sheets to Quiz Q5, at tutorials
during the week 20 – 23 March, 2006
The Problems This assignment will be graded out of a maximum of 20 MARKS.
Write your student number (9 digits) in the following chart.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
Student # :
Some of the digits are to be used in solving the following problems.
1. Consider the curve in the plane defined parametrically by
x(t ) = t 2 + 1
y(t ) = A7t 2 + A8t + A9
(a) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the slope of the tangent to the curve
at the point with parameter value t = 1.
(b) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of d 2 y
dx2 at the point with
general parameter value t (t 0). For this problem you must not substitute in any
formula from your class notes or any textbook; you are expected to determine the2nd derivative by di ff erentiation, for example in the manner similar to that done in
your textbook, Example 1, page 661.
(c) [1 MARK] Determine the range of values of t — if there are any such values —
where the curve is concave upward.
2. This problem is based on Problem 12 on your WeBWorK assignment R8. For the given
arc of the given curve,
(a) [8 MARKS] determine the area of the surface of revolution of that arc about the
x-axis;
(b) [2 MARKS] set up an integral for the area of the surface of revolution of that arcabout the y-axis, but, in this case only, do not evaluate the integral.
In each case you are expected to show all your work.
Remember the rules: McGill’s Code of Student Conduct and Disciplinary Procedures appears in
the Handbook on Student Rights and Responsibilities (PDF English version - French version). Article
15(a) of the Code, which is devoted to plagiarism, reads as follows:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 386/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5031
No student shall, with intent to deceive, represent the work of another person as his or
her own in any academic writing, essay, thesis, research report, project or assignmentsubmitted in a course or program of study or represent as his or her own an entire essay or
work of another, whether the material so represented constitutes a part or the entirety of
the work submitted.
Please don’t cause yourself embarrassment and waste everyone’s time: it isn’t worth it, and you really
need to learn how to solve these kinds of problems yourself.
The Solutions
1. (a)
x(t ) = t 2 + 1
y(t ) = A7t 2 + A8t + A9
dx
dt = 2t
dy
dt = 2 A7t + A8
dy
dx=
dy
dt
dxdt
= 2 A7t + A8
2t
dy
dx
t =1
= A7 + A8
2
(b)
d 2 y
dx2 =
d
dx
2 A7t + A8
2t
= d
dt
2 A7t + A8
2t
· dt
dx
= d
dt
2 A7t + A8
2t
· 1
dxdt
= d
dt 2 A7t + A8
2t · 1
2t
= (2 A7)(2t ) − (2 A7t + A8)(2)
(2t )3
= − A8
4t 3
(c) If the student’s A8 is 0, the curve is flat. Otherwise it is concave upwards precisely
when t < 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 387/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5032
2. CORRECTED ON 20 MARCH 2006. The following solution is valid only
when K , the upper limit of integration, is sufficiently small. The correct so-lution is much more complicated, as we need to ensure that the respective
factors cos θ + θ sin θ and sin θ − θ cos θ remain positive. I have corrected my
original version by inserting absolute signs. However, the evaluation of these
integrals is complicated when we attempt to break the integral up into parts
based on the signs of these factors. This is certainly more difficult than was
intended from students in this course. Please exercise good judgment in grad-
ing the two parts of this problem, and do not expect those students for whom
the upper limit K is large to obtain the correct area.
x(θ ) = a(cos θ + θ sin θ ) y(θ ) = a(sin θ − θ cos θ )
⇒ x = aθ cos θ
y = aθ sin θ
⇒
( x)2 + ( y)2 = |aθ |(a) about the x-axis, PROVIDED K IS SUFFICIENTLY SMALL,
Area =
K
0
2πa| sin θ − θ cos θ | · |θ | d θ = 2πa
K
0
θ sin θ d θ − K
0
θ 2 cos θ d θ
for positive K su fficiently small. We must integrate by parts.
θ sin θ d θ = −θ cos θ +
cos θ d θ
= −θ cos θ + sin θ + C θ 2 cos θ d θ = θ 2 sin θ − 2
θ sin θ d θ
= θ 2 sin θ + 2θ cos θ − 2sin θ + C (θ sin θ − θ 2 cos θ ) d θ = −3θ cos θ + 3sin θ − θ 2 sin θ + C
Hence the area of the surface of revolution is −3K cos K + 3 sin K − K 2 sin K .
(b) about the y-axis, PROVIDED K IS SUFFICIENTLY SMALL,
Area =
K
0
2πa| cos θ + θ sin θ | · |θ | d θ = 2πa
K
0
θ cos θ d θ +
K
0
θ 2 sin θ d θ
.
D.9 MATH 141 2007 01
The use of written assignments was discontinued in 2007.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 388/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5033
E Quizzes from Previous Years
E.1 MATH 141 2007 01
E.1.1 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1
Distribution Date: Mounted on the Web on 4 February, 2007
corrected 19 January, 2010 — subject to further corrections
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of
the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [5 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
g( x) =
a
x
b tan(t ) dt ,
(where a and b are constants). Then use Part 2 of the Fundamental Theorem to evaluate
g( x), by first verifying carefully that ln | sec x| is an antiderivative of tan x.
Solution:
(a) Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral as a
function of its upper index of integration. Here the variable is the lower index of integration.
d
dx
a
x
b tan(t ) dt
= d
dx
− x
a
b tan(t ) dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 389/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5034
=
−
d
dx
x
a
b tan(t ) dt
= −b tan x .
Some students may quote a variant of Part 1 which gives the derivative of a definite
integral with respect to the lower index, and this should be accepted if work has
been shown.
(b) Students were expected to first find the derivative of ln | sec x|. Since this is a com-
position of 2 functions, the Chain Rule will be needed. Let u = sec x. Then
d
dxln | sec x| =
d
duln |u| · d
dxsecx
= 1
u ·sec x tan x
= 1
sec x· sec x tan x
= tan x .
Hence
g( x) = b ln | sec t |a x = b ln
sec a
sec x
= b ln
cos x
cos a
.
2. [5 MARKS] Find an antiderivative of the integrand of the integral
b
ak + y + my2
dy,
(where a, b, k , , m are constants), and then use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to
evaluate the integral. You are not expected to simplify your numerical answer.
Solution:
(a) One antiderivative of ky0 + y1 + my2 is
k · y1
1 + · y2
2 + m · y3
3 .
(b) Hence
b a
k + y + my
2 dy
=
k · y1
1 + · y2
2 + m · y3
3
b
a
=
k · b1
1 + · b2
2 + m · b3
3
−
k · a1
1 + · a2
2 + m · a3
3
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 390/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5035
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the functiong( x) =
√ x
a
b cos t
t dt ,
where a, b are constants.
Solution:
(a) Denote the upper index of the integral by u( x) =√
x.
(b) Then
d
dxg( x) =
d
dx √
x
a
b cos t
t dt
= d
dx
u( x)
a
b cos t
t dt
= d
du
u( x)
a
b cos t
t dt · du( x)
dx
= b cos u
u· du( x)
dx
= b cos u
u · 1
2√
x
= b cos
√ x
√ x ·
1
2 √ x= b
cos√
x
2 x
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine all values of x where the curve y = x
0
1
1 + at + bt 2 dt is concave upward, where a, b are constants. (Each version of this
quiz contained specific values for the constants a, b.)
Solution:
(a) By Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem,
y( x) = 1
1 + ax + bx2 .
(b) Diff erentiating a second time yields
y( x) = d
dx
1
1 + ax + bx2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 391/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5036
=
− 1
1 + ax + bx22 ·
d
dx1 + ax + bx2
= − a + 2bx1 + ax + bx2
2 .
(c) The curve is concave upward where y > 0:
− a + 2bx1 + ax + bx2
2 > 0 ⇔ −(a + 2bx) > 0
since the denominator is a square, hence positive
⇔ 2bx < −a
⇔
x < −
a
2b when b > 0
x > − a2b
when b < 0
never concave upward when b = 0, a > 0
always concave upward when b = 0, a < 0
Tuesday version
1. [5 MARKS] If
c a
f ( x) dx = k and
c b
f ( x) dx = , find
b a
f ( x) dx. Show your work.
Solution:
(a)c
a
f ( x) dx =
b a
f ( x) dx +
c b
f ( x) dx .
(b) Hencec
b
f ( x) dx =
c a
f ( x) dx −b
a
f ( x) dx .
(c)
= k − .
2. [5 MARKS] Find an antiderivative of the integrand of the integral
a
0
√ x dx, and then
use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to evaluate the integral. You are not expected
to simplify your numerical answer, but no marks will be given unless all your work is
clearly shown.
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 392/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5037
(a) One antiderivative of x12 is
112
+ 1· x 1
2+1 =
2
3 x
32 .
(b) a
0
√ x dx =
2
3 x
32
a
0
= 2
3
a
32 − 0
=
2
3a
32 .
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
x2
a
b√
1 + t c dt .
Solution:
(a) Let the upper index of the integral be denoted by u = x2. Then
(b)
d
dx
x2 a
b√
1 + t c dt = d
dx
u a
b√
1 + t c dt
= d
du
u
a
b√
1 + t c dt
· du
dx
= b√
1 + uc · du
dx
= b√
1 + uc · 2 x
= b√
1 + x2c · 2 x
4. [10 MARKS] If F ( x) =
x
1
f (t ) dt , where f (t ) =
t 2
1
a + ub
udu and a, b are constants,
find F (2).
Solution:
(a) Applying Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem yields
F ( x) = f ( x) =
x2
1
a + ub
udu .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 393/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5038
(b) A second application of Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem yields
F ( x) = f ( x) = d
dx
x2
1
a + ub
udu .
(c) Denote the upper index of the last integral by v = x2.
(d)
d
dx
x2
1
a + ub
udu =
d
dx
v
1
a + ub
udu
= d
dv
v
1
a + ub
u
du
·
dv
dx
= a + vb
v· dv
dx
= a + vb
v· 2 x
= a + x2b
x2 · 2 x
=2
a + x2b
x.
Wednesday version
1. [5 MARKS] Use Part 2 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to evaluate the integralbπ
aπ
cos θ d θ , where a, b are given integers. No marks will be given unless all your work
is clearly shown. Your answer should be simplified as much as possible.
Solution:
(a) One antiderivative of cos θ is sin θ .
(b)
bπ aπ
cos θ d θ = [sin θ ]bπaπ = sin(bπ) − sin(aπ) .
(c) Students were expected to observe that the value of the sine at the given multiples
of π is 0, so the value of the definite integral is 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 394/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5039
2. [5 MARKS] Express limn→∞
n
i=1
axi sin xi ∆ x as a definite integral on the interval [b, c],
which has been subdivided into n equal subintervals.
Solution: c
b
ax sin x dx .
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
g( x) =
bx
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt ,
where a, b, c are positive integers.
Solution:
(a) The Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral with respect to
the upper limit of integration, when the lower limit is constant. The given integral
must be expressed in terms of such specialized definite integrals.
g( x) =
bx
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt =
0
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt +
bx
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt
= − ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt +
bx
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt
(b) For the summand
bx 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt , let u = bx. Then
d
dx
bx 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt =
d
dx
u 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt
= d
du
u 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt · du
dx
= u2 + c
u2 − c· du
dx
= u2 + c
u2 − c· b
= (bx)2 + c
(bx)2 − c· b
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 395/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5040
(c) For the summand ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2
− c
dt , let u = ax. Then, analogously to the preceding
step,d
dx
ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt =
(ax)2 + c
(ax)2 − c· a .
(d)
g( x) = (bx)2 + c
(bx)2 − c· b − (ax)2 + c
(ax)2 − c· a .
4. [10 MARKS] Find a function f ( x) such that
k + x
a
f (t )
t 2 dt =
√ x (106)
for x > 0 and for some real number a; k and are constants given in the question,
diff erent constants to diff erent students. (HINT: Diff erentiate the given equation.)
Solution: A more proper wording of the problem would have been “Find a function f ( x)
and a real number a such that...”.
(a) Assume that equation (106) holds. Then diff erentiation of both sides with respect
to x yields
0 + f ( x)
x2 =
1
2 · · 1√
x.
(b) We solve the preceding equation to obtain that f ( x) = 2 x 32 .
(c) Substitution into equation (106) yields
k +
2
x
a
t −12 dt =
√ x .
We know how to integrate powers of t :
k +
cot2 ·
√ t
xa
= √
x .
(d) The preceding reduces to k = √ a, which may be solved to obtain
a =
k
2
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 396/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5041
Thursday version
1. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
πb πa
sin t dt .
Solution:
(a) An antiderivative of sin t is − cos t .
(b)πb
πa
sin t dt = [− cos t ]πbπa
(c) [1 MARK] Your answer should be simplified as much as possible.
2. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the Riemann sum for f ( z) = a− x2, (0 ≤ x ≤ 2) with 4 subintervals,
taking the sample points to be the right endpoints. It is not necessary to simplify the final
numerical answer.
Solution:
(a) The interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 2 is divided by 3 points into 4 subintervals of length ∆ x =24
= 12
.
(b) The point x∗i selected in the ith interval will always be the right end-point, i.e.,
xi = i
12
(i = 1, 2, 3, 4).
(c) The Riemann sum is4
i=1
f ( x∗i )∆ x =
1
2
4i=1
a − i2
4
.
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
bx cos x
cos (t c) dt , where a, b, c are real numbers.
Solution:
(a) The Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral with respect to
the upper limit of integration, when the lower limit is constant. The given integral
must be expressed in terms of such specialized definite integrals.
bx cos x
cos (t c) dt =
0 cos x
cos (t c) dt +
bx 0
cos (t c) dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 397/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5042
= −
cos x
0
cos (t
c
) dt +
bx
0
cos (t
c
) dt
(b) For the summand
bx 0
cos (t c) dt , let u = b x. Then
d
dx
bx 0
cos (t c) dt = d
dx
u 0
cos (t c) dt
=
d
du
u
0
cos (t c
) dt · du
dx
= cos (uc) · b
= cos ((bx)c) · b
(c) For the summand
cos x 0
cos (t c) dt , let v = cos x.
d
dx
cos x
0
cos (t c) dt = d
dx
v
0
cos (t c) dt
= d
dv
v 0
cos (t c) dt · dv
dx
= cos (vc) · (− sin x)
= cos (cosc x) · (− sin x)
(d)bx
cos x
cos (t c) dt = −cos (cosc x) · (− sin x) + cos ((bx)c) · b .
4. [10 MARKS] Let f ( x) =
0 if x < 0
x if 0 ≤ x ≤ a
2a − x if a < x < 2a
0 if x > 2a
and g( x) =
x
0
f (t ) dt , where a is
a positive constant. Showing all your work, find a formula for the value of g( x) when
a < x < 2a.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 398/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5043
Solution:
(a) The interval where we seek a formula is the third interval into which the domain
has been broken. For x in this interval the integral can be decomposed into x
0
f (t ) dt =
a
0
f (t ) dt +
x
a
f (t ) dt .
The portion of the definition of f for x < 0 is of no interest in this problem, since
we are not finding area under that portion of the curve; the same applies to the
portion of the definition for x > 2a.
(b)
a
0
f (t ) dt = a
0
t dt
=
t 2
2
t =a
t =0
= a2
2 .
(c) x
a
f (t ) dt =
x
a
(2a − t ) dt
= 2at − t 2
2 t = x
t =a
=
2ax − x2
2
−
2a2 − a2
2
.
(d)
g( x) = a2
2 +
2ax − x2
2
−
2a2 − a2
2
= 2ax − x2
2 − a2 .
E.1.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2
Distribution Date: Posted on the Web on 28 February, 2007
Caveat lector! There could be misprints or errors in these draft solutions.
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of
the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 399/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5044
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
xb + a +
1
x2 + 1
dx, (where a and b are given
positive integers).
Solution:
(a)
xb dx =
xb+1
b + 1 + C 1,
(b)
a dx = ax + C 2
(c)
1
x2 + 1 d x = arctan x + C 3
(d) xb + a +
1
x2 + 1 dx = xb+1
b + 1 + ax + arctan x + C .
2. [5 MARKS] Use a substitution to evaluate the indefinite integral
t 2 cos
a − t 3
dt ,
(where a is a given real number).
Solution:
(a) Try the substitution u = t 3.
(b) du = 3t 2 dt ⇒ t 2 dt = 13
du.
(c)
t 2 cos a −t 3 dt = 1
3
cos(a
−u) du
= −1
3 sin(a − u) + C
= −1
3 sin(a − t 3) + C .
(Some students may wish to employ a second substitution v = a − u. Alternatively,
a better substitution for the problem would have been to take u = a − t 3.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 400/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5045
3. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the parabola y = x2, the tangent
line to this parabola at (a, a2
), and the x-axis, (where a is a given real number).Solution: This area can be computed by integrating either with respect to y or with
respect to x.
Integrating with respect to y: (a) Since y = 2 x, the tangent line through (a, a2) has
equation
y − a2 = 2a( x − a) ⇔ y = 2ax − a2 .
(b) To integrate with respect to y we need to express the equations of the parabola
and the line in the form
x = function of y .
The branch of the parabola to the right of the y-axis is x = √ y. The line hasequation x =
y
2a+
a
2.
(c) The area of the horizontal element of area at height y is
y + a2
2a− √
y
∆ y.
(d) The area is the value of the integral a2
0
y + a2
2a− √
y
dy .
(e) Integration yields
y2
4a+ ay
2 − 2
3 y
32
a2
0
=
14
+ 12 − 2
3
a3 = 1
12 a3 .
Integrating with respect to x: (a) As above, the tangent line is y = 2ax − a2. Its
intercept with the x-axis is at x = a
2.
(b) The area of the vertical element of area at horizontal position x ≤ a
2 is x2 − 0
∆ x.
(c) The area of the vertical element of area at horizontal position x ≥ a2
is x2 − (2ax − a2)
( x − a)2 ∆ x.
(d) The area of the region is the sum a2
0
x2 dx +
a
a2
( x − a)2 dx .
(e) Integration yields x3
3
a2
0
+
−( x − a)3
3
a
a2
= a3
12 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 401/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5046
4. [10 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating the region bounded by
the given curves about the line y = 1: y =
n
√ x, y = x, where n is a given positive integer.Solution: A favoured method of solution was not prescribed.
Using the method of “washers”: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bounding the
region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revolution
is a horizontal line, the element of area being rotated is vertical. For arbitrary
x the lower point on the element is ( x, x); the upper point is ( x, n√
x). The
distances of these points from the axis are, respectively 1 − x and 1 − n√
x.
(c) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 − x)2 + (1 − n√ x)2
∆ x .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π
1
0
−(1 − x)2 + (1 − n
√ x)2
dx
= π
1
0
−2 x + x2 + 2 x
1n − x
2n
dx
= π
− x2 +
x2
3 +
2n
n + 1 x
n+1n − n
n + 2 x
n+2n
1
0
= π
−1 +
1
3 +
2n
n + 1 − n
n + 2
=
(n − 1)(n + 4)π
3(n + 1)(n + 2)
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bound-
ing the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revolution
is a horizontal line, the element of area being rotated is also horizontal. For
arbitrary y the left endpoint on the element is ( yn, y); the right endpoint is ( y, y).
The length of the element is, therefore, y− yn; the distances of the element from
the axis of symmetry is 1 − y.
(c) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 − y) · ( y − yn) · ∆ y .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π
1
0
(1 − y)( y − yn) dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 402/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5047
= 2π 1
0− yn + yn+1 + y
− y2 dy
= 2π
− 1
n + 1 yn+1 +
1
n + 2 yn+2 +
1
2 y2 − 1
3 y3
1
0
= 2π
− 1
n + 1 +
1
n + 2 +
1
2 − 1
3
− 0
= 2π
1
6 − 1
(n + 1)(n + 2)
=
(n − 1)(n + 4)π
3(n + 1)(n + 2)
Tuesday version
1. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
(a − t )(b + t 2) dt .
Solution:
(a) Expand the product in the integrand: (a − t )(b + t 2) dt =
ab − bt + at 2 − t 3
dt .
(b) Integrate term by term:
ab − bt + at
2
− t 3
dt = ab · t − b
2 · t 2
+
a
3 · t 3
− 1
4 · t 4
+ C .
2. [5 MARKS] Using a substitution, evaluate the indefinite integral
cosn x sin x dx, where
n is a fixed, positive integer.
Solution:
(a) Use new variable u, where du = −sin x dx; one solution is u = cos x.
(b)
cosn x sin x dx = − un du
= − un+1
n + 1 + C
= − 1
n + 1 cosn+1 x + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 403/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5048
3. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the parabola x = y2, the tangent
line to this parabola at (a2
, a), and the y-axis, where a is a fixed, positive real number.Solution: The solution is analogous (under the exchange x ↔ y) to that given for Prob-
lem 3 of the Monday quiz.
4. [10 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating the region bounded by
y = xn and x = yn about the line x = −1, where n is a given positive integer.
Solution:
Case I: n is even
Using the method of “washers”: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bound-
ing the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revo-
lution is a vertical line, the element of area being rotated is horizontal. For
arbitrary y the farther endpoint on the element is ( y1n , y); the nearer end-
point is ( yn, y). The distances of these points from the axis are, respectively
1 + n√
y and 1 + yn.
(c) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 + yn)2 + (1 + n
√ y)2
∆ y .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π 1
0
−(1 + y)2 + (1 + n√ y)2
dy
= π
1
0
2 y
1n + y
2n − 2 yn − y2n
dy
= π
2n
n + 1 y
n+1n +
n
n + 2 y
n+2n − 2
n + 1 yn+1 − 1
2n + 1 y2n+1
1
0
= 2(n − 1)(3n2 + 7n + 3)π
(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) Find the intersections of the curves
bounding the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) =(0, 0), (1, 1).
(b) Since the axis of revolution is a vertical line, the element of area being
rotated is also vertical. For arbitrary x the top endpoint on the element is
( x, x1n ); the lower endpoint is ( x, xn). The length of the element is, there-
fore, x1n − xn; the distance of the element from the axis of symmetry is
1 + x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 404/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5049
(c) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 + x) · x 1n − xn
.
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π
1
0
(1 + x)( x1n − xn) dx
= 2π
1
0
x
1n − xn + x
n+1n − xn+1
dx
= 2π
n
n + 1 − 1
n + 1 +
n
2n + 1 − 1
n + 2
= 2(n − 1)(3n2
+ 7n + 3)π(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
Case II: n is odd
Using the method of “washers”: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bound-
ing the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (±1, ±1).
Here there is an issue of interpretation. The textbook usually permits the
word region to apply to one that may have more than one component;
some authors would not wish to apply the term in such a situation. I will
follow the textbook, and permit a region here to have two components.
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of rev-
olution is a vertical line, the element of area being rotated is horizontal.
But there are two kinds of elements, depending on whether y is positive
or negative. For arbitrary, positive y the farther endpoint on the element is
( y1n , y); the nearer endpoint is ( yn, y). The distances of these points from
the axis are, respectively 1 + n√
y and 1 + yn. For arbitrary, negative y the
nearer endpoint on the element is ( y1n , y); the farther endpoint is ( yn, y).
The distances of these points from the axis are, respectively 1 + n√
y and
1 + yn (both of which are less than 1).
(c) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 + y
n
)
2
+ (1 +
n
√ y)
2∆ y .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π
1
−1
−(1 + y)2 + (1 + n√
y)2 dy
= π
1
0
2 y
1n + y
2n − 2 yn − y2n
dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 405/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5050
+π 0
−1−2 y
1n
− y
2n + 2 yn + y2n dy
= π
2n
n + 1 y
n+1n +
n
n + 2 y
n+2n − 2
n + 1 yn+1 − 1
2n + 1 y2n+1
1
0
+π
− 2n
n + 1 y
n+1n − n
n + 2 y
n+2n +
2
n + 1 yn+1 +
1
2n + 1 y2n+1
0
−1
= 2(n − 1)(3n2 + 7n + 3)π
(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1) +
2(n − 1)(n2 + 3n + 1)π
(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
= 4(n − 1)π
n + 1 .
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) Find the intersections of the curvesbounding the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) =
(0, 0), (±1, ±1).
(b) Since the axis of revolution is a vertical line, the element of area being
rotated is also vertical. For arbitrary, positive x the top endpoint on the el-
ement is ( x, x1n ); the lower endpoint is ( x, xn); for arbitrary, negative x the
bottom endpoint on the element is ( x, x1n ); the upper endpoint is ( x, xn).
The length of the element is, therefore, x 1
n − xn; the distance of the ele-
ment from the axis of rotation is 1 + x.
(c) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 + x) · x 1
n − xn .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π
1
−1
(1 + x) x 1
n − xn dx
= 2π
1
−1
x 1n − xn + x
n+1n − xn+1
dx
= 2π n
n + 1 −
1
n + 1
+ n
2n + 1 −
1
n + 2
+2π
n
n + 1 − 1
n + 1 − n
2n + 1 +
1
n + 2
= 4(n − 1)π
n + 1
Wednesday version
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 406/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5051
1. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the indefinite integral sin2t
cos t dt .
Solution:
(a) Apply a “double angle” formula: sin2t
cos t dt =
2 sin t cos t
cos t dt = 2
sin t dt .
(b) Complete the integration:
2
sin t dt = −2cos t + C .
2. Using a substitution, evaluate the indefinite integral
e x
e x + adx, where a is a non-zero
real number.
Solution:
(a) [2 MARKS] Try the substitution u = e x + a, so du = e x dx.
(b) e x
e x + adx =
du
u= ln |u| + C = ln |e x + a| + C .
(If the constant a is positive, then the absolute signs are not required.)
3. [10 MARKS] Find the number b such that the line y = b divides the region bounded
by the curves y = ax2 and y = k into two regions with equal area, where a, k are given
positive constants.
Solution:
(a) Determine the range of values for integration by finding the intersections of the
bounding curves: solving the equations yields the points
∓
k
a, k
.
(b) Determine the portion of the full area which is below the line y = b. We begin by
repeating the calculation of the preceding part: the corner points have coordinates∓
b
a, b
. The area is
√ ba
−√
ba
(b − ax2) dx = 2
bx − ax3
3
√ ba
0
= 4
3b
b
a .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 407/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5052
(c) As a special case of the foregoing, or by a separate calculation, we can conclude
that the area of the entire region is 43
k
k a
.
(d) The condition of the problem is that
4
3b
b
a=
1
2 · 4
3k
k
a
which is equivalent to 4b3 = k 3, and implies that the line should be placed where
b = 2− 23 k .
4. [10 MARKS] Use the method of cylindrical shells to find the volume generated by ro-
tating the region bounded by the given curves about the specified axis.
y = √ x − 1 , y = 0 , x = a
about y = b, where a, b are fixed positive constants, and b ≥√
a − 1 .
Solution:
(a) Solve equations to determine the limits of integration. Solving x = a with y =√ x − 1 yields the single point of intersection
a,
√ a − 1
.
(b) The horizontal element of area at height y which generates the cylindrical shell has
left endpoint (1 + y2, y) and right endpoint (a, y), so its length is a − (1 + y2).
(c) The distance of the horizontal element of area which generates the shell from the
axis of rotation is b
− y.
(d) Set up the integral for the volume by cylindrical shells:
2π
√ a−1
0
(b − y)a − (1 + y2)
dy .
(e) Evaluate the integral
2π
√ a−1
0
(b − y)
a − (1 + y2)
dy
= 2π
√ a−1
0 b(a − 1) − (a − 1) y − by2 + y3
dy
= 2π
b(a − 1) y − a − 12
y2 − b3
y3 + 14
y4√
a−1
0
= 2π
b(a − 1)
32 − a − 1
2 (a − 1) − b
3(a − 1)
32 +
1
4(a − 1)2
= 2π(a − 1)32
2
3 · b − 1
4
√ a − 1
.
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 408/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5053
Thursday version
1. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral by making a substitution: b
(1 + ax)3 d x ,
where a, b are non-zero constants.
Solution:
(a) A substitution which suggests itself is u = 1 + a x, implying that du = a dx, so
dx = 1a
du.
(b) b
(1 + ax)3 dx = b
a
du
u3 = − b
2au−2 + C = − b
2a(1 + ax)2 + C .
2. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
seca x tan x dx, where a is a constant,
positive integer.
Solution:
(a) Try the substitution given by du = sec x·tan x dx, of which one solution is u = sec x.
(b)
sec
a
x tan x dx =
u
a
−1
du =
ua
a + C =
seca x
a + C .
Some students may have integrated by sight.
3. [10 MARKS] Find the number b such that the line divides the region bounded by the
curves x = ay2 and x = k into two regions with equal area.
Solution: The solution is analogous (under the exchange x ↔ y) to that given for Prob-
lem 3 of the Wednesday quiz.
4. [10 MARKS] The region bounded by the given curves is rotated about the axis x = −1.
Find the volume of the resulting solid by any method:
y = 5, y = x2 − ax + b
Solution: Because there are constraints on the constants, I will work just one variant,
with a = 3, b = 7.
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) To find the extremes of integration, we
solve the equations y = 5 and y = x2 − 3 x + 7, obtaining ( x, y) = (1, 5), (2, 5).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 409/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5054
(b) The height of a vertical element of area which generates a cylindrical shell is,
at horizontal position x, 5 − ( x2
− 3 x + 7) = − x2
+ 3 x − 2.(c) The distance of that vertical element of area from the axis of revolution is 1+ x.
(d) The volume is given by the integral
2π
2
1
(1 + x)(− x2 + 3 x − 2) dx
(e) Evaluating the integral:
2π
2
1
(1 + x)(− x2 + 3 x − 2) dx
= 2π 2
1− x3 + 2 x2 + x
−2 dx
= 2π
−1
4 x4 +
2
3 x3 +
1
2 x2 − 2 x
2
1
= 2π
−4 +
16
3 + 2 − 4 +
1
4 − 2
3 − 1
2 + 2
= 5π
6
Using the method of “washers” (a) To find the lowest point on the parabola, we solve
x2 − 3 x + 7 ≥ 0. This can be done by completing the square, or by using the
calculus to find the local minimum. We find it to be3
2 ,
19
4
.(b) The horizontal element generating the “washer” at height y extends between
the solutions in x to the equation y = x2 − 3 x + 7; these are
x =3 ±
4 y − 19
2 .
(c) The volume of the “washer” at height y is, therefore,
π
1 +3 +
4 y − 19
2
2
−
1 +3 −
4 y − 19
2
2
∆ y
= 5π 4 y−
19 ∆ y
(d) The volume is given by the integral 5π
5
194
4 y − 19 dy.
(e) Evaluation of the integral:
5π
5
194
4 y − 19 dy =
5π · 2
3 · 1
4(4 y − 19)
32
5
194
= 5π
6 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 410/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5055
E.1.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3
Distribution Date: Posted on the Web on 21 March, 2007
Caveat lector! There could be misprints or errors in these draft solutions.
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of
the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [6 MARKS] Evaluate the integral t 3eat dt , where a is a non-zero constant.
Solution: This problem requires several consecutive applications of integration by parts
to reduce the exponent of the power of t to 0:
u = t 3, dv = eat dt ⇒ du = 3t 2 dt , v = 1
aeat
⇒
t 3eat dt = 1
a· t 3eat − 3
a
t 2eat dt
U = t 2, dV = eat dt ⇒ dU = 2t dt , V = 1
aeat
⇒ t 3eat dt = 1
a ·t 3
−
3
a2
t 2 eat + 6
a2 teat dt
u = t , d v = eat dt ⇒ d u = dt , v = 1
aeat
⇒
t 3eat dt =
1
a· t 3 − 3
a2 · t 2 +
6
a3t
eat − 6
a3
eat dt
=
1
a· t 3 − 3
a2 · t 2 +
6
a3t − 6
a4
eat + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 411/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5056
the correctness of which integration may be verified by diff erentiation of the product on
the right.
2. [8 MARKS] Showing all your work, find a reduction formula for the indefinite integral cosn a x d x, where a is a non-zero constant, and n is an integer not less than 2.
Solution:
(a) Introduce a symbol for the general indefinite integral sought:
I n =
cosn a x d x
(b) Integration by parts:
u = cosn−1 ax ⇒ du = −a(n − 1) cosn−2 ax · sin a x d x
dv = cos a x d x ⇒ v = 1
a· sin ax
I n = 1
a· cosn−1 ax · sin ax + (n − 1)
cosn−2 ax · sin2 a x d x
= 1
a· cosn−1 ax · sin ax + (n − 1)
cosn−2 ax ·
1 − cos2 ax
dx
= 1
a ·cosn−1 ax
·sin ax + (n
−1) I n−2
−(n
−1) I n .
(c) Solve the last equation for I n
I n = 1
an· sin ax · cosn−1 ax +
n − 1
n I n−2 + C .
3. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
1
x2√
x2 − a2dx , where a is
a non-zero constant.
Solution: The following solution uses a trigonometric substitution; it is also possible to
solve this problem using a hyperbolic substitution.
As is customary, I will proceed mechanically, taking square roots where necessary with-
out much attention to the sign choices; and then verify at the end by diff erentiation that
this process has produced a valid indefinite integral. This procedure can be made rigor-
ous by defining the new variable in terms of an inverse trigonometric function of x. This
is a useful exercise, but becomes extremely complicated in this case, because we would
have to work with either the inverse cosine or the inverse secant, and the textbook we
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 412/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5057
are using chooses diff erent domains for these two functions. So I will avoid the niceties
and proceed as described.I propose to use a substitution which provides that x = a sec θ . Then
dx = a sec θ · tan θ · d θ ,
and 1
x2√
x2 − a2dx =
1
a2
cos θ d θ
= 1
a2 sin θ + C
= 1
a2 tan θ · cos θ + C
= sec2 θ − 1
a2 sec θ + C
=
√ x2 − a2
a2 x+ C ,
the correctness of which integration may be verified by diff erentiation of the quotient on
the right.
4. [8 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
k
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x−
a)( x−
b) dx,
where a, b are distinct constants, c is a non-zero constant, and the limits of integration
k , are also prescribed. (The integrand was not presented to students in factored form.)
Solution:
(a) Since the degree of the numerator is not less than the degree of the denominator,
begin by dividing the denominator into the numerator, obtaining a quotient and a
remainder: x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x +
c
( x − a)( x − b) d x .
(b) Expand the fraction into partial fractions. Assume that
c
( x − a)( x − b) =
A
x − a+
B
x − b,
take to a common denominator, and equate the resulting polynomials:
c = A · ( x − b) + B · ( x − a) .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 413/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5058
(c) Now either equate coefficients of like powers of x, or, equivalently, give x succes-
sive values x = a and x = b:
c = A(a − b)
c = B(b − a) ⇒ A =
c
a − b= − B .
(d) The integration reduces to x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x +
c
a − b · 1
x − a − c
a − b · 1
x − b
dx .
(e) Complete the integration:
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x2
2 +
c
a − b(ln | x − a| − ln | x − b|) + C
= x2
2 +
c
a − bln
x − a
x − b
+ C ,
the correctness of which integration may be verified by diff erentiation of the func-
tion on the right.
(f) Provided it is convergent the given definite integral can now be evaluated:
k
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b)
dx = x2
2
+ c
a − b
ln x − a
x − b
k
= 2 − k 2
2 +
c
a − b
ln
− a
− b
− ln
k − a
k − b
= 2 − k 2
2 +
c
a − b
ln
( − a)(k − b)
( − b)(k − a)
(g) All of the preceding is based on the integral being convergent. In some of the
versions the integral was divergent. This was because at least one of the roots of
the polynomial which is the denominator of the integrand was contained in the
interval of integration. In such a case the integral can be seen to diverge.
5. [4 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
1√ 3
−1
earctan y
1 + y2 dy . I have stated the problem with just one
pair of possible limits for the integral; the variations of the problem included several
possible limits in each case, for each of which students should have been familiar with
the arctangent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 414/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5059
Solution: For simplicity, I work a specific instance of this problem. Use the substitution
u = arctan y, so du = dy1 + y2 . Then an antiderivative can be obtained as follows
earctan y
1 + y2 dy =
eu du = eu + C = earctan y + C
so the definite integral is equal to
earctan y
1√ 3
−1= e
π6 − e− π
4 .
Alternatively, the substitution may be executed in the definite integral, replacing the
lower limit of
−1 by arctan(
−1) =
−π4
, and the upper limit of 1√ 3
by arctan 1√ 3
= π6
.
Tuesday version
1. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
x2 cos a x d x, where a is a
non-zero constant.
Solution: Two applications of integration by parts will be used to reduce the exponent
of the power of x to 0.
(a)
u = x2
⇒ du = 2 x dx
dv = cos a x d x ⇒ v = 1
asin ax
x2 cos a x d x = x2
a · sin ax − 2
a
x · sin a x d x
(b)
U = x ⇒ dU = d x
dV = sin a x d x ⇒ V = −1
a· cos ax
x2 cos a x d x = x
2
a· sin ax − 2
a
− xa
· cos ax + 1a
cos a x d x
=
x2
a· sin ax +
2
a2 x · cos ax − 2
a2
cos a x d x
= x2
a· sin ax +
2
a2 x · cos ax − 2
a3 sin ax + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 415/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5060
The integration can be checked by diff erentiation of the alleged antiderivative.
2. [9 MARKS] Showing all your work, find a reduction formula for the integral
xneax dx,
where a is a non-zero constant.
Solution:
(a) Introduce a symbol for the general indefinite integral sought:
I n =
xneax dx .
(b) Integration by parts:
u = xn ⇒ du = n xn−1 dx
dv = eax dx ⇒ v = 1
a· eax
I n = 1
a· eax − n
a
xn−1eax dx
= 1
a· eax − n
a I n−1.
which is the desired reduction formula.
3. [4 MARKS] Showing your work, evaluate the integral
sin
3
ax · cos
2
a x d x, where a isa non-zero constant.
Solution: This integral is easily evaluated by a substitution giving du = constant ×sin a x d x. So a convenient substitution is u = cos ax, which yields du = −a sin a x d x.
sin3 ax · cos2 a x d x =
sin2 ax · u2 · −du
a
=
1 − cos2 ax
· u2 · −du
a
= 1 −u2 ·
u2
·
−du
a=
1
a
u4 − u2
du
= 1
a
u5
5 − u3
3
+ C
= 1
a
cos5 ax
5 − cos3 ax
3
+ C ,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 416/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5061
which integration may be checked by diff erentiation. (Of course, there are other, equiv-
alent ways of expressing this indefinite integral.)
4. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
x3
√ x2 + a2
dx, where a is a
given non-zero constant.
Solution: To simplify the surd in the denominator one may use either a trigonometric
or a hyperbolic substitution. For students in this course a trigonometric substitution is
usually a better choice. To arrange that x = a tan u, we use a substitution
u = arctan x
a, (107)
and dx = a sec
2
u du. We may assume that a > 0. The interval of validity for substitution(107) is −π2
< x < π2
, in which the secant is positive. x3
√ x2 + a2
dx =
a3 tan3 u
|a sec u| · a sec2 u du
= a3
tan2 u · sec u tan u du
= a3
sec2 u − 1
· d
dusec u du
= a3
sec3 u
3 − sec u + C
eff ectively by substitution U = sec u
= 1
3
(a tan u)2 − 2a2
(a tan u)2 + a2 + C
= 1
3
x2 − 2a2
√ x2 + a2 + C
which integration may be verified by diff erentiation.
5. [9 MARKS] (To simplify the exposition of the solution, I work a specific example here.)
Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
x + 21
( x + 9)( x − 5) d x.
Solution: Since the degree of the numerator is less than that of the denominator, we candispense with the first step of dividing denominator into numerator.
(a) We need to expand the integrand into a sum of partial fractions; fortunately the
factorization of the denominator has been given. Assuming there are constants
A, B such that x + 21
( x + 9)( x − 5) =
A
x + 9 +
B
x − 5
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 417/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5062
and transforming all fractions to have a common denominator, we find that
x + 21 = A( x − 5) + B( x + 9) .
(b) The values of A, B may be obtained either by comparing coefficients of like powers
of x, or by assigning to x successively the “convenient” values 5, -9: we obtain that
26 = 14 B ⇒ B = 13
7
12 = −14 A ⇒ A = −6
7.
(c) We may now complete the integration:
x + 21
( x + 9)( x − 5) d x =
1
7 − 6
x + 9 +
13
x − 5
dx
= −1
7(−6ln( x + 9) + 13 ln( x − 5)) + C
which can also be expressed in other, equivalent ways. This integration may be
verified by diff erentiation.
Wednesday version
1. [4 MARKS] Showing your work, evaluate
a
0
( x2 + 1)e− x dx , where a is a given constant.
Solution: I will integrate by parts twice, in order to reduce the degree of the polynomial
factor of the integrand.
(a) First integration by parts:
u = x2 + 1 ⇒ du = 2 x dx
dv = e− x dx ⇒ v = −e− x
a 0
( x2 + 1)e− x dx =( x2 + 1)
−e− xa
0+
a
0
2 x · e− x dx .
(b) Second integration by parts:
U = 2 x ⇒ dU = 2 dx
dV = e− x dx ⇒ V = −e− x
a 0
( x2 + 1)e− x dx =( x2 + 1 + 2 x)
−e− xa
0+
a
0
2 · e− x dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 418/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5063
(c) Completion of the integration:
a 0
( x2 + 1)e− x dx =( x2 + 2 + 2 x)
−e− xa
0
= −(a2 + 2a + 3)e−a + 3.
2. [9 MARKS] Showing all your work, find a reduction formula for the integral
π2
0
sinn a x d x,
where a is a given integer.
Solution: Assume n is an integer greater than 1.
(a) Introduce a symbol for the definite integral sought:
I n =
π2
0
sinn a x d x .
(b) Integration by parts:
dv = sin a x d x ⇒ v = −cos ax
adx
u = sinn−1 ax ⇒ du = a(n − 1) sinn−2 ax · cos a x d x
I n = −1
a ·sinn−1 ax
·cos ax
π2
0
+ (n−
1) π
2
0
sinn−2 ax·
cos2 a x d x
(c) Decomposition of integral: π2
0
sinn−2 ax · cos2 a x d x =
π2
0
sinn−2 ax ·1 − sin2 ax
dx
=
π2
0
sinn−2 a x d x − π
2
0
sinn a x d x
= I n−2 − I n
(d) Solution of equation to obtain reduction formula
I n =
−1
a · sinn−1 ax · cos ax
π2
0
+ (n − 1) ( I n−2 − I n)
⇒ nI n =
−1
a· sinn−1 ax · cos ax
π2
0
+ (n − 1) I n−2
⇒ I n = 1
n(0 − 0) +
n − 1
n I n−2
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 419/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5064
Because of the choice of limits and the fact that a is an integer, the “net change” is
0. Thus we obtain a very simple relationship, which can be solved. Students werenot asked to complete this part of the solution. For example, it is possible to prove
by induction that, if n = 2m, an even, positive integer, then
I 2m = 2m − 1
2m · 2m − 3
2m − 2 · . . . · 3
2 I 0
= (2m)!
4mm!m! · π
2 .
(This is Exercise 44, page 481 in the textbook.)
3. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral x2a2 − x2
32
dx, where a is a
non-zero constant.
Solution: Without limiting generality we take a > 0. A trigonometric substitution can
simplify this integral. One such substitution would have x = a sin u; more precisely,
u = arcsin xa
, defined for − π2 ≤ x ≤ π
2, in which interval the cosine and secant are
positive. Then d x = a du√ 1−u2
.
x2
a2 − x2
32
=
a2 sin2 u
a3 cos3 u· a cos u du
=
tan2
u
du =
sec2
u − 1
du
= tan u − u + C
= sin u
cos u− u + C
= sin u
1 − sin2 u− u + C
=
xa
1 − x2
a2
− arcsin x
a+ C
= x
√ a2 − x2 −arcsin
x
a+ C
which may be verified by diff erentiation.
4. [9 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
k
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx,
where a, b, k , are distinct constants such that the integrand is defined throughout the
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 420/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5065
given interval, and c is a non-zero constant. (The integrand was not presented to students
in factored form.)Solution:
(a) Since the degree of the numerator is not less than the degree of the denominator,
begin by dividing the denominator into the numerator, obtaining a quotient and a
remainder: x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x +
c
( x − a)( x − b) d x .
(b) Expand the fraction into partial fractions. Assume that
c
( x − a)( x − b) =
A
x − a+
B
x − b,
take to a common denominator, and equate the resulting polynomials:
c = A · ( x − b) + B · ( x − a) .
(c) Now either equate coefficients of like powers of x, or, equivalently, give x succes-
sive values x = a and x = b:
c = A(a − b)
c = B(b − a) ⇒ A =
c
a − b
=
− B .
(d) The integration reduces to x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x +
c
a − b · 1
x − a − c
a − b · c
x − b
dx .
(e) Complete the integration: x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x2
2 +
c
a − b(ln( x − a) − ln( x − b)) + C
= x2
2 + c
a − bln x − a
x − b+ C ,
the correctness of which integration may be verified by diff erentiation of the func-
tion on the right.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 421/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5066
(f) Evaluate the definite integral
k
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx =
x2
2 +
c
a − b(ln | x − a| − ln | x − b|)
k
=
x2
2 +
c
a − bln
x − a
x − b
k
= 2 − k 2
2 +
c
a − bln
( − a)(k − b)
( − b)(k − a)
5. [4 MARKS] Showing all work, evaluate the integral
sin3 a x d x, where a is a positive
integer.
Solution: sin3 a x d x =
1 − cos2 ax
· sin a x d x
under substitution u = cos ax, where du = −a sin a x d x
=
(1 − u2)(−1
a) du
= −1
a
u − u3
3
+ C
= −
cos ax
a+
cos3 ax
3a+ C .
Thursday version
1. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
b
a
e√
t dt .
Solution: Begin with a substitution√
t = u, so t = u2, dt = 2u du. When t = a, u =√
a,
etc.: e
√ t dt =
2ueu du .
Now apply integration by parts:
U = u ⇒ dU = du
dV = 2eu du ⇒ V = 2eu 2ueu du = u · 2eu −
2eu du
= u · 2eu − 2eu + C = 2(u − 1)eu + C
= 2(√
t − 1)e√
t + C
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 422/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5067
The definite integral given is then equal to 2(√
t − 1)e√
t b
a.
2. [9 MARKS] Showing all your work, find a reduction formula for the integral
(ln(ax + 1))n dx
where a is a given, positive constant.
Solution: This problem is a slight generalization of Exercise 45, p. 481 in the textbook,
an odd-numbered problem for which there is a solution in the Student Solutions Manual,
and also hints on one of the CD-Roms supplied with the textbook.
(a) Introduce a symbol for the definite integral sought:
I n = (ln(ax + 1))n dx .
(b) Change the variable (a step which is helpful, but not necessary)
u = a x + 1 ⇒ du = a dx
I n = 1
a
(ln u)n du
(c) Integration by parts:
U = (ln u)n ⇒ dU = n(ln u)n−1 · 1
udV = 1 du
⇒ V = u
I n = u(ln u)n − n
(ln u)n−1 du
= (ax + 1)(ln(ax + 1))n − na
(ln(ax + 1))n−1 dx
= (ax + 1)(ln(ax + 1))n − na · I n−1
3. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
cos4 at dt , where a is a
given non-zero constant.
Solution: We have to apply the following double angle identity twice:
cos2θ = 2 cos2 θ − 1 .
cos4 atdt =
1 + cos2at
2
2
dt
= 1
4
cos2 2atdt + 2
cos2atdt +
1 dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 423/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5068
= 1
4
1 + cos4at
2
dt + 2 cos2at dt + 1 dt =
1
8 · 1
4asin4at +
1
2 · 1
2asin2at +
3
8t + C
= 1
32asin4at +
1
4asin 2at +
3
8t + C
which may be verified by diff erentiation. (Of course, the integral may be expressed in
other ways under transformation by trigonometric identities.)
4. [4 MARKS] Showing your work, evaluate the integral
dx
x√
x2 + a, where a is a given
positive integer, not a perfect square.
Solution: The surd in the denominator may be simplified by either a trigonometric or ahyperbolic substitution. For students in this course the trigonometric substitutions are
usually easier.
x =√
a · tan θ ⇒ dx =√
a sec2 θ d θ dx
x√
x2 + a=
sec2 θ d θ
tan θ · √ a · | sec θ | .
The actual substitution is given by θ = arctan x√ a
, valid for −π2
< x < π2
. In that interval
the secant function is positive, so the absolute signs may be dropped. The integral is
equal to
1√ a
csc θ d θ = 1√
aln | csc θ − cot θ | + C
= 1√
aln
sec θ − 1
tan θ
+ C
= 1√
aln
√
tan2 θ − 1
tan θ
+ C
= 1√
aln
√ x2 + a − √
a
x
+ C
which can be verified by diff erentiation.
5. [9 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
k
x( x − a)( x − b) + c
( x − a)( x − b) dx,
where a, b, k , are distinct constants such that a, b are not contained in the interval whose
end-points are k , , and c is a non-zero constant.
Solution: I will first determine an indefinite integral.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 424/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 425/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5070
E.1.4 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q4
Distribution Date: Posted on the Web on 06 April, 2007; corrected on 09 April, 2007.
Caveat lector! There could be misprints or errors in these draft solutions.
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of
the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. Each version of the quiz was graded
out of a maximum of 30 marks, but 2 of the versions had 5 problems and 2 had 4 problems.
All of the quizzes had a heading that included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [6 MARKS] Showing all of your work, find the length of the following curve for the
interval 0 < a ≤ u ≤ b : y = ln
eu + 1
eu − 1
.
Solution:
(a)
dy
dx=
eu − 1
eu + 1
eu(eu − 1) − (eu + 1)eu
(eu − 1)2
= − 2eu
e2u
−1
1 +
dy
dx
2
=
e2u + 1
e2u − 1
2
= coth2 u
(b)
arc length =
b
a
1 +
dy
dx
2
du =
b
a
| coth u| du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 426/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5071
(c) Successful completion of the integration: b
a
| coth u| du =
b
a
coth u du
since a < b
[ln sinh u]ba
= ln sinh b
sinh a= ln
eb − e−b
ea − e−a
0.0
2.5
−1.0
0.5
1.51.00.5
3.0
2.0
−0.5
1.5
1.0
0.0
−1.5
Figure 26: The limacon r = 1 + 2sin θ
2. [10 MARKS] (see Figure 26 on page 5071) The graph of the following curve is given.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 427/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5072
Showing detailed work, find the area that is enclosed between the inner and the outer
loops: r = a(1 + 2sin θ ), where a is a positive constant.Solution:
(a) Determination of the limits of integration: we need first to locate where the curve
crosses itself. Since its formula is in terms of sin θ , the curve is periodic with period
(at most) 2π. As θ ranges over the values from 0 to 2π, the values r (θ ) range over
uniquely determined values. How then can the curve cross itself? This can happen
either
i. at points (r (θ 1), θ 1) and (r (θ 1 + π), θ 1 + π) where r (θ 1 + π) = −r (θ 1); or
ii. at the pole, where r = 0 for two distinct values of θ .
The first possibility would, for the present curve, require that
1 + 2 sin(θ 1 + π) = − (1 + 2sin θ 1)
which is equivalent to
2 + 2sin θ 1 + 2 sin(θ 1 + π) = 0
which is equivalent to 2 = 0, a contradiction. Thus the present curve can cross
itself only at the pole. That occurs where 1 + 2 sin θ = 0, i.e., where sin θ = − 12
.
The values of θ satisfying this equation are 2nπ− π6
and (2n +1)π+ π6
, where n is any
integer. The outer loop of this lima¸con is traced out, for example, for
−π6
≤ θ
≤ 7π
6 .
The inner loop is traced for 7π6 ≤ θ ≤ 11π
6 .
(b) The area of the region bounded by the larger, outer loop is
a2
7π6
− π6
1
2 · (1 + 2sin θ )2 d θ
= a2
7π6
− π6
1
2 ·1 + 4sin θ + 4 sin2 θ
d θ
= a2
7π
6
−π6
1
2 · (1 + 4sin θ + 2 − 2cos2θ ) d θ
= a2
2
7π6
− π6
(3 + 4sin θ − 2cos2θ ) d θ
= a2
2 [3θ − 4cos θ − sin2θ ]
7π6
− π6
= a2
2
7π
2 − 4cos
7π
6 − sin
7π
3
− a2
2
−π
2 − 4cos
−π
6 − sin
−π
3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 428/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5073
= a2 2π + 3
√ 3
2 .
(c) The area of the inner loop is
a2
11π6
7π6
1
2 · (1 + 2sin θ )2 d θ
= a2
2 [3θ − 4cos θ − sin2θ ]
11π6
7π6
= a2
2
11π
2 − 4cos
11π
6 − sin
11π
3
− a2
2
7π
2 − 4cos
7π
6 − sin
7π
3
= a2π −
3√
3
2 .
(d) The area of the region between the loops is the excess of the area inside the outer
loop over the area inside the inner loop, i.e.,
a2
2π +
3√
3
2
−π − 3
√ 3
2
= a2(π + 3
√ 3) .
Note that a cleaner way of solving this problem would have been to first integrate
from 0 to 2π, which would give the area between the loops plus twice the area
inside the smaller loop; and then to subtract twice the area inside the smaller loop.
This method is better because the first integral is very easy to evaluate, since theperiodic terms contribute nothing.
This curve is discussed in Exercise 10.4.21, on page 683 of the textbook, and is solved
in the Student Solutions Manual and also on one of the CD-Roms which accompany the
textbook.
3. [4 MARKS] Showing full details of your work, find the exact length of the curve x =
et + e−t , y = a − 2t , 0 ≤ t ≤ b, where a, b are constants.
Solution:
dxdt
2
+
dydt
2
=et − e−t
2 + 4
=et + e−t 2
arc length =
b
0
et + e−t dt
=et − e−t b
0 = eb − e−b = 2 sinh b .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 429/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5074
4. [4 MARKS] Find the value of the limit for the sequence. If it diverges, prove that fact:arctan
3n
3n + 1
.
Solution: As n → ∞, 3n3n+1
= 1 − 13n+1
→ 1. Since the arctangent function is continuous
at the point 1, the limit of the sequence is the arctangent of 1, i.e., π4
.
5. [6 MARKS] The given curve is rotated about the y-axis. Find the area of the resulting
surface: x = 1
2√
2
y2 − ln y
, (1 ≤ y ≤ a), where a is a real constant greater than 1.
Solution:
(a)
dxdy
= 12
√ 2
2 y − 1
y
1 +
dx
dy
2
= 1 + 1
8
4 y2 +
1
y2 − 4
= 1
8
4 y2 +
1
y2 + 4
=
1
2√
2
2 y +
1
y
2
(b)
surface area =
a
1
2π x
1 +
dx
dy
2
dy
= π
4
a
1
y2 − ln y
2 y +
1
y
dy
= π
4
a
1
2 y3 + y − 2 y ln y − ln y
y
dy
= π
4 y4
2 +
y2
2 − 1
2(ln y)2
a
1
− π
2 a
1
y ln y dy
(c) One way to integrate
y ln y dy is by parts, with u = ln y, v = y: u = 1 y
, v = y2
2 ,
y ln y dy =
y2
2 · ln y −
y
2 dy
= y2
4(2 ln y − 1) + C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 430/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 431/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5076
(a)
dy
dx=
1
2
x − 1
x
1 +
dy
dx
2
= 1 + 1
4
x2 +
1
x2 − 2
= 1
4
x2 +
1
x2 + 2
=
1
2
x +
1
x
2
(b)
surface area =
b
a
2π y
1 +
dy
dx
2
dx
= π
b
a
x2
4 − ln x
2
x +
1
x
dx
= π
b
a
x3
4 +
x
4 − x ln x
2 − ln x
2 x
dx
= π 1
16
x4 + x2
8 − 1
4
(ln x)2b
a −π
b
a
x ln x dx
(c) One way to integrate
x ln x dx is by parts, with u = ln x, v = x: u = 1 x
, v = x2
2 ,
x ln x dx =
x2
2 · ln x −
x
2 d x
= x2
4(2 ln x − 1) + C .
Another way is to use the substitution w = x2, so dw = 2 x dx, ln w = 2 ln x:
x ln x dx =
ln w
2 · dw
2 = 1
4
ln w dw = 1
4w (ln w − 1) + C etc.
Thus the surface area is
π
x4
16 +
x3
8 − 1
4(ln x)2 − x2
4(2 ln x − 1)
b
a
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 432/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5077
3. [4 MARKS] Find the exact length of the curve given by
x = et cos t y = et sin t (0 ≤ t ≤ a)
where a is a positive constant.
Solution:
(a)
dx
dt = et (cos t − sin t )
dy
dt = et (sin t + cos t )
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
= e2t (2 cos2 t + 2sin2 t ) = 2e2t
(b) The arc length is a
0
√ 2et dt =
√ 2(ea − 1) .
4. [10 MARKS] Working only with polar coordinates, find the area of the region that lies
inside the first curve and outside the second curve: r = b sin θ , r = a, where a and b are
positive constants.
Solution:
(a) Both of these curves are circles; we need to determine the coordinates of the points
of intersection. Solving the equations yields
r = a sin θ = a
b .
One point of intersection will be (r , θ ) =a, arcsin a
b
. Another point of intersection
will be (r , θ ) =
a, π − arcsin ab
— remember that the values of the arcsine function
are in the interval −π2
, π2 . It appears from a drawing that we have all the points of
intersection. If we solve the equation r = −a with r = b sin θ we obtain preciselythe same points, albeit with diff erent coordinates. If we attempt to replace the
equation r = b sin θ with that obtained under the identification (r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π)
there is no change. This algebraic investigation discloses all possible points of
intersection except the pole, which must be checked separately. But the pole cannot
lie on r = a, since the pole has first coordinate 0 always. Thus we have, indeed,
found all the points of intersection.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 433/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5078
(b) The area bounded by the arcs can be considered to consist of the disk r = b sin θ
diminished by a sector of the circle r = a for arcsin
a
b ≤ θ ≤ π − arcsin
a
b , togetherwith two small segments of the disk r = b sin θ bounded by the rays θ = arcsin a
b
and θ = π − arcsin ab
. What I have provided is one prescription for computing the
area. An easier way would be to take the integral
1
2
π−arcsin ab
arcsin ab
(b sin θ )2 − a2
d θ
=
π2
arcsin ab
(b sin θ )2 − a2
d θ
by symmetry around the line θ = π2
= π
2
arcsin ba
b2
1 − cos2θ 2
− a2
d θ
=
π2
arcsin ba
b2
2 − a2
− b2
2 cos2θ
d θ
=
b2
2 − a2
θ − b2
4 sin2θ
π2
arcsin ba
= b2 − 2a2
2
π
2 − arcsin
a
b
+
a
2
√ b2 − a2
5. [6 MARKS] Determine whether the series is convergent or divergent. If it is convergent,
find its sum. Otherwise prove that it is divergent:∞
n=1
b
n(n + a)
, where a, b are positive
integers.
Solution:
(a) Expand the general term into partial fractions: there exist constants A, B such that
b
n(n + a) =
A
n+
B
n + a.
To determine the coefficients A, B we can proceed in several ways. If we take the
fractions to a common denominator n(n + a), we obtain the polynomial identity
b = A · ( N + A) + b · a .
In this identity, if we set the variable n equal to −a, we obtain that b = B(−a), so
B = −ba
; and, setting n = 0, we obtain A = ba
, hence
b
n(n + a) =
b
a
1
n− 1
n + a
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 434/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5079
(b) For sufficiently large N the N th partial sum is equal to
N n=1
b
n(n + a)
= b
a
1
1 +
1
2 + . . . +
1
a − 1 − 1
N + 1 − 1
N + 2 − . . . − 1
N + a
→ b
a
1
1 +
1
2 + . . . +
1
a − 1 − 0 − 0 − . . . − 0
as N → ∞. Hence the series converges to the sum
b
a1
1 +
1
2 + . . . +
1
a − 1
.
Convergence could be proved in other ways, thereby earning the student part marks. For
example, using the Comparison or Limit Comparison Tests, or the Integral Test.
Wednesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing detailed work, find all points diff erent from the origin on the
following curve where the tangent is horizontal; a is a positive constant:
x = a(cos θ
−cos2 θ ), y = a(sin θ
−sin θ cos θ ) .
Solution:
(a)
dx
d θ = a (− sin θ − 2cos θ (− sin θ ))
= a(sin θ )(2 cos θ − 1)
dy
d θ = a
− cos θ + 2cos2 θ − 2sin2 θ
= a − cos θ + 2cos2 θ
−1
= a(2 cos θ + 1)(cos θ − 1)
Actually, you weren’t expected to find dxdt
.
(b) There will be a horizontal tangent at the point with parameter value t if dy
dx = 0,
i.e., if
dy
d θ
dxd θ
= 0, implying that dy
d θ must be 0, provided dx
d θ 0 at the same value of t .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 435/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 436/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5081
⇒ dx
d θ
2
+ dy
d θ
2
= 9a2 sin2 θ
·cos2 θ
· cos2 θ + sin2 θ = 9a2 sin2 θ cos2 θ .
The curve is in the first quadrant when both coordinates are positive; as each of these is
a cube of a sine or cosine, this means that the portion of the curve in the first quadrant is
that given by 0 ≤ θ ≤ π2
. The length of the arc is
π2
0
9a2 sin2 θ cos2 θ d θ =
π2
0
3a sin θ · cos θ d θ = 3a
sin2 θ
2
π2
0
= 3a
2 .
3. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region that lies inside both of the following curves
r = a + 2sin θ , r = a − 1, where a is a suitable positive constant.
Solution:
(a) Determination of the limits of integration: we need first to locate where the curves
cross. We begin by solving the two given equations, and find that
sin θ = −1
2 ⇒ θ =
7π
6 or
11π
6
or any angle obtained from these by adding an integer multiple of 2π. This yields
the points a − 1,
7π
6
,
a − 1,
11π
6
.
Students weren’t expected to pursue this question further. Strictly speaking, they
should then have solved r = a + 2sin θ , r = −(a − 1), which would have yielded no
points; then solved r = −a + 2sin θ , r = a − 1, which would again yield no points;
then r = −a + 2 sin θ , r = −(a − 1), which would have yielded the 2 points already
found.
(b) This problem could then be approached in several ways. To find the area “directly”
would require finding the sum of the integrals
1
2
7π6
− pi6
(a − 1)2 d θ
and1
2
11π6
7 pi6
(a + 2sin θ )2 d θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 437/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 438/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5083
similarly, the second series sums to 1a−1
. Hence the given series sums to the sum of these
limits, i.e. 1
b − 1 +
1
a − 1 =
a + b − 2
(a − 1)(b − 1) .
Thursday version
1. [10 MARKS] The curve x = a(1 − 2cos2 t ), y = (tan t )(1 − 2cos2 t ), where a is a
given positive integer, crosses itself at some point ( x0, y0). Showing all your work, find
the point of crossing, and the equations of both tangents at the point. (In determining
the point of crossing you are expected to investigate the parametric functions: it is not
sufficient to simply plot a finite number of points on the curve.)
Solution:
(a) Since the functions are all periodic with period π, it suffices to take an interval of
this length for t , and that will reveal all aspects of the behavior of this curve. (More
precisely, the tangent function has period π, and, while the cosine function has
period 2π, its square has period π.) So, without limiting generality, let’s consider
−π2 ≤ t ≤ π
2: we have to exclude both end points of this interval, since the tangent
function is not defined at either of them.
Suppose that the curve crosses itself at the points with parameter values t = t 1 and
t = t 2; without limiting generality, we can assume that these parameter values have
been so labelled that t 1 < t 2. Since the x-coordinates will need to be the same,
a(1 − 2cos2 t 1) = a(1 − 2cos2 t 2) (108)
so
cos t 1 = ±cos t 2 . (109)
Since the y-coordinates must also coincide, we also have
(tan t 1)(1 − 2cos2 t 1) = (tan t 2)(1 − 2cos2 t 2) (110)
which implies that either
cos2
t 1 = cos2
t 2 =
1
2 , (111)
or
tan t 1 = tan t 2 . (112)
In the interval we have chosen for t , the cosines are always positive; the only solu-
tion to (111) is t 1 = −π4
, t 2 = + π4
. In that same interval for t there will be no solu-
tions to (112), since the tangent function is increasing there. Thus the only possible
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 439/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5084
crossing points are t = ± π4
, and the point of crossing is the origin, ( x, y) = (0, 0).
While it isn’t required in the solution, note that as t → ±π
2 , x → 1: this curve isasymptotic to the vertical line x = 1.
(b) Tangent at the point with parameter value t = −π4
:
dx
dt = 4a(cos t )(sin t ) = 2a sin 2t = −2a
y = (tan t )(1 − 2cos2 t ) = tan t − sin2t
dy
dt = sec2 t − 2cos2t = 2 − 0
dy
dx=
dy
dt
dx
dt
= − 2
2a= −1
a,
and the tangent has equation y = − xa
.
(c) Tangent at the point with parameter value t = π4
:
dx
dt = 4a(cos t )(sin t ) = 2a sin2t = 2a
dy
dt = sec2 t − 2cos2t = 2 − 0
dy
dx=
dy
dt
dxdt
= 2
2a=
1
a,
and the tangent has equation y =
x
a .
2. [5 MARKS] Showing detailed work, find the surface area generated by rotating the
following curve about the y-axis.
x = at 2 , y = bt 3 , 0 ≤ t ≤ 5.
Solution:
dx
dt = 2at
dy
dt = 3bt 2
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
= 4a2t 2 + 9b2t 4
area about y-axis = 2π
5
0
at 2√
4a2t 2 + 9b2t 4 dt
= 2πa
5
0
t 3√
4a2 + 9b2t 2 dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 440/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5085
Under the substitution u = 4a2 + 9b2t 2,
du = 18b2t dt
2πa
5
0
t 3√
4a2 + 9b2t 2 dt = aπ
81b4
4a2+225b2
4a2
(u32 − 4a2u
12 ) du
= πa
81b4
2
5u
52 − 8a2
3 u
32
4a2+225b2
4a2
= 2πa
(81)(15)b4
(4a2 + 225b2)
32 (2a2 + 675b2) − 16a5
= ...
3. [10 MARKS] There is a region in the first quadrant that is bounded by arcs of both of
the following curves. Showing your work in detail, find the area of the region:
r 2 = a sin 2θ r 2 = a cos2θ .
Solution:
(a) The given curves are expressed only in terms of sine and cosine of 2θ . The given
functions are periodic with period π. When, for either of these curves, we permit
θ to range over an interval of length π, we will trace out the entire curves. The
intersections of the curves in the first quadrant will be where sin 2θ = cos2θ is
positive: thus the only point we have found by this algebraic solution of the two
equations is at θ = π8 .
However there are other ways in which curves can intersect, since points have
infinitely many diff erent sets of polar coordinates. If we transform either of the
given equations under the substitution (r , θ ) → (−r , θ + π), we find that there is
no change in the equation. Thus we haven’t missed any points because of the
convention that permits the first coordinate to be negative.
But there is another situation that leads to multiple sets of coordinates; that is at the
pole, where the second — angular — coordinate is totally arbitrary; the pole can
lie on a curve simply because of the fact that its distance coordinate r = 0, with no
reference to θ . To determine whether the pole lies on a curve we must investigate
whether the equation is satisfied by r = 0 with any value of θ . We find the curver 2 = a sin2θ does contain the pole: when r = 0 the equation is satisfied by any θ
such that sin 2θ = 0; so two solutions are θ = 0 and θ = π2
. Similarly, the pole lies
on the curve r 2 = a cos2θ with θ = π4
. I have given only the coordinates in the first
quadrant. To summarize: there are 2 intersection points in the first quadrant:
(r , θ ) =
a
12 2− 1
4 , π
4
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 441/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 442/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5087
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to onetypical variety.
Monday version
1. [5 MARKS] If
c a
f ( x) dx = k and
c b
f ( x) dx = , find
b a
f ( x) dx. Show your work.
Solution:
(a)c
a
f ( x) dx =
b a
f ( x) dx +
c b
f ( x) dx .
(b) Hencec
b
f ( x) dx =
c a
f ( x) dx −b
a
f ( x) dx .
(c)
= k − .
2. [5 MARKS] Find an antiderivative of the integrand of the integral a
0√ x dx, and then
use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to evaluate the integral. You are not expected
to simplify your numerical answer, but no marks will be given unless all your work is
clearly shown.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 443/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5088
(a) One antiderivative of x12 is
112
+ 1· x 1
2+1 =
2
3 x
32 .
(b) a
0
√ x dx =
2
3 x
32
a
0
= 2
3
a
32 − 0
=
2
3a
32 .
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, diff erentiate the function g( x) =
x4 tan x
1√ 2 + t 2
dt .
Solution:
(a) First split the interval of integration into 2 parts at a convenient place:
g( x) =
0 tan x
1√ 2 + t 2
dt +
x4 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt .
(b) Then reverse the limits in the first summand and change its sign, so that the variable
limit is the upper one:
g( x) = −tan x 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt +
x4 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt .
(c) Denote the upper limit of the first integral by u = tan x. Then
d
dx
tan x 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt = d
du
u 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt · du
dx
= 1√
2 + u2· sec2 x
=
2sec x
·tan x
√ 2 + tan2 x =
2sec x
·tan x
√ 1 + sec2 x .
(d) Denote the upper limit of the second integral by v = x4. Then
d
dx
x4 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt = d
dv
v 0
1√ 2 + t 2
dt · dv
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 444/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5089
= 1
√ 2 + v2
·4 x3
= 4 x3
√ 2 + x8
.
(e) Henced
dxg( x) = −2sec x · tan x√
2 + tan2 x+
4 x3
√ 2 + x8
.
4. [10 MARKS] If F ( x) =
x
1
f (t ) dt , where f (t ) =
t 2
1
a + ub
udu and a, b are constants,
find F (2).
Solution:
(a) Applying Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem yields
F ( x) = f ( x) =
x2
1
a + ub
udu .
(b) A second application of Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem yields
F ( x) = f ( x) = d
dx x2
1
a + ub
udu .
(c) Denote the upper index of the last integral by v = x2.
(d)
d
dx
x2
1
a + ub
udu =
d
dx
v
1
a + ub
udu
= d
dv
v
1
a + ub
u du · dv
dx
= a + vb
v· dv
dx
= a + vb
v· 2 x
= a + x2b
x2 · 2 x
=2
a + x2b
x .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 445/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5090
Tuesday version
1. [5 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
g( x) =
a
x
b tan(t ) dt ,
(where a and b are constants). Then use Part 2 of the Fundamental Theorem to evaluate
g( x), by first verifying carefully that ln | sec x| is an antiderivative of tan x.
Solution:
(a) Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral as a
function of its upper index of integration. Here the variable is the lower index of
integration.
d
dx
a
x
b tan(t ) dt
= d
dx
− x
a
b tan(t ) dt
= − d
dx
x
a
b tan(t ) dt
= −b tan x .
Some students may quote a variant of Part 1 which gives the derivative of a definite
integral with respect to the lower index, and this should be accepted if work has
been shown.
(b) Students were expected to first find the derivative of ln | sec x|. Since this is a com-
position of 2 functions, the Chain Rule will be needed. Let u = sec x. Then
d
dxln | sec x| =
d
duln |u| · d
dxsecx
= 1
u· sec x tan x
= 1
sec x ·sec x tan x
= tan x .
Hence
g( x) = b ln | sec t |a x = b ln
sec a
sec x
= b ln
cos x
cos a
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 446/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5091
2. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the limit by first recognizing the sum as a Riemann sum for a
function defined on [0, 1]:
limn→∞
1
n
7
n+
14
n+
21
n+ . . . +
7n
n
.
Solution:
(a) We are told to take the interval of integration to be [0, 1]; when this is divided into
n equal parts, each has length ∆ x = 1
n. Such a factor has been explicitly written in
the sum.
(b) The typical summand is — aside from the common factor 1n — of the form 7i
n .
Since the distance of the left end-point of the ith subinterval from 0 is i∆ x = in
, we
may interpret
7i
n =
√ 7 x .
(c) Thus the limit must be equal to 1
0
√ 7 x dx =
√ 7 · 2
3 · x 3
2
1
0
= 2
3
√ 7.
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
g( x) =
√ x
a
b cos t
t dt ,
where a, b are constants.
Solution:
(a) Denote the upper index of the integral by u( x) =√
x.
(b) Then
d
dx
g( x) = d
dx
√ x
a
b cos t
t
dt
= d
dx
u( x)
a
b cos t
t dt
= d
du
u( x)
a
b cos t
t dt · du( x)
dx
= b cos u
u· du( x)
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 447/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5092
= b cos u
u·
1
2 √ x= b
cos√
x√ x
· 1
2√
x
= b cos
√ x
2 x
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine all values of x where the curve y = x
0
1
1 + at + bt 2 dt is concave downward, where a, b are constants.
Solution:
(a) By Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem,
y( x) = 1
1 + ax + bx2 .
(b) Diff erentiating a second time yields
y( x) = d
dx
1
1 + ax + bx2
= −
11 + ax + bx2
2 ·
d
dx1
+ax
+bx
2= − a + 2bx
1 + ax + bx22
.
(c) The curve is concave downward where y < 0:
− a + 2bx1 + ax + bx2
2 > 0 ⇔ −(a + 2bx) > 0
since the denominator is a square, hence positive
⇔ 2bx <
−a
⇔
x < − a2b when b > 0 x > − a
2b when b < 0
never concave upward when b = 0
Wednesday version
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 448/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5093
1. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
πb
πa
sin t dt .
Solution:
(a) An antiderivative of sin t is − cos t .
(b)πb
πa
sin t dt = [− cos t ]πbπa
(c) Your answer should be simplified as much as possible.
2. [5 MARKS] Evaluate the following limit by first recognizing the sum as a Riemann
sum for a function defined on [0, 1]: limn→∞
ni=1
i8
n9. A full solution is required — it is not
sufficient to write only the value of the limit.
Solution:
(a) We are told to take the interval of integration to be [0, 1]; when this is divided into
n equal parts, each has length ∆ x = 1
n.
(b) The typical summand is — aside from the common factor 1n
— of the form
in
8
.
Since the distance of the left end-point of the ith subinterval from 0 is i∆ x = i
n, we
may interpret
i
n
8
= x8 .
(c) Thus the limit must be equal to
1
0
x8 dx = 1
9 x9
1
0
= 1
9 .
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivative
of the function
bx cos x
cos (t c) dt , where a, b, c are real numbers.
Solution:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 449/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5094
(a) The Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral with respect to
the upper limit of integration, when the lower limit is constant. The given integralmust be expressed in terms of such specialized definite integrals.
bx cos x
cos (t c) dt =
0 cos x
cos (t c) dt +
bx 0
cos (t c) dt
= −cos x 0
cos (t c) dt +
bx 0
cos (t c) dt
(b) For the summand
bx
0
cos (t
c
) dt , let u = b x. Then
d
dx
bx 0
cos (t c) dt = d
dx
u 0
cos (t c) dt
= d
du
u 0
cos (t c) dt · du
dx
= cos (uc) · b
= cos ((bx)c)
·b
(c) For the summand
cos x 0
cos (t c) dt , let v = cos x.
d
dx
cos x 0
cos (t c) dt = d
dx
v 0
cos (t c) dt
= d
dv
v 0
cos (t c) dt · dv
dx
= cos (vc
) · (− sin x)= cos (cosc x) · (− sin x)
(d)bx
cos x
cos (t c) dt = −cos (cosc x) · (− sin x) + cos ((bx)c) · b .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 450/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5095
4. [10 MARKS] Let f ( x) =
0 if x < 0
x if 0 ≤ x ≤ a2a − x if a < x < 2a
0 if x > 2a
and g( x) = x
0 f (t ) dt , where a is
a positive constant. Showing all your work, find a formula for the value of g( x) when
a < x < 2a.
Solution:
(a) The interval where we seek a formula is the third interval into which the domain
has been broken. For x in this interval the integral can be decomposed into
x
0
f (t ) dt = a
0
f (t ) dt + x
a
f (t ) dt .
The portion of the definition of f for x < 0 is of no interest in this problem, since
we are not finding area under that portion of the curve; the same applies to the
portion of the definition for x > 2a.
(b) a
0
f (t ) dt =
a
0
t dt
= t 2
2 t =a
t =0
= a2
2 .
(c) x
a
f (t ) dt =
x
a
(2a − t ) dt
=
2at − t 2
2
t = x
t =a
=
2ax − x2
2
−
2a2 − a2
2
.
(d)
g( x) = a2
2 +
2ax − x2
2
−
2a2 − a2
2
= 2ax − x2
2 − a2 .
Thursday version
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 451/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5096
1. [5 MARKS] Use Part 2 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to evaluate the integralbπ
aπ
cos θ d θ , where a, b are given integers. No marks will be given unless all your work
is clearly shown. Your answer should be simplified as much as possible.
Solution:
(a) One antiderivative of cos θ is sin θ .
(b)bπ
aπ
cos θ d θ = [sin θ ]bπaπ = sin(bπ) − sin(aπ) .
(c) Students were expected to observe that the value of the sine at the given multiples
of π is 0, so the value of the definite integral is 0.
2. [5 MARKS] Express limn→∞
ni=1
axi sin xi ∆ x as a definite integral on the interval [b, c],
which has been subdivided into n equal subintervals.
Solution: c
b
ax sin x dx .
3. [10 MARKS] Use Part 1 of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus to find the derivativeof the function
g( x) =
bx
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt ,
where a, b, c are positive integers.
Solution:
(a) The Fundamental Theorem gives the derivative of a definite integral with respect to
the upper limit of integration, when the lower limit is constant. The given integral
must be expressed in terms of such specialized definite integrals.
g( x) =
bx
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt =
0
ax
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt +
bx
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt
= − ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt +
bx
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 452/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5097
(b) For the summand
bx
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − c dt , let u = bx. Then
d
dx
bx 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt =
d
dx
u 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt
= d
du
u 0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt · du
dx
= u2 + c
u2
−c ·
du
dx
= u2 + c
u2 − c · b
= (bx)2 + c
(bx)2 − c· b
(c) For the summand
ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt , let u = ax. Then, analogously to the preceding
step,d
dx
ax
0
t 2 + c
t 2 − cdt =
(ax)2 + c
(ax)2 − c· a .
(d)
g( x) = (bx)2 + c
(bx)2 − c· b − (ax)2 + c
(ax)2 − c· a .
4. [10 MARKS] Find the derivative of the function f ( x) =
x3 √
x
√ t cos t dt .
Solution:
(a) First split the interval of integration into 2 parts at a convenient place:
f ( x) =
0 √
x
√ t cos t dt +
x3 0
√ t cos t dt
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 453/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5098
(b) Then reverse the limits in the first summand and change its sign, so that the variable
limit is the upper one:
f ( x) = −
√ x
0
√ t cos t dt +
x3 0
√ t cos t dt .
(c) Denote the upper limit of the first integral by u =√
x. Then
d
dx
√ x
0
√ t cos t dt =
d
dx
u 0
√ t cos t dt
= d
du
u 0
√ t cos t dt · du
dx
=√
u cos u · du
dx
=
√ x cos
√ x · 1
2√
x
= cos
√ x
2 x14
.
(d) Denote the upper limit of the second integral by v = x3. Then
d
dx
x3 0
√ t cos t dt =
d
dx
v 0
√ t cos t dt
= d
dv
v 0
√ t cos t dt · dv
dx
=√
v cos v · dv
dx
= √ x3 cos x3 · 3 x2
= 3 x72 cos
x3
(e) Henced
dx f ( x) = −cos
√ x
2 x14
+ 3 x72 cos
x3
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 454/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5099
E.2.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2
Distribution Date: Mounted on the Web on Monday, March 03rd, 2008
Caveat lector! There could be misprints or errors in these draft solutions.
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of
the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating
about the line y = 1 the region bounded by the curves y = n√
x and y = x, where n is a
given positive integer.
Solution: A favoured method of solution was not prescribed.
Using the method of “washers”: (a) The solution I am giving is for the case where n
is even.
(b) Find the intersections of the curves bounding the region. Solving the 2 equa-
tions yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
(c) It’s not clear from the wording of the problem whether it was intended, in the
case of odd n, to permit the second intersection point ( x, y) = (−1, −1); the
decision was left to the individual TA’s. The remainder of this solution covers
the case of even n; for odd n this solution does not consider the solid generatedby rotating the region with vertices ( x, y) = (−1, −1), (0, 0).
(d) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revolution
is a horizontal line, the element of area being rotated is vertical. For arbitrary
x the lower point on the element is ( x, x); the upper point is ( x, n√
x). The
distances of these points from the axis are, respectively 1 − x and 1 − n√
x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 455/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5100
(e) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 − x)2 + (1 − n√ x)2
∆ x .
(f) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π
1
0
−(1 − x)2 + (1 − n
√ x)2
dx
= π
1
0
−2 x + x2 + 2 x
1n − x
2n
dx
= π − x2 + x2
3 +
2n
n + 1 x
n+1n − n
n + 2 x
n+2n
1
0
= π
−1 +
1
3 +
2n
n + 1 − n
n + 2
=
(n − 1)(n + 4)π
3(n + 1)(n + 2)
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) The solution I am giving is for the case
where n is even.
(b) Find the intersections of the curves bounding the region. Solving the 2 equa-
tions yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
(c) It’s not clear from the wording of the problem whether it was intended, in the
case of odd n, to permit the second intersection point ( x, y) = (−1, −1); the
decision was left to the individual TA’s. The remainder of this solution covers
the case of even n; for odd n this solution does not consider the solid generated
by rotating the region with vertices ( x, y) = (−1, −1), (0, 0).
(d) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revolution
is a horizontal line, the element of area being rotated is also horizontal. For
arbitrary y the left endpoint on the element is ( yn, y); the right endpoint is ( y, y).
The length of the element is, therefore, y− yn; the distances of the element from
the axis of symmetry is 1 − y.
(e) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 − y) · ( y − yn) · ∆ y .
(f) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π
1
0
(1 − y)( y − yn) dy
= 2π
1
0
− yn + yn+1 + y − y2
dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 456/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5101
= 2π − 1
n + 1
yn+1 + 1
n + 2
yn+2 + 1
2
y2
− 1
3
y31
0
= 2π
− 1
n + 1 +
1
n + 2 +
1
2 − 1
3
− 0
= 2π
1
6 − 1
(n + 1)(n + 2)
=
(n − 1)(n + 4)π
3(n + 1)(n + 2)
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
(a − t )(b + t 2) dt .
Solution:
(a) Expand the product in the integrand: (a − t )(b + t 2) dt =
ab − bt + at 2 − t 3
dt .
(b) Integrate term by term: ab − bt + at 2 − t 3
dt = ab · t − b
2 · t 2 +
a
3 · t 3 − 1
4 · t 4 + C .
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine a number b such that the line x = b
divides into two regions of equal area the region bounded by the curves x = ay2 and
x = k .
Solution: The solution is analogous (under the exchange x ↔ y) to that given for Prob-
lem 1 of the Tuesday quiz.
4. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, use a substitution to evaluate the indefinite integral e x
e x + adx, where a is a non-zero real number.
Solution:
(a) Try the substitution u = e x + a, so du = e x dx.
(b)
e x
e x + adx =
du
u= ln |u| + C = ln |e x + a| + C .
(If the constant a is positive, then the absolute signs are not required.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 457/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5102
Tuesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find a number b such that the line y = b divides
the region bounded by the curves y = ax2 and y = k into two regions with equal area,
where a, k are given positive constants.
Solution:
(a) Determine the range of values for integration by finding the intersections of the
bounding curves: solving the equations yields the points
∓
k
a, k
.
(b) Determine the portion of the full area which is below the line y = b. We begin by
repeating the calculation of the preceding part: the corner points have coordinates∓
b
a, b
. The area is
√ ba
−√
ba
(b − ax2) dx = 2
bx − ax3
3
√ ba
0
= 4
3b
b
a.
(c) As a special case of the foregoing, or by a separate calculation, we can conclude
that the area of the entire region is 4
3k
k
a.
(d) The condition of the problem is that
4
3b
b
a=
1
2 · 4
3k
k
a
which is equivalent to 4b3 = k 3, and implies that the line should be placed where
b = 2− 23 k .
2. [10 MARKS] The region bounded by the curves y = 5 and y = x2 − ax + b is rotated
about the axis x = −1. Showing all your work, find the volume of the resulting solid.
Solution: Because there are constraints on the constants, I will work just one variant,
with a = 3, b = 7.
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) To find the extremes of integration, we
solve the equations y = 5 and y = x2 − 3 x + 7, obtaining ( x, y) = (1, 5), (2, 5).
(b) The height of a vertical element of area which generates a cylindrical shell is,
at horizontal position x, 5 − ( x2 − 3 x + 7) = − x2 + 3 x − 2.
(c) The distance of that vertical element of area from the axis of revolution is 1+ x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 458/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5103
(d) The volume is given by the integral
2π
2
1
(1 + x)(− x2 + 3 x − 2) dx
(e) Evaluating the integral:
2π
2
1
(1 + x)(− x2 + 3 x − 2) dx
= 2π
2
1
− x3 + 2 x2 + x − 2
dx
= 2π −1
4
x4 + 2
3
x3 + 1
2
x2
−2 x
2
1
= 2π
−4 +
16
3 + 2 − 4 +
1
4 − 2
3 − 1
2 + 2
= 5π
6
Using the method of “washers” (a) To find the lowest point on the parabola, we solve
x2 − 3 x + 7 ≥ 0. This can be done by completing the square, or by using the
calculus to find the local minimum. We find it to be
3
2, 19
4
.
(b) The horizontal element generating the “washer” at height y extends between
the solutions in x to the equation y = x2 − 3 x + 7; these are
x =3 ±
4 y − 19
2 .
(c) The volume of the “washer” at height y is, therefore,
π
1 +
3 +
4 y − 19
2
2
−1 +
3 −
4 y − 19
2
2∆ y
= 5π 4 y − 19 ∆ y
(d) The volume is given by the integral 5π
5
194
4 y − 19 dy.
(e) Evaluation of the integral:
5π
5
194
4 y − 19 dy =
5π · 2
3 · 1
4(4 y − 19)
32
5
194
= 5π
6 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 459/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5104
3. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, use a substitution to evaluate the indefinite integral cosn x sin x dx, where n is a fixed, positive integer.
Solution:
(a) Use new variable u, where du = −sin x dx; one solution is u = cos x.
(b) cosn x sin x dx = −
un du
= − un+1
n + 1 + C
= − 1n + 1
cosn+1 x + C
4. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
xb + a +
1
x2 + 1
dx, (where
a and b are given positive integers).
Solution:
(a)
xb dx =
xb+1
b + 1 + C 1,
(b)
a dx = ax + C 2
(c)
1
x2 + 1 d x = arctan x + C 3
(d)
xb + a +
1
x2 + 1
dx =
xb+1
b + 1 + ax + arctan x + C .
Wednesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the volume of the solid obtained by rotating
about the line x =
−1 the region bounded by y = xn and x = yn, where n is a given
positive integer.
Solution:
Case I: n is even
Using the method of “washers”: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bound-
ing the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (1, 1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 460/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5105
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of revo-
lution is a vertical line, the element of area being rotated is horizontal. Forarbitrary y the farther endpoint on the element is ( y
1n , y); the nearer end-
point is ( yn, y). The distances of these points from the axis are, respectively
1 + n√
y and 1 + yn.
(c) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 + yn)2 + (1 + n
√ y)2
∆ y .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π
1
0
−(1 + y)2 + (1 + n
√ y)2
dy
= π 1
0
2 y
1n + y
2n − 2 yn − y2n
dy
= π
2n
n + 1 y
n+1n +
n
n + 2 y
n+2n − 2
n + 1 yn+1 − 1
2n + 1 y2n+1
1
0
= 2(n − 1)(3n2 + 7n + 3)π
(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) Find the intersections of the curves
bounding the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) =
(0, 0), (1, 1).
(b) Since the axis of revolution is a vertical line, the element of area being
rotated is also vertical. For arbitrary x the top endpoint on the element is( x, x
1n ); the lower endpoint is ( x, xn). The length of the element is, there-
fore, x1n − xn; the distance of the element from the axis of symmetry is
1 + x.
(c) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 + x) · x
1n − xn
.
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π
1
0
(1 + x)( x1n − xn) dx
= 2π
1
0
x
1n − xn + x
n+1n − xn+1
dx
= 2π
n
n + 1 − 1
n + 1 +
n
2n + 1 − 1
n + 2
= 2(n − 1)(3n2 + 7n + 3)π
(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 461/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5106
Case II: n is odd
Using the method of “washers”: (a) Find the intersections of the curves bound-ing the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) = (0, 0), (±1, ±1).
Here there is an issue of interpretation. The textbook usually permits the
word region to apply to one that may have more than one component;
some authors would not wish to apply the term in such a situation. I will
follow the textbook, and permit a region here to have two components.
(b) Find the inner and outer dimensions of the washer. Since the axis of rev-
olution is a vertical line, the element of area being rotated is horizontal.
But there are two kinds of elements, depending on whether y is positive
or negative. For arbitrary, positive y the farther endpoint on the element is
( y1n , y); the nearer endpoint is ( yn, y). The distances of these points from
the axis are, respectively 1 + n√ y and 1 + yn. For arbitrary, negative y the
nearer endpoint on the element is ( y1n , y); the farther endpoint is ( yn, y).
The distances of these points from the axis are, respectively 1 + n√
y and
1 + yn (both of which are less than 1).
(c) The volume of the “washer” is, therefore,
π−(1 + yn)2 + (1 + n
√ y)2
∆ y .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
π 1
−1−
(1 + y)2 + (1 + n√
y)2 dy
= π
1
0
2 y
1n + y
2n − 2 yn − y2n
dy
+π
0
−1
−2 y
1n − y
2n + 2 yn + y2n
dy
= π
2n
n + 1 y
n+1n +
n
n + 2 y
n+2n − 2
n + 1 yn+1 − 1
2n + 1 y2n+1
1
0
+π
− 2n
n + 1 y
n+1n − n
n + 2 y
n+2n +
2
n + 1 yn+1 +
1
2n + 1 y2n+1
0
−1
= 2(n − 1)(3n
2
+ 7n + 3)π(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
+ 2(n − 1)(n
2
+ 3n + 1)π(n + 1)(n + 2)(2n + 1)
= 4(n − 1)π
n + 1 .
Using the method of cylindrical shells: (a) Find the intersections of the curves
bounding the region. Solving the 2 equations yields the points ( x, y) =
(0, 0), (±1, ±1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 462/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5107
(b) Since the axis of revolution is a vertical line, the element of area being
rotated is also vertical. For arbitrary, positive x the top endpoint on the el-ement is ( x, x
1n ); the lower endpoint is ( x, xn); for arbitrary, negative x the
bottom endpoint on the element is ( x, x1n ); the upper endpoint is ( x, xn).
The length of the element is, therefore, x 1
n − xn; the distance of the ele-
ment from the axis of rotation is 1 + x.
(c) The volume of the cylindrical shell element of volume is, therefore,
2π(1 + x) · x 1
n − xn .
(d) Correctly evaluate the integral:
2π 1
−1(1 + x)
x 1n − xn
dx
= 2π
1
−1
x 1n − xn + x
n+1n − xn+1
dx
= 2π
n
n + 1 − 1
n + 1 +
n
2n + 1 − 1
n + 2
+2π
n
n + 1 − 1
n + 1 − n
2n + 1 +
1
n + 2
= 4(n − 1)π
n + 1
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the indefinite integral
sin2t
cos t dt .
Solution:
(a) Apply a “double angle” formula: sin2t
cos t dt =
2 sin t cos t
cos t dt = 2
sin t dt .
(b) Complete the integration:
2
sin t dt = −2cos t + C .
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the region bounded by the parabola
y = x2, the tangent line to this parabola at (a, a2), and the x-axis, (where a is a given real
number).
Solution: This area can be computed by integrating either with respect to y or with
respect to x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 463/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5108
Integrating with respect to y: (a) Since y = 2 x, the tangent line through (a, a2) has
equation y − a2 = 2a( x − a) ⇔ y = 2ax − a2 .
(b) To integrate with respect to y we need to express the equations of the parabola
and the line in the form
x = function of y .
The branch of the parabola to the right of the y-axis is x = √
y. The line has
equation x = y
2a+
a
2.
(c) The area of the horizontal element of area at height y is
y + a2
2a− √
y
∆ y.
(d) The area is the value of the integral a2
0
y + a2
2a− √
y
dy .
(e) Integration yields y2
4a+
ay
2 − 2
3 y
32
a2
0
=
1
4 +
1
2 − 2
3
a3 =
1
12 a3 .
Integrating with respect to x: (a) As above, the tangent line is y = 2ax − a2. Its
intercept with the x-axis is at x = a
2.
(b) The area of the vertical element of area at horizontal position x ≤ a
2 is x2 − 0
∆ x.
(c) The area of the vertical element of area at horizontal position x ≥ a2
is x2 − (2ax − a2)
( x − a)2 ∆ x.
(d) The area of the region is the sum a2
0
x2 dx +
a
a2
( x − a)2 dx .
(e) Integration yields x3
3
a
2
0
+−( x − a)3
3
a
a2
= a3
12 .
4. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the indefinite integral
seca x tan x dx,
where a is a constant, positive integer.
Solution:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 464/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5109
(a) Try the substitution given by du = sec x·tan x dx, of which one solution is u = sec x.
(b) seca x tan x dx =
ua−1 du =
ua
a+ C =
seca x
a+ C .
Some students may have integrated by sight.
Thursday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, use the method of cylindrical shells to find the
volume generated by rotating about the axis x = b the region bounded by the curves
y =√
x − 1, y = 0, x = a, where a, b are fixed real constants. b ≥√
a − 1 .
Solution:
(a) Solve equations to determine the limits of integration. Solving x = a with y =√ x − 1 yields the single point of intersection
a,
√ a − 1
.
(b) The horizontal element of area at height y which generates the cylindrical shell has
left endpoint (1 + y2, y) and right endpoint (a, y), so its length is a − (1 + y2).
(c) The distance of the horizontal element of area which generates the shell from the
axis of rotation is b − y.
(d) Set up the integral for the volume by cylindrical shells:
√ a−
1
0
(b − y)
a − (1 + y2)
dy .
(e) Evaluate the integral
√ a−1
0
(b − y)a − (1 + y2)
dy
=
√ a−1
0
b(a − 1) − (a − 1) y − by2 + y3
dy
=
b(a − 1) y − a
−1
2 y2
− b
3 y3
+
1
4 y4
√ a−1
0
= b(a − 1)32 − a − 1
2 (a − 1) − b
3(a − 1)
32 +
1
4(a − 1)2
= (a − 1)32
2
3 · b − 1
4
√ a − 1
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 465/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5110
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, use a substitution to evaluate the integral b
(1+ax)3 dx ,
where a, b are non-zero constants.Solution:
(a) A substitution which suggests itself is u = 1 + a x, implying that du = a dx, so
dx = 1a
du.
(b) b
(1 + ax)3 dx =
b
a
du
u3 = − b
2au−2 + C = − b
2a(1 + ax)2 + C .
3. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, use a substitution to evaluate the indefinite integral
t 2 cos a −t 3 dt , (where a is a given real number).
Solution:
(a) Try the substitution u = t 3.
(b) du = 3t 2 dt ⇒ t 2 dt = 13
du.
(c) t 2 cos
a − t 3
dt =
1
3 cos(a − u) du
=
−
1
3 sin(a
−u) + C
= −1
3 sin(a − t 3) + C .
(Some students may wish to employ a second substitution v = a − u. Alternatively,
a better substitution for the problem would have been to take u = a − t 3.)
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the region bounded by the
parabola x = y2, the tangent line to this parabola at (a2, a), and the y-axis, where a is a
fixed, positive real number.
Solution: The solution is analogous (under the exchange x ↔ y) to that given for Prob-
lem 3 of the Wednesday quiz.
E.2.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3
Release Date: Mounted on the Web on 05 April, 2008
These draft solutions could contain errors, and they must be subject to correction. Caveat
lector!
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 466/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5111
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled. Each
type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The order of the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had a heading that
included the instructions
• Time = 30 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
x5 ln(20 x) dx.
Solution:
(a) I will integrate by parts, setting u = ln(20 x), dv = x5 dx. Then du = dx
x, v =
x6
6 .
(b) x5 ln(20 x) dx = (ln(20 x)) ·
x6
6
− 1
6
x5 dx
= x6 ln(20 x)
6 − x6
36 + C .
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
1 − cot2 x
csc2 xdx.
Solution:
1 − cot2 x
csc2
x
dx = sin2 x − cos2 x
sin2
x · csc2
x
dx
=
sin2 x − cos2 x
dx
=
(− cos2 x) dx
= −1
2 sin 2 x + C .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 467/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 468/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5113
= cot θ + θ + C
= cos θ
sin θ + θ + C
= cos θ √
1 − cos2 θ + arccos
x
2 + C
=
x2
1 − x2
4
+ arccos x
2 + C
= x√
4 − x2+ arccos
x
2 + C .
Tuesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
e5 x cos(2 x) dx .
Solution:
(a) Use integration by parts. In this case the factors e5 x and cos 2 x are rendered neither
“more complicated” nor “simpler” under either integration or diff erentiation. Two
applications of integration by parts, with appropriate choices of functions, will
yield an equation that can be solved for the value of the indefinite integral. For the
first application take, for example, u = e5 x and dv = cos2 x. Then du = 5e5 x dx,
and v = 12
sin 2 x.
(b) e5 x cos(2 x) dx = e5 x · 1
2 sin 2 x − 5
2
e5 x sin 2 x dx . (113)
(c) Now we apply integration by parts to evaluate
e5 x sin 2 x dx, taking U = e5 x and
dV = sin 2 x. Then dU = 5e5 x dx, and V = −12
cos 2 x.
(d) e5 x sin(2 x) dx = e5 x ·
−1
2 cos 2 x
+
5
2
e5 x cos2 x dx . (114)
(e) Combining equations (113), (114) yields e5 x cos(2 x) dx = e5 x · 1
2 sin 2 x − 5
2
−e5 x · 1
2 · cos2 x +
5
2
e5 x sin2 x dx
= e5 x ·
1
2 · sin2 x +
5
4 cos 2 x
− 25
4
e5 x cos(2 x) dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 469/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5114
(f) Solving the last equation yields e5 x cos(2 x) dx =
1
29e5 x · (2sin2 x + 5cos2 x) + C .
2. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, use a substitution to change this integral into the
integral of a rational function; then integrate and express your solution in terms of x: 1 + 7e x
1 − e x dx .
Solution:
(a) Let u = e x, so du = e x dx.
(b) Then
1 + 7e x
1 − e x dx =
1 + 7u
1 − u· du
uand we proceed to expand the integrand into
a sum of partial fractions.
(c) Assuming that 1 + 7u
u(1 − u) =
A
u+
B
1 − u, and multiplying both sides by u(1 − u), we
obtain the identity in u 1 + 7u = A(1 − u) + Bu. Setting u = 0 and u = 1 yields the
equations 1 = A and 8 = B. We can now continue integration.
(d)
1
+7u
1 − udu =
1u
+ 81 − u
du
= ln |u| − 8 ln |1 − u| + C
= ln e x − 8 ln |1 − e x| + C
= x − 8 ln |1 − e x| + C
which solution can be checked by diff erentiation.
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
dx
x2 + 8 x + 17
2
d x.
Solution:
(a) Completing the square of the polynomial in the denominator, we obtain
x2 + 8 x + 17 =
x +
8
2
2
+
17 −
8
2
2 = ( x + 4)2 + 1 .
Accordingly, we can simplify the integral by taking u = x + 4, du = d x.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 470/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5115
(b) The preceding substitution is not sufficient, however. All we obtain is dx
x2 + 8 x + 172
dx =
duu2 + 1
2 .
We can simplify this further by taking u = tan θ , i.e., by taking θ = arctan u, so
d θ = du
1 + u2.
(c) du
1 + u2
2
=
sec2 θ
sec4 θ d θ
=
cos2 θ d θ
=
1 + cos2θ
2 d θ =
θ
2 +
sin 2θ
4 + C
= 1
2 arctan u +
u
2(1 + u2) + C
= 1
2
arctan( x + 4) +
x + 4
x2 + 8 x + 17
+ C
which can be verified by diff erentiation. You should always verify this type of
integration by diff erentiation, in order to locate silly algebra mistakes (or worse).
Wednesday version
1. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the indefinite integral
x cos(18 x) dx.
Solution:
(a) This can be solved using integration by parts. Define u = x, dv = cos(18 x) dx, so
du = d x and v = sin(18 x)
18 .
(b) x cos(18 x) dx = x · sin(18 x)
18 −
sin(18 x)
18
= x sin(18 x)
18 +
cos(18 x)
182 + C ,
which can be verified by diff erentiation.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 471/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5116
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral 1 − sin x
cos xdx.
Solution: 1 − sin x
cos xdx =
(sec x − tan x) dx
= ln | sec x + tan x| + ln | cos x| + C
= ln |(sec x + tan x) · (cos x)| + C
= ln |1 + sin x| + C = ln(1 + sin x) + C .
Note that the absolute signs are not needed, since 1 + sin x cannot be negative.
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
π3
π6
ln tan x
(sin x) · (cos x) d x.
Solution:
(a) In view of the complicated nature of the integrand, one would be advised to seek
a substitution that could render it more amenable. But the integrand involves both
sines and cosines. However, note that
(sin x)(cos x) = (tan x)(cos2 x) = tan x
sec2 x=
tan x
tan2 x + 1.
Taking u = tan x, we have du = sec2 x dx. When x = π
3, u =
√ 3; when x =
π
6,
u = 1√
3.
(b)
π3
π6
ln tan x
(sin x) · (cos x) d x
=
√ 3
1√ 3
ln uu
u2+1
duu2 + 1
=
√ 3
1√ 3
ln u
u du
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 472/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5117
(c) Now the integral looks as though it could be simplified by a substitution v = ln u,
so dv = du
u . When u = √ 3, v = ln 32 ; when u = 1√ 3 , v = −ln 32 .
(d)
√ 3
1√ 3
ln u
udu =
ln 22
− ln 32
v dv
=
v2
2
ln 32
− ln 32
= 0.
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
et √
49 − e2t dt .
Solution:
(a) Clearly a substitution of the form u = et is indicated, in order to simplify the
integrand. We find that du = et dt .
(b) We obtain
et
√ 49 − e2t dt =
√ 49 − u2 du. Now a trigonometric substitution
is indicated. Take u = 7 sin θ — more precisely, θ = arcsin u7
(the inverse cosine
could also have been used), so du = 7 cos θ d θ : √ 49 − u2 du = 49
cos2 θ d θ.
(c)
49
cos2 θ d θ =
49
2
(1 + cos2θ ) d θ
= 49
2(θ + sin θ · cos θ ) + C
= 49
2 arcsin
u
7 +
u
2
√ 49 − u2 + C
= 49
2 arcsin
et
7 +
et √ 49 − e2t
2 + C .
Thursday version
1. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
sin3 9 x dx.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 473/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5118
Solution: The integrand is an odd power of the sine function. I will substitute u = cos 9 x,
so du = −9sin9 x dx. sin3 9 x dx =
1 − u2
1
9
du
= −u
9 +
u3
27 + C
= −cos x
9 +
cos3 x
27 + C .
2. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
π2
π4
cot2 x dx. Your answer
should be simplified as much as possible; the instructors are aware that you do not have
the use of a calculator.
Solution:
(a) Recall that cot2 x = csc2 x − 1, and that d
dxcot x = −csc2 x.
(b)
π2
π4
cot2
x dx =
π2
π4
csc
2
x − 1
dx
= [− cot x − x]π4π2
.
(c) = −π
2 + 1 +
π
4 = 1 − π
4.
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral
√ 9 − x2
xdx.
Solution:
(a) To simplify the square root, substitute x = 3cos θ , i.e., θ = arccos x3
. Then dx =
−3sin θ d θ .
(b)
√ 9 − x2
xdx = −3
sin2 θ
cos θ d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 474/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5119
=
−3
1 − cos2 θ
cos θ
d θ
= −3
(sec θ − cos θ ) d θ
= −3 ln | sec θ + tan θ | + 3 sin θ + C
(c)
−3 ln | sec θ + tan θ | + 3sin θ + C = −3 ln
1 +
1 − x2
9
x3
+ 3
1 − x2
9 + C
= −3 ln3 +
√ 9
− x2
x + √ 9 − x2 + C
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following integral is con-
vergent or divergent. Evaluate it if it is convergent; in such a case you are expected to
simplify your answer as much as is consistent with not having the use of a calculator: 1
0
6
ln 7 x√
x
dx
Solution:
(a) Let’s look first at the associated indefinite integral,
ln 7 x√
xdx. The integrand
can be expressed as a product, in which one of the factors “simplifies” upon dif-
ferentiation, while the other does not become significantly “more difficult” upon
integration. So we will integrate by parts, taking u = ln 7 x, and dv = x− 12 dx. Then
du = 1 x
, and we may take v = 2√
x.
(b)
ln 7 x√
xdx = (ln7 x)(2
√ x) − 2
dx√
x
= (ln7 x)(2 √ x) − 4 √ x + C .
(c) The integrand is not defined at x = 0 in the given interval of integration. By the
definition of an improper integral, we have 1
0
ln 7 x√ x
dx = lima→0+
1
a
ln 7 x√ x
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 475/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5120
= lima
→0+ (ln7 x)(2
√ x) − 4
√ x
1
a
= lima→0+
(2ln7 − 4) − √ a · (2 ln(7a) − 4)
= 2 l n 7 − 4 − lim
a→0+(ln7a)(2
√ a)
(d) The limit can be expressed as that of a ratio where numerator and denominator both
become infinite. Thus l’Hospital’s Rule may be used:
lima→0+
(ln7a)(2√
a) = 2 lima→0+
ln 7a
a− 12
= 2 lima→0
+
1a
−12 a−3
2
= 2 lima→0+
(−2√
a) = 0.
Thus the original integral is convergent, and its value is 6(2 ln 7 − 4).
Problems not used
1. [10 MARKS] Make a substitution to express the integrand as a rational function, and
then evaluate the integral.
4
1
√ x
x − 16
d x .
Solution:
(a) Start by substituting u =√
x, so x = u2, dx = 2u du. When x = 1, u = 1; when
x = 4, u = 2.
(b) 4
1
√ x
x − 16 d x =
2
1
2u2
u2 − 36 du
= 2
12 +
72
u2
− 36 du
=
2
1
2 +
6
u − 6 − 6
u + 6
du
=u2 + 6 ln |u − 6| − 6 ln |u + 6|
2
1
= 3 + 6 ln 7
10 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 476/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5121
E.2.4 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q4
Release Date: Mounted on the Web on Wednesday, April 9th, 2008
These are draft solutions that were prepared when the quizzes were being designed. It was in-
tended that Teaching Assistants would consult these draft solutions when they graded their stu-
dents’ quizzes, and would report any errors or omissions. As the Teaching Assistants may be-
lieve that they are inhibited from communicating with the instructor who manages this course,
it is not clear that the solutions have been thoroughly checked. The solutions are being released
with the cautionary warning, Caveat lector! — Let the reader beware! Use them at your own
risk.
There were four diff erent types of quizzes, for the days when the tutorials are scheduled.
Each type of quiz was generated in multiple varieties for each of the tutorial sections. The
order of the problems in the varieties was also randomly assigned. All of the quizzes had aheading that included the instructions.
• Time = 45 minutes
• No calculators!
• Show all your work: marks are not given for answers alone.
• Enclose this question sheet in your folded answer sheet.
In the following I will either provide a generic solution for all varieties, or a solution to one
typical variety.
Monday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the length of the curve y = x5
30 +
1
2 x3 (1 ≤
x ≤ 2). Simplify your answer as much as possible; the instructors are aware that you do
not have the use of a calculator.
Solution:
dy
dx=
x4
6 − 3
2 x4
⇒ 1 +
dydx
2
=
1 + x8
36 + 9
4 x8 − 1
2
=
x8
36 +
9
4 x8 +
1
2 =
x4
6 +
3
2 x4
2
=
x4
6 +
3
2 x4
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 477/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5122
The absolute signs may be dropped, since the given square root is a sum of positive
multiples of even powers, and must be non-negative. The length is 2
1
x4
6 +
3
2 x4
dx =
x5
30 − 1
2 x3
2
1
= 353
240 .
2. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the surface obtained by rotating
x = 1
2
y2 + 2
32
(7 ≤ y ≤ 10) about the x-axis. Simplify your answer as much as
possible; the instructors are aware that you do not have the use of a calculator.
Solution:dx
dy=
1
3 · 3
2 · y2 + 2
12 · 2 y = y
y2 + 2 .
Thus 1 +
dx
dy
2
=
1 + y2(2 + y2) = y2 + 2 .
The area of the surface is
10
7 1 + y2
· (2π y) dy = 2π y2
2 +
y4
4 10
7
= 7701π
2 .
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area enclosed by the curve (in polar
coordinates) r = 7 + 2sin6θ .
Solution: The curve surrounds the pole, and is periodic with period 2π. The area may be
expressed as an integral over an interval of length 2π; for example, as
1
2 2π
0
(7 + 2sin6θ )2 d θ = 1
2 2π
0
(49 + 28sin6θ + 4sin2 6θ ) d θ
= 1
2
2π
0
(49 + 28sin6θ + 2(1 − cos 12θ )) d θ
= 1
2
49θ − 28
6 cos6θ + 2θ − 2
12 sin 12θ
2π
0
= 1
2(51)(2π) = 51π .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 478/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5123
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the exact length of the curve x = 6 + 3t 2,
y = 2 + 2t 3
(0 ≤ t ≤ 1).Solution:
dx
dt = 6t
dy
dt = 6t 2
dy
dx=
dy
dt dx
dt
= t
⇒
1 +
dy
dx
2
=√
1 + t 2
Arc Length =
1
0
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
=
1
0
√ 36t 2 + 36t 4 dt
= 6
1
0
t √
1 + t 2 dt
= 6 · 1
2 · 2
3
1 + t 2 3
2 1
0= 2
1 + t
2 32 1
0
= 22
32 − 1
= 4
√ 2 − 2 .
5. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, sum a series in order to express the following
number as a ratio of integers: 0.35 = 0.35353535 . . ..
Solution:
0.35 = 35
100
1 +
1
100 +
1
1002 +
1
1003 + . . .
=
35100
1 − 1100
= 35
99 .
Tuesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the length of the curve x = 1
3
√ y · ( y − 3)
(49 ≤ y ≤ 64). Simplify your answer as much as possible; the instructors are aware that
you do not have the use of a calculator.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 479/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5124
Solution:
dx
dy=
1
3 · 3
2
√ y − 3
3 · 1
2 y− 1
2 = 1
2
√ y − 1√
y
⇒
1 +
dx
dy
2
=
1 +
1
4
y +
1
y− 2
=
1
4
y +
1
y+ 2
= 1
4 √
y + 1√
y2
= 1
2
√ y +
1√ y
.
The absolute signs may be dropped, since the square root is non-negative. The length is
1
2
64
49
√ y +
1√ y
dy =
1
2
2
3 · y 3
2 + 2√
y
64
49
=
1
3 · y 3
2 + √
y
64
49
= 172
3 .
2. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the surface obtained by rotatingthe curve x = 6 + 2 y2 (0 ≤ y ≤ 3) about the x-axis.
Solution:
dx
dy= 4 y
⇒
1 +
dx
dy
2
=
1 + 16 y2
⇒ Area = 3
0 1 + 16 y2 · 2π y dy
= π
24
(1 + 16 y2)
32
3
0
= π
24
(145)
32 − 1
.
3. [15 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the region that lies inside the curve
r = 15 cos θ , and outside the curve r = 5 + 5cos θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 480/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5125
Solution: The first curve is a circle; the second is a cardioid whose axis of symmetry
is the initial ray. If we solve the equations we find that the curves intersect at θ =± arccos 12
= ±π3
. They also intersect at the pole, which appears on the circle when
θ = π2
, etc., and on the cardioid when θ = π, etc. The region whose area we seek lies
between the two curves when −π3 ≤ θ ≤ π
3 and r is positive. Integration shows the area
to be
1
2
π3
− π3
(15 cos θ )2 − (5 + 5cos θ )2
d θ
= 25
2
π3
− π3
8cos2 θ − 2cos θ − 1
d θ
= 252
π3
− π3
(4(1 + cos2θ ) − 2cos θ − 1) d θ
= 25
2
π3
− π3
(3 + 4cos2θ − 2cos θ ) d θ
= 25[3θ + 2sin2θ − 2sin θ ]π3
0
= 25π +
√ 3 −
√ 3
= 25π .
4. [15 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the length of the loop of the curve x = 18t −6t 3, y = 18t 2.
Solution:
dx
dt = 18 − 18t 2
dy
dt = 36t
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
=
182
1 − t 2
2+ 362t 2 = 18
1 + t 2
.
We must determine where the curve crosses itself. The student was expected to show that
she knew how to find this crossing point systematically, not just by guessing or exam-ining a rough graph. The crossing point can be found by solving for distinct parameter
values t 1 t 2 the equations x = 18t 1 − 8t 31
= 18t 2 − 8t 32
, y = 18t 21
= 18t 2. Collecting
terms and factorizing yields the system of equations
(t 1 − t 2)18 − 6
t 21 + t 1t 2 + t 22
= 0 ,
18 (t 1 − t 2) (t 1 + t 2) = 0 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 481/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5126
Since we are looking for a solution where t 1 t 2, we may divide by t 1 − t 2, which cannot
equal 0, and obtain the system3 −
t 21 + t 1t 2 + t 22
= 0 ,
t 1 + t 2 = 0 .
From the second equation we see that t 2 = −t 1, and then the first equation yields 3 = t 21
,
so the solutions are t 1 = −t 2 = ±√
3; we may take the loop as beginning with parameter
value −√
3 and ending with parameter value +√
3. The length of the arc will be +√
3
−√
3
181 + t 2
dt
= 2 √
3
0
18
1 + t 2
dt
since the integrand is even and the interval is symmetric around 0
= 36
t +
1
3t 3√
3
0
= 72√
3 .
Wednesday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the length of the curve y = ln sec x. Simplify
your answer as much as possible.
Solution:dy
dx=
1
sec x· (sec x tan x) = tan x
⇒
1 +
dy
dx
2
=
1 + tan2 x = | sec x| .
In the following integral I will drop the absolute signs because the secant is positive over
the entire interval of integration; the length is
π
4
−π4
| sec x| dx = π
4
−π4
sec x dx
= [ln | sec x + tan x|]π4
− π4
= ln(√
2 + 1) − ln(√
2 − 1)
= ln
√ 2 + 1√ 2 − 1
= ln (
√ 2 + 1)2
2 − 1
= ln
(√
2 + 1)2
= 2 ln(√
2 + 1) .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 482/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5127
It would be sufficient for a student to obtain the diff erent of logarithms above. The
subsequent steps simplify the argument, and would be useful if the user did not have theuse of a calculator.
2. [10 MARKS] The curve y = 3√
x (1 ≤ y ≤ 3) is rotated about the y-axis. Showing all
your work, find the area of the resulting surface.
Solution: The data are given partly in terms of x and partly in terms of y, so some care is
needed. Since the limits are given in terms of y, I will integrate with respect to y; it will
be convenient to rewrite the equation of the curve as x = y3.
dx
dy= 3 y2
⇒
1 +
dxdy
2
=
1 + 9 y4
Area =
3
1
1 + 9 y4 · 2π y3 dy
=
1
9 · 1
4 · 2π · 2
3
1 + 9 y4
32
3
1
= π
27
730
32 − 10
32
.
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the region enclosed by the inner
loop of the curve r = 9 + 18 sin θ .Solution: The function 9 + 18 sin θ is periodic with period 2π, so the entire curve is
traced out as θ passes through an interval of that length. If, for example, we consider the
interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π, we find that the curve passes through the pole only at θ = 7π6
and
at θ = 11π6
. Between these values the smaller loop is traced out; the larger loop is traced
out, for example, for −π6 ≤ θ ≤ 7π
6 . We can find the area of the small loop by integrating
between the appropriate limits; the area is
1
2
11π6
7π6
(9 + 18 sin θ )2 d θ
= 812
11π6
7π6
(1 + 4sin θ + 4 sin2 θ ) d θ
= 81
2
11π6
7π6
(1 + 4sin θ + 2(1 − cos2θ )) d θ
= 81
2
11π6
7π6
(3 + 4sin θ − 2cos2θ ) d θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 483/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5128
= 81
2 [3θ
−4cos θ
−sin2θ ]
11π6
7π6
= 81
2
11π
2 − 4cos
11π
6 − sin
11π
3
− 81
2
7π
2 − 4cos
7π
6 − sin
7π
3
= 81
2
11π
2 − 2
√ 3 − −
√ 3
2
− 81
2
7π
2 + 2
√ 3 −
√ 3
2
=
81
2 (2π − 3
√ 3) = 81π − 243
√ 3
2 .
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the surface obtained by rotating
the curve x = 3t − t 3, y = 3t 2 (0 ≤ t ≤ 4) about the x-axis.
Solution:
dx
dt = 3 − 3t 2
dy
dt = 6t
dx
dt
2
+
dy
dt
2
=
32
1 − t 22
+ 62t 2 = 31 + t 2
.
The area of the surface of revolution about the x-axis will be 4
0
3
1 + t 2· 2π
3t 2
dt = 18π
4
0
t 2 + t 4
dt
= 18π
1
3t 3 +
1
5t 54
0
= 6 × 64 × 53
5 =
20352
5 .
5. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of c, if it is known that
∞n=2
(5+
c)−n = 2.
Solution: We are told that the geometric series converges; this implies that its common
ratio is less than 1 in magnitude, i.e., that |5 + c| < 1, which implies that −1 < 5 + c <1, equivalently, that −6 < c < −4. The sum of the geometric series on the left is
1(5+c)2 · 1
1− 15+c
= 1(5+c)(4+c)
. Equating this to 2, we obtain c2 + 9c + 18 = 0, implying that
(c + 3)(c + 6) = 0, so c = −3, −6. Of these two values, −6 lies outside of the admissible
interval, and would yield a divergent series. Thus c can be equal only to −3.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 484/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5129
Thursday version
1. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the exact length of the polar curve r = 7e4θ
(0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π).
Solution:
dr
d θ = 28e4θ
r 2 +
dr
d θ
2
=
72 + 282
e8θ
= 7√
17e4θ .
The length of the arc is then
7√
17
2π
0
e4θ d θ = 7
√ 17
4 e4θ
2π
0
= 7
√ 17
4
e8π − 1
.
2. [10 MARKS] The curve y = 4 − x2 (1 ≤ x ≤ 3) is rotated about the y-axis. Showing all
your work, find the area of the resulting surface.
Solution:
dy
dx= −2 x ⇒
1 +
dy
dx
2
=√
1 + 4 x2
Area =
3
1
√ 1 + 4 x2 · 2π x dx
= 2π · 1
4 · 1
2 · 2
3 ·
1 + 4 x2 3
2
3
1
= π
6 37
32 − 5
32
.
3. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the region enclosed by the outer
loop of the curve r = 9 + 18 sin θ : this region will include the entire inner loop.
Solution: The function 9 + 18 sin θ is periodic with period 2π, so the entire curve is
traced out as θ passes through an interval of that length. If, for example, we consider the
interval 0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π, we find that the curve passes through the pole only at θ = 7π6
and
at θ = 11π6
. Between these values the smaller loop is traced out; the larger loop is traced
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 485/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5130
out, for example, for −π6 ≤ θ ≤ 7π
6 . We can find the area of the large loop by integrating
between those limits, and the area will include the entire smaller loop. The area is
1
2
11π6
7π6
(9 + 18 sin θ )2 d θ
= 81
2
7π6
−π6
(1 + 4 sin θ + 4sin2 θ ) d θ
= 81
2
7π6
−π6
(1 + 4 sin θ + 2(1 − cos2θ )) d θ
= 81
2
7π6
−π6
(3 + 4 sin θ
−2cos2θ ) d θ
= 81
2 [3θ − 4cos θ − sin 2θ ]
7π6
− π6
= 81
2
7π
2 − 4cos
7π
6 − sin
7π
3
− 81
2
−π
2 − 4cos
π
6 + sin
π
3
= 81
2
7π
2 + 2
√ 3 −
√ 3
2
− 81
2
−π
2 − 2
√ 3 +
√ 3
2
= 162π +
243√
3
2 .
4. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, sum a series in order to express the following
number as a ratio of integers: 4.645 = 4.645454545 . . ..
Solution:
4.645 = 4.6 + 1
10
45
100
1 +
1
100 +
1
1002 +
1
1003 + . . .
= 4.6 +
451000
1 − 1100
= 46
10
+ 1
10 ·
45
99
= 511
110
.
5. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, find an equation for the tangent to the curve x =
cos θ + sin7θ , y = sin θ + cos2θ (−∞ < θ < +∞) at the point corresponding to θ = 0.
Solution: The slope of the tangent is
dx
d θ = − sin θ + 7cos7θ
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 486/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5131
dy
d θ = cos θ
−2 sin θ
dy
dx=
dy
d θ dx
d θ
= cos θ − 2sin θ
− sin θ + 7cos7θ =
1
7 when θ = 0 .
The line through ( x(0), y(0)) = (1, 1) with slope 17
has equation y − 1 = 1
7( x − 1), i.e.,
x − 7 y = −6.
Problems prepared but not used
1. The curve x =
c2 − y2 (0 ≤ y ≤ c2 ) is rotated about the y-axis. (c is a fixed real number.)
Showing all your work, find the area of the resulting surface.
Solution:
dx
dy=
1
2 · 1
c2 − y2· (−2 y) = − y
c2 − y2 1 +
dx
dy
2
=
1 +
y2
c2 − y2 =
|c| c2 − y2
Area =
c2
0 |c
| c2 − y2 · 2π
c
2
− y2
dy
= 2π|c| c
2
0
dy = πc2 .
2. Showing all your work, find the slope of the tangent line to the curve with equation in
polar coordinates r = 12
θ , at the point corresponding to θ = π.
Solution:
dr
d θ
=
−12
θ 2dy
dx=
sin θ · dr d θ
+ r · cos θ
cos θ · dr d θ − r · sin θ
= − sin θ + θ cos θ
− cos θ − θ sin θ .
At the point θ = π this ratio is equal to −π.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 487/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5132
3. Showing all your work, find the area of one of the regions bounded by the line θ = π2
and
the closed curve r = 8 + 6sin θ .Solution: (The actual wording of the problem referred to a figure which it is not conve-
nient to include in these notes.) The region can be interpreted as being swept out by a
radius vector from the pole moving between −π2
and + π2
. The area is this
1
2
+ π2
− π2
(8 + 6sin θ )2 d θ =
+ π2
− π2
32 + 48 sin θ + 18 sin2 θ
d θ
=
+ π2
− π2
(32 + 48 sin θ + 9(1 − cos2θ )) d θ
= + π
2
− π2
(41 + 48 sin θ − 9cos2θ ) d θ
=
41θ − 48 cos θ − 9
2 sin 2θ
+ π2
− π2
= 41π .
4. Showing all your work, find the area enclosed by the curve (in polar coordinates) r =
9 + cos2θ .
Solution: The curve surrounds the pole, and is periodic with period 2π. The area may be
expressed as an integral over an interval of length 2π; for example, as
1
2 2π
0 (9 + cos2θ )
2
d θ =
1
2 2π
0 (81 + 18cos2θ + cos
2
2θ ) d θ
= 1
2
2π
0
(81 + 18cos2θ + 1 + cos4θ
2 ) d θ
= 1
2
81θ + 9sin2θ +
1
2θ +
1
8 sin 4θ
2π
0
= 163
4 · 2π =
163π
2 .
5. Showing all your work, find the exact length of the polar curve r = 4θ 2 (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π).
Solution:
dr
d θ = 8θ
r 2 +
dr
d θ
2
=√
16θ 4 + 64θ 2
= 4|θ |√
4 + θ 2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 488/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5133
Over the interval in question θ is positive, and the absolute signs may be dropped. The
length of the arc is 2π
0
4θ √
4 + θ s d θ = 4
3
(4 + θ 2)
32
2π
0
= 32
3
(1 + π2)
32 − 1
.
6. Showing all your work, find equations of the tangents to the curve x = 3t 2 + 4, y = 2t 3 + 3
that pass through the point (7, 5).
Solution: We might, in error think that we need first to determine the parameter value
associated with the given point. We would then solve the system of equations
3t 2 + 4 = 7
2t 3 + 3 = 5
to obtain t = +1. This would be an error. It happens that the given curve passes through
the point (7, 5), but that is fortuitous: we want the tangents to pass through the point, not
the curve! And we can’t find the points of contact of the tangents directly. So let’s first
determine the general tangent to the curve, at the point with parameter value t .
dx
dt = 6t
dydt
= 6t 2
dy
dx =
dy
dt dx
dt
= 6t 2
6t = t ,
so the slope of the tangent at the point (3t 2 + 4, 2t 3 + 3) on the curve is t ; the equation of
that tangent is y −2t 3 + 3
= t
x −
3t 2 + 4
, or
y = t x − t 3 − 4t + 3 . (115)
We now impose the condition that this line pass through the point ( x, y) = (7, 5), i.e., thatits equation be satisfied by ( x, y) = (7, 5), obtaining t 3 − 3t + 2 = 0, whose left member
factorizes to (t − 1)2(t + 2) = 0, so the points of contact of the tangents are t = 1 and
t = −2. The equations of the tangents through the given point are found by giving the
parameter t these two values in equation (115):
y = x − 2 and y = −2 x + 19 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 489/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5134
7. Showing all your work, use methods of polar coordinates to find the length of the polar
curve r = 15 sin θ 0 ≤ θ ≤
4π
15.
Solution:
dr
d θ = 15 cos θ
r 2 +
dr
d θ
2
= 15 .
The length of the arc is, therefore
4π15
015 d θ = 4π .
E.3 MATH 141 2009 01
E.3.1 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q1
Instructions to students
1. Show all your work. Marks may not be given for answers not supported by a full solu-
tion. For future reference, the form of your solutions should be similar to those shown
in the textbook or Student Solutions Manual for similar problems.
2. In your folded answer sheet you must enclose this question sheet: it will be returned
with your graded paper. (WITHOUT THIS SHEET YOUR QUIZ WILL BE WORTH
0.) All submissions should carry your name and student number.
3. Time = 20 minutes.
4. No calculators are permitted.
Monday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the chain rule to find the
derivative of the function
f ( x) =
√ x
√ 3
sin(t )
t 5 dt
Solution:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 490/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5135
• (This step may not be shown explicitly, but it underlies the successful implemen-
tation of the Chain Rule.) Introduction of an intermediate variable: If the new
variable / function is called u = u( x) =√
x, then f ( x) = d
du
u √
3
sin(t )
t 5 dt · du
dx
• application of the Fundamental Theorem
d
du
u √
3
sin(t )
t 5 dt =
sin(u)
u5 .
• completion
sin(√
x)
√ x
5 · 1
2 x−1
2 =
sin√
x
2 x3
2. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a) 0
−π/3
8sec2( x) dx
Solution: [5 MARKS TOTAL]
• state one antiderivative, e.g., 8 tan x
• indicate that the value of the integral is the net change, 8 tan x]0
−π
3• compute the final answer. Students should know the trigonometric functions
of simple submultiples of π.
(b) 1
0
√ x(5 x2 + 4 x − 5) dx
Solution: [5 MARKS TOTAL]
• state one antiderivative, here the obvious method is to express as a sum of
fractional powers and to integrate each separately:
5 x
5
2 + 4 x
3
2 − 5 x
1
2
dx = 5 · 2
7 x
7
2 + 4 · 2
5 x
5
2 − 5 · 2
3 x
3
2 + C
• indicate that the value of the integral is the net change,5 · 2
7 x
72 + 4 · 2
5 x
52 − 5 · 2
3 x
32
1
0
• compute the final answer correctly = 107
+ 85 − 10
3
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 491/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5136
Tuesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the chain rule to find the
derivative of the function
f ( x) =
e x
5
7 + ln6 t
t dt
Solution:
• (This step may not be shown explicitly, but it underlies the successful implemen-
tation of the Chain Rule.) Introduction of an intermediate variable: If the new
variable / function is called u = u( x) = e x
, then
f ( x) = d
du
u
5
7 + ln6 t
t dt · du
dx
• application of the Fundamental Theorem
d
du
u
5
7 + ln6 t
t dt =
7 + ln6 u
u.
• completion
7 + (ln(e x))6
e x · e x =
√ 7 + x6
e x · e x =
√ 7 + x6 .
While you may use some judgment about how much simplification you expect, I don’t
believe it would not be appropriate to accept a composition like ln(e x) not simplified.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a)
0
−π/6
[8 sec( x) tan( x) + 7 cos( x)] dx
Solution: [5 MARKS TOTAL]
• state one antiderivative, e.g., 8 sec x + 7sin x
• indicate that the value of the integral is the net change in the antiderivative,
e.g., [8 sec x + 7sin x]0− π
6
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 492/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5137
• compute the final answer correctly.
(8 + 0) −
8 · 2√ 3
− 7 · 1
2
=
9
2 − 16√
3
(b) 4
1
−3 x−1 + 5 x + 3√ x
dx
Solution: [5 MARKS TOTAL]
• state one antiderivative, here the obvious method is to express as a sum of
fractional powers and to integrate each separately: −3 x−1 + 5 x + 3√ x
dx = −3 ·
−2
1
x− 1
2 + 5 · 2
3 x
32 + 3 · 2
1 x
12 + C
• indicate that the value of the integral is the net change,
−3 ·
−2
1
x− 1
2 + 5 · 2
3 x
32 + 3 · 2
1 x
12
4
1
• compute the final answer correctly
=
6
2 +
10
3 · 8 + 6 · 2
−
6 + 10
3 + 6
=
97
3
Wednesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the chain rule to find the
derivative of the function
f ( x) =
ln x
5
et √
1 + t 2 dt
Solution:
• (This step may not be shown explicitly, but it underlies the successful implemen-
tation of the Chain Rule.) Introduction of an intermediate variable: If the new
variable / function is called u = u( x) = ln x, then
f ( x) = d
du
u
5
et √
1 + t 2 dt · du
dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 493/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5138
• application of the Fundamental Theorem
d
du
u
5
et √ 1 + t 2 dt = eu √
1 + u2 .
• completion
eln x
1 + (ln x)2 · 1
x=
1 + (ln x)2
It is essential that eln x be simplified to x for full marks in this part.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute
π4
− π6
f ( x) dx, where
f ( x) =
4 sin x if x ≤ 05sec x tan x if 0 < x < π
2
Solution:
• decompose the interval into subintervals matching the intervals where the 2 parts
of the definition apply: π4
− π6
f ( x) dx =
0
− π6
f ( x) dx +
π4
0
f ( x) dx
• matching the diff erent functions to the appropriate subintervals: 0
− π6
f ( x) dx +
π4
0
f ( x) dx =
0
− π6
4 sin x dx +
π4
0
5sec x tan x dx
• shift the constants outside of the integration: 0
− π6
4 sin x dx +
π4
0
5sec x tan x dx = 4
0
− π6
sin x dx + 5
π4
0
sec x tan x dx
• find antiderivatives for both of the 2 integrands, e.g., − cos x and sec x
• indicate that the value of each integral is the net change,
4[− cos x]0− π
6+ 5[sec x]
π4
0
• correctly complete the computations
4
− cos0 + cos
π
6
+5
sec
π
4 − sec0
= 4
−1 +
√ 3
2
+5(√
2−1) = 2√
3+5√
2−9
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 494/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5139
Thursday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus and the chain rule to find the
derivative of the function
f ( x) =
7 x
3 x
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt
Solution:
• The integral must be split into two, at a convenient place, each integral with one
fixed and one variable limit; note that the point where the integral is split CANNOT
BE 0, since the integrand is undefined there:
f ( x) =
7 x
3 x
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt =
1
3 x
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt +
7 x
1
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt
• one integral must be reversed so that the dependence on x is in the upper limit:
f ( x) = − 3 x
1
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt +
7 x
1
√ 8 + 9t 2
t dt
• diff erentiate each of the integrals separately, using the Fundamental Theorem, and
multiply by the factor of the form dudx
from the Chain Rule (see problems on earlier
versions)
d
dx f ( x) = −
8 + 9(3 x)2
3 x· d (3 x)
dx+
8 + 9(7 x)2
7 x· d (7 x)
dx
• completion
−
8 + 9(3 x)2
3 x· 3 +
8 + 9(7 x)2
7 x· 7 =
−√
8 + 81 x2 +
8 + 9(49) x2
x
2. [10 MARKS] Compute √
3
0
f ( x) dx, where
f ( x) =
3 x if 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
61+ x2 if x > 1
Solution:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 495/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5140
• for decomposing the interval into subintervals matching the intervals where the 2
parts of the definition apply: √ 3
0
f ( x) dx =
1
0
f ( x) dx +
√ 3
1
f ( x) dx
• for matching the diff erent functions to the appropriate subintervals:
√ 3
0
f ( x) dx =
1
0
3 x dx +
√ 3
1
6
1 + x2 dx
• for shifting constants outside of the integration:
1
0
3 x dx +
√ 3
1
6
1 + x2 dx =
3
2
1
0
2 x dx + 6
√ 3
1
1
1 + x2 d x
• for finding antiderivatives for both of the 2 integrands, e.g., x2 and arctan x
• for indicating that the value of each integral is the net change,
3
2[ x2]1
0 + 6[arctan x]√
31
• for correctly completing the computations
3
2[ x2]1
0+6[arctan x]√
31
= 3
2(1−0)+6
arctan
√ 3 − arctan 1
=
3
2+6
π
3 − π
4
=
3
2+
π
2
E.3.2 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q2
Instructions to students
1. Show all your work. Marks may not be given for answers not supported by a full solu-
tion. For future reference, the form of your solutions should be similar to those shown
in the textbook or Student Solutions Manual for similar problems.
2. In your folded answer sheet you must enclose this question sheet: it will be returnedwith your graded paper. WITHOUT THIS SHEET YOUR QUIZ WILL BE WORTH 0.
All submissions should carry your name and student number.
3. Time = 25 minutes.
4. No calculators are permitted.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 496/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5141
Monday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a) sec2 x
1 + 6 tan xdx
(b) 9/2
1/2
e√
2 x
√ 2 x
dx
Solution:
(a) [4 MARKS] for this indefinite integral
• [1 MARK] for stating the substitution
• [1 MARK] for rewriting the indefinite integral in terms of the new variable
• [1 MARK] for finding an antiderivative in terms of the new variable
• [1 MARK] for restating the antiderivative in terms of the original variable
(b) [6 MARKS] for this definite integral
• [1 MARK] for stating the substitution
• [3 MARKS] for transforming the definite integral, including the upper andlower limit
• [1 MARK] for finding an antiderivative
• [1 MARK] for the final answer
(Some students may, instead, find an antiderivative [4 MARKS] and then find the
net change [2 MARKS].)
2. [10 MARKS] Compute the volume of the solid of revolution about the x-axis obtained
by revolving the region bounded by the x-axis, the lines x = π
6 and x =
π
3, and the curve
y =√
4cos x.
Solution: It was intended that students solve this problem using the “Method of Wash-
ers”. A solution using Cylindrical Shells would certainly be acceptable, but would be
more difficult, as students do not yet know how to integrate arccos y, and may not have
mastered integration by parts. If they complete part of such a solution, allocate the marks
similarly to the scheme for Washers.
• [4 MARKS] for the integrand
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 497/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5142
• [2 MARKS] for the limits of integration
• [2 MARKS] for finding an antiderivative
• [2 MARKS] for completing the integration.
3. [10 MARKS] Let R be the region in the xy-plane bounded by the x-axis, the lines x = π4
and x = π2
, and the curve y = 9sin x. Compute the volume of the solid of revolution
obtained by revolving the region R about the y-axis. Hint: Use the method of cylindrical
shells.
Solution:
• [3 MARKS] for determining the integrand correctly
• [2 MARKS] for determining the limits of integration correctly• [4 MARKS] for applying integration by parts and correctly determining the full
antiderivative
• [1 MARK] for apparently completing the integration correctly
Tuesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a)
sec x tan x−7 − 8sec x
dx
(b)
e4
e
cos(9 ln x)
x dx
Solution:
(a) [4 MARKS] Same scheme as for Problem 1(a) on Monday Versions.
(b) [6 MARKS] Same scheme as for Problem 1(b) on Monday Versions.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute the volume of the solid of revolution about the x-axis obtained
by revolving the region bounded by the lines y = 1, x = −π
4, x =
π
4, and the curve
y = 3 sec x.
Solution: Same scheme as for Problem 2 on Monday Versions.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 498/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5143
3. [10 MARKS] Let R be the region in the xy-plane bounded by the x-axis, the lines x = 1
and x = 5, and the curve y = ln(5 x). Compute the volume of the solid of revolutionobtained by revolving the region R about the y-axis. Hint: Use the method of cylindrical
shells.
Solution:
• [3 MARKS] for determining the integrand correctly
• [2 MARKS] for determining the limits of integration correctly
• [4 MARKS] for applying integration by parts and correctly determining the full
antiderivative
• [1 MARK] for apparently completing the integration correctly
Wednesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Compute
(a) 9 x + 2√
9 x2 + 4 xdx
(b)
1
0
e3 x
e6 x + 1 d x
Solution:
(a) [4 MARKS] Same scheme as for Problem 1(a) on Monday Versions.
(b) [6 MARKS] Same scheme as for Problem 1(b) on Monday Versions.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute the volume of the solid of revolution about the y-axis obtained
by revolving the region bounded by the y-axis, the lines y = ln3 and y = ln 4, and the
curve y = ln x
2.
Solution: Note that this is a solid of revolution about the y-axis. To use the Method
of Washers, which is intended, students will have to rewrite the equation of the curve
in the form x = 2e y. A correct solution using the Method of Cylindrical Shells would
certainly be acceptable. Follow the same grading scheme as shown above for Question
2 of Monday Versions.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 499/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 500/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5145
(b) [6 MARKS] Same scheme as for Problem 1(b) on Monday Versions.
2. [10 MARKS] Compute the volume of the solid of revolution about the y-axis obtained
by revolving the region bounded by the lines x = 1 and y = 2 and the curve y = 3
x.
Solution: Note that this is a solid of revolution about the y-axis; moreover, it has a hole
in the middle. It was intended that students solve this problem using the “Method of
Washers”. However, the Method of Cylindrical Shells would be acceptable, and is not
difficult.
• [4 MARKS] for the integrand
• [2 MARKS] for the limits of integration; note that the data given are partly in terms
of x-coordinates and partly in terms of y-.• [2 MARKS] for finding an antiderivative
• [2 MARKS] for completing the integration.
3. [10 MARKS] Find the average value of the function
x√ 3 + x
on the interval [−2, 1].
Solution:
• [2 MARKS] for setting up the integral correctly, with correct integrand and limits
of integration
• [7 MARKS] for the evaluation of this integral — more than one method is feasible:
Integration by Parts: – [2 MARKS] for a correct selection of u and dv
– [2 MARKS] for determining du and v
– [2 MARKS] for applying integration by parts
– [1 MARK] for the integration of
v du.
Substitution: – [2 MARKS] for selection of an appropriate substitution u =
u( x)
– [2 MARKS] for transforming the integrand correctly into terms of u
– [2 MARKS] for correctly changing the limits of integration into terms of
the new variable
– [1 MARKS] for correctly evaluating the new definite integral
• [1 MARK] for dividing the weighted integral by the length of the interval, and
obtaining the final answer.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 501/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5146
E.3.3 Draft Solutions to Quiz Q3
Instructions to students
1. Show all your work. Marks may not be given for answers not supported by a full solu-
tion. For future reference, the form of your solutions should be similar to those shown
in the textbook or Student Solutions Manual for similar problems.
2. In your folded answer sheet you must enclose this question sheet: it will be returned
with your graded paper. (WITHOUT THIS SHEET YOUR QUIZ WILL BE WORTH
0.) All submissions should carry your name and student number.
3. Time = 25 minutes.
4. No calculators are permitted.
Monday Versions
1. [10 MARKS]
(a) Use integration by parts to compute the integral x3/5 ln x dx.
(b) Make a substitution and then use integration by parts to compute the integral
x3e x2
dx .
Solution:
(a) [4 MARKS]
• [2 MARKS] for a correct choice of u and dv and correctly determining du and
v
• [2 MARKS] for correctly implementing the selection of u and v and complet-
ing the integration correctly
(b) [6 MARKS]
• [1 MARK] for correctly implementing an appropriate substitution
• [2 MARKS] for a correct choice of u and dv and correctly determining du and
v• [2 MARKS] for correctly implementing the selection of u and v and complet-
ing the integration in terms of the new variable
• [1 MARK] for expressing the final, correct answer in terms of the original
variable
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 502/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5147
2. [10 MARKS] Use a trigonometric substitution to compute 1
( √ 25 − x2
)3
dx . Verify
your answer by diff erentiating it!
Solution:
• [2 MARKS] for selecting a correct substitution (either a sine, a cosine will do).
(Strictly speaking, the substitution should be expressed first in terms of an inverse
sine or inverse cosine, but it is common practice not to make that step explicit, so
one can’t expect students to be better than the textbooks.)
• [2 MARKS] for implementing the substitution correctly and writing the integral in
terms of the the square of the secant or cosecant.
• [2 MARKS] for correctly integrating in terms of the new variable• [2 MARKS] for transforming the integral into terms of the original variable x.
• [2 MARKS] for correctly diff erentiating the antiderivative and thereby obtaining
the original integrand
item [10 MARKS] Find the arc length of the parameterized curve x(t ) = e2t + e−2t , y(t ) =
4t − 2 . for t between 0 and 1
2.
Solution: Grading instructions:
• [1 MARKS] for an integral of the correct form
• [4 MARKS] for correctly computing the derivatives of x and y
• [3 MARKS] for correctly finding an antiderivative
• [2 MARKS] for correctly completing the evaluation of the integral.
Tuesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS]
(a) Use integration by parts to compute the integral
x sec2(5 x) dx
(b) Make a substitution and then use integration by parts to compute the integral x3 cos( x2) dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 503/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5148
Solution:
(a) [4 MARKS]
• [2 MARKS] for a correct choice of u and dv and correctly determining du and
v
• [2 MARKS] for correctly implementing the selection of u and v and complet-
ing the integration correctly
(b) [6 MARKS]
• [1 MARK] for correctly implementing an appropriate substitution
• [2 MARKS] for a correct choice of u and dv and correctly determining du and
v
• [2 MARKS] for correctly implementing the selection of u and v and complet-ing the integration in terms of the new variable
• [1 MARK] for expressing the final, correct answer in terms of the original
variable
2. [10 MARKS] Use a trigonometric substitution to compute
x2
√ 4 − x2
dx . Verify your
answer by diff erentiating it!
Solution:
• [2 MARKS] for selecting a correct substitution (either a sine, a cosine will do).
(Strictly speaking, the substitution should be expressed first in terms of an inversesine or inverse cosine, but it is common practice not to make that step explicit, so
one can’t expect students to be better than the textbooks.)
• [2 MARKS] for implementing the substitution correctly and writing the integral in
terms of the the square of the secant or cosecant.
• [2 MARKS] for correctly integrating in terms of the new variable
• [2 MARKS] for transforming the integral into terms of the original variable x. This
antiderivative does not include any term with plus / or / minus: there are no ambigu-
ities of signs! If a student shows an ambiguity, this means he has not properly
completed the diff erentiation of the next part, since only one of the signs will yield
the correct derivative.
• [2 MARKS] for correctly diff erentiating the antiderivative and thereby obtaining
the original integrand
3. [10 MARKS] Find the arc length of the parameterized curve x(t ) = −3 + e2t cos t , y(t ) =
5 + e2t sin t for t between 0 and 1
2.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 504/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5149
Solution: Grading instructions:
• [1 MARKS] for an integral of the correct form
• [4 MARKS] for correctly computing the derivatives of x and y
• [3 MARKS] for correctly finding an antiderivative
• [2 MARKS] for correctly completing the evaluation of the integral.
Wednesday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Compute the integral
e9π
1
cos(ln( x)) dx. Hint: A solution by integration
by parts could begin from the observation that cos(ln( x)) = 1·
cos(ln( x)). You could also
apply integration by parts after making a substitution.
Solution: There appear to be several ways of attacking this problem, but the attacks will
require 2 applications of integration by parts, followed by the solving of an equation.
Applying Integration by Parts immediately: • [1 MARK] for a correct selection
of u and dv for the first integration by parts
• [1 MARKS] for correctly determining du and v
• [2 MARKS] for correctly applying integration by parts and expressing the
given integral as the value of uv] minus a second integral, which will then
require a second application of integration by parts
• [1 MARK] for a correct selection of U and dV for the second integration by
parts
• [1 MARKS] for correctly determining dU and V
• [2 MARKS] for correctly applying integration by parts and expressing the
original integral as a sum of [uv + UV ] minus the same integral
• [2 MARKS] for solving the equation for the desired integral and completing
all calculations apparently correctly
Preceding Integration by Parts by a Substitution: • [0 MARKS] for selecting a cor-
rect substitution, and implementing that substitution correctly both in the inte-
grand and the limits of integration, so that the integral is now written in a form
where the use of integration by parts is well indicated.
• [1 MARK] for a correct selection of u and dv for the first integration by parts
• [1 MARKS] for correctly determining du and v
• [2 MARKS] for correctly applying integration by parts and expressing the
given integral as the value of uv] minus a second integral, which will then
require a second application of integration by parts
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 505/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5150
• [1 MARK] for a correct selection of U and dV for the second integration by
parts• [1 MARKS] for correctly determining dU and V
• [2 MARKS] for correctly applying integration by parts and expressing the
original integral as a sum of [uv + UV ] minus the same integral
• [2 MARKS] for solving the equation for the desired integral and completing
all calculations apparently correctly
2. [10 MARKS] Compute
13
( x + 3)( x2 + 4) d x .
Solution:
• [2+2 MARKS] for correctly factorizing the denominator and expressing the needto expand the function into a sum of 2 partial fractions, one with a linear denomi-
nator, the other having a general numerator of degree 1 and denominator of degree
2. Reserve a full 2 MARKS for the numerator of the fraction with the quadratic
denominator.
• [3 MARKS] for determining correctly the 3 undetermined constants
• [3 MARKS] for completing the integration correctly
3. [10 MARKS] Find the surface area of the solid of revolution obtained by revolving the
graph of the parametric curve x(t ) = 2t − 3, y(t ) = t 2 − 3t − 1, 0 ≤ t ≤ 3/2 about the
y-axis.Solution: Grading instructions:
• [2 MARKS] for an integral of the correct form
• [3 MARKS] for correctly computing the derivatives of x and y
• [3 MARKS] for correctly finding an antiderivative
• [2 MARKS] for correctly completing the evaluation of the integral.
Thursday Versions
1. [10 MARKS] Use a substitution and then integration by parts to compute the integral 6
3
e3/ x
x3 dx .
Solution:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 506/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 507/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5152
F Final Examinations from Previous Years
F.1 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-121B (1996 / 1997)
1. [4 MARKS] Find the derivative of the function F defined by
F ( x) =
x4
x2
sin√
t dt .
2. [4 MARKS] Evaluate
π
−π2
f ( x) dx , where
f ( x) =
cos x, −π
2 ≤ x ≤ π
33π x + 1, π
3 < x ≤ π
.
3. [7 MARKS] Evaluate
x sin3 x2 cos x2 dx .
4. [7 MARKS] Evaluate
( x5 + 4− x) dx .
5. [10 MARKS] Calculate the area of the region bounded by the curves x = y2 and
x − y = 2 .
6. [10 MARKS] The region bounded by f ( x) = 4 x − x2 and the x-axis, between
x = 1 and x = 4 , is rotated about the y-axis. Find the volume of the solid that is
generated.
7. [6 MARKS] Evaluate
x ln x dx .
8. [6 MARKS] Evaluate
sin2 x cos5 x dx .
9. [6 MARKS] Determine the partial fraction decomposition of the following ratio of poly-
nomials: x5 + 2
x2 − 1 .
10. [4 MARKS] Determine whether or not the following sequence converges as n → ∞ .
If it does, find the limit: 1 +
x
n
3n
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 508/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5153
11. [4 MARKS] Determine the following limit, if it exists:
lim x→0+
√ x√ x + sin
√ x
.
12. [6 MARKS] Determine whether the series
∞k =2
ke−k 2 converges or diverges.
13. [6 MARKS] Test the following series for
(a) absolute convergence,
(b) conditional convergence.
∞k =10
(−1)k
√ k (k + 1)
.
14. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region that consists of all points that lie within the
circle r = 2 cos θ , but outside the circle r = 1 .
15. [10 MARKS] Determine the length of the curve
r = 5(1 − cos θ ) , (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) .
F.2 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1997 / 1998)
1. [10 MARKS]
(a) Sketch the region bounded by the curves
y = x2 and y = 3 + 5 x − x2 .
(b) Determine the area of the region.
2. [10 MARKS] The triangular region bounded by the lines
y = x , y = 3
2 − x
2 , and y = 0
is revolved around the line y = 0. Determine the volume of the solid of revolution which
is generated.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 509/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5154
3. [10 MARKS] Find the length of the curve y = x2
2 − ln
4√
x from x = 1 to
x = 2 .
4. [5 MARKS] Determine, at x = 12
, the value of the function sin−1 x and the slope of its
graph.
5. [5 MARKS] Evaluate lim x→2
x3 − 8
x4 − 16 .
6. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate lim x→0+
x x .
7. [5 MARKS] Evaluate x3e− x2
dx .
8. [10 MARKS] Evaluate
x3 − 1
x3 + xdx .
9. [10 MARKS] Evaluate
x3
√ 1 − x2
dx , where | x| < 1 .
10. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region that lies within the limacon r = 1 + 2cos θ
and outside the circle r = 2 .
11. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, obtain a second-degree Taylor polynomial for
f ( x) = x
0e
t (1−
t )
dt at x = 0 .
12. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following infinite series
converges or diverges. If it converges, find its sum.
∞n=0
3n − 2n
4n
13. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether or not the following series con-
verges:∞
n=1
2
1n
n2
14. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following series converges:
∞n=1
1
n · 2n
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 510/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5155
F.3 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1997 / 1998
1. [10 MARKS]
(a) Sketch the region bounded by the curves
y = 8
x + 2 and x + y = 4 .
(b) Determine the area of the region.
2. [10 MARKS] The triangular region bounded by the lines
y =
x , y =
3
2 − x
2 , and y =
0
is revolved around the line y = 0. Determine the volume of the solid of revolution which
is generated.
3. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the surface of revolution generated by revolving the curve
y = 1
2
e x + e− x (0 ≤ x ≤ 1)
about the x-axis.
4. [5 MARKS] Determine, at x =
1
2 , the value of the function cos−1
x and the slope of itsgraph.
5. [10 MARKS] Evaluate lim x→2
x − 2cos π x
x2 − 4 .
6. [5 MARKS] Evaluate lim x→∞
cos
1
x2
x4
.
7. [5 MARKS] Evaluate
e2 x
1 + e4 x d x .
8. [5 MARKS] Evaluate
x2 cos x dx .
9. [10 MARKS] Evaluate
x3 − 1
x3 + xdx .
10. [10 MARKS] Evaluate
√ a2 − u2 du , where |u| < a.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 511/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5156
11. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region that lies within the limacon r = 1 + 2cos θ
and outside the circle r = 2 .
12. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, obtain a second-degree Taylor polynomial for
f ( x) =
x
0
es(1−s)ds at x = 0 .
13. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following infinite series
converges or diverges. If it converges, find its sum.
∞n=0
1 + 2n + 3n
5n
14. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether or not the following series con-
verges.∞
n=1
ln n
n
15. [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following series convereges.
∞n=1
n2 + 1
en(n + 1)2
F.4 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1998 / 1999)
1. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y2 = x and ( y−1)2 = 5− x.
2. [8 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid of revolution generated by revolving about the
line x = 1 the region bounded by the curve ( x − 1)2 = 5 − 4 y and the line y = 1 .
3. [8 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid generated by revolving about the line x = 0
the region bounded by the curves
y = sin x
y = −2 x = 0
and x = 2π .
4. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the surface obtained by revolving the curve y = x2 (0 ≤ x ≤
√ 2) about the y-axis.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 512/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5157
5. Define the function F by F ( x) =
x
0
et 3 dt .
(a) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, explain clearly whether or not the following
inequalities are true.
e < F (e) < ee3+1 .
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the value of d
dxF ( x3) at each of the
following points:
i. at x = 0 .
ii. at x = 2 .
6. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate sin3 π x dx .
7. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate x2e− x dx .
8. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate x − 1
x3 − x2 − 2 xdx .
9. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate x3 + x2 + x − 1
x2 + 2 x + 2 dx .
10. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the region inside the curve r = 3 sin θ and outside the curve
r = 2 − cos θ .
11. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following integrals is convergent
or divergent:
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞ 0
sin x dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 513/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5158
(b) [4 MARKS]
2
0
dx
1 − x2 .
12. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following sequences is convergent
or divergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
n sin
π
n
(b) [4 MARKS]
(2 n + 1) e−n
13. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following infinite series is con-
vergent or divergent:
(a) [4 MARKS]∞
n=1
1
4n3 .
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
n+
1
n2
.
14. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following series is convergent,
divergent, conditionally convergent and / or absolutely convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
(−1)n n + 2
n(n + 1) .
(b) [4 MARKS]∞
n=1
(−1)n cos n
n2 .
F.5 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1998 / 1999
1. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y2 = x and y = 6 − x.
2. [8 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid of revolution generated by revolving about the
line x = 0 the region bounded by the curve y = 4 − x2 and the lines x = 0 and
y = 0 .
3. [8 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid generated by revolving about the line x = 0the region bounded by the curves
y = sin x
y = 2
x = 0
and x = 2π .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 514/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5159
4. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the surface obtained by revolving the curve y = − x2 (0 ≤ x ≤ √ 2) about the y-axis.
5. Define the function F by F ( x) =
x 0
sin10 t dt .
(a) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, explain clearly whether or not the following
inequalities are true.
0 < F (e) < e .
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the value of d
dxF ( x) at each of the
following points:
i. at x = 0 .
ii. at x = π
2 .
6. [8 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate x5e− x2
dx .
7. [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
x
3
− x2
+ x + 1 x2 − 2 x + 2
dx .
8. [8 MARKS] Find the area of the region inside the curve r = 6 sin θ and outside the curve
r = 4 − 2 sin θ .
9. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following integrals is convergent
or divergent:
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞
0
cos x dx .
(b) [4 MARKS]
4 0
dx
4 − x2 .
10. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following sequences is convergent
or divergent.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 515/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5160
(a) [4 MARKS] n sin π
n(b) [4 MARKS]
(2 n + 1) e−n
11. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following infinite series is con-
vergent or divergent:
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
4n5 .
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
n− 1
n3
.
F.6 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1999 / 2000)
1. [11 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves x = y2 and x =
− y2 + 12 y − 16 .
2. [11 MARKS] Let C denote the arc of the curve y = cosh x for −1 ≤ x ≤ 1. Find
the volume of the solid of revolution generated by revolving about the line x = −2
the region bounded by C and the line y = e2 + 1
2e.
3. (a) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
92
32
√ 6t − t 2 dt .
(b) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
3π4
π4
√ 1 − sin u du .
4. (a) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine a reduction formula which ex-
presses, for any integer n not less than 2, the value of
xn sin2 x dx in
terms of
xn−2 sin 2 x dx.
(b) [4 MARKS] Use your reduction formula to determine the indefinite integral
x2 sin2 x d
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 516/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5161
5. [11 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate 8 x2 − 21 x + 6
( x − 2)2( x + 2) d x .
6. [11 MARKS] Find the area of the region inside the curve
r = 1 + cos θ and outside the curve r = 1 − cos θ .
7. [11 MARKS] Determine whether the following integral is convergent or divergent. If it
is convergent, find its value. Show all your work.
3
0
1
( x − 1)
4
5
dx
8. [11 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following infinite series is
convergent or divergent:
∞n=1
n! e−(n − 1)2
.
9. Showing all your work, determine whether each of the following series is convergent,
divergent, conditionally convergent and / or absolutely convergent.
(a) [6 MARKS]
∞
n=1
(−1)n
√
n + 2 − √ n
.
(b) [6 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n n
lnn2 .
F.7 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (1999 / 2000
1. [11 MARKS] Determine the area of the region bounded by the curves y = x4 and
y = 2 − x2 .
2. [11 MARKS] Determine the volume of the solid generated by rotating the region bounded
by the curves y = 2 x2 and y2 = 4 x around the x-axis.
3. Evaluate the integrals:
(a) [5 MARKS]
x7
√ 1 − x4
dx .
(b) [6 MARKS]
x2
√ 4 − x2
dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 517/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5162
4. [11 MARKS] Showing all your work, find π/2
0
e2 x sin3 x dx .
5. [11 MARKS] Determine
6 x3 − 18 x
( x2 − 1)( x2 − 4) d x .
6. [11 MARKS] Find the area of the region inside the curve r = 2 + 2sin θ and outside
r = 2 .
7. [11 MARKS] Determine whether the following improper integral converges:
1
0
ln x
x2 dx .
8. [11 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following infinite series
converges:
∞n=1
1√
15n3 + 3.
9. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following series, whether it is conver-
gent, divergent, conditionally convergent and / or absolutely convergent.
(a) [6 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n ln n
n.
(b) [6 MARKS]
∞n=1
cos nπ
n.
F.8 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (2000 / 2001)
1. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following infinite series, whether or
not it converges.
(a) [3 MARKS]
∞i=1
n
n3 + 1 .
(b) [3 MARKS]
∞n=1
ln
n
3n + 1
.
(c) [6 MARKS]∞
n=2
(−1)n(3n + 1)4
5n .
2. [12 MARKS] Determine the volume of the solid of revolution generated by revolving
about the y-axis the region bounded by the curves
y = e− x2
,
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 518/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5163
y = 0 ,
x = 0 , x = 1 .
3. [12 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface of revolution generated by revolving
about the x-axis the curve
y = cos x ,
0 ≤ x ≤ π
6
.
[Hint: You may wish to make use of the fact that
2
sec3
θ d θ = sec θ tan θ + ln | sec θ + tan θ | + C .]
4. [12 MARKS] Find the area that is inside the circle
r = 3 cos θ and outside the curve r = 2 − cos θ .
5. [14 MARKS] Evaluate the integral x
( x − 1)( x2 + 4) d x .
6. For the curve given parametrically by x = t 3 + t 2 + 1 , y = 1
−t 2 , determine
(a) [6 MARKS] The equation of the tangent line at the point
( x, y) = (1, 0) , written in the form y = mx + b , where m and b are con-
stants;
(b) [6 MARKS] the value of d 2 y
dx2 at the point ( x, y) = (1, 0) .
7. (a) [10 MARKS] Use integration by parts to determine the value of e x cos x dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
0
−∞e x cos x dx .
8. [12 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y = x2 − 4 and
y = −2 x2 + 5 x − 2 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 519/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5164
F.9 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (2000 / 2001
1. (a) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, find F (1) when
F (t ) =
2t
1
x
x3 + x + 7 dx .
(b) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate 6
0 | x − 2| dx .
2. Showing all of your work, evaluate each of the following integrals:
(a) [4 MARKS]
x + 1√
9
− x2
dx;
(b) [4 MARKS]
12 x3 + x
dx;
(c) [4 MARKS]
sin2 2 x cos2 2 x dx;
(d) [4 MARKS]
ln x dx
3. [15 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the area of the region bounded below by the
line y = 1
2 , and above by the curve y =
1
1 + x2 .
4. [15 MARKS] Showing all your work, find the volume generated by revolving about the y-axis the smaller region bounded by the circle x2 + y2 = 25 and the line x = 4 .
5. Showing all your work,
(a) [2 MARKS] sketch the curve r = 1 − sin θ ;
(b) [6 MARKS] find the length of the portion of the curve that lies in the region given
by r ≥ 0 , −π
2 ≤ θ ≤ π
2 ;
(c) [5 MARKS] find the coordinates of the points on the curve where the tangent line
is parallel to the line θ = 0 .
6. For each of the following integrals, determine whether it is convergent or divergent; if itis convergent, you are expected to determine its value. Show all your work.
(a) [7 MARKS]
2
−1
1
x3 dx ;
(b) [7 MARKS]
∞
1
xe− x2
dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 520/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5165
7. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following series, whether or not it
converges:
(a) [5 MARKS]
∞n=2
1
n(ln n)2;
(b) [5 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n
n2 − 1
n2 + 1
;
(c) [5 MARKS]
∞n=1
n + 1
3n .
F.10 Final Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (2001 / 2002)1. Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following indefinite integrals:
(a) [3 MARKS]
x3
√ 4 − x2
dx
(b) [3 MARKS]
1
y
ln ydy
(c) [3 MARKS]
sec u
1 + sec u· tan u du
(d) [3 MARKS]
e
t
1 + e2t dt
2. Let K denote the curve
y = x2 , (0 ≤ x ≤ 1) .
(a) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface of revolution generated by revolving
K about the y-axis.
(b) [6 MARKS] Determine the volume of the solid of revolution formed by revolving
about the line y = 0 the region bounded by K and the lines x = 1 and
y = 0 .
3. Consider the arc C given by r = θ 2 (0 ≤ θ ≤ π).
(a) [4 MARKS] Express the length of C as a definite integral. Then evaluate the inte-
gral.
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the area of the region subtended by C at the pole — i.e. of
the region bounded by the arc C and the line θ = 0.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 521/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5166
(c) [4 MARKS] The given curve can be represented in cartesian coordinates paramet-
rically as x = θ 2
cos θ , y = θ 2
sin θ . Determine the slope of the tangent to this curveat the point ( x, y) =
0,
π2
2
.
4. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the integral 40 − 16 x21 − 4 x2
(1 + 2 x)
d x .
5. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the region bounded by the
curves y = arctan x and 4 y = π x in the first quadrant.
6. (a) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of sin3 x cos2 x dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of tan4 x dx .
(c) [4 MARKS] Investigate the convergence of the integral
π2
0
tan4 x dx .
7. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of
d 2
dx2
x
0
e2t
1
√ u + 1 du
dt
when x = 0.
8. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following infinite series, whether it is
absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=5
(−1)n n2 − 1
6n2 + 4 .
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(
−1)n
n(ln n)2 .
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(−1)n(n+1)
2
2n .
(d) [4 MARKS]
∞n=0
n + 5
2n .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 522/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5167
F.11 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in Mathematics 189-141B (2001 / 200
1. Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following, always simplifying your answer
as much as possible:
(a) [3 MARKS]
e x sin x dx
(b) [3 MARKS]
12
0
sin−1 y 1 − y2
dy
equivalently,
12
0
arcsin y 1 − y2
dy
.
(c) [3 MARKS]
(u2 + 2u)e−u du
(d) [3 MARKS] 1 + cos t
sin t dt
2. Let K denote the curve
y =√
2 x − x2 ,
0 ≤ x ≤ 1
2
.
(a) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, use an integral to determine the area of the
surface of revolution generated by revolving K about the x-axis.
(b) [6 MARKS] Determine the volume of the solid of revolution formed by revolving
about the line y =√
32
the region bounded by K and the lines x = 0 and
y =√
3
2 .
(You may assume that √ 2 x − x2 dx =
x − 1
2
√ 2 x − x2 +
1
2 arccos(1 − x) .)
3. A curve C in the plane is given by parametric equations
x = t 3 − 3t 2
y = t 3 − 3t .
(a) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine all points ( x, y) on C where thetangent is horizontal.
(b) [6 MARKS] By determining the value of d 2 y
dx2 as a function of t , determine all
points ( x, y) on C at which the ordinate ( y-coordinate) is a (local) maximum, and
all points at which the ordinate is a (local) minimum.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 523/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5168
4. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate the indefinite integral 4 x3
x2 − 9
(3 x + 9) d x .
5. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the region bounded by the
curves x − 2 y + 7 = 0 and y2 − 6 y − x = 0 .
6. (a) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate sin4 x cos2 x dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate tan5 x dx .
(c) [4 MARKS] Investigate the convergence of the integral
π2
π4
tan5 θ d θ .
7. [12 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the value of
d 2
dx2
x
0
π3
−2t
4 + sin(−2u) du
dt
when x = π4
. Your answer should be simplified, if possible.
8. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following infinite series, whether it is
absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=5
(−1)n 1√ n + 1
.
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=2
(
−1)2n
n(ln n)3 .
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
2n
1 + 5n
3n
.
(d) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
sin
1n
cos
1n
· 1n
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 524/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5169
9. [10 MARKS] Prove or disprove the following statement: The point with polar coordi-
nates
r = 2(√
2 − 1)
θ = −π + arcsin((√
2 − 1)2)
lies on the intersection of the curves with polar equations
r 2 = 4sin θ,
r = 1 + sin θ .
You are expected to justify every statement you make, but you do not need to sketch the
curves.
F.12 Final Examination in MATH 141 2003 01
1. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded in the first quadrant by the curves
y = e x, y = e− x, y = e2 x−3 .
Simplify your answer as much as possible. (Your instructors are aware that you do not
have the use of a calculator.)
2. Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following indefinite integrals:
(a) [5 MARKS]
1
x2 + 2 x + 17 d x
(b) [5 MARKS]
ln(ln x)
xdx
3. [12 MARKS] For each of the following integrals,
(a) [2 MARKS] Explain why the integral is improper.
(b) [10 MARKS] Determine its value, or show that the integral does not converge.
Show all your work.
I 1 =
∞
2
2( x2 − x + 1)
( x − 1)( x2 + 1) d x , I 2 =
1
0
2( x2 − x + 1)
( x − 1)( x2 + 1) d x
4. Let Ω denote the region in the first quadrant bounded by the curves x =
16 + y2, y = 0,
x = 0, and y = 3.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 525/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5170
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the volume of the solid of revolu-
tion obtained by rotating Ω about the y-axis.(b) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the surface of revolution
obtained by rotating the arc
x =
16 + y2, (0 ≤ y ≤ 3)
about the y-axis. You may assume that
d
d θ (sec θ tan θ + ln |sec θ + tan θ |) = 2 sec3 θ .
.
5. Consider the arc C given parametrically by x =
t
0
4(1 − cos θ )θ 2 d θ
y = cos t + t sin t
(−π ≤ t ≤ 2π) .
Showing all your work
(a) [4 MARKS] Find the slope of the tangent to C at the point with parameter value
t = 3π
2
.
(b) [6 MARKS] Find the length of C .
6. Give, for each of the following statements, a specific example to show that the statement
is not a theorem:
(a) [3 MARKS] If an∞n=0 is a sequence such that lim
n→∞an = 0, then
∞n=0
an converges.
(b) [3 MARKS] If the series∞
n=0
an and∞
n=0
bn are both divergent, then∞
n=0
(an + bn) is
divergent.
(c) [3 MARKS] If a series ∞n=0
an converges, then ∞n=0
a2n converges.
7. Showing all your work, determine, for each of the following infinite series, whether it is
absolutely convergent, conditionally convergent, or divergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=0
(−1)n
4n2 + 1 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 526/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5171
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=2
n − 1
n
n2
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
1√ n(n + 1)
.
8. [10 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the part of one “leaf” of the
“4-leafed rose” r = 2 cos(2θ ) that is inside the circle r = 1.
F.13 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in MATH 141 2003 01
1. [10 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves
y = e x − 1, y = x2 − x, x = 1.
2. Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
(a) [5 MARKS]
e
1 x
x2 dx
(b) [5 MARKS]
5
2
| x2 − 4 x| dx
3. [12 MARKS] For each of the following integrals,
(a) [2 MARKS] Explain precisely whether the integral is improper.
(b) [10 MARKS] Determine its value, simplifying as much as possible; or show that
the integral does not converge. (The examiners are aware that you do not have
access to a calculator.)
Show all your work.
I 1 =
1
0
2 x
( x − 1)( x2 + 1) d x , I 2 =
3
2
2 x
( x − 1)( x2 + 1) d x
4. Let Ω denote the region bounded by the curves y = sin x, y = 0, x = π2 , x = π.
(a) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the volume of the solid of revolu-
tion obtained by rotating Ω about the y-axis.
(b) [6 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the volume of the solid of revolu-
tion obtained by rotating Ω about the x-axis.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 527/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 528/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5173
1. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Give the numeric value of each of the following limits, sums, inte-grals. If it does not exist write “DIVERGENT”.
(a)
∞n=1
1 + 2n−1
3n =
ANSWER ONLY
(b) ∞
−∞ xe x2
dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(c) The limit of the Riemann sum limn→∞
ni=1
2n
3 + 2i
n
2 − 6
3 + 2in
5
=
ANSWER ONLY
(d)
−∞
∞ xe− x2
dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(e)
∞n=3
4
(2n + 1)(2n + 3) =
ANSWER ONLY
2. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Simplify your answers as much as possible.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 529/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5174
(a) For the point with polar coordinates 3, π7 give another set of polar coordinates
(r , θ ) in which r < 0 and θ > 2.
ANSWER ONLY
(b) Determine the length of the arc of the curve r = θ 2 from (0, 0) to (1, 1).
ANSWER ONLY
(c) A curve is given parametrically by x(t ) = t
0 e−u2
du, y(t ) = 4
t eu2
du. Find the
slope of the tangent to the curve at ( x(1), y(1)).
ANSWER ONLY
(d) Give a definite integral whose value is the area of the surface obtained by rotating
the curve x = y3
6 +
1
2 y
12 ≤ y ≤ 1
about the y-axis. You need not evaluate the
integral.
ANSWER ONLY
(e) On the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 the average value of the function
f ( x) =
√ 1 − x if 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
x − 2 if 1 < x ≤ 4 is
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 530/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 531/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5176
(e) sec3 x tan3 x dx =
ANSWER ONLY
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Let R be the finite region bounded by the curves x = y2 and x = 4 − 3 y4.
(a) [5 MARKS] Find the area of R.
(b) [5 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid generated by revolving R about the y-axis.
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the definite integral
12
− 12
4 x
2 x2 − x − 2
( x2 + 1)( x2 − 1) dx .
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Show that, for any positive integer n, (ln x)2n dx = x(ln x)2n − 2n
(ln x)2n−1 dx
(b) [7 MARKS] Evaluate the integral 1
0
y 2 y − y2
dy .
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK![4 MARKS EACH] Determine for each of the following series whether it
• converges absolutely;
• converges conditionally; or
• diverges.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 532/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5177
(a)
∞
n=1
1 + 1
n
2
e−n
(b)
∞n=10
(−1)n√
2n
1 + 2√
n
(c)
∞n=2
(−1)n ·√
n + 2 −√
n − 1
n
(d)
∞n=0
2π + cos n
6n
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK![6 MARKS] Find the area bounded by one loop of the curve r = cos 3θ .
Another version
1. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Give the numeric value of each of the following limits, sums, inte-
grals. If it does not exist write “DIVERGENT”.
(a)
∞
n=1
1 + 3n−1
4n =
ANSWER ONLY
(b)
∞
−∞ ye y2
dy =
ANSWER ONLY
(c) The limit of the Riemann sum limn→∞
ni=1
2n
4 + 2i
n
2 − 7
4 + 2in
5
=
ANSWER ONLY
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 533/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5178
(d) −∞
∞ ye− y2
dy =
ANSWER ONLY
(e)
∞n=3
4
(2n − 1)(2n + 1) =
ANSWER ONLY
2. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Simplify your answers as much as possible.
(a) On the interval 0 ≤ x ≤ 4 the average value of the function
f ( x) =
√ 1 − x if 0 ≤ x ≤ 1
x − 2 if 1 < x ≤ 4 is
ANSWER ONLY
(b) For the point with polar coordinates
3, π5
give another set of polar coordinates
(r , θ ) in which r < 0 and θ > 2.
ANSWER ONLY
(c) Determine the length of the arc of the curve r = θ 2 from (0, 0) to (1, 1).
ANSWER ONLY
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 534/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5179
(d) A curve is given parametrically by x(t ) = t
0 e−v2
dv, y(t ) = 4
t ev2
dv. Find the
slope of the tangent to the curve at ( x(1), y(1)).
ANSWER ONLY
(e) Give a definite integral whose value is the area of the surface obtained by rotating
the curve x = y3
6 +
1
2 y
12 ≤ y ≤ 1
about the y-axis. You need not evaluate the
integral.
ANSWER ONLY
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Give the value of each of the following indefinite integrals:
(a) sec3 x tan3 x dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(b)
x
5 x2 + 1 d x =
ANSWER ONLY
(c)
e x
√ 1 + e x dx =
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 535/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5180
ANSWER ONLY
(d)
(3 sin2 x − cos2 x) dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(e)
tan2 4 x dx =
ANSWER ONLY
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Let S be the finite region bounded by the curves y = x2 and y = 4 − 3 x4.
(a) [5 MARKS] Find the area of S .
(b) [5 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid generated by revolving S about the x-
axis.
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the definite integral
1
2
−1
2
4 x
4 x2 − 2 x − 4
( x2 + 1)( x2
−1)
dx .
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Show that, for any positive integer m, (ln y)2m dy = y(ln y)2m − 2m
(ln y)2m−1 dy
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 536/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 537/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5182
(b) 0
−∞ xe x dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(c) The limit of the Riemann sum limn→∞
π
n
ni=1
sin2
iπ
n
=
ANSWER ONLY
(d)
∞n=0
4
(2n + 1)(2n + 3) =
ANSWER ONLY
2. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Simplify your answers as much as possible.
(a) For the point with polar coordinates (r , θ ) =−10π
3 , −π
6
give another set of polar
coordinates (r 1, θ 1) in which r 1 > 0 and θ 1 > 2 .
ANSWER ONLY
(b) Find all points — if there are any — where the curves
r = 1 − cos θ and r = −32
intersect.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 538/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5183
ANSWER ONLY
(c) Find the exact length of the curve r = e2θ , (0 ≤ θ ≤ π) .
ANSWER ONLY
(d) On the interval ln 12 ≤ x ≤ π the average value of the function
f ( x) =
sinh x if ln 1
2 ≤ x ≤ 0
sin x if 0 < x ≤ π is
ANSWER ONLY
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS
[3 MARKS EACH] Give the value of each of the following indefinite integrals:
(a)
14 x2 + 1
d x =
ANSWER ONLY
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 539/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5184
(b) dx
√ x2
− 25
=
ANSWER ONLY
(c)
(cos x + 1)(cos x − 2) dx =
ANSWER ONLY
(d)
tan3 x dx =
ANSWER ONLY
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Let C be the arc x = 1
3
y2 + 2
3, (−
√ 2 ≤ y ≤ 0) .
(a) [6 MARKS] Find the area of the surface obtained by revolving C about the x-axis.
(b) [6 MARKS] Find the volume of the solid generated by revolving about the y-axis
the region bounded by C , the coordinate axes, and the line y =
−
√ 2.
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral x3 − 8 x − 1
( x2 − 1)( x + 1) d x .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 540/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5185
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Simplify your answers as much as possible.
(a) [6 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
√ 1 − 9 x2 dx .
(b) [6 MARKS] Evaluate the definite integral
−√
3
0
arctan x dx .
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[4 MARKS EACH] Determine for each of the following series whether it
• converges absolutely;
• converges conditionally; or
• diverges.
(a)
∞n=2
(−1)n ln√
n
ln(n2)
(b)
∞n=1
1 · 3 · 5 · . . . · (2n − 1)
3nn!
(c)
∞
n=1
sin2n
1 + 2n
(d)
∞n=1
(−1)n
√ n
3n − 1
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Use polar coordinates — no other method will be accepted — to find the
area of the region bounded by the curve r = 2 and the line r = 1
cos θ , and containing the
pole.
F.16 Final Examination in MATH 141 2005 01
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
3
0
| x − 1| dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 541/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5186
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
5
x
√ 4 + t 2 dt .
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
2π
sec t dt .
(d) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
x5
3√
x3 + 1
dx .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case you
must answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
2 − cos n
n
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=0
n(−3)n
4n
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
1
n ln n
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integral
or a sum, product, or quotient of several definite integrals, but do not evaluate the inte-
gral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals must have integrand
and limits specific to the given problems:
(a) [6 MARKS] The area of the region bounded by the parabola y = x2, the x-axis, and
the tangent to the parabola at the point (1, 1).
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 542/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5187
(b) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 4 the
region bounded by x = 0 and the curve x =
sin y (0 ≤ y ≤ π).DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(c) [3 MARKS] The area of the surface obtained by revolving about the y-axis the
curve y = e x, 1 ≤ y ≤ 2.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(d) [2 MARKS] The average value of the function 2 x
(1 + x2)2 over the interval 0 ≤ x ≤
2.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
2 x3 + 3 x2 + 3
x2 + x − 12 dx .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [9 MARKS] Use integration by parts to prove that, for integers
m ≥ 2, cosm x dx =
1
mcosm−1 x · sin x +
m − 1
m
cosm−2 x dx
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 543/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5188
(b) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, use the formula you have proved to evaluate π2
0
cos6 x dx.
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C defined by
x = 2cos t − cos2t
y = 2sin t − sin2t .
(a) [8 MARKS] Determine the points where the arc of the curve given by
π
4 ≤ t ≤ 7π
4
has a vertical tangent.
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the length of the arc of the curve given by
0 ≤ t ≤ 2π .
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following integral is convergent; if it is con-
vergent, determine its value: 1
−1dx√
1 − x2
(b) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following series is conditionally convergent,
absolutely convergent, or divergent.
∞n=1
(−1)n n!
nn
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine whether the sequence an = ln(n + 1) − ln n is convergent;
if it is convergent, carefully determine its limit.
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Find the area of the region bounded by the curves
r = 4 + 4sin θ
r sin θ = 3
which does not contain the pole.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 544/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5189
F.17 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in MATH 141 2005 01
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. Calculators are not permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 7 containing questions; and
Pages 8, 9, and 10, which are blank.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the question
is printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the facing page . Any
solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet, but you
must indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform the
invigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 85 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
0
−2
| x2 − 1| dx .
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx 4
x
et 2 dt .
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
1
dt
1 + t 5 .
(d) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
x sin( x2) dx .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 545/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5190
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case youmust answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
2n
3n − 1
n
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(
−1)n
√ n − 1
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(−4)n
3n + 2n
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integral
– possibly improper — or a sum, product, or quotient of several such integrals, but do
not evaluate the integral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals
must have integrand and limits specific to the given problems:
(a) [6 MARKS] The area of the infinite region containing the point 0, 1
2 bounded by
the curve y = e x, the x-axis, and the tangent to the curve at the point (1 , e).
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [3 MARKS] The volume generated by rotating the region bounded by the curves
y =√
x
−1, y = 0, x = 5 about the line y = 3.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 546/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5191
(c) [3 MARKS] The area of the surface obtained by revolving about the x-axis the
curve x = ln y, 1 ≤ x ≤ 3.DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral x3 − x2 − 2 x − 2
x( x2 + x + 1) dx .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [9 MARKS] Use integration by parts to prove that, for integers
m 1,
secm x dx = 1
m
−1
secm−2 x · tan x + m − 2
m
−1 secm−2 x dx
(b) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, use the formula you have proved to evaluate π3
0
sec3 x dx.
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
The curve C has equations x = t 3 + 4t , y = 6t 2.
(a) [8 MARKS] Determine the points on C where the tangent is parallel to the line
with equations x = −7t , y = 12t − 5.
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine a definite integral whose value is the length of the arc of C between the points with parameter values t = 1 and t = 2. YOU ARE NOT
EXPECTED TO EVALUATE THE INTEGRAL!
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Find the area of the region between the inner loop and the outer loop of
the curve r = 1 − 2cos θ .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 547/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5192
F.18 Final Examination in MATH 141 2006 01 (One version)
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed
in. You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and transla-
tion dictionaries are permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 8 containing questions;
and Pages 9, 10, and 11, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this test may be
di ff erent from yours.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the ques-
tion is printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the facing page.
Any solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet,
but you must indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is
printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for theseyou are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked
to show your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are
not correct.
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform
the invigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
2
−1
| x| dx .
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
e3 1
dt
t √
1 + ln t .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 548/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5193
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
0
et 2 dt .
(d) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
limn→∞
1
n
0
n
7
+
1
n
7
+
2
n
7
+ . . . +
n − 1
n
7 .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence and determine whether the series is convergent. In each case you
must answer 3 questions:
• Name the test(s) that you are using.
• Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given series.
• Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
1
(tanh n)2 + 1
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
n2ne−n2
(c) [4 MARKS]∞
n=1
n2 − 85n + 12
n(n + 6)2
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integral
or a sum, product, or quotient of several definite integrals, but do not evaluate the inte-
gral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals must have integrand
and limits specific to the given problems, and should be simplified as much as possible,
except that you are not expected to evaluate the integrals.
(a) [3 MARKS] Expressed as integral(s) along the x-axis only, the area of the region
bounded by the parabola y2
= 2 x + 6 and the line y = x − 1. An answer involvingintegration along the y-axis will not be accepted.
(b) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 1 the
region bounded by the curves y = x3 and y = x2. For this question you are to use
only the method of “washers”.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 549/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5194
(c) [3 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 1 the
region bounded by the curves y = x3
and y = x2
. For this question you are to useonly the method of “cylindrical shells”.
(d) [3 MARKS] The length of the curve whose equation is
x2
4 +
y2
9 = 1 .
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
x5 + x
x4 − 16 d x .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
(a) [4 MARKS]
cos x · cosh x dx
(b) [5 MARKS]
1 −
3
√ x2 + 2 x + 5 dx
(c) [4 MARKS]
sin2 x · cos2 x dx
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C defined by
x = x(t ) = 10 − 3t 2
y = y(t ) = t 3 − 3t ,
where
−∞ < t < +
∞.
(a) [8 MARKS] Determine the value of d 2 y
dx2 at the points where the tangent is horizon-
tal.
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface of revolution about the x-axis of the
arc ( x(t ), y(t )) : −
√ 3 ≤ t ≤ 0
.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 550/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5195
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value: 0
−1
dx
x23
.
(b) [5 MARKS] Determine whether the following series is conditionally convergent,
absolutely convergent, or divergent.
∞
n=1
(−1)n
n − ln n
(c) [3 MARKS] Give an example of a sequence an with the property that limn→∞
an = 0
but
∞n=1
an = +∞. You are expected to give a formula for the general term an of
your sequence.
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] The arc
r = 1 − cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ π)
divides the area bounded by the curve
r = 1 + sin θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π)
into two parts. Showing all your work, carefully find the area of the part that contains
the point (r , θ ) =
12
, π2
.
F.19 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in MATH 141 2006 01
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation
dictionaries are permitted.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 551/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 552/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5197
• [1 MARK] Explain why the test(s) you have chosen is / are applicable to the given
series.• [2 MARKS] Use the test(s) to conclude whether or not the series is convergent.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n n
n2 + 4
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
ln
n
3n + 2
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=1
3n + 6
5n
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express the value of each of the following as a definite integral
or a sum, product, or quotient of several definite integrals, but do not evaluate the inte-
gral(s). It is not enough to quote a general formula: your integrals must have integrand
and limits specific to the given problems, and should be simplified as much as possible,
except that you are not expected to evaluate the integrals.
(a) [4 MARKS] The length of the curve whose equation is
x = 1 + et , y = t 2 , (−3 ≤ t ≤ 3).
(b) [4 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the x-axis theregion bounded by the curves y = x and y = x2. For this question you are expected
to use only the method of “cylindrical shells”.
(c) [4 MARKS] The volume of the solid obtained by rotating about the line y = 2 the
region bounded by the curves y = x and y = x2. For this question you are expected
to use only the method of “washers”.
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
x
3
( x2 + 4)( x − 2) d x .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following. Simplify your answers as much
as possible.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 553/587
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 554/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5199
F.20 Final Examination in MATH 141 2007 01 (One version)
Instructions
1. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
2. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation
dictionaries are permitted.
3. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 8 containing questions; and
Pages 9, 10, and 11, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this test may be different
from yours.
4. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the question
is printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the facing page . Any
solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet, but you
must indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform the
invigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
5. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
2
−1
| x|2 dx .
(b) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
0 1
t 4dt √ t 5 + 1
.
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine the value of
1
n
0
n
3
+
1
n
3
+
2
n
3
+ . . . +
n − 1
n
3 .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 555/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5200
(d) [3 MARKS] Suppose it is known that f ( x) = 4 cosh x for all x. Showing all your
work, determine the value of f (1)− f (−1), expressed in terms of the values of eitherexponentials or hyperbolic functions.
(e) [4 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
x2
12
et t
dt when x = 1 .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests for conver-
gence or divergence to determine whether the series is absolutely convergent, condition-
ally convergent, or divergent. All tests used must be named, and all statements must be
carefully justified.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−n − 2)n(n − 2)n
(2n2 + 1)n
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n+1 n!
n22n
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n sin 1
n
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express each of the following as a definite integral or a sum,
product, or quotient of several definite integrals, simplified as much as possible; you arenot expected to evaluate the integrals.
R is defined to be the region enclosed by the curves x + y = 6 and y = x2; C is the arc
y = 3 x (−1 ≤ x ≤ 2).
(a) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the x-axis. Give an integral or sum of
integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line x = 5. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 556/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5201
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(c) [3 MARKS] Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the
average length that R cuts off from the vertical lines which it meets.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(d) [2 MARKS] Give an integral whose value is the length of C; you need not evaluate
the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(e) [3 MARKS] Given an integral whose value is the area of the surface generated by
rotating C about the line y = −1; you need not evaluate the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral x x2 − 4
( x − 2) + 4
x2 − 4
( x − 2) dx .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 557/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5202
(a) [4 MARKS] e− x
·cos x dx
(b) [5 MARKS]
52
− 12
x√ 8 + 2 x − x2
dx
(c) [4 MARKS]
cos2 x +
1
cos2 x
· tan2 x dx
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the arc C defined by
x = x(t ) = cos t + t sin t
y = y(t ) = sin t − t cos t ,
where 0 ≤ t ≤ π2
.
(a) [6 MARKS] Determine as a function of t the value of d 2 y
dx2.
(b) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface generated by revolving C about the
y-axis.
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value: π
π2
sec x dx .
(b) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully determine whether the series
∞n=3
4
n ln n
is convergent.
(c) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following sequence
converges; if it converges, find its limit:
a1 = 1.a2 = 1.23
a3 = 1.2345
a4 = 1.234545
a5 = 1.23454545
a6 = 1.2345454545
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 558/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5203
etc., where each term after a2 is obtained from its predecessor by the addition on
the right of the decimal digits 45.
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[10 MARKS] The polar curves
r = 2 + 2sin θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π)
and
r = 6 − 6sin θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π)
divide the plane into several regions. Showing all your work, carefully find the area of
the region bounded by these curves which contains the point (r , θ ) = (1, 0).
F.21 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in MATH 141 2007 01 (One
version)
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. The use of calculators is not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Use of regularand translation dictionaries is permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 8 containing questions; and
Pages 9, 10, and 11, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this examination may be
different from yours.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the question
is printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the facing page . Any
solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet, but youmust indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 559/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5204
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform theinvigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
0
− 1√ 2
1√ 1 − x2
dx .
(b) [2 MARKS] Evaluate t 3 cosh t 4 dt .
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine one antiderivative of x ln x.
(d) [3 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
x
− x
tet 2 dt .
(e) [4 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
1
sin x
(ln | sec t + tan t |) dt when x = π
4 .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests to determine
whether the series is convergent or divergent. All tests used must be named, and all
statements must be carefully justified.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=3
1
(n + 2)(n − 2)
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
∞i=n
3−i
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
n + 1
n
n2
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express each of the following as a definite integral or a sum,
product, or quotient of several definite integrals, simplified as much as possible; you are
not expected to evaluate the integrals.
R is defined to be the region enclosed by the curves y − x = 9 and y = ( x + 3)2; C is the
arc x = t , y = e3t (−2 ≤ t ≤ 1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 560/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5205
(a) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the y-axis. Give an integral or sum of
integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line y = −3. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(c) [3 MARKS] Let f (t ) denote the vertical distance of the pointt , e3t
from the x-
axis. Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the average
value of f (t ) over the interval −2 ≤ t ≤ 1.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(d) [2 MARKS] Give an integral whose value is the length of C; you need not evaluate
the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(e) [3 MARKS] Given an integral whose value is the area of the surface generated by
rotating C about the line x = 1; you need not evaluate the integral.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 561/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5206
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
x3 x4 − 4 x2
− 16
x4 − 4 x2 dx .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
sin2(3 x)cos2(3 x) dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
1
x2√
9 x2 − 16dx .
(c) [5 MARKS] Assume that
f ( x) =
x
0
sec100 t dt
is known. Showing all your work, express the value of x
0
sec102 t dt in terms of
f ( x). (You are not expected to determine f ( x) explicitly.)
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the closed arc C defined by
x = x(t ) = 3t 2
y = y(t ) = t 3 − 3t ,
where
−
√ 3
≤ t
≤
√ 3.
(a) [3 MARKS] Determine the area bounded by C.
(b) [3 MARKS] Determine the equation of the tangent to C at the point with parameter
value t = 1
2.
(c) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface generated by revolving C about the
y-axis.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 562/587
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [6 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value: ∞
−∞
x
x2 + 4 d x .
(b) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully determine whether the series
∞n=3
(−1)n
√ ln n
n
is conditionally convergent, absolutely convergent, or divergent.
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[10 MARKS] Find the area inside the larger loop and outside the smaller loop of the
limacon r = 2 sin θ − 1.
F.22 Final Examination in MATH 141 2008 01 (one version)
This examination was written during a labour disruption, when the services of Teaching As-
sistants were not available for grading purposes. The following additional instructions were
distributed with the examination.
VERSION nMcGILL UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF SCIENCE
FINAL EXAMINATION
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS
MATHEMATICS 141 2008 01CALCULUS 2EXAMINER: Professor W. G. Brown DATE: Monday, April 14th, 2008
ASSOCIATE EXAMINER: Mr. S. Shahabi TIME: 09:00 – 12:00 hours
A. Part marks will not be awarded for any part of any question worth [4 MARKS] or less.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 563/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5208
B. To be awarded part marks on a part of a question whose maximum value is 5 marks or
more, a student’s answer must be deemed to be more than 75% correct.
C. While there are 100 marks available on this examination 80 MARKS CONSTITUTE A
PERFECT PAPER. You may attempt as many problems as you wish.
All other instructions remain valid. Where a problem requires that all work be shown, that
remains the requirement; where a problem requires only that an answer be written in a box
without work being graded, that also remains the requirement.
Students are advised to spend time checking their work; for that purpose you could verify
your answers by solving problems in more than one way. Remember that indefinite integrals
can be checked by diff erentiation.
W. G. Brown, Examiner.
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation
dictionaries are permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 9 containing questions; and
Pages 10, 11, and 12, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this test may be different
from yours.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the question
is printed; in some of these problems you are instructed to write the answer in a box,
but a correct answer alone will not be sufficient unless it is substantiated by your work,
clearly displayed outside the box. When space provided for that work is exhausted, youmay write on the facing page . Any solution may be continued on the last pages, or the
back cover of the booklet, but you must indicate any continuation clearly on the page
where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 564/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5209
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform theinvigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
4 − 6 x
1 + x2 dx .
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(b) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
2 0
y2
y3 + 1 dy .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 565/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5210
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(c) [3 MARKS] Evaluate
sin(18 θ ) cos(30 θ ) d θ .
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [3 MARKS] Simplifying your answer as much as possible, evaluate d
dx
√ 3
− x
earcsin z dz .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 566/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5211
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(b) [4 MARKS] For the interval 2 ≤ x ≤ 5 write down the Riemann sum for the
function f ( x) = 3 − x, where the sample points are the left end-point of each of n
subintervals of equal length.
ANSWER ONLY
(c) [4 MARKS] Determine the value of the preceding Riemann sum as a function of
n, simplifying your work as much as possible. (NOTE: You are being asked to
determine the value of the sum as a function of n, not the limit as n → ∞.)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 567/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5212
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
3. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
For each of the following series determine whether the series diverges, converges condi-
tionally, or converges absolutely. All of your work must be justified; prior to using any
test you are expected to demonstrate that the test is applicable to the problem.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞
n=3
1
n √ ln n
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n+1
√ 4n + 5
3n + 10
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
cot−1
1
n + 1
− cot−1
1
n
4. BRIEF SOLUTIONS R is defined to be the region in the first quadrant enclosed by the
curves 2 y = x, y = 2 x, and x2 + y2 = 5.
(a) [4 MARKS] The region
Ris rotated about the line x =
−1. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [4 MARKS] Let L(a) denote the length of the portion of line y = a which lies inside
R. Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the average of
the positive lengths L(a).
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 568/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5213
(c) [4 MARKS] Let C1 be the curve x(t ) = t , y(t ) = cosh t (0 ≤ t ≤ ln 2). Simplifying
your answer as much as possible, find the length of C1.ANSWER ONLY
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [8 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral 36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Determine whether
∞ 3
36
( x + 4)( x − 2)2 d x converges.
If it converges, find its value.
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Showing all your work, evaluate each of the following:
(a) [4 MARKS]
e √ x dx
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 569/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5214
(b) [5 MARKS]
0
− 1
2
x
√ 3 − 4 x − 4 x2 dx
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(c) [4 MARKS]
π
0
sin2 t cos4 t dt .
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 570/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5215
Consider the curve C2 defined by x = x(t ) = 1 + e−t , y = y(t ) = t + t 2 .
(a) [2 MARKS] Determine the coordinates of all points where C2 intersects the x-axis.
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(b) [2 MARKS] Determine the coordinates of all points of C2 where the tangent is
horizontal.
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 571/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5216
(c) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the finite region bounded by C2 and the x-axis.
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the series∞
n=2
√ n√
n + 2 −√
n − 2
is convergent or divergent.
(b) [5 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine whether the following sequence
converges; if it converges, find its limit:
a1 = 3.
a2 = 3.14
a3 = 3.1414a4 = 3.141414
a5 = 3.14141414
a6 = 3.1414141414
etc., where each term after a2 is obtained from its predecessor by the addition on
the right of the decimal digits 14.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 572/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5217
9. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Curves C3 and C4, respectively represented by polar equations
r = 4 + 2cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) (116)
and
r = 4cos θ + 5 (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) , (117)
divide the plane into several regions.
(a) [8 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully find the area of the one region which
is bounded by C3 and C4 and contains the pole.
(b) [4 MARKS] Find another equation — call it (117*) — that also represents
C4, and
has the property that there do not exist coordinates (r , θ ) which satisfy equations(116) and (117*) simultaneously. You are expected to show that equations (116)
and (117*) have no simultaneous solutions.
F.23 Supplemental / Deferred Examination in MATH 141 2008 01 (one
version)
Instructions
1. Fill in the above clearly.
2. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
3. The use of calculators is not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Use of regular
and translation dictionaries is permitted.
4. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 8 containing questions; and
Pages 9, 10, and 11, which are blank. Your neighbour’s version of this examination may be
different from yours.
5. There are two kinds of problems on this examination, each clearly marked as to its type.
• Most of the questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Their solutions are to be written in the space provided on the page where the questionis printed. When that space is exhausted, you may write on the facing page . Any
solution may be continued on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet, but you
must indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is printed!
• Some of the questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you
are expected to write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show
your work, and you should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 573/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5218
You are expected to simplify your answers wherever possible.
You are advised to spend the first few minutes scanning the problems. (Please inform theinvigilator if you find that your booklet is defective.)
6. A TOTAL OF 100 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS EXAMINATION.
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [2 MARKS] Evaluate
0
− 1√ 2
1√ 1 − x2
dx .
(b) [2 MARKS] Evaluate t 3 cosh t 4 dt .
(c) [3 MARKS] Determine one antiderivative of x ln x.
(d) [3 MARKS] Evaluate the integral
x
− x
tet 2 dt .
(e) [4 MARKS] Evaluate d
dx
1
sin x
(ln | sec t + tan t |) dt when x = π
4 .
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
2. For each of the following series you are expected to apply one or more tests to determine
whether the series is convergent or divergent. All tests used must be named, and all
statements must be carefully justified.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=3
1
(n + 2)(n − 2)
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
∞i=n
3−i
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
n + 1
n
n2
3. BRIEF SOLUTIONS Express each of the following as a definite integral or a sum,
product, or quotient of several definite integrals, simplified as much as possible; you are
not expected to evaluate the integrals.
R is defined to be the region enclosed by the curves y − x = 9 and y = ( x + 3)2; C is the
arc x = t , y = e3t (−2 ≤ t ≤ 1).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 574/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5219
(a) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the y-axis. Give an integral or sum of
integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line y = −3. Give an integral or sum
of integrals whose value is the volume of the resulting solid.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(c) [3 MARKS] Let f (t ) denote the vertical distance of the pointt , e3t
from the x-
axis. Express in terms of integrals — which you need not evaluate — the average
value of f (t ) over the interval −2 ≤ t ≤ 1.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(d) [2 MARKS] Give an integral whose value is the length of C; you need not evaluate
the integral.
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(e) [3 MARKS] Given an integral whose value is the area of the surface generated by
rotating C about the line x = 1; you need not evaluate the integral.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 575/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5220
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
4. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[12 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral
x3 x4 − 4 x2
− 16
x4 − 4 x2 dx .
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
sin2(3 x)cos2(3 x) dx .
(b) [4 MARKS] Showing all your work, evaluate
1
x2√
9 x2 − 16dx .
(c) [5 MARKS] Assume that
f ( x) =
x
0
sec100 t dt
is known. Showing all your work, express the value of x
0
sec102 t dt in terms of
f ( x). (You are not expected to determine f ( x) explicitly.)
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the closed arc C defined by
x = x(t ) = 3t 2
y = y(t ) = t 3 − 3t ,
where
−
√ 3
≤ t
≤
√ 3.
(a) [3 MARKS] Determine the area bounded by C.
(b) [3 MARKS] Determine the equation of the tangent to C at the point with parameter
value t = 1
2.
(c) [6 MARKS] Determine the area of the surface generated by revolving C about the
y-axis.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 576/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5221
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [6 MARKS] Showing detailed work, determine whether the following integral is
convergent; if it is convergent, determine its value: ∞
−∞
x
x2 + 4 d x .
(b) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully determine whether the series
∞n=3
(−1)n
√ ln n
n
is conditionally convergent, absolutely convergent, or divergent.
8. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
[10 MARKS] Find the area inside the larger loop and outside the smaller loop of the
limacon r = 2 sin θ − 1.
F.24 Final Examination in MATH 141 2009 01 (one version)
Instructions
1. Do not tear pages from this book; all your writing — even rough work — must be handed in.
You may do rough work for this paper anywhere in the booklet.
2. Calculators are not permitted. This is a closed book examination. Regular and translation
dictionaries are permitted.
3. This examination booklet consists of this cover, Pages 1 through 8 containing questions; and
Pages 9, 10 and 11, which are blank. A TOTAL OF 75 MARKS ARE AVAILABLE ON THIS
EXAMINATION.
4. You are expected to simplify all answers wherever possible.
• Most questions on this paper require that you SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Solutions are to be begun on the page where the question is printed; a correct answer
alone will not be sufficient unless substantiated by your work. You may continue your
solution on the facing page , or on the last pages, or the back cover of the booklet, but
you must indicate any continuation clearly on the page where the question is printed!
To be awarded partial marks on a part of a question a student’s answer for that part
must be deemed to be more than 50% correct. Most of these questions will require
that the answer be written in a box provided on the page where the question is printed;
even if you continue your work elsewhere, the answer should be in the box provided.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 577/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5222
• Some questions on this paper require only BRIEF SOLUTIONS ; for these you must
write the correct answer in the box provided; you are not asked to show your work, andyou should not expect partial marks for solutions that are not correct. Check your work!
1. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
t 3 cos t 2 dt .
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
(b) [4 MARKS] Simplifying your answer as much as possible, evaluate the derivative
d
dt
t 2
0
tanh x2 dx .
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 578/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5223
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
2. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Your answers must be simplified as much as possible.
(a) [4 MARKS] Evaluate
12
1
√ 2
dx√ 1
− x2
·arcsin x
.
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 579/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5224
(b) [4 MARKS] Evaluate 2 y
y
2
− y + 1
dy
ANSWER (SHOW YOUR WORK OUTSIDE THE BOX)
SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
3. For each of the following series determine whether the series diverges, converges condi-
tionally, or converges absolutely. All of your work must be justified; prior to using any
test you are expected to demonstrate that the test is applicable to the problem.
(a) [4 MARKS]
∞n=1
(−1)n+1
cos n
2
n
(b) [4 MARKS]
∞n=2
(−1)n 1
n√
ln n.
(c) [4 MARKS]
∞n=4
(−1)n 1
nln (3n + 1)
4. [9 MARKS] SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [3 MARKS] Evaluate limn→∞
1
n·
nr =1
cos2
r π
n
. (Hint: This could be a Riemann
sum.)
(b) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, prove divergence, or find the limit of an =
arctan(−2n) as n → ∞.
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 580/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5225
(c) [3 MARKS] Showing all your work, prove divergence, or find the value of
∞
n=1
∞
i=1
1
5i
n
.
5. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
(a) [8 MARKS] Evaluate the indefinite integral t + 1
2t 2 − t − 1 dt .
(b) [2 MARKS] Determine whether the following improper integral converges or di-
verges; if it converges, find its value:
∞ 4
t + 1
2t 2 − t − 1 dt .
6. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Consider the curve C1 defined by x = 3t 2 , y = 2t 3 , (t ≥ 0).
(a) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine the area of the surface generated
when the arc 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 of C1 is rotated about the y-axis.
(b) [2 MARKS] Showing all your work, determine all points — if any — where the
normal to the curve is parallel to the line x + y = 8.
7. SHOW ALL YOUR WORK!
Curves C3 and C4, are respectively represented by polar equations
r = 3 + 3cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ 2π) (118)
and
r = 9cos θ (0 ≤ θ ≤ π) . (119)
(a) [7 MARKS] Showing all your work, carefully find the area of the region lying
inside both of the curves.
(b) [3 MARKS] Determine the length of the curves which form the boundary of the
region whose area you have found.
8. BRIEF SOLUTIONS R is defined to be the region in the first quadrant enclosed by the
curves y = 8
x2, x = y, x = 1.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 581/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 5226
(a) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the line x = −1 to create a 3-dimensional
solid, S 1. Give an integral or sum of integrals whose value is the volume of S 1;you are not asked to evaluate the integral(s).
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(b) [3 MARKS] The region R is rotated about the x- axis to create a 3-dimensional
solid, S 2. Give an integral or sum of integrals whose value is the volume of S 2obtained only by the Method of Cylindrical Shells; you are not asked to evaluate
the integral(s).
DEFINITE INTEGRAL(S) ONLY (DO NOT EVALUATE)
(c) [3 MARKS] Calculate the area of R.
ANSWER ONLY
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 582/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6001
G WeBWorK
G.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
G.1.1 Where is WeBWorK?
WeBWorK is located on Web servers of the Department of Mathematics and Statistics, and is
accessible at the following URL:
http: // msr02.math.mcgill.ca / webwork2 / MATH141 WINTER2010 /
If you access WeBWorK through WebCT, the link on your page will have been programmed
to take you to the correct WeBWorK server automatically.
G.1.2 Do I need a password to use WeBWorK?
You will need a user code and a password.
Your user code. Your user code will be your 9-digit student number.
Your password. The WeBWorK system is administered by the Mathematics and Statistics
Department, and is not accessible directly through the myMcGill Portal; your initial password
will be diff erent from your MINERVA password, but you could change it to that if you wish.
Your initial password will be your 9-digit student ID number. You will be able to change this
password after you sign on to WeBWorK.65
Your e-mail address. The WeBWorK system requires each user to have an e-mail address.
After signing on to WeBWorK, you should verify that the e-mail address shown is the one that
you prefer. You should endeavour to keep your e-mail address up to date, since the instructors
may send messages to the entire class through this route.
We suggest that you use either your UEA66 or your po-box address. You may be able to
forward your mail from these addresses to another convenient address, (cf. §4.)
G.1.3 Do I have to pay an additional fee to use WeBWorK?
WeBWorK is available to all students registered in the course at no additional charge.
65If you forget your password you will have to send a message to Professor Brown so that the system adminis-
trator may be instructed to reset the password at its initial value.66Uniform E-mail Address
UPDATED TO April 9, 2010
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 583/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6002
G.1.4 When will assignments be available on WeBWorK?
Each assignment will have a begin date and a due date. The assignment is available to you
after the begin date; solutions will be made available soon after the due date.
G.1.5 Do WeBWorK assignments cover the full range of problems that I should be able
to solve in this course?
The questions on the WeBWorK assignments ( A1 through A6) are a sampling of some types
of problem you should be able to solve after successfully completing this course. Some types
of calculus problems do not lend themselves to this kind of treatment, and may not appear on
the WeBWorK assignments. Use of WeBWorK does not replace studying the textbook —
including the worked examples, attending lectures and tutorials, and working exercises
from the textbook — using the Student Solutions Manual [3] to check your work. Students
are cautioned not to draw conclusions from the presence, absence, or relative frequencies of
problems of particular types, or from particular sections of the textbook. Certain sections
of the textbook remain examination material even though no problems are included in the
WeBWorK assignments.
G.1.6 May I assume that the distribution of topics on quizzes and final examinations
will parallel the distribution of topics in the WeBWorK assignments?
No! While the order of topics on WeBWorK assignments should conform to the order of the
lectures, there are some topics on the syllabus that will not appear in WeBWorK questions.Use WeBWorK for the areas it covers, and supplement it by working problems from your
textbook. Also, remember that WeBWorK — which checks answer only — cannot ascertain
whether you are using a correct method for solving problems. But, if you write out a solution
to an odd-numbered textbook problem, you can compare it with the solution in the Solutions
Manual; and, if in doubt, you can show your work to a Teaching Assistant at one of the many
office hours that they hold through the week.
G.1.7 WeBWorK provides for diff erent kinds of “Display Mode”. Which should I use?
“Display mode” is the mode that you enter when you first view a problem; and, later, when
you submit your answer. You may wish to experiment with the diff erent formats. The defaultis jsMath mode, which should look similar to the version that you print out (cf. next question).
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 584/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6003
G.1.8 WeBWorK provides for printing assignments in “Portable Document Format”
(.pdf), “PostScript” (.ps) and “TEXSource” forms. Which should I use?Most newer home computers have already been loaded with the Acrobat Reader for .pdf files; if
the Reader has not been installed on your computer67, you will find instructions for download-
ing this (free) software in §1.6.5 of these notes. Most computers available to you on campus
should be capable of printing in .pdf format.
G.1.9 What is the relation between WeBWorK and WebCT?
There is none. WebCT is the proprietary system of Web Course Tools that has been imple-
mented by McGill University. You may access the web page for this course, and WeBWorK
through your WebCT account68, and WebCT will link you to the appropriate server for WeB-
WorK. If you follow this route to WeBWorK, you will still have to log in when you reach
the WeBWorK site. At the present time we will be using WebCT primarily for the posting of
grades, and as a convenient repository for links to notes and announcements in the course. We
are not planning to use the potential WebCT sites that exist for the tutorial sections: use only
the site for the lecture section in which you are registered.
G.1.10 What do I have to do on WeBWorK?
After you sign on to WeBWorK, and click on “Begin Problem Sets”, you will see a list of As-
signments, each with a due date. Since there is no limit to the number of attempts at problems
on P0 or the other “Practice” assignments, you may play with these assignments to learn howto use the WeBWorK software.
You may print out a copy of your assignment by clicking on “Get hard copy”. This is
your version of the assignment, and it will diff er from the assignments of other students in
the course. You should spend some time working on the assignment away from the computer.
When you are ready to submit your solutions, sign on again, and select the same assignment.
This time click on “Do problem set”. You can expect to become more comfortable with the
system as you attempt several problems; but, in the beginning, there are likely to be situations
where you cannot understand what the system finds wrong with some of your answers. It is
useful to click on the Preview Answers button to see how the system interprets an answer that
you have typed in. As the problems may become more difficult, you may have to refer to the
“Help” page, and also to the “List of functions” which appears on the page listing the problems.Don’t submit an answer until you are happy with the interpretation that the Preview Answers
button shows that the system will be taking of your answer.
67At the time these notes were written, the latest version of the Reader was 9.0, but recent, earlier versions
should also work properly.68http: // mycourses.mcgill.ca
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 585/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6004
G.1.11 How can I learn how to use WeBWorK?
As soon as your instructor announces that the WeBWorK accounts are ready, sign on and try
assignment P0, which does not count. The system is self-instructive, so we will not burden
you with a long list of instructions.
You will need to learn how to enter algebraic expressions into WeBWorK as it is coded to
read what you type in a way that may diff erent from what you expect. For example, the symbol
ˆ is used for writing exponents (powers). If you type 2ˆ3, WeBWorK will interpret this as
23 = 8. However, if you type 2ˆ3+x, WeBWorKwill interpret it as 23 + x, i.e. as 8 + x; if you
wish to write 23+ x, you have to type 2ˆ(3+x). You may obtain more information from the List
of Available Functions, available online, or at
http: // webwork.maa.org / wiki / Mathematical notation recognized by WeBWorK
G.1.12 Where should I go if I have difficulties with WeBWorK ?
If you have difficulties signing on to WeBWorK, or with the viewing or printing functions on
WeBWorK, or with the specific problems on your version of an assignment, you may send
an e-mail distress message directly from WeBWorK by clicking on the Feedback button.
You may also report the problem to your instructor and / or your tutor, but the fastest way of
resolving your difficulty is usually the Feedback . Please give as much information as you
can. (All of the instructors and tutors are able to view from within WeBWorK the answers
that you have submitted to questions.)If your problem is mathematical, and you need help in solving a problem, you should
consult one of the tutors at their office hours; you may go to any tutor’s office hours, not only
to the hours of the tutor of the section in which you are registered.
G.1.13 Can the WeBWorK system ever break down or degrade?
Like all computer systems, WeBWorK can experience technical problems. The systems man-
ager is continually monitoring its performance. If you experience a difficulty when online,
please click on the Feedback button and report it. If that option is not available to you,
please communicate with either instructor by e-mail.
If you leave your WeBWorK assignment until the hours close to the due time on the duedate, you should not be surprised if the system is slow to respond. This is not a malfunction,
but is simply a reflection of the fact that other students have also been procrastinating! To
benefit from the speed that the system can deliver under normal conditions, do not delay your
WeBWorK until the last possible day! If a systems failure interferes with the due date of an
assignment, arrangements could be made to change that date, and an e-mail message could
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 586/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6005
be broadcast to all users (to the e-mail addresses on record), or a message could be posted on
WeBCT or the WeBWorK sign-on screen.69
G.1.14 How many attempts may I make to solve a particular problem on WeBWorK?
Practice Assignments P1 — P6 are intended to prepare you for Assignments A1 — A6, and
permit unlimited numbers of attempts; your grades on these “Practice” do not count in your
term mark. For the problems on assignments A1 — A6 you will normally be permitted about 5
tries: read the instructions at the head of the assignment.
G.1.15 Will all WeBWorK assignments have the same length? the same value?
The numbers of problems on the various assignments may not be the same, and the individualproblems may vary in difficulty. Assignments A1 — A6 will count equally in the computation
of your grade.
G.1.16 Is WeBWorK a good indicator of examination performance?
A low grade on WeBWorK has often been followed by a low grade on the examination.
A high grade on WeBWorK does not necessarily indicate a likely high grade on the exam-
ination.
To summarize: WeBWorK alone is not enough to prepare this course; but students who
don’t do WeBWorK appear to have a poor likelihood of success in MATH 141: that is one
reason why we have made the WeBWorK assignments compulsory.
69But slowness of the system just before the due time will not normally be considered a systems failure.
8/15/2019 Brown's Notes 2010
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/browns-notes-2010 587/587
Information for Students in MATH 141 2010 01 6101
H Contents of the DVD disks for